Agilent Technologies 4395A Manual Change

Agilent 4395A Network/Spectrum/Impedance Analyzer Operation Manual
Manual Change
Agilent Part No. N/A
Feb 2008
Change 1
Change the value of Return loss to the following.
Return loss
frequency ＜100 MHz…………………………………………………………………>12 dB (SPC)
frequency ≧100 MHz…………………………………………………………………> 7 dB (SPC)
Change 2
Change the specification of L Accuracy (Page 11-19) to the following.
Accuracy
D ≦ 0.2
0.2 < D
La
La
La(1 + D)
C Copyright 2008 Agilent Technologies
○
マニュアル チェンジ
変更 １
Return Loss の値を以下に変更してください。
Return loss
frequency ＜100 MHz…………………………………………………………………>12 dB (SPC)
frequency ≧100 MHz…………………………………………………………………> 7 dB (SPC)
変更 2
L Accuracy の仕様（ページ 11-19）を以下に変更して下さい。
Accuracy
D ≦ 0.2
0.2 < D
La
La
La(1 + D)
C Copyright 2008 Agilent Technologies
○
Agilent 4395A Network/Spectrum/Impedance Analyzer Operation Manual
Manual Change
Agilent Part No. N/A
May 2007
Change 1
Regarding the Data Processing of Impedance Analyzer Mode, refer to the 4396B Operating Hand book (Page
5-6 to 5-9), or the 4396B Function reference. You can also download the 4396B Manual with the following
process.
1. Open the Agilent Technologies Website. http://www.agilent.com/
2. In the search box, enter 4396B, and then open the page of 4396B Network/Spectrum Impedance Analyzer.
3. Click the manuals in the Technical Support of 4396B RF Network/Spectrum/Impedance Analyzer.
4. Download the manual
C Copyright 2007 Agilent Technologies
○
マニュアル チェンジ
変更 １
インピーダンス･アナライザ・モードでの内部データ処理については、4396B オペレーティング・ハンドブ
ック（5-6 から 5-9 ページ）または、4396B の機能解説書を参照して下さい。
また、4396B のマニュアルは以下の手順でダウンロードする事ができます。
1. アジレント・テクノロジーのホームページを開きます。
http://www.agilent.com/
2. 検索の欄に“4396B”を入力し、4396B ネットワーク/スペクトラム/インピーダンスアナライザのページ
を開きます。
3. 4396B RF ネットワーク/スペクトラム/インピーダンスアナライザの、テクニカルサポート/イベントか
らマニュアルをクリックします。
4. マニュアルをダウンロードします。
C Copyright 2007 Agilent Technologies
○
Agilent 4395A Network/Spectrum/Impedance Analyzer Operation Manual
Manual Change
Agilent Part No. N/A
January 2007
Change 1
Change the equations for the noise level measurement (page 8-35) to the following.
Converting to a Different Equivalent Noise Bandwidth
1. Calculate the conversion factor using the following equations with displayed units:
Unit
Use
dBm/Hz
K=10logBW
dBV/√Hz、dBμV/√Hz
K=10logBW
W/Hz
K=BW
V/√Hz
K=√BW
Where, BW is the target equivalent noise bandwidth.
Change 2
Change options 1CN, 1CM and 1CP in the package contents of the 4395A (page 2-3) to the following.
Description
Option 1CN Handle Kit
Handle Kit
Option 1CM Rack Mount Kit
Rack Mount Kit
Option 1CP Rack Mount & Handle Kit
Rack Mount & Handle Kit
C Copyright 2007 Agilent Technologies
○
Agilent Part Number
Quantity
5063-9229
1
5063-9216
1
5063-9223
1
マニュアル チェンジ
変更 １
ノイズ・レベル測定（ページ 8-36）の計算式を以下に変更して下さい。
等価ノイズ・バンド幅の変換
1. 表示単位にあわせて、以下の式から変換係数 K を計算します。
表示単位
式
dBm/Hz
K=10logBW
dBV/√Hz、dBμV/√Hz
K=10logBW
W/Hz
K=BW
V/√Hz
K=√BW
ここで、BW は変換する等価ノイズ・バンド幅です。
変更 2
4395A の梱包内容（ページ 2-3）のオプション 1CN、1CM、1CP を以下に変更して下さい。
説明
オプション 1CN ハンドル・キット
ハンドル・キット
オプション 1CM ラック・マウント・キット
ラック・マウント・キット
オプション 1CP ラック・マウント＆ハンドル・キット
ラック・マウント＆ハンドル・キット
C Copyright 2007 Agilent Technologies
○
Agilent パーツ番号
数量
5063-9229
1
5063-9216
1
5063-9223
1
Manual Change
Agilent Part No. N/A
August 2004
Printed in Malaysia
Change
Change the company name from (YOKOGAWA-) HEWLETT-PACKARD, LTD., or its abbreviation HP
(YHP) to Agilent Technologies or Agilent.
This document may contain references to HP (YHP) or (Yokogawa-) Hewlett-Packard.
Please note that
Hewlett-Packard’s former test and measurement, semiconductor products and chemical analysis businesses
are now part of Agilent Technologies.
To reduce potential confusion, the only change to product numbers
and names has been in the company name prefix: where a product number/name was HP XXXX the current
name/number is now Agilent XXXX. For example, model number HP4294A is now model number Agilent
4294A.
マニュアル・チェンジ
変更
本文中の「HP（YHP）」、または「(横河)ヒューレット・パッカード株式会社」という語句を、「Agilent」、
または「アジレント・テクノロジー株式会社」と変更してください。
ヒューレット・パッカード社の電子計測、半導体製品、化学分析ビジネス部門は分離独立し、アジ
レント・テクノロジー社となりました。
社名変更に伴うお客様の混乱を避けるため、製品番号の接頭部のみ変更しております。
（例: 旧製品名
HP 4294A
© Copyright 2004 Agilent Technologies
は、現在
Agilent 4294A
として販売いたしております。）
Safety Summary
When you notice any of the unusual conditions listed below, immediately
terminate operation and disconnect the power cable.
Contact your local Agilent Technologies sales representative or
authorized service company for repair of the instrument. If you continue
to operate without repairing the instrument, there is a potential fire or
shock hazard for the operator.
n Instrument operates abnormally.
n Instrument emits abnormal noise, smell, smoke or a spark-like light
during the operation.
n Instrument generates high temperature or electrical shock during
operation.
n Power cable, plug, or receptacle on instrument is damaged.
n Foreign substance or liquid has fallen into the instrument.
Caution
Do not exceed the operating input power, voltage, and current
level and signal type appropriate for the instrument being used, refer to
your instrument's Operation Manual.
Electrostatic discharge(ESD) can damage the highly sensitive
microcircuits in your instrument. ESD damage is most likely to occur as
the test fixtures are being connected or disconnected. Protect them from
ESD damage by wearing a grounding strap that provides a high
resistance path to ground. Alternatively, ground yourself to discharge any
static charge built-up by touching the outer shell of any grounded
instrument chassis before touching the test port connectors.
4395A
Agilent 4395A Network/Spectrum/Impedance Analyzer
Operation Manual
SERIAL NUMBERS
This manual applies directly to instruments which have
the serial number prex JP1KE and MY411.
For additional important information about serial numbers,
read \Serial Number" in Appendix D of this Manual.
Agilent Part No. 04395-90040
Printed in JAPAN May 2003
Sixth Edition
Notice
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. All rights are
reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated to another
language without the prior written consent of the Agilent Technologies.
Agilent Technologies Japan, Ltd.
Component Test PGU-Kobe
1-3-2, Murotani, Nishi-ku, Kobe-shi,
Hyogo, 651-2241 Japan
c Copyright 1997, 1998, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003 Agilent Technologies Japan, Ltd.
Manual Printing History
The manual printing date and part number indicate its current edition. The printing date
changes when a new edition is printed. (Minor corrections and updates that are incorporated
at reprint do not cause the date to change.) The manual part number changes when extensive
technical changes are incorporated.
September 1997 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : First Edition (part number: 04395-90000)
September 1998 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Second Edition (part number: 04395-90010)
March 2000 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Third Edition (part number: 04395-90010)
July 2001 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Fourth Edition (part number: 04395-90020)
December 2002 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Fifth Edition (part number: 04395-90030)
May 2003 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Sixth Edition (part number: 04395-90040)
iii
Certication
Agilent Technologies certies that this product met its published specications at the time
of shipment from the factory. Agilent Technologies further certies that its calibration
measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and
Technology, to the extent allowed by the Institution's calibration facility, or to the calibration
facilities of other International Standards Organization members.
Warranty
This Agilent Technologies instrument product is warranted against defects in material and
workmanship for a period of one year from the date of shipment, except that in the case of
certain components listed in General Information of this manual, the warranty shall be for the
specied period. During the warranty period, Agilent Technologies will, at its option, either
repair or replace products that prove to be defective.
For warranty service or repair, this product must be returned to a service facility designated by
Agilent Technologies. Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to Agilent Technologies and Agilent
Technologies shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer. However, Buyer shall
pay all shipping charges, duties, and taxes for products returned to Agilent Technologies from
another country.
Agilent Technologies warrants that its software and rmware designated by Agilent
Technologies for use with an instrument will execute its programming instruction when
property installed on that instrument. Agilent Technologies does not warrant that the operation
of the instrument, or software, or rmware will be uninterrupted or error free.
Limitation Of Warranty
The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate
maintenance by Buyer, Buyer-supplied software or interfacing, unauthorized modication or
misuse, operation outside the environmental specications for the product, or improper site
preparation or maintenance.
No other warranty is expressed or implied. Agilent Technologies specically disclaims the
implied warranties of merchantability and tness for a particular purpose.
iv
Exclusive Remedies
The remedies provided herein are buyer's sole and exclusive remedies. Agilent Technologies
shall not be liable for any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages,
whether based on contract, tort, or any other legal theory.
Assistance
Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for
Agilent Technologies products.
For any assistance, contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Oce.
Addresses are provided at the back of this manual.
v
Safety Summary
The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation,
service, and repair of this instrument. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specic
WARNINGS elsewhere in this manual may impair the protection provided by the equipment.
In addition it violates safety standards of design, manufacture, and intended use of the
instrument.
The Agilent Technologies assumes no liability for the customer's failure to comply with these
requirements.
Note
4395A comply with INSTALLATION CATEGORY II and POLLUTION DEGREE 2
in IEC1010-1. 4395A are INDOOR USE product.
Note
LEDs in this product are Class 1 in accordance with IEC825-1.
CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT
Ground The Instrument
To avoid electric shock hazard, the instrument chassis and cabinet must be connected to a
safety earth ground by the supplied power cable with earth blade.
DO NOT Operate In An Explosive Atmosphere
Do not operate the instrument in the presence of ammable gasses or fumes. Operation of any
electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a denite safety hazard.
Keep Away From Live Circuits
Operating personnel must not remove instrument covers. Component replacement and internal
adjustments must be made by qualied maintenance personnel. Do not replace components
with the power cable connected. Under certain conditions, dangerous voltages may exist even
with the power cable removed. To avoid injuries, always disconnect power and discharge
circuits before touching them.
DO NOT Service Or Adjust Alone
Do not attempt internal service or adjustment unless another person, capable of rendering rst
aid and resuscitation, is present.
DO NOT Substitute Parts Or Modify Instrument
Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install substitute parts or
perform unauthorized modications to the instrument. Return the instrument to a Agilent
Technologies Sales and Service Oce for service and repair to ensure that safety features are
maintained.
vi
Dangerous Procedure Warnings
Warnings , such as the example below, precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout
this manual. Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed.
Warning
Dangerous voltages, capable of causing death, are present in this
instrument. Use extreme caution when handling, testing, and adjusting
this instrument.
vii
Safety Symbols
General denitions of safety symbols used on equipment or in manuals are listed below.
Instruction manual symbol: the product is marked with this symbol when it is
necessary for the user to refer to the instruction manual.
Alternating current.
Direct current.
On (Supply).
O (Supply).
In position of push-button switch.
Out position of push-button switch.
Frame (or chassis) terminal. A connection to the frame (chassis) of the
equipment which normally include all exposed metal structures.
This Warning sign denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure, practice,
condition or the like, which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could
result in injury or death to personnel.
This Caution sign denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure, practice,
condition or the like, which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could
result in damage to or destruction of part or all of the product.
This Note sign denotes important information. It calls attention to a
procedure, practice, condition or the like, which is essential to highlight.
Axed to product containing static sensitive devices use anti-static handling
procedures to prevent electrostatic discharge damage to component.
viii
Typeface Conventions
Bold
Italics
Computer
4HARDKEYS5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SOFTKEYS
Boldface type is used when a term is dened. For example: icons are
symbols.
Italic type is used for emphasis and for titles of manuals and other
publications.
Italic type is also used for keyboard entries when a name or a variable
must be typed in place of the words in italics. For example: copy
lename means to type the word copy, to type a space, and then to
type the name of a le such as file1.
Computer font is used for on-screen prompts and messages.
Labeled keys on the instrument front panel are enclosed in 4 5.
Softkeys located to the right of the LCD are enclosed in
NNNNN
.
ix
Documentation Map
The following manuals are available for the analyzer.
Operation Manual (Option ABA only) (Agilent Part Number 04395-900x0)
The Operation Manual describes all function accessed from the front panel keys and
softkeys. It also provides information on options and accessories available, specications,
system performance, and some topics about the analyzer's features.
Programming Manual (Option ABA only) (Agilent Part Number 04395-900x1)
The Programming Manual shows how to write and use BASIC program to control the
analyzer and describes how Instrument BASIC works with the analyzer..
Instrument BASIC Users Handbook (Option ABA only) (Agilent Part Number
04155-9015x)
The Instrument BASIC User's Handbook introduces you to the Instrument BASIC
programming language, provide some helpful hints on getting the most use from it, and
provide a general programming reference. It is divided into three books, Instrument
BASIC Programming Techniques, Instrument BASIC Interface Techniques, and
Instrument BASIC Language Reference.
Service Manual (Option 0BW only), (Agilent Part Number 04395-901x0)
The Service Manual explains how to adjust, troubleshoot, and repair the instrument.
This manual is option 0BW only.
The number indicated by \x" in the part number of each manual, is allocated for numbers
increased by one each time a revision is made. The latest edition comes with the product.
x
Contents
1. Introduction
About the 4395A Network/Spectrum/Impedance Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . .
About This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Document Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Installation Guide
Incoming Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Providing clearance to dissipate heat at installation site . . . . . . . . . . .
Instruction for Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rack/Handle Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option 1CN Handle Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option 1CM Rack Mount Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting the Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option 1CP Rack Mount & Handle Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting the Handle and Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a Test Set for Network Analyzer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting an Active Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
For Spectrum Analyzer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
For Network Analyzer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting an Impedance Test Kit and a Test Fixture for Impedance Analyzer
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting an Impedance Test Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a Test Fixture to the Impedance Test Kit . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up a 75 Measurement For Spectrum Analyzer Mode . . . . . . . .
3. Quick Start Guide
Network Analyzer Tour . . . . . . .
Before You Leave On The Tour . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Equipments . . . . . . .
Step 1: Preparing for the Measurement
Turning ON the 4395A . . . . . . .
Connecting the DUT . . . . . . . .
Step 2: Setting up the 4395A . . . . .
Setting the Analyzer Type . . . . .
Setting the Active Channel . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-1
1-1
1-2
2-2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-5
2-5
2-7
2-7
2-7
2-8
2-8
2-8
2-9
2-9
2-9
2-9
2-9
2-10
2-12
2-12
2-12
.
.
.
.
.
2-16
2-16
2-16
2-18
2-19
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-3
3-3
3-5
3-5
3-6
Contents-1
Selecting the Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing the Automatic Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 3: Making a Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 4: Reading a Measurement Result . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading a Measured Value by Using Marker . . . . . . . .
Step 5: Printing Out the Measurement Result . . . . . . . .
Conguring and Connecting a Printer . . . . . . . . . . .
Making a Hardcopy of the LCD Display . . . . . . . . . .
Spectrum Analyzer Tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before You Leave On The Tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Equipments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 1: Preparing for a Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turning ON the 4395A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the DUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 2: Setting Up the 4395A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Analyzer Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Active Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 3: Making a Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading the Peak Level Using the Marker . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Resolution Bandwidth to See Low Level Signals
Searching for Harmonics Using the Search Function . . . .
Step 4: Saving and Recalling 4395A Settings . . . . . . . . .
Preparing the Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving 4395A Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering the File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recalling the 4395A Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Impedance Analyzer Tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before You Leave On The Tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Equipments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 1: Preparing for the Measurement . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Impedance Test Kit . . . . . . . . . . .
Turning ON the 4395A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up the 4395A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Analyzer Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activating Channel 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Sweep Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Output Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the IF Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Averaging Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 3: Making a Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPEN Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SHORT Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOAD Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 4: Connecting and Setting Up a Test Fixture . . . . .
Connecting the xture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Electrical Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fixture Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 5: Carrying Out Impedance Measurement . . . . . .
Selecting the Measurement Parameters for Channel 1 . .
Connecting the DUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents-2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-10
3-12
3-12
3-14
3-14
3-14
3-15
3-15
3-15
3-16
3-17
3-17
3-17
3-18
3-18
3-19
3-19
3-20
3-22
3-22
3-23
3-25
3-26
3-26
3-27
3-27
3-29
3-31
3-31
3-31
3-32
3-33
3-33
3-33
3-34
3-34
3-35
3-36
3-37
3-38
3-39
3-41
3-41
3-42
3-43
3-45
3-45
3-45
3-47
3-49
3-49
3-50
Performing the Automatic Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 6: Switching from Channel 1 to Channel 2 . . . . . . .
Setting the Averaging Factor for Channel 2 . . . . . . . .
Step 7: Selecting the measurement parameters for Channel 2
Step 8: Dual Channel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-50
3-52
3-53
3-54
3-56
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-3
6. Analyzer Input Terminals R, A, and B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7. RF OUT Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4
4-4
4. Front and Rear Panels
Features of 4395A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. Hardkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACTIVE CHANNEL Block . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUREMENT Block . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SWEEP Key Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MARKER Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTRUMENT STATE Block . . . . . . . . . .
ENTRY keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Softkeys that are Joined by Vertical Lines . . . .
Softkeys That Toggle Between On and O States .
Softkeys that Show Status Indications in Brackets
3. GPIB \REMOTE" Indicator . . . . . . . . . . .
4. 4Preset5 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. PROBE POWER Connector . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8. DC SOURCE (DC Voltage/Current Output) Connector (Option 001) .
9. Built-in Flexible Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10. LINE Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11. Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. Active Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Measured Input(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. SCALE/DIV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. Reference Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6. Marker Data Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7. Marker Statistics and Width Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8. Softkey Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9. PASS/FAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10. Sweep Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11. Sweep Parameter Span/Stop Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12. Power Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13. CW Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14. Video Bandwidth (VBW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15. Input Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16. Sweep Parameter Center/Start Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17. RBW/IFBW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18. Status Notations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19. External Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20. Active Entry Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21. Message Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22. Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Panel Features and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-4
4-5
4-5
4-5
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-7
4-7
4-7
4-7
4-7
4-8
4-8
4-8
4-8
4-8
4-8
4-8
4-8
4-8
4-9
4-9
4-10
4-10
4-10
4-10
4-11
Contents-3
1. External Reference Input Connector .
2. Internal Reference Output Connector
3. External Program RUN/CONT Input .
4. I/O Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. Power Cable Receptacle . . . . . . .
6. GPIB Interface . . . . . . . . . . .
7. External Monitor Terminal . . . . . .
8. Parallel Interface . . . . . . . . . .
9. 24-bit I/O Port . . . . . . . . . . .
10. mini-DIN Keyboard Connector . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-11
4-11
4-12
4-12
4-12
4-12
4-12
4-12
4-12
4-12
11. Test Set I/O Interface . . . . . . .
12. Gate Output (Option 1D6 Only) . . . . .
13. External Trigger Input . . . . . . . . .
14. Reference Oven Output (Option 1D5 Only)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-13
4-13
4-13
4-13
5. Preparations for Measurements
Selecting an appropriate connection of DUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
For Network Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting DUT for Directional Transmission Characteristic Measurement . .
Connecting DUT for Directional Transmission and Reection Characteristics
Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting DUT for Bi-directional Transmission and Reection Characteristics
(Four S Parameters) Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting DUT for Transmission Characteristic Measurement When the
Output Signal is in a Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting DUT for Transmission Characteristic Measurement When the Input
and Output Signals are in a Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
For Spectrum Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting DUT When Directly Measuring the Signal . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting DUT When Measuring the Signal in a Circuit . . . . . . . . . .
For Impedance Measurement (Option 010) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Impedance Test Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Presetting 4395A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6. Setting and Optimizing Measurement Conditions
Selecting the Analyzer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Active Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Channel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up the Trigger System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up the Trigger System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the External Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Trigger Signal Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generating a Trigger Event on Each Measurement Point (NA, ZA Mode)
Setting the Sweep Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Sweep Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Power Sweep Function (NA, ZA Mode) . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Input Port/Measurement Parameter . . . . . . . . . . .
To Select the Input Port in NA Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
With the T/R Test Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
With the S-Parameter Test Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Select the Input Port in SA Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Select the Measurement Parameter in ZA mode . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Measurement Format (NA, ZA Mode) . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents-4
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-1
5-1
5-1
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-5
5-6
5-6
5-6
5-8
5-8
5-9
6-2
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-4
6-4
6-5
6-5
6-6
6-6
6-6
6-7
6-7
6-7
6-7
6-7
6-8
6-8
6-10
Selecting the Measurement Format in NA Mode . . . . . . . . .
Displaying the Trace as a Smith Chart (NA, ZA Mode) . . . . . .
How To Change Marker Readout Format (NA, ZA Mode) . . . . .
Using the Impedance Conversion Function (NA Mode) . . . . . .
To Display Phase beyond 6180 Degrees (NA, ZA Mode) . . . . .
Using the Complex Plane Format (ZA Mode) . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying R-X in the Complex Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting the Scale Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Display Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Display Unit in SA Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Phase Unit (NA, ZA Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Center Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Marker Position to Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Maximum Peak to Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change the Center Frequency by the Specied Step Size . . . . .
Example: Displaying Harmonics (SA Mode) . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Frequency Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Narrowing the Span Setting (SA Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Frequency Range to Full Span . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Sweep Parameters Using 4Start5 and 4Stop5 . . . . . .
Zooming To a Part of the Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change the Zooming Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying a Zoomed Trace on the Other Channel . . . . . .
Adjusting the Scale and Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatically Adjusting the Scale and Reference (NA, ZA Mode)
Manually Adjusting the Scale and Reference (NA, ZA Mode) . .
Setting the Reference (SA Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Numeric Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Scale per Division (SA Mode) . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the IF/Resolution/Video Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the IF Bandwidth (NA, ZA Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the IF Bandwidth to Auto Mode . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Resolution Bandwidths (SA Mode) . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Resolution Bandwidth to Auto Mode . . . . . . . .
Setting the Video Bandwidth (SA Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resetting the Video Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7. Calibration
Calibration Required for the Network Analyzer Mode
To Select an Appropriate Calibration Method . . .
Performing a Response Calibration . . . . . . . .
Performing a Response & Isolation Calibration . . .
Performing an S11 1-Port Calibration . . . . . . .
Performing an S22 1-Port Calibration . . . . . . .
Performing a Full 2-Port Calibration . . . . . . . .
Performing a 1-Path 2-Port Calibration . . . . . .
Selecting the Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . .
Customizing the User Dened Calibration Kit . . .
Dening the Standard Denition . . . . . . . .
Step 1: Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 2: Opening the Dene Standard Menu . .
Step 3: Entering C Parameters . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6-10
6-10
6-11
6-11
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-13
6-13
6-14
6-14
6-14
6-15
6-15
6-15
6-17
6-17
6-18
6-19
6-20
6-20
6-21
6-22
6-22
6-22
6-23
6-23
6-23
6-24
6-24
6-24
6-25
6-26
6-26
6-26
6-27
6-27
6-28
6-28
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7-1
7-1
7-2
7-2
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-8
7-10
7-10
7-10
7-10
7-10
7-11
Contents-5
Step 4: Entering OFFSET Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 5: Entering a Standard Class Label . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 6: Completing the Denition of a Calibration Kit . . . . .
Dening a Class Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 1: Preparing for the Class Assignment . . . . . . . . . .
Step 2: Specifying the Standard Class . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 3: Creating the Standard Class Label . . . . . . . . . . .
Labeling and Saving Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verifying the Denition of the User-Dened Calibration Kit . . .
Calibration Required for the Impedance Analyzer Mode . . . . . . .
OPEN/SHORT/LOAD Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Test Fixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Electrical Length of the Test Fixture . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the User Dened Fixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing Fixture Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dening a Custom Fixture Compensation Kit . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 1: Opening the Fixture Compensation Kit Modication Menu
Step 2: Specifying Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 3: Specifying the Standard Label . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7-11
7-11
7-11
7-12
7-12
7-12
7-13
7-13
7-13
7-14
7-14
7-14
7-15
7-17
7-17
7-18
7-19
7-19
7-19
7-20
7-20
Interpreting the Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Read a Value Using the Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Improving the Readout Resolution (SA Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Select Marker Readout Unit (SA Nide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Use the Sub-markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Use the 1Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Search for a Point that has the Target Value (NA, SA Mode) . . . . . . . .
To Search for the Peak-to-Peak of Ripples Using the Statistics Function . . . .
Step 1: To Specify the Search Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 2: To Search For the Ripple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Search for a Single Peak on the Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Search for Multiple Peaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Dene the Peak for Search (To Ignore Unnecessary Peaks) . . . . . . . . .
Dening the Peak Slope to Ignore the Relatively Broad Peaks (NA, ZA Mode)
Entering Directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dening Peak Height (SA Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the Peak Threshold to Ignore the Absolutely Small Peaks . . . .
Entering Directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Specify the Search Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the 1Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Use the Trace Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Store the Trace into the Trace Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Display Memory Traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Use the Trace Math Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Turn O the Data Math Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Multiply the Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Clear a Multiplied Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Overlay Multiple Traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Store the Trace into the Overlay Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2
8-2
8-3
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-5
8-7
8-7
8-7
8-8
8-9
8-10
8-10
8-10
8-10
8-11
8-11
8-11
8-11
8-12
8-12
8-12
8-14
8-14
8-14
8-15
8-15
8-15
8-15
8-16
8-16
8. Analyzing the Measurement Results
Contents-6
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
To Clear the Overlay Traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Print Out a Display Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To See or Print a Measured Value List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Print an Analyzer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Save and Recall the Settings and Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Save an Analyzer Setting or Measurement Data . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying a Data Array Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Recall a Saved Analyzer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Save a Display Image to a TIFF File . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Save Measured Data for a Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Copy a File between Floppy Disk and Memory Disk . . . . . . .
To Initialize a Disk for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Initialize the Memory Disk for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Back Up the Memory Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Network Measurement Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring 3 dB Bandwidth Using the Width Function . . . . . . .
Measuring Electrical Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Velocity Factor of a Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring Phase Deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deviation from the Linear Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Group Delay Aperture . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compensating for the Electrical Delay Caused by an Extension Cable
If the Electrical Delay of the Extension Cable is Known . . . . .
If the Electrical Delay of the Extension Cable is Unknown . . . .
Measuring the Electrical Length of a Cable . . . . . . . . . .
Reection of a Opened or Shorted Cable . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Spectrum Measurement Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring the Noise Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Converting to a Dierent Unit of Equivalent Noise Bandwidth . .
Measuring the Carrier to Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Gated Spectrum Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gate Trigger Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edge Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Level Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RBW Filter Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing Time Gated Spectrum Analysis . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 1: Determining the Gate Trigger Parameters . . . . . . .
Step 2: Connecting the Gate Trigger Source . . . . . . . . . .
Step 3: Setting the Center and Span Frequency . . . . . . . .
Step 4: Adjusting the Gate Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the RBW/VBW and Using the Averaging Function . . . . .
Setting the Resolution Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Video Bandwidth (VBW) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring the Spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring Zero Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Transition Time Using the Marker . . . . . . . . . . .
Tracking Unstable Harmonics Using the Search Track Function . . .
Typical Impedance Measurement Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applying DC Bias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Upper Limit for DC Bias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up and Applying Output Voltage/Current . . . . . . . . .
Equivalent Circuit Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-16
8-17
8-17
8-17
8-17
8-19
8-19
8-20
8-20
8-20
8-21
8-21
8-22
8-22
8-23
8-23
8-24
8-25
8-27
8-28
8-29
8-29
8-29
8-30
8-31
8-31
8-32
8-32
8-32
8-34
8-35
8-35
8-37
8-38
8-38
8-38
8-39
8-40
8-41
8-41
8-43
8-43
8-43
8-44
8-44
8-45
8-46
8-47
8-48
8-50
8-51
8-51
8-52
8-52
8-53
Contents-7
Menus Associated with Equivalent Circuit Analysis . . . . . . .
Equivalent Circuit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select Equivalent Circuit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dene Equivalent Circuit Parameter Menu . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Equivalent Circuit Analysis Function . . . . . . . . .
Calculating Approximate Values of Equivalent Circuit Constants
Simulating a Trace from the Equivalent Circuit Parameters . . .
Determining Q Value Using the Width Search Function . . . . . . .
Widths Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Width Value Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Anti-Resonance Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Resonance Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Admittance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9. Advanced Techniques for Optimizing Measurements
Reducing Sweep Time (Using List Sweep) . . . . . .
Planning the sweep list . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing a Sweep List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Modify or Delete the Segment . . . . . . . .
Executing the List Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . .
Improving Dynamic Range (NA Mode) . . . . . . . .
Adjusting the IF Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . .
Using List Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing GO/NO-GO Test of a Filter (using limit line)
Planning the Limit Lime . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing a Limit Line Table . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Modify or Delete the Segment . . . . . . . .
Executing a Limit Line Test . . . . . . . . . . .
To Make a Limit Line Test Active . . . . . . . .
To Beep When the Limit Test is Failed . . . . . .
To Oset the Limit Line . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stabilizing the Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Stop the Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Use the Averaging Function . . . . . . . . . .
To Use Maximum or Minimum Hold Function . . .
To Capture an Unstable Signal Using Signal Track .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-53
8-53
8-54
8-54
8-56
8-56
8-56
8-57
8-57
8-57
8-58
8-58
8-58
8-59
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
9-2
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-6
9-6
9-7
9-8
9-9
9-9
9-10
9-10
9-10
9-11
9-12
9-13
9-13
9-13
9-13
9-14
Measuring Transmission Characteristics of a Filter (NA Mode)
Measurement Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analyzer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Read Out Insertion Loss Using the Marker . . . . . . . . .
6 dB Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ripple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring Phase Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Expanded Phase Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reection Measurement (NA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analyzer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10-2
10-2
10-2
10-2
10-3
10-3
10-3
10-3
10-4
10-5
10-6
10-7
10-8
10-8
10-8
10-8
10. Examples of Applications
Contents-8
Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return Loss and Reection Coecient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standing Wave Ratio (SWR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S-Parameters Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Readout Using the Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Impedance Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Admittance Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gain Compression Measurement (NA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analyzer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Absolute Output Level Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AM Signal Measurement (SA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analyzer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carrier Amplitude and Frequency Measurement Using the Marker . . . .
Modulating Frequency and Modulation Index Measurement Using 1Marker
FM Signal Measurement (SA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analyzer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency Deviation of Wide Band FM Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency Deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carrier Level and Modulating Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Evaluation of a Chip Capacitor (ZA Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analyzer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Test Fixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Electrical Length of the Test Fixture . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fixture Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacitance and Dissipation Factor under Swept Frequency . . . . . . .
Setting Measurement Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
jZj and (Phase) under Swept Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equivalent Circuit Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Evaluation of a Crystal Resonator (ZA Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analyzer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Test Fixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Electrical Length of the Test Fixture . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fixture Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Measurement Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Readout of Resonance Frequency (Fr ) and Crystal Impedance (CI) . . . .
Equivalent Circuit Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Admittance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10-9
10-9
10-10
10-11
10-11
10-12
10-13
10-14
10-14
10-14
10-15
10-15
10-15
10-16
10-18
10-18
10-18
10-18
10-18
10-18
10-19
10-21
10-21
10-21
10-21
10-21
10-21
10-21
10-22
10-24
10-24
10-24
10-24
10-25
10-25
10-26
10-26
10-27
10-27
10-27
10-28
10-29
10-31
10-31
10-31
10-31
10-31
10-31
10-31
10-32
10-32
10-32
10-33
10-33
10-35
Contents-9
Using the Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Evaluation of a Varactor Diode - DC Bias Sweep Using List Sweep Function (ZA
Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analyzer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dening the Sweep List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Test Fixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Electrical Length of the Test Fixture . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fixture Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring Capacitance under DC Bias Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11. Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
Network Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Source Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiver Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Magnitude Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phase Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group Delay Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sweep Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement Throughput 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spectrum Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Amplitude Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sweep Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specications when Option 1D6 Time-Gated spectrum analysis is installed
Specications when Option 1D7 50 to 75
Input Impedance Conversion is
installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4395A Option 010 Impedance Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sweep Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IF Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement Port Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement Basic Accuracy (Supplemental Performance Characteristics) .
jZj - Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
jYj - Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R - X Accuracy (Depends on D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G - B Accuracy (Depends on D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L Accuracy (Depends on D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C Accuracy (Depends on D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common to Network/Spectrum/Impedance Measurement . . . . . . . . .
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hard copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents-10
.
10-35
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10-36
10-36
10-36
10-36
10-36
10-37
10-38
10-38
10-38
10-38
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11-1
11-1
11-1
11-1
11-3
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-6
11-6
11-6
11-7
11-7
11-8
11-12
11-12
11-13
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11-13
11-14
11-14
11-14
11-14
11-14
11-14
11-14
11-14
11-16
11-17
11-18
11-18
11-18
11-19
11-19
11-19
11-20
11-20
11-20
11-20
11-20
11-20
Printer parallel port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option 001 DC Voltage/Current Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Probe Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specications When HP Instrument BASIC Is Operated . . . . . . . .
General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input and Output Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-operation Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Performance at Network Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical System Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comparison of Typical Error-Corrected Measurement Uncertainty . .
Reection Uncertainty of a One-Port Device . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reection Uncertainty of a Two-Port Device . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission Uncertainty of a Low-Loss Device . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission Uncertainty of a Wide Dynamic Range Device . . . . .
Types of Residual Measurement Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Residual Systematic Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Residual Random Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Residual Drift Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Error Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reection Uncertainty Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Total Reection Magnitude Uncertainty (Erm ) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Total Reection Phase Uncertainty (Erp ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission Uncertainty Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Total Transmission Magnitude Uncertainty (Etm ) . . . . . . . . . . .
Total Transmission Phase Uncertainty (Etp ) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dynamic Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Determining Relative Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Error Contribution
Phase Dynamic Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Determining Relative Phase Dynamic Accuracy Error Contribution . .
Dynamic Accuracy Error Contribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dynamic Accuracy Error Contribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dynamic Accuracy Error Contribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Eects of Temperature Drift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Drift with S11 One-Port Calibration . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Drift with Full Two-Port Calibration . . . . . . . . . .
System performance with Dierent Test Sets and Connector Types . . .
Determining Expected System performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12. Accessories and Options
Options Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC SOURCE (Option 001) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Stability Frequency Reference (Option 1D5) . .
Time-Gated Spectrum Analyzer (Option 1D6) . . . .
50 to 75 Input Impedance Conversion (Option 1D7)
Impedance Measurement Function (Option 010) . . .
Handle Kit (Option 1CN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rack Mount Kit (Option 1CM) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rack Mount and Handle Kit (Option 1CP) . . . . . .
Measurement accessories available . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11-21
11-21
11-21
11-21
11-24
11-24
11-25
11-25
11-26
11-26
11-28
11-28
11-28
11-28
11-29
11-30
11-31
11-32
11-33
11-33
11-33
11-33
11-34
11-35
11-35
11-35
11-36
11-36
11-36
11-37
11-37
11-37
11-38
11-38
11-39
11-40
11-41
11-42
11-43
11-44
11-45
11-52
11-52
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12-1
12-1
12-1
12-1
12-1
12-1
12-1
12-1
12-1
12-2
Contents-11
Test Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
87511A/B S Parameter Test Set . . . . . . . . . . .
87512A/B Transmission/Reection Test Set . . . . .
Active Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41800A Active Probe (5 Hz to 500 MHz) . . . . . . .
41802A 1 M
Input Adapter (5 Hz to 100 MHz) . . .
1141A Dierential Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Splitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11850C,D Three-way Power Splitters . . . . . . . .
11667A Power Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11857D 7 mm Test Port Return Cable Set . . . . . .
11857B 75 Type-N Test Port Return Cable Set . . .
11851B 50 Type-N RF Cable Set . . . . . . . . . .
BNC Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11852B 50 to 75 Minimum Loss Pad (DC to 2 GHz)
Adapter Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System accessories available . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPIB cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12-2
12-2
12-2
12-2
12-2
12-2
12-2
12-2
12-2
12-2
12-3
12-3
12-3
12-3
12-3
12-3
12-3
12-3
12-3
12-5
12-5
12-5
12-5
System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Processing for Network Measurement . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ratio Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency Characteristics Correction by Corrective Data Arrays
Averaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Raw Data Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Coecient Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Delay and Phase Oset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Trace Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Trace Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Processing for Spectrum Measurement . . . . . . . . . . .
Decimation Windowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fast Fourier Transform (fft) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Absolute Squared (ABS2 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video Averaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attenuator Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Averaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency Characteristics Level Correction . . . . . . . . . .
Raw Data Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
A-2
A-3
A-3
A-3
A-4
A-4
A-5
A-5
A-5
A-5
A-5
A-5
A-5
A-5
A-6
A-6
A-6
A-6
A-6
A-6
A-7
A-7
A-7
A-8
A-8
A-8
A-8
A-8
A-8
A-8
A. Basic Measurement Theory
Contents-12
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Memory Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format/Unit conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Trace Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Trace Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Processing for Impedance Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltage/Current Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-V to Reection Coecient Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Coecient Arrays/Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Averaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Raw Data Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fixture Compensation Coecient Arrays/Fixture Compensation . . . . .
Data Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Trace Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Trace Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Measurement Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S-parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conversion Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smith Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Polar Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Averaging (Sweep Averaging) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IF Band Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spectrum Measurement Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detection Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Positive and Negative Peak Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Swept Spectrum Analyzers versus FFT Analyzers . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selectivity of the RBW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Noise measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Noise Format and Marker Noise Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Detection Mode for Noise Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VBW for Noise Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Impedance Measurement Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-V Measurement Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Concept of I-V Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How This Is Dierent From Impedance Conversion in the Network Analyzer
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Impedance Measurement Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Signal Level at DUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement Points and Display Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limit Line Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How Limit Lines are Entered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
A-8
A-8
A-8
A-8
A-9
A-9
A-9
A-10
A-10
A-10
A-11
A-11
A-11
A-11
A-11
A-11
A-11
A-11
A-11
A-11
A-12
A-12
A-12
A-12
A-13
A-13
A-14
A-15
A-15
A-15
A-16
A-16
A-16
A-19
A-19
A-19
A-19
A-19
A-21
A-22
A-22
A-22
A-22
A-23
A-23
A-23
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
A-23
A-25
A-25
A-25
A-27
A-28
A-29
A-29
Contents-13
Turning ON/OFF Limit Line/Limit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Segments Entering Order Needs Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving the Limit Line Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Osetting the Sweep Parameter or Amplitude of the Limit Lines . . . .
Supported Display Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use a Sucient Number of Points or Errors May Occur . . . . . . . . .
Displaying, Printing, or Plotting Limit Test Data . . . . . . . . . . . .
Results of Plotting or Printing the Display with Limit Lines ON . . . . .
Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Three Types of Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marker Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marker Time Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Continuous/Discrete Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marker on the Data Trace or on the Memory Trace . . . . . . . . . .
1Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marker Search Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Width Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peak Denition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peak Denition for Network Analyzer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peak Denition for Spectrum Analyzer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How GPIB Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Talker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Listener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPIB Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPIB Capabilities of the 4395A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bus Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration for Network Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accuracy Enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sources of Measurement Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Directivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Source Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolation (Crosstalk) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency Response (Tracking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compensation for Measurement Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying Calibration Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dening the Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oset and Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the Standard Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accuracy Enhancement Fundamentals-Characterizing Systematic Errors
One-Port Error Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring reection coecient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Directivity Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Source match error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency response error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How calibration standards are used to quantify these error terms . .
Two-Port Error Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring Transmission Coecient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Match Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents-14
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
A-30
A-30
A-31
A-31
A-31
A-31
A-31
A-31
A-32
A-32
A-32
A-32
A-32
A-32
A-33
A-33
A-33
A-35
A-35
A-36
A-37
A-37
A-37
A-37
A-37
A-38
A-38
A-39
A-39
A-40
A-40
A-40
A-40
A-41
A-42
A-43
A-43
A-44
A-44
A-45
A-45
A-45
A-46
A-47
A-47
A-49
A-49
A-49
A-49
A-50
A-50
A-51
A-54
A-54
A-54
Isolation Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Terms the 4395A Can Reduce . . . . . . . . . .
Saving and Recalling Instrument States and Data . . . . . .
Storage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disk Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disk Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Disk Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy Files Between the Memory Disk and the Flexible Disk
File Types And Data Saved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Binary Files and ASCII Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument States and Internal Data Arrays (STATE) . . .
Internal Data Arrays (DATA ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . .
Graphics image (GRAPHICS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File Type and Data Group Combinations . . . . . . . . . .
File Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto Recall Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File Structure of Internal Data Arrays File for Binary Files .
File Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File Structure of Internal Data Arrays File for ASCII File . .
Status Block and Data Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File Structure for Single Channel and Dual Channel . . .
Data Array Names for the Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . .
Data Array Names for the Network Analyzer . . . . . .
Data Groups of the Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . .
Data Groups of the Network Analyzer . . . . . . . . .
Save Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL Data Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B. Softkey Reference
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4Marker5 4Marker 5
4Search5
. . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4Chan 15 4Chan 25 4Meas5
. . .
4Display5 . . .
4Scale Ref5
. .
4Bw/Avg5 . . .
4Cal5 . . . . .
4Sweep5 . . . .
4Source5
. . .
4Trigger5 . . .
4Format5
4Center5 4Span5 4Start5 4Stop5
!
. . . .
. . .
4Local5 4Preset5 .
4Copy5 . . . .
4Save5 . . . .
4Recall5 . . . .
4Utility5
4System5
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
A-55
A-55
A-58
A-58
A-58
A-58
A-58
A-59
A-59
A-59
A-59
A-59
A-59
A-60
A-60
A-61
A-61
A-62
A-62
A-62
A-62
A-66
A-66
A-68
A-68
A-69
A-69
A-69
A-71
A-71
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
B-2
B-5
B-7
B-11
B-14
B-16
B-29
B-32
B-34
B-35
B-36
B-39
B-42
B-44
B-47
B-48
B-52
B-54
Contents-15
C. Input Range and Default Settings
Active Channel Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4Chan 15 and 4Chan 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4Meas5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4Format5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4Display5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4Scale Ref5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4Bw/Avg5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4Cal5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sweep Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4Sweep5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4Source5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4Trigger5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4Center5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4Span5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4Start5 & 4Stop5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marker Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4Marker5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4Marker!5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4Search5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4Utility5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument State Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4System5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4Copy5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4Save5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4Local5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Results of Power Loss to Battery Backup Memory (Factory Setting)
Predened Calibration Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Predened Standard Class Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . .
D. Manual Changes
Introduction . . . . .
Manual Changes . . .
Serial Number . . . .
Miscellaneous Changes
Messages
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
C-1
C-1
C-2
C-2
C-2
C-3
C-5
C-13
C-13
C-14
C-14
C-15
C-16
C-16
C-16
C-17
C-17
C-17
C-18
C-18
C-19
C-20
C-20
C-20
C-21
C-21
C-21
C-22
C-24
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
D-1
D-1
D-2
D-3
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Messages-1
.
Error Messages in Numerical Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Messages-15
. .
Index
Contents-16
Figures
2-1.
2-2.
2-3.
2-4.
2-5.
2-6.
2-7.
2-8.
2-9.
2-10.
2-11.
3-1.
3-2.
3-3.
3-4.
3-5.
3-6.
3-7.
4-1.
4-2.
4-3.
5-1.
5-2.
5-3.
5-4.
5-5.
5-6.
5-7.
5-8.
5-9.
6-1.
6-2.
6-3.
6-4.
6-5.
6-6.
6-7.
6-8.
6-9.
6-10.
6-11.
Power Cable Supplied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rack Mount Kits Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a Transmission/Reection Test Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting an S-parameter Test Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spectrum Analyzer Mode (One Active Probe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Analyzer Mode (One Active Probe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Analyzer Mode (Two Active Probes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a Transmission/Reection Test Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Impedance Test Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Test Fixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission/Reection Test Set Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S-Parameter Test Set Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Equipments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Equipments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Impedance Test Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the test xture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Panel Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screen Display (Single Channel, Cartesian Format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting DUT for Directional Transmission Characteristic Measurement . . .
Connecting DUT for Directional Transmission and Reection Characteristics
Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting DUT for Bi-directional Transmission and Reection Characteristics
(Four S Parameters) Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting DUT for Transmission Characteristic Measurement When the Output
Signal is in a Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting DUT for Transmission and Reection Characteristics Measurement
When the Output Signal is in a Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting DUT for Transmission Characteristic Measurement When the Input
and Output Signals are in a Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting DUT When Directly Measuring the Signal . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting DUT When Measuring the Signal in a Circuit . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Impedance Test Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Channel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of EXT TRIGGER Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smith Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expanded Phase Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marker Readout of Complex Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marker to Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peak to Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Narrowing Span with Signal Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Sweep Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zooming the Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6
2-8
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-17
2-18
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-16
3-32
3-33
3-45
4-1
4-6
4-11
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
6-3
6-5
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-16
6-17
6-18
6-20
6-21
6-22
Contents-17
6-12.
6-13.
6-14.
6-15.
6-16.
6-17.
7-1.
7-2.
7-3.
8-1.
8-2.
8-3.
8-4.
8-5.
8-6.
8-7.
8-8.
8-9.
8-10.
8-11.
8-12.
8-13.
8-14.
8-15.
8-16.
8-17.
8-18.
8-19.
8-20.
8-21.
8-22.
8-23.
8-24.
8-25.
8-26.
8-27.
8-28.
8-29.
8-30.
8-31.
9-1.
9-2.
9-3.
9-4.
9-5.
9-6.
9-7.
9-8.
9-9.
9-10.
9-11.
9-12.
9-13.
10-1.
10-2.
Autoscale Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marker to Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Scale/Div. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting IF Bandwidth (IFBW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Resolution Bandwidth (RBW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Video Bandwidth (VBW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Calibration Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Test Fixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model of Fixture Compensation Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marker Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sub-marker and Maker List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ripple Parameters Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peak Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Searching for Multiple Peaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peak Denition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Threshold Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Search Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Saved Data from Spreadsheet Software . . . . . . . . .
Bandwidth Measurement Using Width Function . . . . . . . . .
Parameters of a Band Pass Filter Measurement . . . . . . . . .
Measuring Electrical Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deviation from the Linear Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Group Delay Aperture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port Extension With the T/R Test Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Measurement Conguration (Transmission) . . . . . . . .
Cable Measurement Conguration (Reection) . . . . . . . . . .
Noise Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C/N Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edge Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Level Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Domain Measurement Conguration . . . . . . . . . . . .
Target and Trigger Signal Timing on the Oscilloscope . . . . . . .
Gate Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Gated Measurement Conguration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Gated Spectrum Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marker Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tracking Unstable Harmonics Using Search Track . . . . . . . .
Connecting DC SOURCE to Impedance test kit . . . . . . . . . .
Q Measurement Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reducing Sweep Time by Optimizing the Number of Display Points
List Sweep Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sweep List Edit Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting IF Bandwidth (IFBW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dynamic Range Enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limit Line Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency, Upper and Lower Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limit Line Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limit Line Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Osetting Limit Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maximum Holding the Drifting Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display When Starting Signal Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display After Signal Has Drifted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission Measurement Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Response of a SAW Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents-18
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6-23
6-24
6-25
6-26
6-27
6-28
7-15
7-16
7-19
8-2
8-4
8-5
8-7
8-8
8-9
8-10
8-11
8-13
8-22
8-26
8-26
8-27
8-29
8-30
8-31
8-32
8-33
8-35
8-37
8-38
8-39
8-41
8-42
8-42
8-43
8-46
8-49
8-50
8-51
8-58
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-6
9-7
9-8
9-8
9-9
9-11
9-12
9-14
9-15
9-15
10-2
10-3
10-3.
10-4.
10-5.
10-6.
10-7.
10-8.
10-9.
10-10.
10-11.
10-12.
10-13.
10-14.
10-15.
10-16.
10-17.
10-18.
10-19.
10-20.
10-21.
10-22.
10-23.
10-24.
10-25.
10-26.
10-27.
10-28.
10-29.
10-30.
10-31.
10-32.
11-1.
11-2.
11-3.
11-4.
11-5.
11-6.
11-7.
11-8.
11-9.
11-10.
11-11.
11-12.
11-13.
11-14.
11-15.
11-16.
11-17.
11-18.
11-19.
11-20.
11-21.
11-22.
11-23.
Using the Marker to Determine 6 dB Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Peak Search to Determine Ripple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Amplitude and Phase Response of a SAW Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expanded Phase Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reection Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reection Measurement Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S11 on Polar Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Impedance Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Admittance Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gain Compression Measurement Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gain Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input vs. Output Power Level at the 01 dB Gain Compression Point . . . . .
Carrier Amplitude and Frequency of AM Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modulating Frequency of AM Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wide Band FM Signal Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zooming Carrier Signal of FM Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Impedance Test Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Test Fixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cs and D Characteristics of a Chip Capacitor under Swept Frequency . . . . .
jZj and Characteristics of a Chip Capacitor under Swept Frequency . . . . .
Equivalent Circuit Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simulation of Frequency-based Characteristics Using Resulting Equivalent Circuit
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency-based Characteristics of a Crystal Resonator . . . . . . . . . . .
Readout of the Fr and CI Values of a Crystal Resonator . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equivalent Circuit Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simulation of Frequency-based Characteristics Using Resulting Equivalent Circuit
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Admittance Chart for a Crystal Resonator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characteristics of a Varactor Diode under DC Bias Sweep . . . . . . . . . .
Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phase Dynamic Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Noise Sidebands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Displayed Average Noise Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical On-screen Dynamic Range (Center: 50 MHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Dynamic Range at Inputs R, A, and B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Impedance Measurement Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 bit I/O Port Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24-bit I/O Interface Pin Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trigger Signal (External trigger input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S-Parameter Test Set Interface Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Total Reection Magnitude Uncertainty of One-Port Device . . . . . . . . . .
Total Reection Phase Uncertainty of One-Port Device . . . . . . . . . . . .
Total Reections Magnitude Uncertainty of Two-Port Device . . . . . . . . .
Total Reection Phase Uncertainty of Two-Port Device . . . . . . . . . . . .
Total Transmission Magnitude Uncertainty of a Low-Loss Device . . . . . . .
Total Transmission Phase Uncertainty of a Low-Loss Device . . . . . . . . .
Total Transmission Magnitude Uncertainty of a Wide Dynamic Range Device .
Total Transmission Phase Uncertainty of a Wide Dynamic Range Device . . . .
4395A/85046A System Error Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-4
10-5
10-6
10-6
10-7
10-8
10-9
10-10
10-11
10-12
10-13
10-14
10-16
10-17
10-19
10-19
10-22
10-23
10-24
10-26
10-28
10-29
10-29
10-30
10-32
10-33
10-34
10-34
10-35
10-38
11-4
11-5
11-8
11-9
11-10
11-11
11-17
11-22
11-22
11-24
11-25
11-26
11-27
11-27
11-29
11-29
11-30
11-30
11-31
11-31
11-32
11-32
11-34
Contents-19
11-24. Typical Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Error
(@Reference Power Level=Full Scale) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-25. Typical Phase Dynamic Accuracy Error
(@Reference Power Level=Full Scale) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-26. Typical Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Error
(@Reference Power Level=020 dB from Full Scale) . . . . . .
11-27. Typical Phase Dynamic Accuracy Error
(@Reference Power Level=020 dB from Full Scale) . . . . . .
11-28. Typical Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Error
(@Reference Power Level=060 dB from Full Scale) . . . . . .
11-29. Typical Phase Dynamic Accuracy Error
(@Reference Power Level=060 dB from Full Scale) . . . . . .
11-30. Total Reection Magnitude Uncertainty (@One-Port Cal) . . . . . .
11-31. Total Refection Phase Uncertainty (@One-Port Cal) . . . . . . . .
11-32. Total Transmission Magnitude Uncertainty (@Full Two-Port Cal) . .
11-33. Total Transmission Phase Uncertainty (@Full Two-Port Cal) . . . . .
A-1. Schematic block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-2. Data Processing for Network Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-3. Data Processing for Spectrum Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-4. Data Processing for Impedance Measurement . . . . . . . . . . .
A-5. S-Parameters of a Two-Port Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-6. Reection Impedance and Admittance Conversions . . . . . . . .
A-7. Transmission Impedance and Admittance Conversions . . . . . . .
A-8. Constant Group Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-9. Higher Order Phase Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-10. Rate of Phase Change Versus Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-11. Variations in Frequency Aperture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-12. Swept Spectrum Analyzers versus Step FFT Analyzers . . . . . . .
A-13. Resolving Small Adjacent Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-14. I-V Measurement Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-15. Impedance Test Kit Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-16. Test Signal Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-17. Measurement Points and Display Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-18. The Concept of Segments as a Point between Two Sets of Limit Lines
A-19. Bandwidth Search Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-20. Peak Denition for Network Analyzer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-21. Peak Denition for Spectrum Analyzer Mode . . . . . . . . . . .
A-22. Analyzer Single Bus Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-23. Directivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-24. Source Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-25. Load Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-26. Sources of Error in a Reection Measurement . . . . . . . . . . .
A-27. Reection Coecient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-28. Eective Directivity EDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-29. Source Match ESF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-30. Reection Tracking ERF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-31. \Perfect Load" Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-32. Measured Eective Directivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-33. Short Circuit Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-34. Open Circuit Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-35. Measured S11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-36. Major Sources of Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-37. Transmission Coecient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-38. Load Match ELF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-39. Isolation EXF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents-20
. . . . .
11-39
. . . . .
11-39
. . . . .
11-40
. . . . .
11-40
. . . . .
11-41
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11-41
11-43
11-43
11-44
11-44
A-2
A-4
A-7
A-10
A-13
A-14
A-14
A-17
A-17
A-18
A-18
A-20
A-21
A-23
A-25
A-25
A-27
A-29
A-34
A-35
A-36
A-39
A-41
A-42
A-43
A-49
A-49
A-50
A-50
A-51
A-51
A-52
A-52
A-53
A-53
A-54
A-54
A-55
A-55
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
A-40.
A-41.
A-42.
A-43.
A-44.
A-45.
A-46.
A-47.
D-1.
Full Two-Port Error Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File Header Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAW Data Group Structure for the Network Analyzer . . . . . . . . . .
RAW Data Group Structure for the Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . .
CAL Data Group Structure for the Network Analyzer . . . . . . . . . .
CAL Data Group Structure for the Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . .
DATA, MEMORY, DATA TRACE and MEMORY TRACE Data Group Structure
CAL Data Group Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial Number Plate (sample) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
A-56
A-62
A-63
A-63
A-64
A-64
A-65
A-71
D-2
Contents-21
Tables
2-1.
2-2.
2-3.
2-4.
7-1.
7-2.
7-3.
8-1.
8-2.
8-3.
8-4.
10-1.
11-1.
11-2.
11-3.
11-4.
11-5.
11-6.
11-7.
11-8.
11-9.
11-10.
12-1.
A-1.
A-2.
A-3.
A-4.
A-5.
A-6.
A-7.
A-8.
A-9.
A-10.
C-1.
C-2.
C-3.
C-4.
C-5.
C-6.
C-7.
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rack Mount Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Method Selection Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of the Standard Denitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example: Standard Class Assignment of the 85032B . . . . . . . . .
Allowable RWB Settings and Minimum Gate Length . . . . . . . . .
Default Settings When Switched to Normal Span or Zero Span . . . .
Minimum Time Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equivalent Circuit Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sweep List for Evaluating a Varactor Diode . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signal Source Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters of System error Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical System Performance for Devices with 7 mm Connectors
4395A with 87511A Test Set (300 kHz to 500 MHz) . . . . . . . .
Typical System Performance for Devices with 3.5 mm Connectors
4395A with 87511A Test Set (300 kHz to 500 MHz) . . . . . . . .
Typical System Performance for Devices with 50 Type-N Connectors
4395A with 87511A Test Set (300 kHz to 500 MHz) . . . . . . . .
Typical System Performance for Devices with 75 Type-N Connectors
4395A with 87511B Test Set (300 kHz to 500 MHz) . . . . . . . .
Typical System Performance for Devices with 50 Type-N Connectors
4395A with 87512A Test Set (100 Hz to 500 MHz) . . . . . . . . .
Typical System Performance for Devices with 75 Type-N Connectors
4395A with 87512B Test Set (100 Hz to 500 MHz) . . . . . . . . .
Reection Measurement Uncertainty Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission Measurement Uncertainty Worksheet . . . . . . . . . .
Supported Printers and Printing Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Obtaining Parameters in 1 Marker Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Denitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Class Assignments Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Valid Characters for File Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suxes and Extensions Added Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents of ASCII Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Groups and Data Array Names for Spectrum Analyzer . . . . .
Data Groups and Data Array Names for the Network Analyzer Mode .
Network Measurement Type Versus Raw Data Saved . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Type for Network Measurement Versus CAL Data Saved .
3.5 mm Standard Cal Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 mm Standard Cal Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
50 Type-N Standard Cal Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75 Type-N Standard Cal Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Class Assignments Table (7 mm and 3.5 mm) . . . . . . . .
Standard Class Assignments Table (50 Type-N) . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Class Assignments Table (75 Type-N) . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents-22
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-3
2-4
2-7
2-8
7-2
7-10
7-12
8-45
8-47
8-48
8-55
10-37
11-23
11-34
. . . .
11-46
. . . .
11-47
. . . .
11-48
. . . .
11-49
. . . .
11-50
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11-51
11-53
11-54
12-5
A-33
A-46
A-47
A-61
A-61
A-67
A-68
A-69
A-70
A-70
C-22
C-22
C-22
C-23
C-24
C-24
C-25
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
D-1. Manual Changes by Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-2. Manual Changes by Firmware Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-1
D-1
Contents-23
1
Introduction
About the 4395A Network/Spectrum/Impedance Analyzer
The 4395A Network/Spectrum/Impedance Analyzer provides excellent vector network and
spectrum measurement performance from 10 Hz to 500 MHz. Providing both network and
spectrum measurement capabilities, the 4395A is a cost eective solution for the development
and production testing of electronic devices.
Optionally, the 4395A can serve as an impedance analyzer as well. This requires Option 010
and the 43961A Impedance Test Kit.
About This Guide
This guide is the Operation Manual for the 4395A. It includes the following
chapters/appendixes:
\Chapter 1 Introduction"
This chapter.
\Chapter 2 Installation
Provides procedures needed to install the 4395A.
Guide"
Provides a quick-start tutorial which lets you learn the basics of
\Chapter 3 Quick Start
network, spectrum, and impedance analyzer modes.
Guide"
Illustrates and describes the 4395A's front and rear panel
\Chapter 4 Front and Rear
features.
Panels"
\Chapter 5 Preparations for Provides the procedures needed to prepare for a measurement.
Measurement"
\Chapter 6 Setting and
Provides the procedures for setting and optimizing measurement
conditions of 4395A.
Optimizing Measurement
Conditions"
\Chapter 7 Calibration"
Provides general procedures for using the 4395A as an
impedance analyzer.
\Chapter 8 Analyzing the
Explains how to analyze and process the measurement results
Measurement Results"
obtained in each analyzer mode.
Provides advanced measurement techniques that can be used to
\Chapter 9 Advanced
optimize your measurement tasks.
Techniques for Optimizing
Measurement Tasks"
\Chapter 10 Examples of
Contains example applications of the 4395A for each of
Applications"
network, spectrum, and impedance analyzer modes.
\Chapter 11 Specications
Provides detailed information on the 4395A's specications.
and Supplemental
Characteristics"
\Chapter 12 Accessories and Lists options and accessories available with the 4395A.
Options"
Introduction 1-1
\Appendix A Analyzer
Features"
\Appendix B Softkey
Reference"
\Appendix C Input Range and
Default Settings"
\Appendix D Manual
Changes"
Document Guide
provides additional information on analyzer features beyond the
basics covered in the previous chapters.
Shows the hierarchy of softkeys that appear on the 4395A's
display.
Lists the valid ranges and initial settings of the various functions
of the 4395A.
Provides information on changes to the manual and on the
product serial number.
For information on using GPIB commands to program the 4395A, refer to Programming
Manual, which contains a complete command reference with ready-to-use sample programs.
1-2 Introduction
2
Installation Guide
This chapter provides installation and setup instructions. It contains the following information:
Incoming Inspection
Replacing Fuse
Power Requirements
Operation Environment
Providing clearance to dissipate heat at installation site
Instruction for Cleaning
Rack/Handle Installation
Connecting Cables
Connecting a Test Set for Network Analyzer Mode
Connecting an Active Probe
Connecting an Impedance Test Kit and a Test Fixture
Connecting a Keyboard
Setting Up a 75 Measurement For Spectrum Analyzer Mode
Installation Guide 2-1
Incoming Inspection
Incoming Inspection
Warning
To avoid hazardous electrical shock, do not turn on the 4395A when there
are signs of shipping damage to any portion of the outer enclosure (for
example, covers, panel, or display)
Inspect the shipping container for damage. If the shipping container or cushioning material
is damaged, it should be kept until the contents of the shipment have been checked for
completeness and the 4395A has been checked mechanically and electrically. The contents
of the shipment should be as listed in Table 2-1. If the contents are incomplete, if there is
mechanical damage or defect, or if the 4395A does not pass the power-on selftests, notify the
nearest Agilent Technologies oce. If the shipping container is damaged, or the cushioning
material shows signs of unusual stress, notify the carrier as well as the Agilent Technologies
oce. Keep the shipping materials for the carrier's inspection.
2-2 Installation Guide
Incoming Inspection
Description
Table 2-1. Contents
Agilent Part Number
Quantity
Network/Spectrum/Impedance Analyzer
4395A
1
CD-ROM (Manuals)
04395-905xx1
1
Sample Program Disk (2 disks)
04395-180x0
1
Power Cable2
-
1
Operation Manual
04395-900x01
1
Programming Manual
04395-900x11
1
Instrument BASIC Users
HandBook
04155-90151
1
-
1
8120-1839
1
04395-901x01
1
1250-1859
1
11852B option 004
1
5062-3991
1
5062-3979
1
5062-3985
1
Option ABA only
Option 810 only
mini-DIN Keyboard
Option 010 only
BNC(m)-BNC(m) Cable
Option 0BW only
Service Manual
Option 1D5 only
BNC Adapter
Option 1D7 only
50
/75
Minimum Loss Pad
Option 1CN Handle Kit
Handle Kit
Option 1CM Rack Mount Kit
Rack Mount Kit
Option 1CP Rack Mount & Handle Kit
Rack Mount & Handle Kit
1 The number indicated by \x" in the part number of each manual, is allocated for numbers increased by
one each time a revision is made. The latest edition comes with the product.
2 The power cable depends on where the instrument is used,see Figure 2-1.
Installation Guide 2-3
Replacing Fuse
Replacing Fuse
Fuse Selection
Select proper fuse according to the Table 2-2.
Table 2-2. Fuse Selection
Fuse Rating/Type Fuse Part Number
5A 250Vac
UL/CSA type
Time Delay
2110-0030
For ordering the fuse,contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Oce.
Procedure
Lever a small minus screwdriver to
dismount the fuse holder above the AC
line receptacle on the rear panel.
Caution
To check or replace the fuse, pull the fuse
holder and remove the fuse. To reinstall
the fuse, insert a fuse with the proper
rating into the fuse holder.
Use the proper fuse for the line voltage selected. Use only fuses with the
required current rating and of the specied type as replacements. DO NOT use
a mended fuse or short-circuit the fuse-holder in order to by-pass a blown fuse.
Find out what caused the fuse to blow!
2-4 Installation Guide
Power Requirements
Power Requirements
The 4395A requires the following power source:
Voltage : 90 to 132 Vac, 198 to 264 Vac
Frequency : 47 to 63 Hz
Power : 300 VA maximum
Power Cable
In accordance with international safety standards, this instrument is equipped with a
three-wire power cable. When connected to an appropriate ac power outlet, this cable grounds
the instrument frame.
The type of power cable shipped with each instrument depends on the country of destination.
Refer to Figure 2-1 for the part numbers of the power cables available.
Warning
For protection from electrical shock, the power cable ground must not be
defeated.
The power plug must be plugged into an outlet that provides a protective
earth ground connection.
Installation Guide 2-5
Power Requirements
Figure 2-1. Power Cable Supplied
2-6 Installation Guide
Operation Environment
Operation Environment
The 4395A must be operated under within the following environment conditions, and sucient
space must be kept behind the 4395A to avoid obstructing the air ow of the cooling fans.
Temperature: 10 C to 40 C
Humidity:
less than 80% RH
Note
The 4395A must be protected from temperature extremes which could cause
condensation within the instrument.
Providing clearance to dissipate heat at installation site
To ensure the specications and measurement accuracy of the product, you must keep ambient
temperature around the product within the specied range by providing appropriate cooling
clearance around the product or, for the rackmount type, by forcefully air-cooling inside
the rack housing. For information on ambient temperature to satisfy the specications and
measurement accuracy of the product, refer to Chapter 11, Specications and Supplemental
Characteristics.
When the ambient temperature around the product is kept within the temperature range
of the operating environment specication (refer to \Operating Conditions" in Chapter 11),
the product conforms to the requirements of the safety standard. Furthermore, under that
temperature environment, it has been conrmed that the product still conforms to the
requirements of the safety standard when it is enclosed with cooling clearance as follows:
Table 2-3.
Conditions
Rear
180 mm
Side
60 mm
Instruction for Cleaning
To prevent electrical shock, disconnect the 4395A power cable from the receptacle before
cleaning. Wipe with a dry cloth or a soft cloth that is soaked with water and wrung tightly
without undue pressure to clean the casing. Do not attempt to clean the 4395A internally.
Installation Guide 2-7
Rack/Handle Installation
Rack/Handle Installation
The 4395A can be rack mounted and used as a component in a measurement system.
Figure 2-2 shows how to rack mount the 4395A.
Table 2-4. Rack Mount Kits
Description
Option
1CN
1CM
1CP
Handle Kit
Rack Mount Kit
Rack Mount & Handle Kit
Agilent Part
Number
5062-3991
5062-3979
5062-3985
Figure 2-2. Rack Mount Kits Installation
Option 1CN Handle Kit
Option 1CN is a handle kit containing a pair of handles and the necessary hardware to attach
them to the instrument.
Installing the Handle
1. Remove the adhesive-backed trim strips 1 from the left and right front sides of the 4395A.
2. Attach the front handles 3 to the sides using the screws provided.
3. Attach the trim strips 4 to the handles.
2-8 Installation Guide
Rack/Handle Installation
Option 1CM Rack Mount Kit
Option 1CM is a rack mount kit containing a pair of anges and the necessary hardware to
mount them to the instrument in an equipment rack with 482.6 mm (19 inches) horizontal
spacing.
Mounting the Rack
1. Remove the adhesive-backed trim strips 1 from the left and right front sides of the 4395A.
2. Attach the rack mount ange 2 to the left and right front sides of the 4395A using the
screws provided.
3. Remove all four feet (lift bar on the inner side of the foot, and slide the foot toward the
bar).
Option 1CP Rack Mount & Handle Kit
Option 1CP is a rack mount kit containing a pair of anges and the necessary hardware to
mount them to an instrument which has handles attached, in an equipment rack with 482.6
mm (19 inches) spacing.
Mounting the Handle and Rack
1. Remove the adhesive-backed trim strips 1 from the left and right front sides of the 4395A.
2. Attach the front handle 3 and the rack mount ange 5 together on the left and right front
sides of the 4395A using the screws provided.
3. Remove all four feet (lift bar on the inner side of the foot, and slide the foot toward the
bar).
Connecting Cables
Use shielded cables when you connect the DUT and accessories for testing.
For more information about the cables, see chapter 12.
Installation Guide 2-9
Connecting a Test Set for Network Analyzer Mode
Connecting a Test Set for Network Analyzer Mode
To use the network analyzer mode of the 4395A, a test set is required to measure the
transmission and reection characteristics of the device under test (DUT).
You can use either the 87512A/B transmission/reection (T/R) test set or the 87511A/B
S-parameter test set. The 87512A/B T/R test set measures reection and transmission in the
forward direction only. The 87511A/B S-parameter test set measures both the forward and
reverse directions without reconnection.
For more information about the test sets, see Chapter 12.
Connecting a Transmission/Reection Test Set
Figure 2-3. Connecting a Transmission/Reection Test Set
1. Place the transmission/reection (T/R) test set in front of the 4395A.
2. Connect the R and A ports of the 4395A and the T/R test set to each other.
3. Connect the RF OUT port of the 4395A and the RF IN port of the T/R test set with a
semi-rigid cable.
Note
When you use the 87512B, press 4Cal5 MORE SET Z0 . Then press 475 455 4215 to
set the characteristic impedance (Z0 ) to 75 .
2-10 Installation Guide
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Connecting a Test Set for Network Analyzer Mode
Connecting an S-parameter Test Set
Figure 2-4. Connecting an S-parameter Test Set
1. Place the 4395A on the S-parameter test set.
2. Connect the TEST SET-I/O INTERCONNECT interface on the rear panel of the 4395A and
the NETWORK ANALYZER-I/O INTERCONNECT interface of the test set using the cable
furnished with the test set.
3. Connect the RF OUT, R, A, and B inputs of the 4395A to the S-parameter test set to each
other.
Note
When you use the 87511B, press 4Cal5 MORE SET Z0 . Then press 475 455 4215 to
set the characteristic impedance (Z0 ) to 75 .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Installation Guide 2-11
Connecting an Active Probe
Connecting an Active Probe
The active probe allows you to analyze an in-circuit signal or device that has no port for
connecting to the test set. The active probe can be used for both spectrum and network
measurements.
The 4395A can use the following active probes:
41800A Active Probe (5 Hz to 500 MHz)
41802A 1 M
Input Adapter (5 Hz to 100 MHz)
For more information about these active probes, see Chapter 12.
For Spectrum Analyzer Mode
Figure 2-5. Spectrum Analyzer Mode (One Active Probe)
1. Connect the output connector of the active probe to the R,A,or B port of the 4395A.
2. Plug the probe power plug into the PROBE POWER connector.
For Network Analyzer Mode
Using One Active Probe
2-12 Installation Guide
Connecting an Active Probe
Figure 2-6. Network Analyzer Mode (One Active Probe)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect the power splitter to the RF OUT port.
Connect one output from the power splitter to the R input.
Connect the other output of the power splitter to the DUT.
Connect the active probe to the B input and plug the probe plug into the PROBE POWER
connector.
5. If necessary, terminate the DUT with a load.
Note
The following power splitters are available for the 4395A:
11850C,D Three-way Power Splitter
11667A Two-way Power Splitter
For more information about these power splitters, see Chapter 12.
Installation Guide 2-13
Connecting an Active Probe
Using Two Active Probes
Figure 2-7. Network Analyzer Mode (Two Active Probes)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect one active probe to the R input.
Connect the other active probe to the B input.
Connect the RF OUT port to the DUT.
If necessary, terminate the DUT with a load.
2-14 Installation Guide
Connecting an Active Probe
Using a Transmission/Reection Test Set
Figure 2-8. Using a Transmission/Reection Test Set
1. Connect the 87512A/B T/R test set.
2. Connect the active probe to the B input.
3. If necessary, terminate the DUT with a load.
Installation Guide 2-15
Connecting an Active Probe
Connecting an Impedance Test Kit and a Test Fixture for Impedance
Analyzer Mode
Connecting an Impedance Test Kit
To start the impedance measurement, you need to connect the 43961A Impedance Test Kit to
the 4395A. See Figure 2-9.
1. Verify the 4395A is turned o.
2. Connect the N-cable to the RF OUT port of the 4395A.
3. Connect two connectors of the 43961A to the R and A ports of the 43961A.
4. Connect the other connector of the N-cable to the RF IN port of the 43961A.
5. Turn on the 4395A.
Figure 2-9. Connecting the Impedance Test Kit
Connecting a Test Fixture to the Impedance Test Kit
To connect the test xture to the impedance test kit, see the applicable test xture manual for
instructions. The following is a general procedure:
1. Turn the APC-7 connector of the impedance test kit OUTPUT port.
2. Verify that the connector sleeve is retracted fully.
3. Set the mounting posts of the test station into the twin locating holes at the corner of the
test xture.
4. Connect the connector on the underside of the test xture to the OUTPUT port of the
impedance test kit.
2-16 Installation Guide
Connecting an Active Probe
Figure 2-10. Connecting Test Fixture
Installation Guide 2-17
Connecting a Keyboard
Connecting a Keyboard
An mini-DIN keyboard can be connected to the mini-DIN connector on the rear panel of
the 4395A. The mini-DIN keyboard provides an easier way to enter characters for the le
names, display titles, and Instrument BASIC programs. It can also access the 4395A softkey
functions by using keyboard function keys. For more information on the mini-DIN keyboard,
see Programming Manual.
Figure 2-11. Connecting a Keyboard
2-18 Installation Guide
Setting Up a 75 Measurement For Spectrum Analyzer Mode
Setting Up a 75 Measurement For Spectrum Analyzer Mode
Note
This operation requires the option 1D7 50
to 75
Input Impedance
Conversion. For detail information about option 1D7, see Chapter 12.
1. Attach the 11852B Option 004 50 N(m)/75 N(f) minimum loss pad to R, A, or B input.
2. Press 4Cal5.
3. Press INPUT Z .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Press 4*5 to set the impedance of the source (75 ). Then press 4Entry O5.
5. Select the input port:
Attached to
Press
Input R
Input A
Input B
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
LVL CAL DATA R
LVL CAL DATA A
LVL CAL DATA B
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6. Enter the insertion loss of the minimum loss pad in dB and press 4215.
Note
Perform this procedure each time the 4395A is preset because the 4395A does
not retain this setting in memory.
Installation Guide 2-19
3
Quick Start Guide
Network Analyzer Tour
In this section, you explore the network analyzer mode of operation. Before starting this tour,
verify that the 4395A is correctly installed (see chapter 2, \Installation Guide," if you need
additional information).
Before You Leave On The Tour
On this tour, you will learn how to make a basic network analyzer measurement by measuring
the transmission characteristics of a bandpass lter.
Overview
The following is a short summary of the tour:
1. Preparing for a measurement
Turning ON the 4395A
Connecting the DUT
2. Setting up the 4395A
Selecting the analyzer type
Setting the active channel
Setting the input port
Setting the frequency range
Performing the automatic scaling
3. Making a calibration
4. Reading a measurement result
Reading a measured value by using marker
5. Printing out the measurement result
Conguring and connecting a printer
Making a hardcopy of the display
After you nish this tour, you will understand how to make a basic measurement in the
network analyzer mode of operation.
Quick Start Guide 3-1
Before You Leave On The Tour
Required Equipments
To perform all the steps in this tour, you must have the following equipments:
4395A Network/Spectrum/Impedance Analyzer
Measurement Device:
This tour assumes the device under test (DUT) is a 70 MHz bandpass lter
THRU (BNC female-to-female connector)
Two BNC cables
Test Set (use either of the following)
Transmission/Reection (T/R) Test Set
Two N-to-BNC adapters
S-Parameter Test Set
Two APC7-to-N adapters
Two N-to-BNC adapters
HP DeskJet Printer *
Parallel Interface Cable *
* If you wish to test some other device, you will need to change particular measuring
conditions, such as the frequency range, according to the general characteristics of the DUT.
* If you do not have an HP DeskJet printer and cable, skip step 5, \Printing Out the
Measurement Results".
Figure 3-1. Required Equipment
3-2 Quick Start Guide
Step 1: Preparing for the Measurement
Step 1: Preparing for the Measurement
You must set up the test set before you turn ON the 4395A. The setup procedure for the test
set is described in \Connecting a Test Set for Network Analyzer Mode" in Chapter 2.
Turning ON the 4395A
Press the LINE switch.
The 4395A performs a power on self-test. About 20 seconds later, the model name, revision
number, and other information should appear on the LCD to indicate that the 4395A has
normally started up.
Connecting the DUT
Connect the DUT as shown in Figure 3-2 or Figure 3-3.
Figure 3-2. Transmission/Reection Test Set Setup
Quick Start Guide 3-3
Step 1: Preparing for the Measurement
Figure 3-3. S-Parameter Test Set Setup
3-4 Quick Start Guide
Step 2: Setting up the 4395A
Step 2: Setting up the 4395A
Before you start the measurement, you must set up the 4395A to t your measurement
requirements. For example, you must set the frequency range of the measurement. In this
step, you will set the following parameters:
Analyzer type
Network analyzer mode
Active channel
Channel 1
Inputs
B/R or S21 (depending on the test set)
Format
Log magnitude (default)
Frequency Range Center 70 MHz, Span 500 kHz
Setting the Analyzer Type
To use the 4395A in the network analyzer mode, you must set the analyzer type to the network
analyzer mode after selecting the active channel.
In the MEASUREMENT block, press 4Meas5.
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Press ANALYZER TYPE .
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Press NETWORK ANALYZER .
Quick Start Guide 3-5
Step 2: Setting up the 4395A
Setting the Active Channel
Because the 4395A has two measurement channels you can have two dierent measurement
setups at the same time. To change the active channel to channel 1:
In the ACTIVE CHANNEL block, press
4Chan 1 5.
Note
Verify the Chan 1 active channel indicator
lights.
Changing the analyzer type presets the 4395A for the active channel. If you
want to keep the current measurement settings when changing the analyzer
type, rst set the other channel to active.
Selecting the Input
The 4395A uses three inputs for network measurements (R, A, and B). Usually, the R input is
connected to the RF OUT signal directly, the A input measures the reected signal from the
DUT, and the B input measures the signal through the DUT.
This example assumes you are using the T/R test set. Therefore, because you are going to
measure the transmission characteristics of the DUT, select B/R to measure the ratio of B and R
inputs.
When you use the S-parameter test set, you can measure the forward and reverse
characteristics of a 2-port device without reconnecting the inputs. In that case, select S21 for a
transmission measurement in the forward direction.
3-6 Quick Start Guide
Step 2: Setting up the 4395A
In the MEASUREMENT block, press 4Meas5.
FFFFFFFFF
Press B/R .
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Press Trans:FWD S21 [B/R] to select B/R
for the forward direction.
Setting the Frequency Range
To display the transmission characteristics of the 70 MHz bandpass lter, you should specify
the frequency range for the measurement. In this example, set the 4395A to a 70 MHz center
frequency with a 500 kHz span.
Quick Start Guide 3-7
Step 2: Setting up the 4395A
In the SWEEP block, press 4Center5.
Press 475 405.
Press 4M/5.
In the SWEEP block, press 4Span5.
Press 455 405 405.
Press 4k/m5.
Performing the Automatic Scaling
Often, the trace obtained after specifying the frequency range is too large or too small
vertically for the grid. However, by using the automatic scaling function, you can obtain the
optimum vertical setting automatically.
3-8 Quick Start Guide
Step 2: Setting up the 4395A
In the MEASUREMENT block, Press
4Scale Ref5.
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Press AUTO SCALE .
The transmission characteristics trace of the lter is displayed as shown below:
All the settings are displayed on the LCD.
1. Active channel is set to channel 1.
2. Inputs are set to B/R.
3. Format is set to log magnitude mode.
4. Center frequency is set to 70 MHz.
5. Frequency span is set to 500 kHz.
Quick Start Guide 3-9
Step 3: Making a Calibration
Step 3: Making a Calibration
To ensure accurate measurement results, calibrate the 4395A before making a measurement.
Calibration reduces error factor due to uncertainty. In this example, you perform the response
calibration to cancel a frequency response error. A THRU (BNC female-to-female connector) is
necessary to perform a response calibration for the transmission measurement.
Performing a Response Calibration (for the Transmission Measurement)
Press 4Cal5.
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Press RESPONSE .
FFFFFFFFFFFF
Press THRU .
3-10 Quick Start Guide
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Press CALIBRATE MENU .
Disconnect the DUT then, connect the THRU.
WAIT - MEASURING CAL STANDARD is
displayed.
Step 3: Making a Calibration
FFFFFFFFFFFF
The THRU softkey label is underlined when
the measurement is completed.
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Press DONE: RESPONSE .
Disconnect the THRU and reconnect the DUT.
\Cor" is displayed on the left side of the display to show that the frequency response error is
corrected.
The measured value is now corrected for the frequency response error.
Note
If the trace is changed, it requires an adjustment of the scale. Perform the
automatic scaling again by pressing 4Scale Ref5 AUTO SCALE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Quick Start Guide 3-11
Step 4: Reading a Measurement Result
Step 4: Reading a Measurement Result
You may want to readout the measured values on the displayed trace. You can use the marker
function for this purpose. The marker shows the frequency and response value at the marker
point.
Reading a Measured Value by Using Marker
In the MARKER block, press 4Marker5.
Verify a marker appears on the trace.
Turn the knob to the right to move the
marker toward the right.
Read the values at the right top of the display.
The marker has a search function that makes it easier and faster to evaluate the trace results.
For example, to search for the maximum value and its frequency on the trace:
In the MARKER block, press 4Search5.
3-12 Quick Start Guide
FFFFFFFFF
Press MAX .
Step 4: Reading a Measurement Result
The marker immediately moves to the
maximum point on the displayed trace.
Read the frequency and response values
displayed at the upper right of the display.
Quick Start Guide 3-13
Step 5: Printing Out the Measurement Result
Step 5: Printing Out the Measurement Result
You may want a hardcopy of the measured results for a permanent record of the measurement.
The 4395A can print out the data as a snapshot of the display or as a list of values without
using any external controller.
Conguring and Connecting a Printer
Locate the parallel interface connector on the back of the 4395A.
Caution
Do not connect a printer to \TEST SET - I/O INTERCONNECT". Doing so could
damage the printer.
Note
For more information about printer, see the chapter 12.
Making a Hardcopy of the LCD Display
Press 4Copy5.
3-14 Quick Start Guide
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Press PRINT [STANDARD] to execute the
printing.
Spectrum Analyzer Tour
Spectrum Analyzer Tour
In this section, you explore the spectrum analyzer mode of operation. Before starting this
tour, verify the 4395A is correctly installed (see chapter 2, \Installation Guide," if you need
additional information).
Before You Leave On The Tour
On this tour, you will learn how to make a basic spectrum analyzer measurement by measuring
the output signal of a signal generator.
Overview
The following is a short summary of the tour:
1. Preparing for a measurement
Turning ON the 4395A
Connecting the test signal source
2. Setting up the 4395A
Selecting the analyzer type
Setting the active channel
Selecting the input
Setting the frequency range
3. Making a Measurement
Reading the peak level using the marker
Setting the resolution bandwidth to see low level signals
Searching for harmonics using the search function
4. Saving and recalling the 4395A settings
Preparing the disk
Saving 4395A settings
Entering the le name
Recalling the 4395A settings
After you nish this tour, you will understand how to make a basic measurement in the
spectrum analyzer mode of operation.
Quick Start Guide 3-15
Spectrum Analyzer Tour
Required Equipments
To perform all the steps in this tour, you must have the following equipments:
4395A Network/Spectrum/Impedance Analyzer
Test signal source (020dBm, 20MHz, sine wave)**
N to BNC Adapter (50 )
BNC cable
3.5 inch 2HD Blank Disk
** If you wish to test some other test signal, you will need to change particular measuring
conditions, such as the frequency range, according to the general characteristics of the signal.
Figure 3-4. Required Equipments
3-16 Quick Start Guide
Step 1: Preparing for a Measurement
Step 1: Preparing for a Measurement
Turning ON the 4395A
Verify the power source setting is correct before you turning ON the 4395A. If necessary, see
chapter 2, \Installation Guide."
Press the LINE switch
The 4395A performs a power on self-test. About 20 seconds later, the model name, revision
number, and other information should appear on the LCD to indicate that the 4395A has
normally started up.
Connecting the DUT
Connect the test signal source (020 dBm, 20 MHz) to Input R of the 4395A.
Quick Start Guide 3-17
Step 2: Setting Up the 4395A
Step 2: Setting Up the 4395A
In this step, you will set the following parameters:
Active channel
Channel 2
Analyzer type
Spectrum analyzer mode
Input
R input
Frequency Range 0 Hz to 80 MHz
Setting the Analyzer Type
To use the spectrum analyzer mode, you must set the analyzer type to the spectrum analyzer
mode after selecting an active channel.
In the MEASUREMENT block, press 4Meas5.
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Press ANALYZER TYPE .
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Press SPECTRUM ANALYZER .
Note
Changing the analyzer type presets the 4395A for the active channel. If you
want to keep the current measurement settings when changing the analyzer
type, rst set the other channel to active.
3-18 Quick Start Guide
Step 2: Setting Up the 4395A
Setting the Active Channel
The 4395A has two measurement channels. This allows you to have two dierent measurement
setups. Other selections you make on the front panel aect only the active channel. To set the
active channel to channel 2:
In the ACTIVE CHANNEL block, press
4Chan 25.
Note
Verify the Chan 2 active channel indicator
lights.
All selected settings are stored separately for each channel. You must select an
active channel (1 or 2) before you can change the measurement setup for that
channel.
Selecting the Input
The 4395A has three inputs; R, A, and B. Any of the inputs (R, A, or B) can be used for a
spectrum measurement.
In the spectrum analyzer mode, the R input is selected by default. In the following steps, you
verify the R input is selected.
In the MEASUREMENT block, press 4Meas5.
FFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Verify the R in SPECTRUM: R is underlined.
(This shows that the R input is selected for a
spectrum analyzer measurement.)
Quick Start Guide 3-19
Step 2: Setting Up the 4395A
Setting the Frequency Range
The CAL OUT signal (20 MHz at 020 dBm) is connected as test signal source.
To see this signal
on display, you must set the appropriate frequency range (in this case, 0 to 80 MHz):
In the SWEEP block, press 4Start5.
Press 405.
Press 4215.
Press 4Stop5.
Press 485 405.
Press 4M/5.
Verify the 20 MHz signal is displayed as shown below:
3-20 Quick Start Guide
Step 2: Setting Up the 4395A
Quick Start Guide 3-21
Step 3: Making a Measurement
Step 3: Making a Measurement
Reading the Peak Level Using the Marker
Let's try to read peak signal level by using the marker:
Press 4Search5.
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Press SEARCH:PEAK .
Read the marker value shown at the upper
right of grid.
3-22 Quick Start Guide
Marker appears on trace.
Marker moves to the top of the CAL OUT
signal.
Step 3: Making a Measurement
Setting the Resolution Bandwidth to See Low Level Signals
To see lower level signals that are approximately the same level as the noise oor, use a narrow
resolution bandwidth (rbw) setting.
Before you set the RBW, set the maximum peak level as the reference level. This increases the
visibility of the lower level signal. This technique is useful when you are measuring two signals
and one is very close to the noise level.
Press 4Marker!5.
Press MKR!REFERENCE .
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
The trace moves upward to place the tip of the maximum peak at the top line of the grid.
Quick Start Guide 3-23
Step 3: Making a Measurement
Press 4Bw/Avg5.
Press 4+5 to narrow RBW setting to 3 kHz.
Now, with the noise oor level lowered by narrowing the resolution bandwidth, the second and
third harmonics can be seen as shown below:
3-24 Quick Start Guide
Step 3: Making a Measurement
Searching for Harmonics Using the Search Function
You can easily readout a harmonics' frequency and level by using the peak search function:
Press 4Search5.
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Press NEXT PEAK .
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Press SEARCH:PEAK .
The marker moves to the third (or second)
harmonic.
To move the marker
to the second (or third)
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
harmonic, press NEXT PEAK again.
Quick Start Guide 3-25
Step 4: Saving and Recalling 4395A Settings
Step 4: Saving and Recalling 4395A Settings
You can store the settings or measurement data on a 3.5 inch disk using the 4395A's disk drive.
In this tour, you save and recall the settings that you selected previously in this tour.
Preparing the Disk
To use a disk, you must rst initialize it by performing the following steps:
Verify the disk is not write protected.
Insert the disk into the disk drive
Press 4Save5.
Press FILE UTILITIES .
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Toggle STOR DEV [MEMORY] to [DISK] , and Toggle FORMAT [DOS] to [LIF] .
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
press INITIALIZE DISK
3-26 Quick Start Guide
Step 4: Saving and Recalling 4395A Settings
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Press INIT DISK: YES .
The message, \INITIALIZE DISK In Progress,"
is displayed. After the disk is initialized, this
message is turned o.
Note
The 4395A can use either a LIF (Logical Interchange Format) or a MS-DOS (Disk
Operating System) format disk.
Note
The 4395A can initialize a 1.44 MB 3.5 inch exible disk only.
Saving 4395A Settings
In the following example, use \SATOUR" as the le name of the 4395A settings you want to
save.
Press 4Save5.
FFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Press STATE .
The 4395A requests the le name you want to use for the saved settings.
Entering the File Name
Note
If a keyboard is connected, you can use it for le name entry. If not, use the
front-panel controls as described in the following steps.
Quick Start Guide 3-27
Step 4: Saving and Recalling 4395A Settings
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Turn the rotary knob to move the arrow
below the rst character, S.
Press SELECT LETTER .
Keep entering characters until SATOUR is
entered.
If
you enter a wrong character, press
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
BACK SPACE to erase the character.
FFFFFFFFFFFF
To complete the le name entry, press DONE . Verify the disk access indicator lights (this
shows that the 4395A is saving the settings to
the disk).
Note
The le name for a LIF format can be up to 10 characters long. However,
with the 4395A, the last 2 characters are reserved for a sux. Therefore,
you can enter a le name of up to 8 characters. Either upper or lower case is
recognized in the LIF format.
A le name for a MS-DOS(DOS) format consists of a le name and an extension.
The le name can be up to 8 characters long and the extension contains up to 3
characters. A period separates the extension from the le name. The extension
3-28 Quick Start Guide
Step 4: Saving and Recalling 4395A Settings
part reserved by the 4395A. Therefore, you can enter a le name of up to 8
characters. The le name is not case sensitive in the DOS format.
Recalling the 4395A Settings
You can recall the le containing the saved 4395A settings anytime you want. This is true, even
if you change the current 4395A settings. In this example, you will preset the 4395A and then
recall the settings in the SATOUR le.
Presetting
Press 4Preset5.
The 4395A is set to the preset conditions. However, the 4395A settings from the previous
examples are stored in the SATOUR le on the disk.
Quick Start Guide 3-29
Step 4: Saving and Recalling 4395A Settings
Recalling the SATOUR le.
Press 4Recall5.
The disk access lamp lights.
The stored le
is listed in the softkey label
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
area. Press SATOUR_S to recall the 4395A
settings that you saved.
Note
Sux, \_S," means the 4395A settings are saved. If you save the 4395A
settings in a DOS format, an extension, \.sta," is appended to the le name.
After the disk access lamp goes out, all 4395A settings that you set are recalled. You can verify
them on the display. If you want to know what settings are saved, see chapter 8.
3-30 Quick Start Guide
Impedance Analyzer Tour
Impedance Analyzer Tour
In this section, you explore the impedance analyzer mode of operation. Before starting this
tour, make sure that your 4395A is correctly installed (see chapter 1, \Installation and Setup
Guide," if you need additional information).
Note
Your 4395A must be equipped with option 010 to serve as an impedance
analyzer. Otherwise, impedance analyzer mode is not available.
Before You Leave On The Tour
Through this tour, you will learn how to make a basic impedance analyzer measurement by
measuring the impedance characteristics of a chip capacitor.
Overview
The following is a short summary of the tour:
1. Preparing for a measurement
Connecting the impedance test kit
Turning ON the 4395A
2. Setting up the 4395A
Selecting the analyzer type
Activating Channel 1
Setting the sweep parameters
Setting the output level
Setting the IF bandwidth
3. Calibrating the 4395A
OPEN calibration
SHORT calibration
LOAD calibration
4. Connecting and setting up a test xture
Connecting the xture
Setting the electrical length
Fixture compensation
5. Carrying out impedance measurement
Selecting the measurement parameters for Channel 1
Connecting the DUT
Performing the Automatic Scaling
6. Switching from Channel 1 to Channel 2
7. Selecting the measurement parameters for Channel 2
8. Dual channel display
Quick Start Guide 3-31
Impedance Analyzer Tour
After you nish this tour, you will understand how to make a basic measurement in impedance
analyzer mode. If you want to learn how to perform more complex tasks, refer to Chapters 5
through 9.
Required Equipments
To perform all the steps in this tour, you must have the following equipments:
Figure 3-5. Required Equipments
1. 4395A Network/Spectrum/Impedance Analyzer with Option 010 equipped
2. 43961A Impedance Test Kit
3. Calibration kit (included in the 43961A)
4. Test xture of your choice
5. Short device for the test xture
6. DUT (chip capacitor)*
If you wish to test some other device instead of a chip capacitor, you will need to change
particular measuring conditions, such as the frequency range, according to the general
characteristics of the DUT.
3-32 Quick Start Guide
Impedance Analyzer Tour
Step 1: Preparing for the Measurement
Connecting the Impedance Test Kit
The 4395A requires the 43961A Impedance Test Kit to apply signals to, and measure the
impedance characteristics of, a DUT (see Figure 3-6). To connect the 43961A Impedance Test
Kit, follow these steps:
Figure 3-6. Connecting the Impedance Test Kit
1.
2.
3.
4.
Make sure that the power to the 4395A is OFF.
Connect the N-N cable to the 4395A's RF OUT port.
Make sure that the 43961A's APC7 connector sleeve is completely exposed.
Connect the two connectors of the 43961A to the R and A ports of the 4395A, by tightening
the two connectors little by little alternately while holding the test kit.
5. Connect the other end of the N-N cable to the RF IN port of the 43961A.
Turning ON the 4395A
Verify the power source setting is correct before you turning ON the 4395A. If necessary, see
chapter 2, \Installation Guide."
Quick Start Guide 3-33
Impedance Analyzer Tour
Press the power switch.
The 4395A performs a power on self-test. About 20 seconds later, the model name, revision
number, and other information should appear on the LCD to indicate that the 4395A has
normally started up.
Setting Up the 4395A
Setting the Analyzer Type
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Available analyzer modes are listed in the menu under the ANALYZER TYPE softkey. You can
use the 4395A as an impedance analyzer by selecting the corresponding analyzer mode from
that menu. Follow these steps:
Press the 4Meas5 key in the
MEASRUREMENT block.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Choose IMPEDANCE ANALYZER .
3-34 Quick Start Guide
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Choose ANALYZER TYPE .
Impedance Analyzer Tour
Activating Channel 1
The 4395A has two channels, each of which can retain dierent measuring conditions.
To demonstrate how eectively you can use these two channels to perform impedance
measurement, this tour uses the following scenario:
1. Activate Channel 1, and set the parameters that apply to Channel 1
2. Switch to Channel 2, and set the parameters that apply to Channel 2 (see \Step 6: Switching
from Channel 1 to Channel 2")
3. Display both channels in parallel (see \Step 8: Dual Channel Display")
First, activate Channel 1 through these steps:
Press the 4Chan 15 key in the
ACTIVE CHANNEL block.
Make sure that the indicator lamp
beside the 4Chan 15 key is ON.
Quick Start Guide 3-35
Impedance Analyzer Tour
Setting the Sweep Parameters
This tour assumes that the frequency is being swept from 100 kHz to 500 MHz.
Follow these steps:
Press the 4Sweep5 key.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Choose SWEEP TYPE MENU to
access the sweep type menu.
Choose LOG FREQ to have the
4395A accept log frequency
settings.
Press the 4Start5 key.
To specify the frequency at which
to start the sweep, enter 415 405 405
using the numeric keys.
Press the 4k/m5 key to indicate that
the unit is kHz.
3-36 Quick Start Guide
Impedance Analyzer Tour
Press the 4STOP5 key.
To specify the frequency at which
to stop the sweep, enter 455 405 405
using the numeric keys.
Press the 4M/5 key to indicate
that the unit is MHz.
Setting the Output Level
This tour assumes an output level of +0.5 dBm.
Follow these steps:
Quick Start Guide 3-37
Impedance Analyzer Tour
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Press the 4Source5 key.
Choose POWER .
Enter 405 4.5 455 using the numeric
keys.
Press the 4x15 key.
Setting the IF Bandwidth
This tour assumes an IF bandwidth of 300 Hz.
Follow these steps:
3-38 Quick Start Guide
Impedance Analyzer Tour
Note
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Press the 4Bw/Avg5 key.
Choose IF BW .
Enter 435 405 405 using the numeric
key.
Press the 4215 key.
A smaller IF bandwidth reduces trace noise, but increases measuring time.
Setting the Averaging Factor
This tour assumes the averaging factor of 8.
Follow these steps:
Quick Start Guide 3-39
Impedance Analyzer Tour
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Press the 4Bw/Avg5 key.
Choose AVERAGING FACTOR .
Enter 485 using the numeric key.
Press the 4215 key.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Toggle AVERAGING on OFF to
ON off .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Note
When you perform impedance measurement with the 43961A, you must set IF
bandwidth equal to or less than 300 Hz and averaging factor equal to or greater
than 8.
3-40 Quick Start Guide
Impedance Analyzer Tour
Step 3: Making a Calibration
Calibrating the 4395A in impedance analyzer mode requires that the 4395A be connected with
the 43961A impedance test kit. A proper calibration is required for the 4395A to perform
measurements within the guaranteed accuracy range.
For impedance analyzer mode, the 4395A must be calibrated for each of the following three
circuit states:
OPEN (0 S termination)
SHORT (0 termination)
LOAD (50 termination)
To calibrate the 4395A, access the calibration menu through these steps:
Press the 4Cal5 key.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Choose CALIBRATE MENU .
With the calibration menu displayed on the LCD screen, calibrate the 4395A for the OPEN,
SHORT, and LOAD states in order.
Note
Be sure to use the calibration kit included in the 43961A package.
OPEN Calibration
Follow these steps:
Quick Start Guide 3-41
Impedance Analyzer Tour
Connect the 0 S termination to the
43961A's OUTPUT port.
Remove the 0 S termination.
SHORT Calibration
Follow these steps:
3-42 Quick Start Guide
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Choose OPEN .
Wait until the OPEN softkey's
label is underlined to indicate that
the OPEN calibration is complete.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Impedance Analyzer Tour
Connect the 0 termination to the
43961A's OUTPUT port.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Press SHORT .
Wait until the SHORT softkey's
label is underlined to indicate that
the SHORT calibration is complete.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Remove the 0 termination.
LOAD Calibration
Follow these steps:
Quick Start Guide 3-43
Impedance Analyzer Tour
Connect the 50 termination to
the 43961A's OUTPUT port.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Choose DONE: CAL .
Remove the 50
termination.
3-44 Quick Start Guide
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Press LOAD .
Wait until the LOAD softkey's
label is underlined to indicate that
the LOAD calibration is complete.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Make sure that a \Cor" marker is
displayed at the left-hand edge of
the screen.
Impedance Analyzer Tour
Step 4: Connecting and Setting Up a Test Fixture
Connecting the xture
This tour does not assume any specic test xture. You can use a test xture of your choice.
For how to connect your test xture to the impedance test kit, refer to the documentation that
comes with the test xture. A typical test xture can be installed in such a procedure as shown
below:
1. Turn the OUTPUT port APC-7 connector of the impedance test kit.
2. Make sure that the connecting sleeve is completely retracted.
3. Set the test station's mount post to the pair of holes located at one corner of the test xture.
4. Turn the xing ring counterclockwise until it is fully tightened.
5. Connect the impedance test kit's OUTPUT port to the connector located on the back side of
the test xture.
Figure 3-7. Connecting the test xture
Setting the Electrical Length
Connecting a test xture adds an extra electrical length to the test circuit. This electrical
length, which is specic to the test xture you use, must be known to the 4395A so that it can
compensate for the extra electrical length and eliminate errors due to phase shifts.
The 4395A incorporates a database of Agilent test xtures with their own electrical lengths.
For example, if the model number of your test xture is 16192, you would set the electrical
length as follows:
Quick Start Guide 3-45
Impedance Analyzer Tour
Press the 4Meas5 key.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Choose SELECT FIXTURE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Press RETURN twice.
3-46 Quick Start Guide
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Choose FIXTURE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Select 16192 .
Make sure that the FIXTURE label
on the screen is followed by your
selected model number (16192, in
this case).
Impedance Analyzer Tour
Fixture Compensation
Fixture compensation is a process that calibrates the 4395A with a test xture installed,
thereby eliminating errors produced between the test xture electrode and the impedance
test kit's OUTPUT port. Normally, the 4395A must be xture-compensated for the OPEN and
SHORT circuit states. It can optionally be xture-compensated for the LOAD state.
Note
For how to connect standards, refer to the documentation that comes with the
test xture you use.
Quick Start Guide 3-47
Impedance Analyzer Tour
Connect the appropriate short
device to the xture.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Choose COMPEN MENU .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Remove the short device to put
the circuit into the OPEN state.
Choose FIXTURE COMPEN .
Choose SHORT .
Wait until the SHORT softkey's
label is underlined to indicate that
the SHORT compensation is
complete.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3-48 Quick Start Guide
Press the 4Cal5 key.
Impedance Analyzer Tour
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Choose OPEN .
Wait until the OPEN softkey's label
is underlined to indicate that the
OPEN compensation is complete.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Choose DONE: COMPEN .
Make sure that a \Cmp" marker is
displayed in place of the \Cor"
marker.
Step 5: Carrying Out Impedance Measurement
Selecting the Measurement Parameters for Channel 1
To begin impedance measurement, the 4395A must know which characteristics it should
measure and how it should report the measured values. This tour assumes that the following
measurement parameters are specied for Channel 1.
Characteristic Absolute value of impedance (jZj)
value
Format
Log
To set the parameters listed above, follow these steps:
Quick Start Guide 3-49
Impedance Analyzer Tour
Press the 4Meas5 key.
Choose IMPEDACE: MAG (jZj) .
Press the 4Format5 key.
Choose LOG Y-AXIS .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
These settings are applied to Channel 1, which has been the active channel in the scenario of
this tour. Note that, in Steps 6 and 7, you will switch from Channel 1 to Channel 2, and assign
dierent settings to Channel 2.
Connecting the DUT
How to connect a DUT diers depending on which test xture you use. For more information,
refer to the documentation that comes with your test xture.
As soon as you have connected the DUT, the 4395A will measure and display the impedance
characteristics.
Performing the Automatic Scaling
Often, the trace obtained after specifying the frequency range is too large or too small
vertically for the grid. However, by using the automatic scaling function, you can obtain the
optimum vertical setting automatically.
Follow these steps:
3-50 Quick Start Guide
Impedance Analyzer Tour
Press the 4Scale Ref5 key.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Choose AUTO SCALE .
Quick Start Guide 3-51
Impedance Analyzer Tour
Step 6: Switching from Channel 1 to Channel 2
All the settings you have made so far are assigned to Channel 1. Now, activate Channel 2
instead of Channel 1.
Press the 4Chan 25 key in the
ACTIVE CHANNEL block.
3-52 Quick Start Guide
Make sure that the indicator lamp
beside the 4Chan 25 key is ON.
Impedance Analyzer Tour
Setting the Averaging Factor for Channel 2
This tour assumes the averaging factor of 8.
Follow these steps:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Press the 4Bw/Avg5 key.
Choose AVERAGING FACTOR .
Enter 485 using the numeric key.
Press the 4215 key.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Toggle AVERAGING on OFF to
ON off .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Quick Start Guide 3-53
Impedance Analyzer Tour
Step 7: Selecting the measurement parameters for Channel 2
This tour assumes that the following measurement parameters be specied for Channel 2.
Characteristic Phase (z )
value
Format
Linear
To set the parameters listed above, follow these steps:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Press the 4Meas5 key.
Choose PHASE: z .
Press the 4Format5 key.
Choose LIN Y-AXIS .
3-54 Quick Start Guide
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Impedance Analyzer Tour
Now both Channels 1 and 2 are assigned specic settings. You can not only have one of the
two channels displayed at a time, but also have both channels displayed in parallel, as you will
learn in the next step.
Quick Start Guide 3-55
Impedance Analyzer Tour
Step 8: Dual Channel Display
The 4395A provides a feature that displays the measurement results for both channels at the
same time. This feature is called \dual channel display."
Follow these steps:
Press the 4Display5 key.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Choose DUAL CHAN on OFF so
that the label changes to
DUAL CHAN ON off .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The screen is split into upper and lower halves. The upper half shows the absolute impedance
value while the lower half shows the phase.
3-56 Quick Start Guide
Impedance Analyzer Tour
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Choose MORE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Choose SPLIT DISP ON off so
that the label changes to
SPLIT DISP on OFF .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Two graphs are merged into a single coordinate plane.
Quick Start Guide 3-57
4
Front and Rear Panels
Features of 4395A
This chapter describes the features of the front and rear panels of 4395A. It provides
illustrations and descriptions of the front panel features, the LCD display and its labels, and the
rear panel features and connectors.
Front Panel
The front panel provides a number of hardkeys (physical keys) and softkeys (menu items
displayed on the LCD), which allow you to activate various analyzer functions (Figure 4-1).
Figure 4-1. Front Panel Layout
Front and Rear Panels 4-1
Front Panel
1. Hardkeys
The hardkeys (physical keys) located on the front panel are divided into 6 blocks|- labeled
\ACTIVE CHANNEL", \MEASUREMENT", \SWEEP", \MARKER", \INSTRUMENT STATE", and
\ENTRY", respectively. Some of the front panel hardkeys control instrument functions directly
while others provide access to softkey menus.
ACTIVE CHANNEL Block
The ACTIVE CHANNEL block contains two hardkeys: 4Chan 15 and 4Chan 25. By pressing either of
these two keys, you can make the channel 1 or 2 active.
All measuring conditions you specify through the front panel, such as sweep settings, are
assigned to the currently active channel. Once you have assigned your desired settings to each
channel, you can instantly switch between the two dierent sets of measuring conditions by
simply pressing the 4Chan 15 or 4Chan 25 key.
MEASUREMENT Block
The MEASUREMENT block contains hardkeys associated with measuring parameters, display
formats, and calibration.
SWEEP Key Block
The SWEEP block contains hardkeys associated with sweep settings.
MARKER Block
The MARKER block contains hardkeys associated with the marker function that facilitates
reading values on the measurement trace.
INSTRUMENT STATE Block
The INSTRUMENT block contains hardkeys that aect the instrument state of 4395A.
ENTRY keys
The ENTRY block contains the following:
numeric keys
a rotary knob
step keys for incrementing or decrementing your entered values
edit keys
unit terminator keys
You can use the rotary knob to change the value of the currently active parameter.
2. Softkeys
Softkey menus are lists of up to eight related functions that can be displayed in the softkey
label area at the right-hand side of the display. The eight keys to the right of the LCD are the
softkeys. Pressing one of the softkeys selects the adjacent menu function. This either executes
the labeled function and makes it the active function, causes instrument status information to
be displayed, or presents another softkey menu.
Some of the softkey menus are accessed directly from front panel keys and some from
other menus. For example, the sweep menu accessed by pressing the 4Sweep5 key presents
all the sweep functions such as sweep type, number of points, and sweep time. Pressing
4-2 Front and Rear Panels
Front Panel
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NUMBER of POINTS allows the required number of points displayed per sweep to be entered
directly from the number pad. RETURN softkeys return to previous menus. DONE indicates
completion of a specic procedure and then returns to an earlier menu.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Softkeys that are Joined by Vertical Lines
When several possible choices are available for a function, the softkeys are joined by vertical
lines. For example, in the spectrum input port menu under the 4Meas5 key, the available inputs
are listed: R , A , B with a vertical line between them. Note that only one softkey can be
selected at a time. When a selection has been made from the listed alternatives, that selection
is underlined until another selection is made.
NNNNN
NNNNN
NNNNN
Softkeys That Toggle Between On and O States
Some softkey functions can be toggled on or off, for example averaging. This is indicated in
the softkey label. The current state, on or off, is capitalized in the softkey label.
Example:
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
AVERAGING ON off
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
AVERAGING on OFF
The word on is capitalized, showing that averaging is currently on.
The word o is capitalized, showing that averaging is currently o.
Softkeys that Show Status Indications in Brackets
Some softkey labels show the current status of a function in brackets. These include
simple toggle functions and status-only indicators. An example of a toggled function is the
PRINT [STANDARD] or PRINT [COLOR] softkey. The DATA MATH[ ] softkey is an example
of a status-only indicator, where the selected equation of the data math function is shown in
brackets in the softkey label.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. GPIB \REMOTE" Indicator
The \REMOTE" Indicator turns on when the analyzer is in the remote state.
4.
4Preset5
Key
This key returns the instrument to a known standard preset state from any step of any manual
procedure. A complete listing of the instrument preset conditions is provided in Appendix C.
5. PROBE POWER Connector
This connector (fused inside the instrument) supplies power to an active probe for in-circuit
measurements of AC circuits. Applicable active probes are described in Chapter 12.
Front and Rear Panels 4-3
Front Panel
6. Analyzer Input Terminals R, A, and B
These are input terminals through which the 4395A receives signals output from the RF OUT
terminal and then fed through the test circuit. How to use these input terminals diers
depending on which analyzer mode you use:
In network analyzer mode, use the A and B terminals to receive signals output from the RF
OUT terminal and then fed through the device under test (DUT), and use the R terminal to
directly feed back the signal output from the RF OUT terminal to provide the reference input
signal. You may want to use a power splitter to split the RF OUT signal among the input
terminals.
In spectrum analyzer mode, you can use any of these three terminals to monitor the spectrum
of the input signals.
In impedance analyzer mode, which is available with option 010, use the R and A terminals to
monitor the voltage and current across the DUT being fed with the signals output from the RF
OUT terminal.
These terminals comply with INSTALLATION CATEGORY I of IEC 1010-1.
Note
Do not exceed the operating input power, voltage, and current level
and signal type appropriate for the instrument being used, refer to your
instrument's operation manual.
Note
Electrostatic discharge(ESD) can damage the highly sensitive
microcircuits in your instrument. ESD damage is most likely to occur as the
test xtures are being connected or disconnected. Protect them from ESD
damage by wearing a grounding strap that provides a high resistance path to
ground. Alternatively, ground yourself to discharge any static charge built-up
by touching the outer shell of any grounded instrument chassis before touching
the test port connectors.
7. RF OUT Connector
Connects the RF output signal from the analyzer's internal source to a test set or power
splitter. The output impedance at this connector is 50 .
Note that, in spectrum analyzer mode, the RF output is disabled by default. When you perform
zero span measurement in spectrum analyzer mode, you can turn the RF output on.
8. DC SOURCE (DC Voltage/Current Output) Connector (Option 001)
This connector, located on the front panel, supplies up to 640 V / 6100 mA of DC
voltage/current.
4-4 Front and Rear Panels
Screen Display
9. Built-in Flexible Disk Drive
You can use this disk drive to store your measurement data, instrument , list sweep tables, and
HP Instrument BASIC programs. Supported data formats include the LIF (logical interchange
format) and DOS (disk operating system) format.
10. LINE Switch
Turns on/o the power to the 4395A.
11. Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
Displays measurement results, softkey menus, instrument settings, system or error messages
Screen Display
The LCD displays a grid on which the measurement data is plotted, the currently selected
measurement traces, and other information describing the measurement. Figure 4-2 shows the
locations of the dierent information labels.
In addition to the full-screen display shown in Figure 4-2, a split display is available (see \Dual
Channel Display" in Chapter 6). In this case, information labels are provided for each half of
the display.
The screen can also be used as the HP Instrument BASIC display. HP Instrument BASIC uses
either a full-screen display or a half-screen display below the graphic display as a text screen.
Front and Rear Panels 4-5
Screen Display
Figure 4-2. Screen Display (Single Channel, Cartesian Format)
1. Active Channel
Displays either \CH1" or \CH2" to indicate the number of the currently active channel (one that
was selected keys in the ACTIVE CHANNEL block). When the dual channel function is enabled
and traces for the two channels are overlaid, both \CH1" and \CH2" appear in this area.
4-6 Front and Rear Panels
Screen Display
2. Measured Input(s)
Shows the input terminals currently in use, the values of the S parameters, or ratio of inputs
(such as A/R ratio). Use the 4Meas5 key to select the item to appear in this area.
3. Format
Shows the currently selected display format. Use the 4Format5 key to select your desired display
format.
4. SCALE/DIV
Shows the currently selected scale in the unit appropriate to the ongoing measurement. Use
the 4Scale Ref5 key to select your desired scale.
5. Reference Level
Displays the value of a reference line in Cartesian formats or the outer circle in polar formats.
It is selected using the 4Scale Ref5 key. However, the reference line is invisible (it is indicated by
a small triangle adjacent to the graticule at the left). The position of the reference line for the
spectrum analyzer is xed at the top of the Cartesian format.
6. Marker Data Readout
Displays the values of the marker in the unit appropriate to the current measurement (see
Chapter 8). The status of the marker is also displayed under the marker values. The following
status notations are used:
Cpl
Xch
Sgnl
Peak
Max
Min
Targ
PksA
PksL
PksR
Marker couple is tuned on. (When single channel is displayed, this notation is not displayed even if
the marker couple is on.)
Cross channel is turned on.
Signal tracking is turned on. (When both signal tracking and search tracking are turned on, only
Sgnl is displayed because search tracking is not allowed in this case.)
PEAK search tracking is turned on.
MAX search tracking is turned on.
MIN search tracking is turned on.
TARGET search tracking is turned on.
PEAK ALL search tracking is turned on.
PEAK LEFT ALL search tracking is turned on.
PEAK RIGHT ALL search tracking is turned on.
7. Marker Statistics and Width Value
Displays the statistical marker values determined by using the menus accessed with the 4Utility5
key, and the width value determined by using the menus accessed with the 4Search5 key. See
Chapter 8.
Front and Rear Panels 4-7
Screen Display
8. Softkey Labels
Displays the menu labels that dene the function of the softkeys immediately to the right of
the label.
9. PASS/FAIL
Indicates the values used for limit testing using limit lines. See \Limit Line Concept" in
Appendix A.
10. Sweep Time
Displays the sweep time. When sweep time is manually changed, # is displayed between SWP
and the sweep time value.
11. Sweep Parameter Span/Stop Value
Displays the stop frequency of the sweep range in frequency domain measurements or the
upper limit of a power sweep if 4395A is in network analyzer mode or impedance analyzer
mode. When the sweep parameter is in center/span mode, however, this area indicates the span
instead. You can suppress the display of the sweep parameter values (see Chapter 6).
12. Power Level
Displays the power level of RF output if the 4395A is in network analyzer mode or impedance
analyzer mode and frequency sweep is selected. When power sweep is selected or the 4395A is
in another mode, this area is blank.
13. CW Frequency
Displays the measured frequency if the 4395A is in network analyzer mode or impedance
analyzer mode and power sweep is being performed. When frequency sweep is selected or the
4395A is in another mode, this area is blank.
14. Video Bandwidth (VBW)
Displays the video bandwidth if the 4395A is in spectrum analyzer mode.
15. Input Attenuator
Displays the input attenuator value at the inputs R, A, B if the 4395A is in spectrum analyzer
mode.
16. Sweep Parameter Center/Start Value
Displays the start frequency of the sweep range in frequency domain measurements or the
lower power value in power sweep if the 4395A is in network analyzer mode or impedance
analyzer mode. When the sweep parameter is in center/span mode, this area shows the sweep
center value instead.
4-8 Front and Rear Panels
Screen Display
17. RBW/IFBW
Displays the RBW (in spectrum analyzer mode) or IFBW (in network analyzer mode or
impedance analyzer mode). When RBW or IFBW is manually changed, a sharp sign (#) is
displayed between RBW or IFBW and the value.
18. Status Notations
Displays the current status of various functions for the active channel. The following notations
are used:
3
P
Cor
C2
Cmp
C?
C2?
Cm?
C!
C2!
Cm!
Cm*
Del
Neg
Smp
Avg
Max
Min
G3
0O
G&O
D0M
D+M
D/M
Hld
"
ext
man
bus
Svc
Sweep parameters changed: measured data in doubt until a complete fresh sweep has been taken.
RF output is ON (zero span in spectrum analyzer mode only).
Error correction is ON (network analyzer mode and impedance analyzer mode).
Level correction is ON (spectrum analyzer mode only).
Two-port error correction is ON (network analyzer mode only).
Fixture compensation is ON(impedance analyzer mode only).
Sweep parameters have changed1 and interpolated error correction is ON (network analyzer mode
and impedance analyzer mode).
Sweep parameters have changed1 and interpolated two-port correction is ON (network analyzer
mode only).
Sweep parameters have changed1 and interpolated xture compensation is ON (impedance analyzer
mode only).
Sweep parameters have changed2 and extrapolated error correction is ON (network analyzer mode
and impedance analyzer mode).
Sweep parameters have changed2 and extrapolated two-port correction is ON (network analyzer
mode only).
Sweep parameters have changed2 and extrapolated xture compensation is ON (impedance analyzer
mode only).
Fixture compensation is ON when error correction is C? or C! (impedance analyzer mode only).
Electrical delay, port extension, or phase oset has been added or subtracted (network analyzer
mode and impedance analyzer mode).
Negative peak detection is ON (spectrum analyzer mode only).
Sample detection is ON (spectrum analyzer mode only).
Sweep-by-sweep averaging is ON. The averaging count is shown below.
Maximum hold is ON.
Minimum hold is ON.
Data math Gain is ON.
Data math Oset is ON.
Data math Gain is ON and data math Oset is ON.
Data math ( Data Trace 0 Memory Trace ) is ON.
Data math ( Data Trace + Memory Trace ) is ON.
Data math ( Data Trace / Memory Trace ) is ON.
Hold sweep.
Sweep indicator. (When sweep time is longer than 2 seconds, it appears on the trace).
Waiting for external trigger (BNC in rear panel).
Waiting for manual trigger.
Waiting for GPIB trigger.
A service mode is turned on. If this notation is shown, the measurement data will be out of
specications. (See Service Manual.)
1 Frequency span reduced, etc.
2 Frequency span expanded, etc.
Note
No status notation is displayed when Gate trigger is used.
Front and Rear Panels 4-9
Screen Display
19. External Reference
ExtRef is displayed when an external reference signal is connected to the external reference
input on the rear panel. This applies even if the phase is not locked to the external reference
signal.
20. Active Entry Area
Displays the name of the currently active input parameter with its current value.
21. Message Area
Displays prompts or error messages. See \Error Messages" for more information on error
messages.
22. Title
Displays a user-dened title which can consist of alphanumeric characters.
4-10 Front and Rear Panels
Rear Panel Features and Connectors
Rear Panel Features and Connectors
Figure 4-3 shows the features and connectors on the rear panel. Requirements for the input
signals to the rear panel connectors are provided in Chapter 11.
Figure 4-3. Rear panel
1. External Reference Input Connector
Connects an external frequency reference signal to the analyzer that is used to phase lock the
analyzer for increased accuracy in frequency.
When the 4395A is equipped with the external oven (Option 1D5), this connector must
be connected to REF OVEN connector (14). The external frequency reference function is
automatically enabled when a signal is connected to this input. When the signal is removed,
the analyzer automatically switches back to its internal frequency reference.
2. Internal Reference Output Connector
Connects to the frequency reference input of an external instrument to phase lock it to the
4395A for stable synchronization with the internal frequency of the 4395A.
Front and Rear Panels 4-11
Rear Panel Features and Connectors
3. External Program RUN/CONT Input
Externally triggers run or cont of the HP Instrument BASIC program. The positive edge of
a pulse whose width is 20 s or larger in the low state triggers run or cont. The signal is
TTL-compatible.
4. I/O Port
This is a 12-bit data communications port that connects to external devices such as a handler
on a production line. It can communicate 8 bits of output data and 4 bits of input data at a
time. For more information, see Chapter 11 and Programming Manual.
5. Power Cable Receptacle
This receptacle accommodates the main power cable. Insert the main-power cable plug only
into a socket outlet that has a protective ground contact. Note that the fuse that protects the
power line is located inside the rear panel cover.
6. GPIB Interface
Connects the analyzer to an external controller and other instruments to congure an
automated system. This connector is also used when the analyzer itself serves as the controller
of compatible peripherals. For more information, see Programming Guide.
7. External Monitor Terminal
This terminal outputs measurement results to an external color monitor. Color monitors
supporting VGA (scan rate of 31.5 kHz) can be connected to this terminal.
8. Parallel Interface
This interface can be used to redirect the displayed results to a printer. It complies with the
Centronics parallel interface standard. See \Printer" in Chapter 12 for supported printers.
9. 24-bit I/O Port
In addition to the 12-bit I/O port (described in item 4 above), the 4395A is equipped with a
24-bit data communications port that connects to external devices such as a handler on a
production line. This port can communicate 2 sets of 8-bit output data and 2 sets of 4-bit
bidirectional data at a time. For more information, see Programming Guide.
10. mini-DIN Keyboard Connector
Connect a mini-DIN keyboard to this connector usually when using Instrument BASIC.
Note
Be sure to use the specied PS/2, 101 keyboard. Using any other keyboard can
cause failure.
4-12 Front and Rear Panels
Rear Panel Features and Connectors
11. Test Set I/O Interface
You can use this interface to establish a connection between the 4395A and the test set using
the cable included in the S-parameter test set package to control the test set from the 4395A.
See Chapter 12 for the test set that can be connected. This interface is not used for the
87512A/B transmission/reection test set.
Caution
Do not connect a printer to this interface. Doing so could damage the printer.
12. Gate Output (Option 1D6 Only)
Outputs a signal that indicates the status of the gate when the 4395A is performing gate trigger
in EDGE mode. The signal is TTL-compatible; high indicates gate on, low indicates gate off.
13. External Trigger Input
Triggers a measurement sweep. The positive (or negative) edge of a signal in the low (or high
state) starts a measurement. The signal is TTL-compatible. To use this connector, set the trigger
mode to external using softkey functions.
14. Reference Oven Output (Option 1D5 Only)
Connects to the EXT REF INPUT connector when Option 1D5 is installed. Option 1D5 improves
the frequency accuracy and stability of the 4395A.
Front and Rear Panels 4-13
5
Preparations for Measurements
This chapter provides the each procedure needed to prepare for network , spectrum, and
impedance (with Option 010) measurements. The procedures are:
Selecting an appropriate connection of DUT
Presetting 4395A
If you are using the 4395A for the rst time, it is recommended to get started by reading
Chapter 1 through Chapter 3 of this manual.
Selecting an appropriate connection of DUT
For Network Measurement
Connections of DUT in the network measurement varies depending upon your measurement
parameters as described in this section.
Connecting DUT for Directional Transmission Characteristic Measurement
When you measure the transmission characteristic supplying a signal to your DUT from one
direction, connect the DUT to the analyzer with the power splitter and the cables as shown in
Figure 5-1.
You should manually change cabling when measuring the characteristic for reverse direction.
Figure 5-1. Connecting DUT for Directional Transmission Characteristic Measurement
Preparations for Measurements 5-1
Selecting an appropriate connection of DUT
Connecting DUT for Directional Transmission and Reection Characteristics
Measurement
When you measure the transmission and reection characteristics supplying a signal to your
DUT from one direction, connect the DUT to the analyzer with the transmission/reection test
set.
You should manually change cabling when measuring the characteristics for reverse direction.
Figure 5-2.
Connecting DUT for Directional Transmission and Reection Characteristics
Measurement
Connecting DUT for Bi-directional Transmission and Reection Characteristics
(Four S Parameters) Measurement
Bi-directional transmission and reection characteristics, or all four S parameters, can be
measured eectively with the S parameter set.
The device allows you to measure all the four parameters without changing cable connection
manually at each measurement.
5-2 Preparations for Measurements
Selecting an appropriate connection of DUT
Figure 5-3.
Connecting DUT for Bi-directional Transmission and Reection Characteristics (Four S
Parameters) Measurement
Connecting DUT for Transmission Characteristic Measurement When the Output
Signal is in a Circuit
If the output signal of DUT is in a circuit, use the active probe to capture a signal from the test
channel as shown in Figure 5-4.
Figure 5-4.
Connecting DUT for Transmission Characteristic Measurement When the Output Signal is
in a Circuit
Use the transmission/reection test set with the active probe, when measuring the reection
characteristic at the input lead simultaneously. See Figure 5-5.
Preparations for Measurements 5-3
Selecting an appropriate connection of DUT
Figure 5-5.
Connecting DUT for Transmission and Reection Characteristics Measurement When the
Output Signal is in a Circuit
5-4 Preparations for Measurements
Selecting an appropriate connection of DUT
Connecting DUT for Transmission Characteristic Measurement When the Input
and Output Signals are in a Circuit
If both of the input and output signals of DUT are in a circuit, attach the active probes to both
of the reference channel and the test channel, as shown in Figure 5-6.
Figure 5-6.
Connecting DUT for Transmission Characteristic Measurement When the Input and
Output Signals are in a Circuit
Preparations for Measurements 5-5
Selecting an appropriate connection of DUT
For Spectrum Measurement
Connections of DUT in the spectrum measurement varies depending upon how the
measurement signal can be obtained as described in this section.
Connecting DUT When Directly Measuring the Signal
When you measure a signal which is directly supplied from the DUT to 4395A, connect the
DUT as shown in Figure 5-7.
Figure 5-7. Connecting DUT When Directly Measuring the Signal
Connecting DUT When Measuring the Signal in a Circuit
Use the active probe to capture the measurement signal which is in a circuit as shown in
Figure 5-8.
5-6 Preparations for Measurements
Selecting an appropriate connection of DUT
Figure 5-8. Connecting DUT When Measuring the Signal in a Circuit
Preparations for Measurements 5-7
Selecting an appropriate connection of DUT
For Impedance Measurement (Option 010)
Connecting the Impedance Test Kit
In the impedance measurement, the 43961A Impedance Test Kit is required to connect your
DUT to the analyzer. See Figure 5-9.
1. Verify the 4395A is turned o.
2. Connect the N-cable to the RF OUT port of the analyzer.
3. Connect two connectors of the 43961A to the R and A ports of the 43961A.
4. Connect the other connector of the N-cable to the RF IN port of the 43961A.
5. Turn on the 4395A.
Note
Figure 5-9. Connecting the Impedance Test Kit
The connection between DUT and the analyzer is accomplished when a test
xture is mounted on the impedance test kit. Note that all the measurement
settings and calibrations should be completed before you mount the test xture.
Follow the steps described in Chapter 6 and Chapter 7.
5-8 Preparations for Measurements
Presetting 4395A
Presetting 4395A
Before starting measurement, press the green 4Preset5 key in the INSTRUMENT STATE block to
set the 4395A to the preset state.
For additional information about the preset state, see Appendix C.
Preparations for Measurements 5-9
6
Setting and Optimizing Measurement Conditions
This chapter provides following procedures for setting and optimizing measurement conditions:
Select the analyzer mode
Select the active channel
Set up the trigger system
Set the sweep conditions
Select the input port/measurement parameter
Select the measurement format
Select the display unit
Set the frequency range
Set the vertical scale
Set the IF/resolution/video bandwidth (IFBW/RBW/VBW)
Setting and Optimizing Measurement Conditions
6-1
Selecting the Active Channel
Selecting the Analyzer Mode
1. Press 4Meas5.
2. Press ANALYZER TYPE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Select one of the following analyzer modes:
Analyzer Mode
Softkey
Network Analyzer
Spectrum Analyzer
Impedance Analyzer1
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NETWORK ANALYZER
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
IMPEDANCE ANALYZER
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
1 Option 010 only.
Note
When you change the analyzer mode (operating mode), the analyzer is set to
the preset state. So, when you want to change the analyzer mode, you must
select it before you set up the other settings.
Note
In this manual, the following abbreviations are used:
NA mode: Network analyzer mode
SA mode: Spectrum analyzer mode
ZA mode: Impedance analyzer mode
Selecting the Active Channel
In the ACTIVE CHANNEL block, press 4Chan 15 (channel 1) or 4Chan 25 (channel 2) to select the
active channel.
The 4395A has two independent channels. You can assign a dierent set of measurement
conditions to each channel and switch between the two channels with just a single keystroke,
provided that you use both channels for the same analyzer mode. By switching between the
channels, you can eectively evaluate the DUT's characteristics under dierent measurement
conditions.
Note
Be sure to select the active channel before you set measurement conditions.
Once you have activated either channel, all the settings you make are
assigned to the active channel.
These two channels can only be assigned dierent measurement
conditions within the same analyzer mode. You cannot use them across
two dierent analyzer modes. For example, it is not possible to assign
network measurement conditions to one channel while assigning spectrum
measurement conditions to the other channel.
6-2 Setting and Optimizing Measurement Conditions
Dual Channel Display
Dual Channel Display
1. Press 4Display5.
2. Toggle DUAL CHAN on OFF to ON off .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press MORE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Select one of the following options:
Display Mode
Toggle
Split the screen into the two
channels
Merge the channels into one
screen
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SPLIT CHAN on OFF
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SPLIT CHAN ON off
Split the screen into the two channels
!
!
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
ON off
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
on OFF
Merge the channels into one screen
Figure 6-1. Dual Channel Display
Setting and Optimizing Measurement Conditions
6-3
Setting Up the Trigger System
Setting Up the Trigger System
This section provides procedures for setting the trigger system.
Setting up the trigger system
Using the external trigger
Setting Up the Trigger System
1. Press 4Trigger5.
2. Press TRIGGER: [ ] .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Select one of the following options:
Trigger Mode
Softkey
Internal trigger source
External trigger source1
Manual trigger
Gate trigger2
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FREE RUN
EXTERNAL
MANUAL
GATE [ ]
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
1 See \Using the External Trigger" that follows.
2 Option 1D6 and SA (spectrum analyzer) mode only. Chapter 8 describes how to use
this trigger mode.
Using the External Trigger
1. Connect the trigger source to the EXT TRIGGER connector on the rear panel of the 4395A.
2. Press 4Trigger5.
3. Press TRIGGER: [ ] .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Press EXTERNAL .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. Input a trigger signal to the analyzer.
The external trigger signal level must be TTL Level.
6-4 Setting and Optimizing Measurement Conditions
Setting Up the Trigger System
Figure 6-2. Location of EXT TRIGGER Connector
Setting the Trigger Signal Polarity
1. Press 4Trigger5.
2. Press TRIGGER: [ ] .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Toggle TRIG PLRTY POS neg to pos NEG to turn the trigger polarity to the negative logic.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Generating a Trigger Event on Each Measurement Point (NA, ZA Mode)
1. Press 4Trigger5.
2. Press TRIGGER: [ ] .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Select one of the following options:
Trigger Source
Softkey
Manual
External
Press MANUAL .
Press EXTERNAL .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Toggle TRIG EVENT [ON SWEEP] to [ON POINT] .
5. To generate a trigger event, press MANUAL (for manual) or input the external trigger signal
(for external).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Setting and Optimizing Measurement Conditions
6-5
Setting the Sweep Conditions
The sweep indicator (\"") moves to each point every time a trigger event is generated. You
can select this mode only after you have selected MANUAL or EXTERNAL as the trigger source,
or activated the bus trigger mode. For more information about the bus trigger mode, see the
Programming Manual.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Setting the Sweep Conditions
The 4395A controls the sweep process based on the following conditions:
Sweep mode
Sweep type
Sweep parameters
This section describes how to select the sweep mode and sweep type. For how to set the sweep
parameters, see \Setting the Frequency Range". For how to use the power sweep function, see
\Using the Power Sweep Function (NA, ZA Mode)".
In addition, the 4395A is capable of automatically controlling the sweep process in accordance
with a user-specied sweep list. For more information on the list sweep function, refer to
Chapter 9 of this manual.
Selecting the Sweep Mode
Select one of the following options
Sweep Mode
Keystrokes
Continuous
Single
Specied times
Press 4Trigger5, then choose CONTINUOUS .
Press 4Trigger5, then choose SINGLE .
Press 4Trigger5, choose NUMBER of GROUPS , enter
the number of times, and then press 4215.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Selecting the Sweep Type
1. Press 4Sweep5 and choose SWEEP TYPE MENU .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Select one of the following options:
Sweep Type
Softkey
Linear Frequency
Log Frequency1
List Frequency
Press LIN FREQ .
Press LOG FREQ .
Press LIST FREQ (See \Reducing Sweep
Time (Using List Sweep)" in Chapter 9).
Press POWER SWEEP . See \Using the
Power Sweep Function (NA, ZA Mode)"
that follows.
Power Sweep1
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
1 NA, ZA mode.
6-6 Setting and Optimizing Measurement Conditions
Selecting the Input Port/Measurement Parameter
Using the Power Sweep Function (NA, ZA Mode)
1. Press 4Source5 CW FREQ . Then enter the CW frequency.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Press 4Sweep5.
3. Press SWEEP TYPE MENU .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Press POWER SWEEP .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. Enter the start and stop power levels.
For example, to sweep from 05 dBm to +15 dBm, press 4Start5 405 455 4215, 4Stop5 415 455 4215.
Note
You can set the sweep power in increments of 0.1 dB.
Maximum power sweep range (start to stop) is 20 dB within range of 050
dBm to +15 dBm.
Selecting the Input Port/Measurement Parameter
This step provides following procedures:
To select the input port in NA mode
To select the input port in SA mode
To select the measurement parameter in ZA mode
To Select the Input Port in NA Mode
With the T/R Test Set
Press 4Meas5.
To measure
Type
Press
Reection
Transmission
A port/B port
Ratio
Ratio
Ratio
NNNNNNNNNNN
Reection
Transmission
Source
Absolute
Absolute
Absolute
A/R
B/R
A/B
NNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNN
MORE A
MORE B
MORE R
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNN
With the S-Parameter Test Set
Press 4Meas5.
Setting and Optimizing Measurement Conditions
6-7
Selecting the Input Port/Measurement Parameter
To measure
Direction
Press
Reection
Forward
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Transmission
Forward
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Transmission
Reverse
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Reection
Reverse
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
S-PARAMETERS
Refl:FWD S11 [A/R]
S-PARAMETERS
Trans:FWD S21 [B/R]
S-PARAMETERS
Trans:REV S12 [B/R]
S-PARAMETERS
Refl:REV S22 [A/R]
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To Select the Input Port in SA Mode
The 4395A has three input ports: R, A, and B. You can use any of these input ports for
spectrum measurements.
In the preset state, the 4395A uses the R input port for spectrum measurements. To explicitly
specify the input port, choose one of the following softkeys:
To select
Softkey
R input port
B input port
A input port
NNNNN
R
B
A
NNNNN
NNNNN
To Select the Measurement Parameter in ZA mode
6-8 Setting and Optimizing Measurement Conditions
Selecting the Measurement Format (NA,ZA Mode)
To measure
Press
Absolute magnitude value of
impedance
Phase value of impedance
Resistance value
Reactance value
Absolute magnitude value of
admittance
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Phase value of admittance
Conductance value
Susceptance value
Absolute magnitude value of
reection coecient
Phase value of reection
coecient
Real part of reection coecient
Imaginary part of reection
coecient
Parallel capacitance
IMPEDANCE: MAG(|Z|)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PHASE(z)
RESIST(R)
REACT(X)
MORE 1/5
ADMITTNCE: MAG(|Y|)
MORE 1/5 y
MORE 1/5 CONDUCT(G)
MORE 1/5 SUSCEPT(B)
MORE 1/5 MORE 2/5 MAG(|0|)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
MORE 1/5 MORE 2/5 PHASE(0 )
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
MORE 1/5 MORE 2/5 REAL(0x)
MORE 1/5 MORE 2/5 IMAG(0y)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
MORE 1/5 MORE 2/5 MORE 3/5
CAPCITNCE: PRL(Cp)
MORE 1/5 MORE 2/5 MORE 3/5
SER(Cs)
MORE 1/5 MORE 2/5 MORE 3/5
INDUCTNCE: PRL(Lp)
MORE 1/5 MORE 2/5 MORE 3/5
SER(Ls)
MORE 1/5 MORE 2/5 MORE 3/5
MORE 4/5 RESISTNCE: PRL(Rp)
MORE 1/5 MORE 2/5 MORE 3/5
MORE 4/5 SER(Rs)
MORE 1/5 MORE 2/5 MORE 3/5
MORE 4/5 D FACTOR: (D)
MORE 1/5 MORE 2/5 MORE 3/5
MORE 4/5 Q FACTOR: (Q)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Series capacitance
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Parallel inductance
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Series inductance
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Parallel resistance
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Series resistance
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Dissipation factor
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Quality factor
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Setting and Optimizing Measurement Conditions
6-9
Selecting the Measurement Format (NA,ZA Mode)
Selecting the Measurement Format (NA, ZA Mode)
Selecting the Measurement Format in NA Mode
1. Press 4Format5.
2. Select one of the following options:
Measurement Format
Softkey
LOG Magnitude
Phase
Group Delay1
Smith Chart2
Polar Chart
Liner Magnitude
Standing Wave Ratio (SWR)
Real Part Only
Imaginary Part Only
Admittance Chart
Phase Unit
(degree or radian)
Expanded Phase
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
LOG MAG
PHASE
DELAY
SMITH CHART
POLAR CHART
MORE LIN MAG
MORE SWR
MORE REAL
MORE IMAGINARY
MORE ADMITTANCE CHART
PHASE UNIT [ ]
( [DEG] or [RAD] )
EXP PHASE on OFF (toggle to ON off )
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
1 See \Group Delay" in Chapter 8.
2 See \Displaying the Trace as a Smith Chart (NA, ZA Mode)".
Displaying the Trace as a Smith Chart (NA, ZA Mode)
1. Press 4Format5.
2. Press SMITH CHART to display the trace as a smith chart.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3.
Use the marker to read a measured value, by pressing 4Marker5 and turning
6-10 Setting and Optimizing Measurement Conditions
.
Selecting the Measurement Format (NA,ZA Mode)
Note
Figure 6-3. Smith Chart
To display the Smith Chart in the ZA mode, set the measurement parameter to
MAG(|0|) in the measurement menu.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To change the marker readout format, use the following procedure:
How To Change Marker Readout Format (NA, ZA Mode)
1. Press 4Utility5 SMTH/POLAR MENU .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Select one of the following options by pressing the corresponding softkey:
Format
Softkey
Real and Imaginary
Linear Magnitude and Phase
Log Magnitude and Phase
Impedance
Admittance
SWR and Phase
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
REAL IMAG
LIN MAG PHASE
LOG MAG PHASE
R+jX
G+jB
SWR PHASE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Using the Impedance Conversion Function (NA Mode)
1. Press 4Meas5.
2. Press CONVERSION [ ] .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Select one of the following options:
Setting and Optimizing Measurement Conditions
6-11
Selecting the Measurement Format (NA,ZA Mode)
Convert To
Selected Port
Softkey
Impedance
Admittance
A/R, S11, S12
B/R, S21, S22
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
A/R, S11, S12
B/R, S21, S22
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Z:Refl
Z:Trans
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Y:Refl
Y:Trans
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The marker readout value is a linear impedance or admittance value even if the LOG MAG
format is selected.
To Display Phase beyond 6180 Degrees (NA, ZA Mode)
By default, the 4395A wraps the trace around at 6180 degree phases. However, there are
occasions when it is more convenient to display the trace without 6180 degree wrap-around. If
this is the case, you can use the Expanded Phase Format, which displays phases beyond 6180
degrees as shown in Figure 10-6.
To select the expanded phase format, follow these steps:
1. Press 4Format5.
2. Toggle EXP PHASE on OFF to ON off .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure 6-4. Expanded Phase Format
Using the Complex Plane Format (ZA Mode)
Displaying R-X in the Complex Plane
1. Press 4Meas5 and choose IMPEDANCE: MAG(|Z|) .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Press 4Format5 and choose COMPLEX PLANE to select the complex plane format.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press 4Scale Ref5 and choose AUTO SCALE to adjust the scale.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
In the complex plane, the measurement parameter is always a complex number even if you
select a scalar parameter (such as jZj).
6-12 Setting and Optimizing Measurement Conditions
Selecting the Display Unit (SA, ZA Mode)
Using the Marker
1. Press 4Marker5. Then move the marker using the rotary knob.
The marker displays the real and imaginary value of the marker position at the upper-right
corner of the grid as shown in Figure 6-5.
Figure 6-5. Marker Readout of Complex Plane
Adjusting the Scale Setting
1. Press 4Scale Ref5.
2. Change the following settings to adjust the scale of the complex plane:
Scale Setting
Keystrokes
Scale/Div
Choose SCALE/DIV . Then enter the scale per
division value.
Choose REFERENCE X VALUE . Then enter the
reference X value.
Choose REFERENCE Y VALUE . Then enter the
reference Y value.
Reference X Value
Reference Y Value
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The reference position of the complex plane is always at the center of the grid. You can adjust
the scale by changing the scale per division setting or the reference coordinate value.
Setting and Optimizing Measurement Conditions
6-13
Selecting the Display Unit (SA, ZA Mode)
Selecting the Display Unit
Selecting the Display Unit in SA Mode
1. Press 4Format5.
2. Select one of the following options by choosing the corresponding softkey:
Display Format
Unit
Softkey
Power
dBm
W
NNNNNNNNNNN
dBV
dBV
V
NNNNNNNNNNN
Voltage
dBm
WATT
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
dBV
dBuV
VOLT
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
You can change the unit of a displayed value anytime you want. The 4395A automatically
converts values into your specied format (unit) using the internally stored data. This
eliminates the need of re-sweeping. Also, the 4395A can convert values even when it is in the
held state.
In spectrum analyzer mode, marker readout unit can be selected apart from the display unit.
See \To Select Marker Readout Unit (SA Nide)" in Chapter 8 for details.
If you want to perform a noise measurement instead of a spectrum measurement, see
\Measuring the Noise Level" in Chapter 8.
Selecting the Phase Unit (NA, ZA Mode)
You can display the phase in either degrees or radians. To switch between the two units, follow
these steps:
1. Press 4Format5.
2. Do one of the following:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To switch from degrees to radians, toggle PHASE UNIT [DEG] to [RAD] .
To switch from radians to degrees, toggle PHASE UNIT [RAD] to [DEG] .
6-14 Setting and Optimizing Measurement Conditions
Setting the Frequency Range
Setting the Frequency Range
The 4395A has some useful features for setting the frequency range. This section provides the
following procedures that are related to setting the frequency range.
Setting the center frequency
Setting the marker position to center
Setting the maximum peak to center
Changing the center with the specied step size
Setting the frequency span
Narrowing the span setting (SA mode)
Setting the frequency range to full span
Setting the sweep parameters using 4Start5 and 4Stop5
Zooming to a part of the trace
Changing the zooming factor
Displaying a zoomed trace on the other channel
Zooming between the marker and the 1marker
Setting the Center Frequency
1. Press 4Center5 to activate the center frequency function.
2. Change the center frequency to place the target signal in the center of the grid by using the
following keys:
To
Use
Set directly
Change continuously
Change with 1-2-5 steps1
405
. . . 495 and units terminator keys
* +
4 5 4 5
1 You can change the step size of 4*5 4+5. See \Change the Center Frequency by the
Specied Step Size" in this section.
Setting the Marker Position to Center
1. Press 4Marker!5. A reverse-triangle shaped marker appears.
2. Place the marker on the position you want to set to the center by using the rotary knob.
3. Press MKR!CENTER .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Press 4Entry O5.
The above procedure causes the 4395A to immediately use the marker-pointed frequency as
the center frequency. If you are measuring an unknown signal, display the signal in full span
rst. Then move the signal to the center using this function.
Setting and Optimizing Measurement Conditions
6-15
Setting the Frequency Range
Press MKR!CENTER
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Move the marker
Figure 6-6. Marker to Center
6-16 Setting and Optimizing Measurement Conditions
Setting the Frequency Range
Setting the Maximum Peak to Center
1. Press 4Marker!5.
2. Press PEAK!CENTER .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press 4Entry O5.
This function changes the center frequency to display the maximum peak at the center of the
grid.
Note
A large frequency span may prevent the peak from appearing accurately at the
center of the grid. If this is the case, press PEAK!CENTER again so that the
peak is redisplayed in the middle.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Display the peak
at the center of the screen
Figure 6-7. Peak to Center
Change the Center Frequency by the Specied Step Size
1. Do one of the following:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Choose 4Center5 CENTER STEP SIZE . Then directly enter your desired step size using
405 . . . 495 and the units terminator keys.
Press 4Marker5 and move the marker to the point you want to use as the step size frequency.
Then choose 4Center5 MKR!CNTR STEP .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Toggle STEP SIZE AUTO man to auto MAN .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press 4Center5.
4. Press 4*5 to increment (or 4+5 to decrement) the center frequency setting by the specied
step size.
This function is useful to display peaks that have a constant interval (such as harmonics) one
after another. The following is an example of using this function to display harmonics .
Setting and Optimizing Measurement Conditions
6-17
Setting the Frequency Range
Example: Displaying Harmonics (SA Mode)
To display the fundamental and harmonics of a 100 MHz signal, follow these steps:
1. Press 4Center5 100 4M/5. Then set the span to display the fundamental at the center of the
grid.
2. Press 4Span5 150 4M/5.
3. Press 4Search5 and toggle SEARCH TRK on OFF to ON off to enable the search track
function.
4. Choose SEARCH: PEAK to move the marker on the fundamental.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. Press 4Center5 and choose MKR!CNTR STEP . Enter 100 MHz (so the step size matches the
fundamental frequency).
6. Toggle STEP SIZE AUTO man to auto MAN to enable the specied step size.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
7. Press 4Center5. Then press 4*5 to display the second harmonic.
8. To display higher order harmonics, press 4*5 as required.
The marker searches for the next harmonic each time you change the center frequency using
the search track function.
Fundamental
Second Harmonics
Figure 6-8. Displaying Harmonics
6-18 Setting and Optimizing Measurement Conditions
Setting the Frequency Range
Setting the Frequency Span
1. Press 4Span5.
2. Enter the frequency span to display the target peak in the optimum grid setting.
To
Use
Set directly
Change continuously
Change with 1-2-5 steps
405
. . . 495 and units terminator keys
* +
4 5 4 5
Setting and Optimizing Measurement Conditions
6-19
Setting the Frequency Range
Narrowing the Span Setting (SA Mode)
1. Press 4Search5.
2. Choose SEARCH: PEAK to place the marker on the carrier.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Toggle SIGNAL TRK on OFF to ON off .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Narrow the span setting. See the \Setting the Frequency Span" procedure.
An extremely small span setting may cause the test signal to disappear from display. This
happens because of the dierence between the displayed and actual frequencies. For example,
when the span setting is set to full span, the displayed test signal frequency has an error of
approximately 600 kHz because of its resolution (500 MHz/800). A span setting smaller than the
error frequency can cause the test signal to disappear from the screen depending on the error
range.
The signal track function allows you to avoid this situation. When signal track is enabled,
the analyzer narrows the span setting while centering the test signal as you narrow the span
setting. Therefore, the test signal is placed at the center of the grid.
The following gure shows an example of narrowing the span with the signal track function.
The actual signal frequency is 250.100025 MHz. When the center is xed and the span is 10
kHz, the signal is out of display. The signal track function tracks the signal by changing the
center frequency, and keeps displaying the signal at the center of the display.
Span 500MHz
Span 10kHz
Figure 6-9. Narrowing Span with Signal Track
Setting the Frequency Range to Full Span.
1. Press 4Span5.
2. Press FULL SPAN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
This function is useful when you want to get a general view of the spectrum after you have
obtained the detailed view of a specic signal.
6-20 Setting and Optimizing Measurement Conditions
Setting the Frequency Range
Setting the Sweep Parameters Using 4Start5 and 4Stop5
You can set the sweep parameters using 4Start5 and 4Stop5 instead of 4Center5 and 4Span5:
1. Press 4Start5 to put the 4395A into a mode where it accepts your entered value as the
frequency at which to start the sweep process.
2. Set the start frequency using the following keys:
To
Use
Set directly
405
Change continuously
Change with 1-2-5 steps
4 5 4 5
. . . 495 and units terminator
keys
* +
3. Press 4Stop5 to put the 4395A into a mode where it accepts your entered value as the
frequency at which to stop the sweep process.
4. Set the stop frequency using the keys listed in the previous table.
Figure 6-10. Setting the Sweep Parameters
Setting and Optimizing Measurement Conditions
6-21
Setting the Frequency Range
Zooming To a Part of the Trace
1. Move the marker to the point where you want to observe the signal details.
2. Press 4Marker!5.
3. Press MKR ZOOM .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. To zoom more, press MKR ZOOM again.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Change the Zooming Factor.
1. Press 4Marker!5 ZOOMING APERTURE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Enter your desired zooming aperture as a percentage of the span.
If you want to obtain a 20-fold zoom, for example, enter 5% for as the zooming factor.
Displaying a Zoomed Trace on the Other Channel.
1. Press 4Display5 and toggle DUAL CHAN on OFF to ON off to display two channels on the LCD.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Move the marker to the point where you want to observe the signal details.
3. Press 4Marker!5.
4. Choose MKR!XCH MENU .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. Choose MKR XCH ZOOM .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The other channel displays the zoomed trace.
Figure 6-11. Zooming the Trace
6-22 Setting and Optimizing Measurement Conditions
Adjusting the Scale and Reference
Adjusting the Scale and Reference
The 4395A provides you with several means to adjust the scale and reference of the trace so
that the entire trace is displayed within the grid area. For example, when the trace is out of
the grid or is too at to see the required characteristics, you can adjust the trace settings by
adjusting the reference or the scale.
Automatically adjusting the scale and reference
Manually adjusting the scale and reference
Setting the reference
Changing the scale per division
Automatically Adjusting the Scale and Reference (NA, ZA Mode)
1. Press 4Scale Ref5.
2. Press AUTO SCALE to t the trace within the grid.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The scale and reference settings are automatically adjusted to provide an optimum trace
display.
Before Auto Scale
After Auto Scale
Figure 6-12. Autoscale Function
Manually Adjusting the Scale and Reference (NA, ZA Mode)
If you want to manually adjust the scale and reference settings, the following functions are
available:
To change the scale per division setting, press SCALE/DIV .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To change the reference position that is shown as \ 7", use REFERENCE POSITION and 4*5 4+5
keys.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To change the reference value, use REFERENCE VALUE .
If you are displaying a data trace and a memory trace together, you need to consider whether
you want to change the scale for one or both traces. You can change the traces as follows:
Setting and Optimizing Measurement Conditions
6-23
Adjusting the Scale and Reference
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
If you want to change the scale setting for the data trace only, set SCALE FOR [DATA] and
D&M SCALE [UNCOUPLE] under 4Scale Ref5 key.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
If you want to change the scale setting for the memory trace only, set SCALE FOR [MEMORY]
and D&M SCALE [UNCOUPLE] .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
If you want to change the scale settings for the both traces, set D&M SCALE [COUPLE] .
Setting the Reference (SA Mode)
Using the Numeric Keys.
1. Press 4Scale Ref5.
2. Choose REFERENCE VALUE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To
Use
or 4+5
Move trace upward
Move trace downward
Set reference value directly
or 4*5
405 . . . 495 and unit keys
Using the Marker.
1. Press 4Search5 and choose SEARCH: PEAK to move the marker to the peak.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Press 4Scale Ref5.
3. Choose MKR!REFERENCE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Move the marker to the top of the peak
Press 4Scale Ref5 MKR!REFERENCE
Figure 6-13. Marker to Reference
6-24 Setting and Optimizing Measurement Conditions
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Adjusting the Scale and Reference
Changing the Scale per Division (SA Mode)
1. Set the reference level to the peak level of the target signal. See the \Using the Marker"
procedure.
2. Press 4Scale Ref5.
3. Choose SCALE/DIV .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Change the scale/division setting to display additional details using the following keys:
To
Use
Change continuously
Change by 1-2-5 steps
Set Scale/Div directly
4 5 4 5
+ *
405
. . . 495 and unit keys
This function can be used to display a small peak on a full grid.
Scale 10 dB/Div
Scale 3 dB/Div
Figure 6-14. Changing Scale/Div.
Setting and Optimizing Measurement Conditions
6-25
Setting the IF/Resolution/Video Bandwidth
Setting the IF/Resolution/Video Bandwidth
Setting the IF Bandwidth (NA, ZA Mode)
1. Press 4Bw/Avg5.
2. Choose IF BW .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press 4*5 or 4+5, or enter an IF bandwidth value directly from the numeric keypad.
A smaller IF bandwidth increases the dynamic range but slows down the sweep process.
IF Bandwidth 30 kHz
IF Bandwidth 100 Hz
Figure 6-15. Setting IF Bandwidth (IFBW)
Note
The IF bandwidth should be set equal to or less than 1/5 of the measurement
frequency.
When making impedance measurements with the 43961A, you must set the
IF bandwidth equal to or less than 300 Hz and set the averaging factor equal
to or greater than 8.
Setting the IF Bandwidth to Auto Mode
If the sweep type is log frequency, the IF bandwidth can be set to auto mode.
1. Press 4Bw/Avg5.
2. Toggle IF BW auto MAN to AUTO man .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
In auto mode, the IF bandwidth is automatically set equal to or less than 1/5 of each
measurement frequency. If you want to set an upper limit of IF bandwidth in auto mode, press
AUTO IFBW LIMIT and enter the upper limit with entry keys.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6-26 Setting and Optimizing Measurement Conditions
Setting the IF/Resolution/Video Bandwidth
Setting the Resolution Bandwidths (SA Mode)
Adjusting the RBW can improve the resolution of the frequency and lower the displayed noise
oor.
1. Press 4Bw/Avg5.
2. Choose RES BW .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Change the RBW setting using 4*5, 4+5, or the
.
Measuring two or more mutually adjusting signals requires special considerations on the width
of the 4395A's internal IF lter. If the internal IF lter is wider than the dierence between
the signals, the analyzer cannot separate them. To avoid this problem, you must provide a
resolution bandwidth (RBW) small enough for the 4395A to identify the respective signals.
A small RBW can reduce the noise power per display point, thereby lowering the displayed
noise oor and making it possible to display lower level signals.
For example, the trace of a 400 Hz amplitude modulated signal conceals sidebands in the
skirt of the carrier trace when the RBW is 300 Hz. In this case, you can split the carrier and
sidebands completely and lower the displayed noise oor by setting the RBW to 10 Hz.
RBW 300 Hz
RBW 10 Hz
Figure 6-16. Setting Resolution Bandwidth (RBW)
Setting the Resolution Bandwidth to Auto Mode
You can automatically set the resolution bandwidth in accordance with the percentage of the
sweep span.
1. Press 4Bw/Avg5.
2. Press RBW/SPAN RATIO and enter the percentage of the sweep span with entry keys.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Toggle to AUTO man .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Setting and Optimizing Measurement Conditions
6-27
Setting the IF/Resolution/Video Bandwidth
Setting the Video Bandwidth (SA Mode)
1. Press 4Bw/Avg5.
2. Choose VIDEO BW .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Set the video bandwidth using the following keys:
To
Use
Lower noise level
4 5,
Shorten sweep time
Set bandwidth directly
405
+ or
4*5, or
. . . 495 and unit keys
When the target signal and the noise are hard to distinguish because of noise variation, narrow
the video bandwidth. This reduces the noise variations and makes the signal clearly visible.
Note, however, that reducing the video bandwidth slows down the sweep process.
You can set the VBW to a value that is 1/1, 1/3, 1/10, 1/30, 1/100, or 1/300 of the RBW setting
currently in eect.
Resetting the Video Bandwidth.
1. Press 4Bw/Avg5 VIDEO BW .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Enter the same value as the RBW setting.
Video BW 30 kHz
Video BW 300 Hz
Figure 6-17. Setting Video Bandwidth (VBW)
6-28 Setting and Optimizing Measurement Conditions
7
Calibration
This chapter describes calibration procedures required for measurement in the network
analyzer mode and the impedance analyzer mode. For details about calibration procedures, see
Appendix A.
In the spectrum analyzer mode, the 4395A requires no calibration procedure in the
measurement.
Note
When performing the 75
measurement in the spectrum analyzer mode, see
Chapter 2 to set the 4395A properly.
Calibration Required for the Network Analyzer Mode
This section provide procedures for performing calibration. The calibration eliminates the
errors and improves the measurement accuracy. The analyzer has six dierent methods of
calibration. You can select the method that ts your measurement requirement by reading \To
Select an Appropriate Calibration Method" procedure. This section also contains a procedure to
customize a calibration kit.
Selecting an appropriate calibration method
Performing a response calibration
Performing a response & isolation calibration
Performing an S11 1-port calibration
Performing an S22 1-port calibration
Performing a full 2-port calibration
Performing a 1-path 2-port calibration
Selecting the calibration kit
Customizing the user dened calibration kit
To Select an Appropriate Calibration Method
The analyzer has six calibration methods. You can choose the appropriate calibration method to
t your measurement by using Table 7-1.
Calibration 7-1
Calibration Required for the Network Analyzer Mode
Table 7-1. Calibration Method Selection Table
Measurement Type
Calibration Complexity
Method
Transmission or reection measurement
when the highest accuracy is not required.
Response
Transmission of high insertion loss devices Response &
or reection of high return loss devices. Not isolation
as accurate as 1-port or 2-port calibration.
See
simple
\Performing a Response
Calibration"
simple
\To Perform a Response
& Isolation Calibration"
Reection of any one-port device or well
terminated two-port device.
S11 1-port
slightly
complex
\Performing an S11
1-Port Calibration"
Reection of any one-port device or well
terminated two-port device.
S22 1-port
slightly
complex
\Performing an S22
1-Port Calibration"
Full 2-port
Transmission or reection of highest
accuracy for two-port devices. S-parameter
Test Set is required.
complex
\Performing a Full
2-Port Calibration"
One-path
Transmission or reection of highest
accuracy for two-port devices. (Reverse test 2-port
device between forward and reverse
measurements.)
complex
\Performing a 1-Path
2-Port Calibration"
Performing a Response Calibration
1. Press 4Cal5 CALIBRATE MENU RESPONSE to display the response calibration menu.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Connect one of following standards. Then press the corresponding key.
Measurement Type
Connect Standard Press
Transmission
Measurement
THRU
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Reection
Measurement
OPEN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SHORT
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
THRU
OPEN
SHORT
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press DONE: RESPONSE .
Performing a Response & Isolation Calibration
1. Press 4Cal5 CALIBRATE MENU RESPONSE & ISOL'N to display the response and isolation
calibration menu.
2. Press RESPONSE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. See 2 of the \Performing a Response Calibration" procedure.
4. Press DONE: RESPONSE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. Connect isolation standard (LOAD).
7-2 Calibration
Calibration Required for the Network Analyzer Mode
6. Press ISOL'N .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
7. Press DONE RESP ISOL'N CAL .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Calibration 7-3
Calibration Required for the Network Analyzer Mode
Performing an S11 1-Port Calibration
Step 1: Opening the S-11 1-Port Calibration Menu
1. Press 4Cal5.
2. Select the proper calibration kit. If the connector type or calibration kit name shown in the
CAL KIT softkey label is not the same as the calibration you are going to use, follow the
\Selecting the Calibration Kit" procedure.
3. Press CALIBRATE MENU S11 1-PORT .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Step 2: Measuring the OPEN
1. Connect OPEN standard to port 1.
2. Press (S11): OPEN (for the 7 mm or 3.5 mm cal kit) or (S11): OPENS (for the type-N cal
kit).
When the 7 mm or 3.5 mm calibration kit is selected, the message \WAIT - MEASURING CAL
STANDARD" is displayed while the OPEN data is measured. The softkey label OPEN is then
underlined. Skip to step 3.
3. If the type-N calibration kit is selected, do the following:
a. Press OPEN [M] (for a male port connector) or press OPEN [F] (for a female port
connector).
The OPEN data is measured and the softkey label is then underlined.
b. Press DONE: OPENS .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Step 3: Measuring the SHORT
1. Disconnect the OPEN. Then connect a SHORT standard to port 1.
2. Press SHORT (for the 7 mm or 3.5 mm calibration kit) or SHORTS (for the type-N calibration
kit).
When the 7 mm or 3.5 mm calibration kit is selected, the SHORT data is measured and the
softkey label is underlined.
3. If the type-N calibration kit is selected, do the following:
a. Press SHORT [M] (for a male port connector) or press SHORT [F] (for a female port
connector).
The SHORT data is measured and the softkey label is then underlined.
b. Press DONE: SHORTS .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Step 4: Measuring the LOAD
1. Disconnect the SHORT, and connect an impedance-matched LOAD (usually 50 or 75 ) at
port 1.
2. Press LOAD . Then wait the LOAD is measured and the LOAD softkey is underlined.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
7-4 Calibration
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Calibration Required for the Network Analyzer Mode
Step 5: Completing the Calibration
1. Press DONE 1-PORT CAL to complete the calibration.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The 4395A calculates the error coecients, and then redisplays the correction menu with a
CORRECTION ON off label. A corrected S11 trace is displayed, and \Cor" appears at the left
side of the screen.
If you press DONE without measuring all the required standards, the message \CAUTION:
ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED" is displayed.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Performing an S22 1-Port Calibration
This calibration is similar to the S11 1-port calibration except that S22 is selected automatically.
It is used only with an S-parameter test set.
For S-parameter measurements in the reverse direction with a transmission/reection test kit,
use the S11 1-port or 1-path 2-port calibration and reverse the DUT between measurement
sweeps.
Calibration 7-5
Calibration Required for the Network Analyzer Mode
Performing a Full 2-Port Calibration
Step 1: Opening the Full 2-Port Calibration Menu
1. Press 4Cal5.
2. Select the proper calibration kit. If the connector type or calibration kit name shown in the
CAL KIT softkey label is not the same as the calibration kit to be used, see the \Selecting
the Calibration Kit" procedure.
3. Press CALIBRATE MENU FULL 2-PORT REFLECT'N .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Step 2: Measuring the Reection
1. Connect a shielded OPEN to port 1.
2. Press (S11): OPEN (for the 7 mm or 3.5 mm calibration kit) or (S11): OPENS (for the
type-N calibration kit).
When the 7 mm or 3.5 mm calibration kit is selected in step 1, the OPEN data is measured
and the softkey label OPEN is underlined.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. If the type-N calibration kit is selected, do the following:
a. Press OPEN [M] (for a male port connector) or press OPEN [F] (for a female port
connector).
The OPEN data is measured. The softkey label is then underlined.
b. Press DONE: OPENS .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Disconnect the OPEN and connect the SHORT to port 1.
5. Press (S11): SHORT (for the 7 mm or 3.5 mm calibration kit) or (S11): SHORTS (for the
type-N calibration kit).
When the 7 mm or 3.5 mm calibration kit is selected, the SHORT data is measured and the
softkey label SHORT is underlined.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6. If the type-N calibration kit is selected, do the following:
a. Press SHORT [M] (for a male port connector) or press SHORT [F] (for a female port
connector).
The SHORT data is measured and the softkey label is then underlined.
b. Press DONE: SHORTS
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
7. Disconnect the SHORT and connect an impedance-matched LOAD (usually 50 or 75 ) at
port 1.
8. Press (S11): LOAD . Then conrm the LOAD softkey label is underlined.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
9. Repeat the OPEN-SHORT-LOAD measurements described above, connecting the devices in
turn to port 2 and using the (S22) softkeys.
10. Press REFLECT'N DONE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The reection calibration coecients are computed and stored. The two-port calibration menu
is displayed (with the REFLECT'N softkey underlined).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
7-6 Calibration
Calibration Required for the Network Analyzer Mode
Step 3: Measuring the Transmission
1. Press TRANSMISSION .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Connect a THRU connection between port 1 and port 2 at the points where the test device is
connected.
3. When the trace settles, press FWD. TRANS. THRU . Then wait the S21 frequency response is
measured and the softkey label is underlined.
4. Press FWD. MATCH THRU . Then wait the S11 load match is measured and the softkey label is
underlined.
5. Press REV. TRANS. THRU . Then wait the S12 frequency response is measured and the
softkey label is underlined.
6. Press REV. MATCH THRU . Then wait the S22 load match is measured and the softkey label is
underlined.
7. Press TRANS. DONE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The transmission coecients are computed and stored. The two-port calibration menu is
displayed (with the TRANSMISSION softkey underlined).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Step 4: Measuring the Isolation
1. If correction for isolation is not required, press ISOLATION OMIT ISOLATION
ISOLATION DONE . Then skip to step 5.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. If correction for isolation is required, connect impedance-matched LOADs to port 1 and port
2.
3. Press FWD ISOL'N ISOL'N STD . Then wait the S21 isolation is measured and the softkey
label is underlined.
4. Press REV ISOL'N ISOL'N STD . Then wait the S12 isolation is measured and the softkey
label is underlined.
5. Press ISOLATION DONE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The isolation error coecients are stored. The two-port calibration menu is displayed (with the
ISOLATION softkey underlined).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Step 5: Completing the Calibration
1. Press DONE: 2-PORT CAL to complete the calibration.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The error coecients are computed and stored. The correction menu is displayed (with
CORRECTION ON off ). A corrected trace is displayed. The notation \C2" at the left of the
screen indicates that two-port error correction is ON.
Now the test device can be connected and measured. Save the calibration data on the built-in
disk drive.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Calibration 7-7
Calibration Required for the Network Analyzer Mode
Performing a 1-Path 2-Port Calibration
Step 1: Opening the 1-Path 2-Port Calibration Menu
1. Press 4Cal5.
2. Select the proper calibration kit. If the connector type or calibration kit name shown in the
CAL KIT softkey label is not the same as the calibration kit to be used, see the \Selecting
the Calibration Kit" procedure.
3. Press CALIBRATE MENU ONE-PATH 2-PORT REFLECT'N .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Step 2: Measuring the Reection
1. Connect a shielded OPEN to the test port.
2. Press (S11): OPEN (for the 7 mm calibration kit) or (S11): OPENS (for the type-N
calibration kit).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The OPEN data is measured, and the softkey label OPEN is underlined.
3. If the type-N calibration kit is selected, do the following:
a. Press OPEN [M] (for a male port connector) or press OPEN [F] (for a female port
connector).
The OPEN data is measured and the softkey label is then underlined.
b. Press DONE: OPENS .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Disconnect the OPEN and connect a SHORT to the test port.
5. Press SHORT (for the 7 mm or 3.5 mm calibration kit) or SHORTS (for the type-N calibration
kit).
When the 7 mm or 3.5 mm calibration kit is selected, the SHORT data is measured and the
softkey label SHORT is underlined.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6. If the type-N calibration kit is selected, do the following:
a. Press SHORT [M] (for a male port connector) or press SHORT [F] (for a female port
connector).
The SHORT data is measured and the softkey label is then underlined.
b. Press DONE: SHORTS .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
7. Disconnect the SHORT and connect an impedance-matched LOAD (50 or 75 ) to the test
port.
8. Press LOAD . Then wait the LOAD is measured and the softkey label LOAD is underlined.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
9. Press REFLECT'N DONE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The reection calibration coecients are computed and stored. The two-port calibration menu
is displayed (with the REFLECT'N softkey underlined).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
7-8 Calibration
Calibration Required for the Network Analyzer Mode
Step 3: Measuring the Transmission
1. Connect a THRU between the test port and the return cable to the analyzer (connect to the
points at which the test device is connected).
2. Press TRANSMISSION .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press FWD. TRANS. THRU . Then wait the S21 frequency response is measured and the
softkey label is underlined.
4. Press FWD. MATCH THRU . Then wait the S11 load match is measured and the softkey label is
underlined.
5. Press TRANS. DONE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The transmission coecients are computed and stored. The two-port calibration menu is
displayed (with the TRANSMISSION softkey underlined).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Step 4: Measuring the Isolation
1. If correction for isolation is not required, press ISOLATION OMIT ISOLATION
ISOLATION DONE . Skip to step 5.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. If correction for isolation is required, connect impedance-matched LOADs to the test port
and the return port.
3. Press FWD ISOL'N ISOL'N STD . Then wait the S21 isolation is measured and the softkey
label is underlined.
4. Press ISOLATION DONE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The isolation error coecients are stored. The two-port calibration menu is displayed (with the
ISOLATION softkey underlined).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Step 5: Completing the Calibration
1. Press DONE 2-PORT CAL to complete the calibration.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The error coecients are computed and stored. The correction menu is displayed with
CORRECTION ON off . A corrected trace is displayed. The notation \C2" at the left of the
screen indicates that 2-port error correction is ON.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Step 6: Performing the Measurement
1. Connect the test device in the reverse direction. Then press PRESS to CONTINUE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Reconnect the test device in the forward direction. Then press PRESS to CONTINUE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Now the error corrected trace is displayed. If you measure the other test device, press 4Trigger5
MEASUREMENT RESTART . Then perform the procedure of step 6.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Save the calibration data on a oppy disk or memory disk.
For additional information about calibration, see Appendix A.
Calibration 7-9
Calibration Required for the Network Analyzer Mode
Selecting the Calibration Kit
1. Press 4Cal5.
2. Press CAL KIT [ ] .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Select one of the following options by pressing the corresponding key:
Calibration Kit
Softkey
7 mm calibration kit
3.5 mm calibration kit
50 N type
75 N type
User dened calibration kit
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL KIT: 7mm
3.5mm
N 50
N 75
USER KIT
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Customizing the User Dened Calibration Kit
Dening the Standard Denition
Step 1: Preparation.
1. Prepare the \Standard Denitions" table of the standard kit you want to use.
Table 7-2 is an example of a standard denition table.
Table 7-2. Example of the Standard Denitions
STANDARD
C0
NO. TYPE 210-15 F
1
SHORT
2
OPEN
3
LOAD
4
OFFSET
FREQ. (GHz)
C1
C2210-36 C3210-45 FIXED OR
COAX or
STANDARD
-27
210 F F/Hz
F/Hz
SLIDING DELAY LOSS Z0 MIN. MAX. WAVEGUIDE
LABEL
ps
M
/s 0
700
50
0
999
COAX
SHORT (M)
0
700
50
0
999
COAX
OPEN (M)
0
700
50
0
999
COAX
BROADBAND
DELAY/
THRU
0
700
50
0
999
COAX
THRU
7
SHORT
17.544
700
50
0
999
COAX
SHORT (F)
8
OPEN
17.544
700
50
0
999
COAX
OPEN (F)
108
55
130
0
FIXED
5
6
62
17
28
0
Step 2: Opening the Dene Standard Menu.
1. Press 4Cal5.
2. Press CAL KIT [ ] .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press MODIFY [ ] .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Press DEFINE STANDARD .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. Select standard number.
7-10 Calibration
Calibration Required for the Network Analyzer Mode
6. Select standard type.
If you did not select standard type as OPEN in step 2, skip to step 4.
Step 3: Entering C Parameters.
1. Press C0 . Then enter C0 (210-15 F).
NNNNNNNN
2. Press C1 . Then enter C1 (210-27 F/Hz).
NNNNNNNN
3. Press C2 . Then enter C2 (210-36 F/Hz2 ).
NNNNNNNN
Step 4: Entering OFFSET Parameters.
1. Press SPECIFY OFFSET .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Press OFFSET DELAY . Then enter the oset delay value.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Press OFFSET LOSS . Then enter the oset loss value.
Press OFFSET Z0 . Then enter Z0 .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Press STD OFFSET DONE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Step 5: Entering a Standard Class Label.
1. Press LABEL STD .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Enter a standard label (up to 10 characters).
3. Press DONE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Step 6: Completing the Denition of a Calibration Kit.
1. Press STD DONE (DEFINED) .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Press KIT DONE (MODIFIED) .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Calibration 7-11
Calibration Required for the Network Analyzer Mode
Dening a Class Assignment
Step 1: Preparing for the Class Assignment.
1. Prepare the standard class assignment table for your calibration kit.
Table 7-3. Example: Standard Class Assignment of the 85032B
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
STANDARD
CLASS LABEL
S11 A
2
8
OPENS
S11 B
1
7
SHORTS
S11 C
3
S22 A
2
8
OPENS
S22 B
1
7
SHORTS
S22 C
3
LOAD
Forward Transmission
4
Fwd. Trans Thru
Reverse Transmission
4
Rev. Trans Thru
Forward Match
4
Fwd. Match Thru
Reverse Match
4
Rev. Match Thru
Response
1
7
2
8
4
RESPONSE
Response & Isolation
1
7
2
8
4
Response & Isol'n
LOAD
Step 2: Specifying the Standard Class.
1. Press SPECIFY CLASS .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Select standard class.
To Select
Press
S11 A
S11 B
S11 C
S22 A
S22 B
S22 C
Forward Transmission
Reverse Transmission
Forward Match
Reverse Match
Response
Response & Isolation
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SPECIFY: S11A
S11B
S11C
SPECIFY: S22A
S22B
S22C
MORE SPECIFY: FWD. TRANS.
MORE REV.TRANS.
MORE FWD. MATCH
MORE REV.MATCH
MORE RESPONSE
MORE RESPONSE & ISOL'N
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Enter the standard number from A to G.
4. Press CLASS DONE (SPEC'D) .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
7-12 Calibration
Calibration Required for the Network Analyzer Mode
Step 3: Creating the Standard Class Label.
1. Press LABEL CLASS to label the standard class.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Select the standard class.
See 2 of Step 2.
3. Enter or modify the correspondent standard class label.
4. Press LABEL DONE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Labeling and Saving Calibration Kit.
1. Press LABEL KIT .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Enter label.
3. Press DONE KIT DONE (MODIFIED) .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Press CAL KIT [ ] SAVE USER KIT USER KIT .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. Press RETURN .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Once you have dened your own calibration kit, you can verify the denition using the copy
function that lists standard parameters and class assignment.
Verifying the Denition of the User-Dened Calibration Kit.
1. Press 4Cal5 CAL KIT [ ] USER KIT to specify the calibration kit as a user-dened kit.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Press 4Copy5 MORE CAL KIT DEFINITION .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To display the standard parameters dened, press STANDARD DEFINITON . Then press the
softkey whose label corresponds to the standard number if you want to list the dened
parameters.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To display the dened class assignment, press CLASS ASSIGNMENT .
3. To make a hardcopy, press PRINT [STANDARD] .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. To return to the normal display, press RESTORE DISPLAY .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Calibration 7-13
Calibration Required for the Impedance Analyzer Mode
Calibration Required for the Impedance Analyzer Mode
This section provide procedures for performing the calibration when measuring in the
impedance analyzer mode. This section also covers how to customize the user dened
calibration kit.
OPEN/SHORT/LOAD Calibration
In the impedance analyzer mode, 4395A should be calibrated with the 43961A impedance
test kit attached. Calibration denes the measurement accuracy at the OUTPUT port on
the impedance test kit. After calibration, the analyzer can measure within its specied
measurement accuracy.
The calibration is performed in terms of the three items:
OPEN (using 0 S termination)
SHORT (using 0 termination)
LOAD (using 50 termination)
Note
You must use the calibration kit that is furnished to the 43961A for the
standard calibration kit.
Calibration Procedure
Follow the steps below to perform the OPEN/SHORT/LOAD calibrations.
1. Press 4Cal5.
2. Press CALIBRATE MENU .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Connect the 0 S termination to the OUTPUT port.
4. Press OPEN .
After an open calibration sequence is completed, the OPEN softkey label is underlined.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. Disconnect the 0 S termination, then connect the 0 termination to the OUTPUT port.
6. Press SHORT .
After a short calibration sequence is completed, the SHORT softkey label is underlined.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
7. Disconnect the 0 termination, then connect the 50 termination.
8. Press LOAD .
After a load calibration sequence is completed, the LOAD softkey label is underlined.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
9. Press DONE: CAL .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
10. Verify the \Cor" notation is displayed on the left of the screen.
7-14 Calibration
Calibration Required for the Impedance Analyzer Mode
Note
Figure 7-1. Connecting Calibration Standards
The OUTPUT port of the impedance test kit and the calibration standards have
APC-7 connectors. The APC-7 connector is very sensitive to damage and dirt.
You need to do the following when handling and storing APC-7 connectors:
Keep the connectors clean.
Do not touch the mating plane surfaces.
Do not set the connectors contact-end down.
Before storing, extend the sleeve or connector nut.
Use end caps over the mating plane surfaces.
Never store connectors loose in a box or a drawer.
Connecting the Test Fixture
To connect the test xture to the impedance test kit, see the applicable test xture manual for
instructions. The following is a general procedure:
1. Turn the APC-7 connector of the impedance test kit OUTPUT port.
2. Verify that the connector sleeve is retracted fully.
3. Set the mounting posts of the test station into the twin locating holes at the corner of the
test xture.
4. Connect the connector on the underside of the test xture to the OUTPUT port of the
impedance test kit.
Calibration 7-15
Calibration Required for the Impedance Analyzer Mode
Figure 7-2. Connecting Test Fixture
7-16 Calibration
Calibration Required for the Impedance Analyzer Mode
Setting the Electrical Length of the Test Fixture
After connecting the test xture, you need to enter the extended electrical length of the
xture. This is required to eliminate a phase shift error caused by the extended electrical
length.
The analyzer has electrical length data for some xtures as preset data.
1. Press 4Meas5.
2. Press FIXTURE SELECT FIXTURE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Select the xture model number that you are using.
4. Press RETURN .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. Verify that \Del" notation appears on the left side of the display.
If your xture is not listed on the softkey label in the xture selection menu, use the user
xture setting menu. (See \Setting the User Dened Fixture ".)
Setting the User Dened Fixture
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Selecting FIXTURE [NONE] SELECT FIXTURE under 4Meas5 displays the list containing Agilent
xtures. To use a xture that is not listed in the xture list, perform the following procedure:
1. Determine the following parameters before dening the user xture:
Port Extension
The equivalent electrical length of the xture [m].
Label
The xture identication that is displayed in the softkey label.
2. Press 4Meas5 FIXTURE [NONE] MODIFY [NONE] to display the user xture setting menu.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press DEFINE EXTENSION . Then enter an equivalent electrical length by using the
numerical keys.
4. Press LABEL FIXTURE . Enter a label by using the rotary knob and then press DONE .
Pressing 4*5 4+5 changes the character set for entry. Up to 8 characters are allowed.
5. Press KIT DONE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6. To store the setting data into the non-volatile memory, press SAVE USER FXTR KIT .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To use the user xture setting, select USER under 4Meas5 FIXTURE [NONE] SELECT FIXTURE .
Calibration 7-17
Calibration Required for the Impedance Analyzer Mode
Performing Fixture Compensation
Fixture compensation reduces the parasitic error existing between the test xture electrode
and the impedance test kit OUTPUT port. Fixture compensation consists of OPEN, SHORT
and LOAD compensations. For basic measurements, the OPEN and SHORT compensations are
required.
Note
For the instructions on how to connect the standards, see the applicable test
xture manual.
1. Connect the SHORT bar to the xture.
2. Press 4Cal5 FIXTURE COMPEN COMPEN MENU .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press SHORT .
After the short compensation sequence is done, the SHORT softkey label is underlined.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Remove the SHORT bar and set the OPEN condition.
5. Press OPEN .
After the open compensation sequence is done, the OPEN softkey label is underlined.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6. Press DONE: COMPEN .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
7. Verify that \Cor" changes to \Cmp" notation.
7-18 Calibration
Calibration Required for the Impedance Analyzer Mode
Selecting the Calibration Kit
See \Selecting the Calibration Kit" in \Calibration Required for the Network Analyzer Mode"
for selecting the calibration kit.
Dening a Custom Fixture Compensation Kit
This section explains how to dene a custom xture compensation kit.
The 4395A incorporates a database of Agilent's genuine test xtures and their specic
compensation coecients. Therefore, as long as you use an Agilent's genuine test xture, you
can use the xture without dening an associated compensation kit.
If you use your custom test xture to meet your actual needs, however, you must dene the
compensation kit associated with the xture before you can use your custom test xture. Once
you have dened a xture compensation kit, the 4395A preserves the denitions so you can
select the compensation kit whenever you need to use it.
The 4395A uses the following equivalent circuit to perform xture compensation for each of
the OPEN, SHORT, and LOAD circuit states:
Figure 7-3. Model of Fixture Compensation Kit
Dening a xture compensation kit involves the following steps:
1. Opening the xture compensation kit modication menu
2. Specifying parameter values
3. Specifying the standard label
The above steps are described in the following subsections in order.
Step 1: Opening the Fixture Compensation Kit Modication Menu
To open the xture compensation kit modication menu, do the following:
1. Press 4Cal5.
2. Choose COMPEN KIT [USER] .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Choose MODIFY [USER] .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Choose DEFINE STANDARD .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Calibration 7-19
Calibration Required for the Impedance Analyzer Mode
Step 2: Specifying Parameter Values
In this step, you specify 2 parameters for each of the OPEN, SHORT, and LOAD circuit states;
thus 6 parameters in all. While the parameters for OPEN and SHORT are required, those for
LOAD are optional.
To specify the parameter values, do the following:
1. Choose OPEN: CONDUCT(G) , and enter the conductance value (G) for OPEN.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Choose CAP. (C) , and enter the capacitance value (C) for OPEN.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Choose SHORT: RESIST. (R) , and enter the resistance value (R) for SHORT.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Choose INDUCT. (L) , and enter the inductance value (L) for SHORT.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. Choose LOAD: RESIST. (R) , and enter the resistance value (R) for LOAD.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6. Choose INDUCT. (L) , and enter the reactance value (L) for LOAD.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
7. Choose STD DONE (DEFINED) .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Step 3: Specifying the Standard Label
1. Choose LABEL KIT .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Enter the standard label (up to 10 characters).
3. Choose DONE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Choose KIT DONE (MODIFIED) .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
7-20 Calibration
8
Analyzing the Measurement Results
The 4395A provides various analyzer functions that allow you to output, save, or further
analyze measurement results obtained through the 4395A's measurement functions. The rst
half of this chapter provides these analyzer functions which are not dependent on a particular
analyzer mode. In the latter half, typical measurement techniques for each analyzer mode are
described.
Topics covered include:
Interpreting the trace
Storing the trace data in memory
Using the trace math functions
Overlaying traces
Outputting the data to a printer
Saving and recalling the settings and data
Typical network measurement techniques
Typical spectrum measurement techniques
Typical Impedance measurement techniques
Analyzing the Measurement Results 8-1
Interpreting the Trace
Interpreting the Trace
Once you have successfully displayed the correct trace on the screen, you can use the marker
to interpret the trace. The 4395A provides you with powerful search functions that allow you
to search for specic points (like peaks or ripples). This section provides procedures for reading
values using the marker and the marker search functions.
To read a value using the marker
To use the sub-markers
To use the 1marker
To search for a point that has a target value
To search for the peak-to-peak of ripples using the statistics function
To search for a single peak on the trace
To search for multiple peaks
To dene the peak for search (to ignore unnecessary peaks)
To specify the search range
To Read a Value Using the Marker
1. Press 4Marker5.
2. Move the marker by performing the following steps:
Turn the rotary knob until the marker moves to the point where you want to read the
measured value.
Enter the target frequency by using numerical keys.
3. Read the marker value displayed on the upper right of the display.
Figure 8-1. Marker Readout
8-2 Analyzing the Measurement Results
Interpreting the Trace
Improving the Readout Resolution (SA Mode)
If you want a more accurate frequency reading of the target signal, set the span and the RBW
as narrow as possible.
Note
The readout resolution of the frequency is determined by the setting of the
frequency span, the number of points (NOP), and the resolution bandwidth
(RBW). The resolution is the sum value of SPAN/(NOP01) and RBW. For
example, when the frequency span is 10 MHz, the NOP is 801, and the RBW is
10 kHz, the readout resolution is approximately 22.5 kHz.
To Select Marker Readout Unit (SA Nide)
Maker readout unit can be selected as follows:
1. press 4Utility5.
2. Press MKR UNIT { g.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Select one of the following options:
Format
Unit
Softkey
Power
dBm
W
NNNNNNNNNNN
dBV
dBV
V
NNNNNNNNNNN
Voltage
dBm
WATT
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
dBV
dBuV
VOLT
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Analyzing the Measurement Results 8-3
Interpreting the Trace
To Use the Sub-markers
1. Press 4Marker5.
2. Move the marker to the point where you want to set the sub-marker.
3. Press SUB MKR .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Select the sub-marker from SUB MKR 1 to 7 .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNN
5. Press 4Utility5.
6. Toggle MKR LIST on OFF to ON off to display the marker list on the bottom of the display.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The sub-marker appears at the point of that the marker is displayed. Sub-markers are xed
horizontally and you cannot move them.
The sub-marker value can only be displayed by using the marker list.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To clear a sub-marker, press 4Marker5 CLEAR SUB MKR . Then press the sub-marker number that
you want to erase from the display.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To clear all of the markers, press 4Marker5 PRESET MKRS .
Figure 8-2. Sub-marker and Maker List
8-4 Analyzing the Measurement Results
Interpreting the Trace
To Use the 1Marker
1. Press 4Marker5.
2. Place the marker at the point you want use as the reference point by using the
.
3. Press 1MODE MENU .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Press 1MKR .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. The reference marker appears at the marker point.
6. To move the marker:
Enter an oset frequency by using the numerical keys.
Turn the rotary knob until the marker moves to the point you want to read the value.
7. Read the level and the frequency dierences from the reference marker that are displayed
on the upper right of the grid.
The marker value on the upper right of the grid shows the frequency and the level dierences
between the reference marker and the marker.
When you use the sub-markers, use the marker list to display the dierence between reference
the marker and the sub-markers. (Press 4Utility5 and then toggle MKR LIST on OFF to ON off .)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure 8-3. 1Marker
To Search for a Point that has the Target Value (NA, SA Mode)
1. Press 4Search5.
2. Press TARGET .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Enter the target value using 405 . . . 495 and the unit terminator keys.
Analyzing the Measurement Results 8-5
Interpreting the Trace
To search for a target on
All of the display
Left side of the marker
Right side of the marker
Press
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
TARGET
SEARCH LEFT
SEARCH RIGHT
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
When the 1marker is active, the target value becomes the dierence from the reference
marker, not an absolute value. For example, you can search for the 03 dB cuto point of a
lter by mixing the 1marker and the target search function.
8-6 Analyzing the Measurement Results
Interpreting the Trace
To Search for the Peak-to-Peak of Ripples Using the Statistics Function
Step 1: To Specify the Search Range
1. Press 4Marker5. Then move the marker to the start point of the range.
2. Press 1MODE MENU 1MKR to place the reference marker on the start point of the range.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Move the marker to the end point of the range.
4. Press 4Search5 SEARCH RANGE MENU .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. Toggle PART SRCH on OFF to ON off .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6. Press MKR1!SEARCH RNG to set the range dened by the reference marker and the marker
as the search range.
Triangle-shaped indicator (4) at the bottom of the grid shows current search range.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Step 2: To Search For the Ripple
1. Press 4Utility5.
2. Toggle STATISTICS on OFF to ON off .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
STATISTICS displays the mean value (mean), the standard deviation (s.dev), and the
peak-to-peak value (p-p) of the ripple within the specied range of the active channel. This
information is displayed on the upper right of the display (see Figure 8-4). If you did not
specify the search range, the analyzer searches within the displayed area.
Figure 8-4. Ripple Parameters Readout
Analyzing the Measurement Results 8-7
Interpreting the Trace
To Search for a Single Peak on the Trace
1. Press 4Search5.
2. Press SEARCH: PEAK to search a maximum peak.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. If you want to search for another peak:
To search next peak for
Press
2nd highest peak
Peak just to the left
Peak just to the right
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NEXT PEAK
NEXT PEAK LEFT
NEXT PEAK RIGHT
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure 8-5. Peak Search
8-8 Analyzing the Measurement Results
Interpreting the Trace
To Search for Multiple Peaks
1. Press 4Search5 MULTIPLE PEAKS .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Do any of the following:
To search for peaks
Press
For all the peaks
For peaks on the right
For peaks on the left
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SEARCH: PEAKS ALL
PEAKS RIGHT
PEAKS LEFT
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press 4Utility5. Toggle MKR LIST on OFF to ON off to list all marker values.
When this function is enabled, the marker is placed on the maximum peak and the sub-markers
are placed on up to seven other peaks. PEAKS ALL searches for all the peaks and places the
sub-markers in the order of peak level.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PEAKS RIGHT and PEAKS LEFT search only to the right or left side of the peak and place the
sub-markers on peaks in the order found.
If the marker is to search for peaks other than harmonics, specify the peak threshold for the
search function. This makes the search function ignore the peaks that have a lower level than
the threshold level. See the \To Dene the Peak for Search (To Ignore Unnecessary Peaks)"
procedure.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PEAKS ALL
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PEAKS RIGHT
Figure 8-6. Searching for Multiple Peaks
Analyzing the Measurement Results 8-9
Interpreting the Trace
To Dene the Peak for Search (To Ignore Unnecessary Peaks)
You can dene the target peak for the search function using the following techniques:
Dening the peak slope to ignore the relatively broad peaks.
Specifying the peak threshold to ignore the absolutely small peaks.
Dening the Peak Slope to Ignore the Relatively Broad Peaks (NA, ZA Mode)
Entering Directly.
1. Press 4Search5 SEARCH: PEAK .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Press PEAK DEF MENU .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press PEAK DEF: 1X . Then enter a width of the peak.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Peak PEAK DEF: 1Y . Then enter a height of the peak.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Using the Marker.
1. Press 4Marker5. Then move the marker on the local maximum you want to search.
2. Press 1MODE MENU 1MKR
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press 4Search5 SEARCH: PEAK PEAK DEF MENU .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Move the marker to the foot of the peak.
5. Press MKR!PEAK DELTA .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
This parameter denes the slope of the peak. The denition is made by dening 1X and 1Y as
shown in Figure 8-7. The search function searches only for peaks that are steeper than the
specied slope. Use this function when the search function searches for a peak that has a
gentle slope.
Figure 8-7. Peak Denition
8-10 Analyzing the Measurement Results
Interpreting the Trace
Dening Peak Height (SA Mode)
1. Press 4Search5.
2. Press SEARCH: PEAK PEAK DEF MENU .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press PEAK DEF: 1Y .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Enter a peak height using the numerical keys and the units terminator keys.
5. Press RETURN .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Specifying the Peak Threshold to Ignore the Absolutely Small Peaks
Entering Directly.
1. Press 4Search5 SEARCH: PEAK PEAK DEF MENU .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Press THRESHOLD VALUE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Enter a threshold value.
4. Toggle THRESHOLD on OFF to ON off .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The red threshold line is displayed. The all search function searches for only the upper side of
the threshold line.
Using the Marker.
1. Press 4Search5.
2. Press SEARCH: PEAK PEAK DEF MENU .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Move the marker to the point you want to set as the threshold value.
4. Press MKR!THRESHOLD .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. Toggle THRESHOLD on OFF to ON off .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Before Dening the Threshold
After Dening the Threshold
Figure 8-8. Threshold Function
Analyzing the Measurement Results 8-11
Interpreting the Trace
To Specify the Search Range
You can set the search function to search within a specied range. To specify the search range,
use one of the following two procedures:
Using the marker
Using the 1marker
Using the Marker
1. Press 4Search5.
2. Press SEARCH RANGE MENU .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Toggle PART SRCH on OFF to ON off .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Move the marker to the start point of the search range.
5. Press MKR!LEFT RNG to set the marker position as the left edge of the range.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6. Move the marker to the end point of the search range.
7. Press MKR!RIGHT RNG to set the marker position to the right edge of the range.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
8. Press RETURN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Using the 1Marker
1. Press 4Marker5.
2. Move the marker to the start point of the search range.
3. Press 1MODE MENU .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Press 1MKR .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. Move the marker to the end point of the search range.
6. Press 4Search5.
7. Press SEARCH RANGE MENU .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
8. Toggle PART SRCH on OFF to ON off to enable the search range.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
9. Press MKR1!SEARCH RNG .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
All the search functions search within a specied search range. You can specify the search
range for each channel individually. The triangle-shaped indicator at the bottom of the grid
shows the current search range (see Figure 8-9). In this gure, 4Search5 SEARCH: PEAK searches
for the highest peak within the specied range. It does not search all of the grid.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
8-12 Analyzing the Measurement Results
Interpreting the Trace
Figure 8-9. Search Range
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To turn o the part search, press 4Search5 SEARCH RANGE MENU , and then toggle
PART SRCH ON off to on OFF .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Analyzing the Measurement Results 8-13
To Use the Trace Memory
To Use the Trace Memory
To Store the Trace into the Trace Memory
1. Display the trace you want to store into the trace memory.
2. Press 4Display5.
3. Press DATA!MEMORY .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
This operation only stores the digitized trace data into the trace memory (not the display on
LCD). You can store the trace data for the trace memory of each channel individually. The
stored trace data is retained until new data is stored, the 4395A is preset, or power is turned
o.
To Display Memory Traces
1. Press 4Display5 DISPLAY [ ] .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Select the display trace:
To display
Press
Memory trace
Data and memory trace together
Data trace
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
MEMORY
DATA and MEMORY
DISPLAY: DATA
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Memory traces are displayed as green (channel 1) or red (channel 2) to distinguish between the
two traces. You can change this color by using the modify colors menu under 4Display5 MORE
ADJUST DISPLAY .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
If the trace memory of the active channel is empty, the error message (CAUTION: NO VALID
MEMORY TRACE) is displayed.
Notes
The scale of the memory trace is coupling with the data trace. If you want to change the
scale setting for only the data or memory trace, toggle 4Scale Ref5 D&M SCALE [COUPLE] to
[UNCOUPLE] . Then toggle SCALE FOR [DATA] or [MEMORY] before you change the settings.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
8-14 Analyzing the Measurement Results
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To Overlay Multiple Traces
To Use the Trace Math Function
1. Press 4Display5.
2. Press DATA MATH [ ] .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Do one of the following:
To
Press
Add Trace with Memory Trace
Subtract Trace with Memory Trace
Divide Trace with Memory Trace
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DATA+MEM
DATA-MEM
DATA/MEM
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To Turn O the Data Math Function
1. Press 4Display5.
2. Press DATA MATH [ ] .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press DATA MATH: DATA .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To Multiply the Trace
1. Press 4Display5.
2. Press DATA MATH [ ] .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press GAIN . Then enter a multiplication factor:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To
Use
Change value continuously
Change value with 1-2-5 steps
Enter value directly
4 5 4 5
Note
* +
405
. . . 495 and unit keys
For more information about the settings of gain and oset value, see
Appendix B.
To Clear a Multiplied Trace
1. Press 4Display5.
2. Press DATA MATH [ ] .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press DEFAULT GAIN & OFS .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Analyzing the Measurement Results 8-15
To Overlay Multiple Traces
To Overlay Multiple Traces
To Store the Trace into the Overlay Trace
1. Press 4Display5.
2. Press OVERLAY TRACES .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press SELECT PEN COLOR and select one of the colors:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Overlay Trace Color1
Press
White
Red
Yellow
Green
Light Blue
Blue
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PEN
PEN
PEN
PEN
PEN
PEN
1
2
3
4
5
6
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
1 Power ON default.
4. Press DATA!OVERLAY .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 above to store dierent traces.
Note
You cannot change the scale setting for the overlay traces. It is also impossible
to read the overlay trace data with markers or to save the data into a oppy
disk or memory disk. For those applications, use the data trace or memory
trace.
To Clear the Overlay Traces
1. Press 4Display5.
2. Press OVERLAY TRACES .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press CLEAR GRAPHICS .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
8-16 Analyzing the Measurement Results
To Print
To Print
This step provides the following procedures for printing:
To print out a display image
To see or print a measured value list
To print an analyzer setting
To Print Out a Display Image
1. Connect the printer to the analyzer with a cable.
2. Press 4Copy5 PRINT [STANDARD] to print out a display image.
To abort printing, press 4Copy5 COPY ABORT .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To See or Print a Measured Value List
1. Press 4Copy5.
2. Press MORE LIST VALUES to display the measured value list.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To see all of the measured value list, press NEXT PAGE or PREV PAGE to turn the pages.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To print out the measured value list, press PRINT [STANDARD] .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To return to the measurement display, press RESTORE DISPLAY .
To Print an Analyzer Setting
1. Press 4Copy5.
2. Press MORE OPERATING PARAMETERS to display the analyzer setting table as shown below.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press PRINT [STANDARD] to print out the settings.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. To return to the measurement display, press RESTORE DISPLAY .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Analyzing the Measurement Results 8-17
To Print
Analyzer Setting Table
OPERATING PARAMETER
ANALYZER TYPE
CH1
NA
CH2
NA
SWEEP TYPE
NUMBER of POINTS
PORT 1 ATTEN.
PORT 2 ATTEN.
INPUT R ATTEN.
INPUT A ATTEN.
INPUT B ATTEN.
GROUP DELAY APERTURE
PHASE OFFSET
LIN FREQ
201
0 dB
0 dB
20 dB
20 dB
20 dB
1 % SPAN
0
LIN FREQ
201
0 dB
0 dB
20 dB
20 dB
20 dB
1 % SPAN
0
PORT
PORT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
VELOCITY FACTOR
0 s
0 s
0 s
0 s
0 s
OFF
1
0 s
0 s
0 s
0 s
0 s
OFF
1
CAL KIT
7mm
7mm
Z0
CAL TYPE
50 ohm
NONE
50 ohm
NONE
1
2
R
A
B
EXTENSION
EXTENSION
EXTENSION
EXTENSION
EXTENSION
8-18 Analyzing the Measurement Results
To Save and Recall
To Save and Recall the Settings and Data
This step provides the following procedures for saving and recalling:
To save an analyzer setting or measurement data
To recall a saved analyzer setting
To save a display image to a TIFF le
To save measured data for a spreadsheet
To copy a le between oppy disk and memory disk
To initialize a disk for use
To initialize the memory disk for use
To back up the memory disk
To Save an Analyzer Setting or Measurement Data
The 4395A supports two storage devices, a built-in exible disk drive and a 512KB memory
disk. The exible disk drive should be used to store large numbers of les and for long term
data storage. Memory disk should be used for temporary data and instrument states and to
store or get data quickly.
Note
When you store important data into the memory disk, perform the memory
disk backup operation described in \To Back Up the Memory Disk". Otherwise,
the memory disk data is lost when the power is turned o.
1. Insert a LIF or DOS formatted 3.5 inch disk into the built-in disk drive (if you are recalling
an instrument state le from the memory disk, skip this step).
2. Press 4Save5.
3. Select a save data type:
Save Data Type
Press
Instrument states only
Measurement data only1
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
STATE
DATA ONLY (binary)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
1 You can specify a data array type. See the \Specifying a Data Array Type"
procedure.
4. Select where the le is stored by pressing either STOR DEV [DISK] (for the built-in disk
drive) or STOR DEV [MEMORY] (for the memory disk).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. Enter a lename. Then press DONE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The analyzer automatically detects the disk format as either the LIF (Logical Interchange
Format) or DOS (Disk Operating System). If you insert an any other format type disk, an error
message is displayed.
For more information, Appendix A provides a complete list of the instrument state to be saved.
Analyzing the Measurement Results 8-19
To Save and Recall
Specifying the Data Format
To save only the measurement data in the ASCII or binary format, follow these steps:
1. Press 4Save5.
2. Choose DATA ONLY . Then select one of the following options by choosing the corresponding
softkey:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Data Format
Softkey
ASCII
Binary
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SAVE ASCII
SAVE BINARY
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Specifying a Data Array Type
To save only the measurement data by specifying the data array to save, follow these steps:
1. Press 4Save5.
2. Choose DATA ONLY .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press DEFINE SAVE DATA
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Choose the softkey associated with the data array to save so that the last two words of the
key label are toggle from on OFF to ON off .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Data Array
Toggle
Raw data array
Calibration data array
Data array
Memory array
Data Trace array
Memory Trace array
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
RAW on OFF to ON off
CAL on OFF to ON off
DATA on OFF to ON off
MEM on OFF to ON off
DATA TRACE on OFF to ON off
MEM TRACE on OFF to ON off
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. Choose RETURN to return to the top menu.
See Appendix A for the denition of each array.
To Recall a Saved Analyzer Setting
1. Insert a disk (if you are recalling an instrument state le from the memory disk, skip this
step).
2. Press 4Recall5.
3. Select where the le is stored by pressing either STOR DEV [DISK] (for a built-in disk
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
drive) or STOR DEV [MEMORY] (for a memory disk).
4. Search for the lename you want to recall (the les are listed on the softkey label).
5. If a target le is not listed on the softkey label, turn the label page by pressing PREV FILES
or NEXT FILES .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
8-20 Analyzing the Measurement Results
To Save and Recall
6. Press the softkey corresponding to the lename label.
To Save a Display Image to a TIFF File
1. Press 4Save5 GRAPHICS .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Select where to store the le by pressing either STOR DEV [DISK] (for a built-in disk drive)
or STOR DEV [MEMORY] (for a memory disk).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Enter lename. Then press DONE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Note
A display image is saved according to the color setup you have done
on the print setup menu (4Copy5 PRINT SETUP ). You can choose from
PRINT:STANDARD (black and white), PRINT COLOR [FIXED] (color against
white background), and PRINT COLOR [VARIABLE] (color against black
background).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The analyzer saves a TIFF le with an extension, \.TIF" for a DOS format, or a sux, \_T" for
a LIF format.
If there is a le that has the same name you entered on the disk, the error message, \lename
error" will be displayed. To save the le, use the other lename to save or purge the old le.
To purge a le, press 4Save5 FILE UTILITIES PURGE FILE then select the displayed lename
by pressing the associated softkey.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To Save Measured Data for a Spreadsheet
1. Insert a DOS format disk into the built-in disk drive.
2. Press 4Save5 DATA ONLY .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press SAVE ASCII .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Select the built-in disk drive as the storage device by toggling to STOR DEV [DISK] .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. Enter a lename. Then press DONE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The analyzer saves an ASCII le with a \.TXT" extension.
The measured data is saved as ASCII text. Each value is separated by a tab. When you
open this le from the spreadsheet software, specify the le format as the \TEXT with TAB
delimiter".
Analyzing the Measurement Results 8-21
To Save and Recall
Figure 8-10. Reading Saved Data from Spreadsheet Software
To Copy a File between Floppy Disk and Memory Disk
1. Press 4Save5 FILE UTILITIES .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Press COPY FILE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Select a storage device where the le is stored by toggling either STOR DEV [DISK] (for the
build-in disk drive) or STOR DEV [MEMORY] (for the memory disk).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Search for the lename you want to recall (the les are listed on the softkey label).
5. If a target le is not listed on the softkey labels, turn the label page by pressing
PREV FILES or NEXT FILES .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6. Press the softkey corresponding to the lename label.
7. Enter the lename of the target le.
8. Select the target storage device by toggling STOR DEV [DISK] or [MEMORY] .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
9. Press DONE to copy the le.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
You cannot copy a le between the LIF and DOS formats. When you want to copy a le on
a DOS formatted disk to the memory disk, you must initialize the memory disk to the DOS
format.
To Initialize a Disk for Use
Note
1.
2.
3.
4.
Initializing the disk erases all data on the disk.
The 4395A can initialize a 1.44 MB 3.5 inch exible disk only.
Verify that the disk is not write protected.
Insert the disk.
Press 4Save5.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Choose FILE UTILITIES .
5. Choose INITIALIZE DISK .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
8-22 Analyzing the Measurement Results
To Save and Recall
6. Select the disk format (either DOS or LIF) by toggling FORMAT [DOS] or [LIF] .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
7. Toggle to STOR DEV [DISK] to select the disk drive.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
8. Press INIT DISK: YES to initialize the disk.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To Initialize the Memory Disk for Use
Note
Initializing the memory disk erases all data on the memory disk. Copy
important les on the memory disk to a exible disk before initializing the
memory disk.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
1. Press 4Save5 FILE UTILITIES .
2. Press INITIALIZE DISK .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Select the disk format (either DOS or LIF) by toggling FORMAT [DOS] or [LIF] .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Toggle to STOR DEV [MEMORY] to select the memory disk.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. Press INIT DISK: YES .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The les on the memory disk are lost when the 4395A is turned o unless the memory disk is
backed up using BACK UP MEMO DISK .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To Back Up the Memory Disk
The data (les and disk format) on the memory disk can be copied to a non-volatile memory
(ash memory) by memory disk backup operation. The backup copy data is recalled to the
memory disk every time the 4395A is turned on.
1. Press 4Save5.
2. Press BACK UP MEMO DISK .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Note
When you store important data into the memory disk, You must back up
the memory disk using BACK UP MEMO DISK . Otherwise, the data on the
memory disk is lost when the 4395A is turned o.
Backup is also important as a means of recovering your precious data in the
event of a power interruption or misoperation. For example, even if you
inadvertently formatted the memory disk while using the 4395A, you could
easily recover the data (les and disk format) from the backup copy; all you
have to do is turn OFF and ON the 4395A.
The memory disk can endure approximately 100,000 cycles of backup
operation.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Analyzing the Measurement Results 8-23
Typical Network Measurement Techniques
Typical Network Measurement Techniques
This section provides the following typical measurement techniques using the network analyzer
mode of operation:
Measuring 3 dB bandwidth using the width function
Measuring electrical length
Measuring phase deviation
Compensating for the electrical delay caused by an extension cable
8-24 Analyzing the Measurement Results
Measuring 3 dB Bandwidth Using the Width Function
Measuring 3 dB Bandwidth Using the Width Function
1. Do one of the following:
Reference Point
Keystrokes
Maximum value
Nominal frequency
Press 4Search5 MAX .
Press 4Marker5 and enter the
nominal frequency through the
numerical keypad.
NNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Press 4Marker5 1MODE MENU 1MKR to make the marker a reference.
3. Press 4Search5 WIDTH [OFF] WIDTH VALUE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Press 405 435 4215 to enter 03 dB.
5. Toggle WIDTH on OFF to ON off .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
As shown in Figure 8-11, a pair of sub-markers appear on both sides of the reference marker,
being lowered by the specied number of levels; also, another sub-maker is displayed in the
middle between the two sub-markers. The bandwidth (BW), center frequency of the bandwidth
(cent), Q factor (Q), insertion loss (loss), and left and right hand bandwidth (1L.F and 1R.F)
are displayed at the upper right corner of the grid.
Figure 8-12 shows a typical example of a band pass lter measurement trace and describes each
parameter. 0 will be returned for all parameters when two cuto points can not be found.
Parameter
Description
Bandwidth (BW)
Center frequency of the
bandwidth (cent)
Q factor (Q)
Insertion loss (loss)
The stimulus width between two cuto points (f1 and f2 )
The center point (fcent ) of the two cuto points (f1 and f2)
Left hand bandwidth
(1L.F)
Right hand bandwidth
(1R.F)
Q=
pf1 2f2
BW
The abosolute value of the dierence of the maximum value
within a specied range and 0 dB
The stimulus dierence between the left hand cuto point (f1)
and the center point of a specied rnage.
The stimulus dierence between the right hand cuto point (f2)
and the center point of a specied range.
You can move the reference marker using the rotary knob. When you enable the width
function, the reference marker automatically turns into a tracking 1marker that allows you to
move the reference marker.
For more information on the width function, see Appendix A.
Analyzing the Measurement Results 8-25
Measuring 3 dB Bandwidth Using the Width Function
Figure 8-11. Bandwidth Measurement Using Width Function
Figure 8-12. Parameters of a Band Pass Filter Measurement
8-26 Analyzing the Measurement Results
Measuring Electrical Length
Measuring Electrical Length
1. Press 4Format5 PHASE , and then select the desired phase format.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Do one of the following procedures:
Using the marker:
a. Press 4Marker5.
b. Turn the rotary knob to move the marker to the center of the display.
c. Press 4Cal5 MORE ELEC DELAY MENU .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
d. Press MKR!DELAY .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Using the rotary knob:
a. Press 4cal5 MORE ELEC DELAY MENU
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
b. Press ELECTRICAL DELAY .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
c. Turn the rotary knob until the trace becomes at at the specied frequency.
3. Press ELECTRICAL DELAY . Then read the electrical length that is displayed under the
electrical delay time.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Before Adding the Electrical Length
After Adding the Electrical Length
Figure 8-13. Measuring Electrical Length
If the average relative permittivity ("R ) of the DUT is known over the frequency span, the
length calculation can be adjusted to better indicate the actual length of the DUT. This can be
done by entering the relative velocity factor for the DUT.
Analyzing the Measurement Results 8-27
Measuring Electrical Length
Setting the Velocity Factor of a Cable
1. Press 4Cal5.
2. Press MORE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press VELOCITY FACTOR .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Enter a new value. Then press 4215.
The relative velocity factor for a given dielectric can be calculated by:
1
Vf = p
"R
The velocity factor defaults to 1.
8-28 Analyzing the Measurement Results
Measuring Phase Deviation
Measuring Phase Deviation
Deviation from the Linear Phase
1. Specify the frequency range.
2. Display the phase trace by pressing 4Format5 PHASE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Adjust the scale settings by pressing 4Scale Ref5 AUTO SCALE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Press 4Marker5. Then move the marker to any of the points where the sloping trace crosses
the center (place the marker on the sloping portion of the trace, not the vertical phase
\wrap-around").
5. Press 4cal5 MORE ELEC DELAY MENU MKR!DELAY to add enough electrical length to match
the phase slope present at the marker frequency.
6. Read the phase value as a deviation from the linear phase.
By adding the electrical length to atten the phase response, the linear phase shift caused by
the DUT is removed. The displayed response is the deviation from the linear phase.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To turn o the electrical length function, press 4cal5 MORE ELEC DELAY MENU
ELECTRICAL DELAY 405 4215.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure 8-14. Deviation from the Linear Phase
Group Delay
The phase linearity of many devices is specied in terms of group delay or envelope delay. This
is especially true of telecommunications components and systems.
Group delay is the dierence in propagation time through a device as a function of frequency.
It is measured as a ratio of phase change over a sample delta frequency as follows:
1
Group Delay = 0
3601F
Where:
1 is phase change [deg]
1F (commonly called the \aperture") is the frequency dierence that gives 1
1. Press 4Format5.
Analyzing the Measurement Results 8-29
Measuring Phase Deviation
2. Press DELAY .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press 4Scale Ref5 AUTO SCALE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The group delay format displays the phase deviation to the group delay aperture. Therefore,
setting the group delay aperture aects the trace shape. Setting a wider aperture makes the
trace smoother. The aperture defaults to 1% of the span.
Setting the Group Delay Aperture.
1. Press 4Bw/Avg5.
2. Press GROUP DELAY APERTURE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Enter group delay aperture value as a percentage of the span.
The group delay aperture is based on the number of points, not the real aperture. For example,
if the number of points is 201, a 1% group delay aperture causes the 4395A to calculate the
group delay using the adjacent measurement points on both sides. Therefore, the group delay
trace may dier depending on the specied number of points.
Aperture 1%
Aperture 5%
Figure 8-15. Setting Group Delay Aperture
8-30 Analyzing the Measurement Results
Compensating for the Electrical Delay Caused by an Extension Cable
Compensating for the Electrical Delay Caused by an Extension Cable
If the Electrical Delay of the Extension Cable is Known
1. Press 4Cal5 MORE PORT EXTENSIONS to open the port extension menu.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Enter the electrical delay values for the respective input ports.
If you do not use the S-parameter test set, follow these steps:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Press EXTENSION INPUT R . Then enter the electrical delay of the cable that is
connected to the R input.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Press EXTENSION INPUT A . Then enter the electrical delay of the A input.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Press EXTENSION INPUT B . Then enter the electrical delay of the B input.
If you use the transmission/reection (T/R) test set, enter the electrical delay of the cable
that is connected to the TEST PORT (for the R and A inputs).
Figure 8-16. Port Extension With the T/R Test Set
If you use the S-parameter test set, follow these steps:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Enter \0" for EXTENSION INPUT R , EXTENSION INPUT A and EXTENSION INPUT B to
clear the port extension of the R, A and B inputs.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Press EXTENSION PORT 1 . Then enter the electrical delay of the PORT 1.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Press EXTENSION PORT 2 . Then enter the electrical delay of the PORT 2.
3. Toggle EXTENSION on OFF to ON off to enable the port extension.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Analyzing the Measurement Results 8-31
Compensating for the Electrical Delay Caused by an Extension Cable
If the Electrical Delay of the Extension Cable is Unknown
You can determine the electrical delay of the extension cable by:
Measuring the electrical delay of the cable
Measuring the cable's reection in the OPEN or SHORT circuit state.
Measuring the Electrical Length of a Cable.
1. Connect the cable as shown in Figure 8-17.
2. Dene the frequency range according to the measurement conditions.
3. Press 4Meas5 B/R (or S PARAMETERS Trans: FWD S21 [B/R] ) to select the transmission
measurement.
4. Press 4Format5 PHASE to select the phase format.
NNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. Press 4Marker5. Then move the marker to the sloping trace that crosses the center of the
display.
6. Press 4Cal5 MORE ELEC DELAY MENU MKR!DELAY ELECTRICAL DELAY , then read the
electrical delay of the cable.
7. Press 405 4215 to clear the electrical delay oset.
8. Enter a measured electrical delay as described in the \If the Electrical Delay of the
Extension Cable is Known" procedure.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure 8-17. Cable Measurement Conguration (Transmission)
Reection of a Opened or Shorted Cable.
1. Connect the cable as shown in Figure 8-18.
2. Dene the frequency range according to the measurement conditions.
3. Press 4Meas5 A/R (or S PARAMETERS Refl:FWD S11 [A/R] ) to select the reection
measurement.
4. Press 4Format5 PHASE to select the phase format.
NNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
8-32 Analyzing the Measurement Results
Compensating for the Electrical Delay Caused by an Extension Cable
5. Press 4Marker5. Then move the marker to the sloping trace that crosses the center of the
display.
6. Press 4Cal5 MORE ELEC DELAY MENU MKR!DELAY ELECTRICAL DELAY , then read the
electrical delay of the cable.
Note that this value is twice the real delay because there are both output and return paths.
7. Press 405 4215 to clear the electrical delay oset.
8. Enter half the value of the measured electrical delay as described in the \If the Electrical
Delay of the Extension Cable is Known" procedure.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure 8-18. Cable Measurement Conguration (Reection)
Analyzing the Measurement Results 8-33
Typical Spectrum Measurement Techniques
Typical Spectrum Measurement Techniques
This section describes typical spectrum measurement techniques. The topics covered include:
Measuring the noise level
Measuring the carrier to noise ratio
Performing the time gated spectrum analysis
Measuring zero span (time domain measurement)
Tracking unstable harmonics using the search track function
8-34 Analyzing the Measurement Results
Measuring the Noise Level
Measuring the Noise Level
1. Press 4Format5.
2. Choose NOISE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press 4Scale Ref5. Then press 4+5 until the noise trace gets close to the reference level.
4. Press 4Bw/Avg5. Then press VIDEO BW .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. Press 4+5 to atten the noise trace.
6. Press 4
and read the normalized noise level.
Marker5. Then turn the
The marker readout unit becomes \dBm/Hz" and is normalized by the 1 Hz equivalent
noise bandwidth (ENBW). To convert the ENBW, see the \Converting to a Dierent Unit of
Equivalent Noise Bandwidth" procedure.
Note
Figure 8-19. Noise Readout
Switching the display to a noise format causes the 4395A to perform detection
in sample detection mode. Subsequently returning the format to 4Format5
SPECTRUM causes the 4395A to perform detection in positive peak detection
mode. This is true even if you have selected the negative detection mode
before switching to the noise format.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Converting to a Dierent Unit of Equivalent Noise Bandwidth
1. Calculate the conversion factor using the following equations with displayed units:
Unit
Use
dBm=Hz
p
p
K = 10logBW
dBV = Hz , dBV = Hz
K = 20logBW
W=Hz
K = 1=BW
V = Hz
K = 1= BW
p
p
2. Where, BW is the target equivalent noise bandwidth.
Analyzing the Measurement Results 8-35
Measuring the Noise Level
3. Press 4Display5 and choose DATA MATH [ ] .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
p
p
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Choose OFFSET for dBm=Hz , dBV = Hz , and dBV = Hz .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
p
Choose GAIN for V = Hz and W=Hz .
4. Enter K, then press 4215.
Note
p
p
p
The 4395A displays dBV = Hz , dBV = Hz , V = Hz as dBV/Hz, dBV/Hz, V/Hz
respectively.
8-36 Analyzing the Measurement Results
Measuring the Carrier to Noise Ratio
Measuring the Carrier to Noise Ratio
1. Set up the frequency range within which to measure a carrier signal.
2. Press 4Marker5 to place the marker on the trace.
3. Press 4Scale Ref5 and choose PEAK!REFERENCE to set the reference level to the carrier signal
level.
4. Adjust the scale/div to display the carrier and noise oor. Use 4Scale Ref5 SCALE/DIV .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. Press 4Marker5 and choose 1MODE MENU 1MKR to place the reference marker on the carrier
signal.
6. Press 4Bw/Avg5. Then choose VIDEO BW .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
7. Enter an appropriate video bandwidth to reduce the variation.
8. Press 4Marker5. Then do either of the following:
Enter the oset frequency using the numeric keys.
Move the marker into the noise level of the trace using the rotary knob.
9. If you want to normalize the marker readout with the RBW lter, press 4Utility5 and toggle
NOISE FORM on OFF to ON off .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
10. Read the dierence from the reference marker.
Figure 8-20. C/N Measurement
Analyzing the Measurement Results 8-37
Measuring the Carrier to Noise Ratio
Time Gated Spectrum Analysis
The time gated spectrum analysis function can be used to measure any one of several signals
separated in time (for example, burst modulated, pulsed RF, and time multiplexed). Using the
gated sweep function allows the analyzer to measure the spectrum of a specic part of the
signal or separate signals, and mask out interfering or transient signals. In the gated sweep
mode, the analyzer is triggered to start and interrupt sweep selectively by an external trigger
signal. By controlling the external trigger signal, the analyzer measures only the signals that
are present when the analyzer sweeps.
The gate sweep is controlled by the following factors:
Trigger polarity, which determines which positive or negative edge (level) causes triggering
Gate trigger mode, which selects one of two modes (EDGE or LEVEL)
Gate Delay, which determines how long after the trigger signal the gate actually becomes
active.
Gate Length, which determines how long the gate is on.
Gate Trigger Mode
Two gate trigger modes (EDGE and LEVEL) are provided for the gate trigger to match the
trigger signal used.
Edge Mode. The edge mode allows you to position the gate relative to either the rising or
falling edge of a TTL trigger signal. The edge initiates the gate delay. For the edge mode, the
gate sweep is controlled by the following factors:
Trigger polarity, which selects the edge (positive or negative) to initiate the start point of the
gate sweep. At the start point, the edge initiates the gate delay.
Gate Delay, which determines how long after the trigger signal the gate actually becomes
active.
Gate Length, which determines how long the gate is on.
Figure 8-21. Edge Mode
8-38 Analyzing the Measurement Results
Measuring the Carrier to Noise Ratio
Level Mode. The level mode allows the external trigger signal to open and close the gate
directly, without a programmed gate length. The level mode also provides the gate delay. For
the level mode, the gate sweep is controlled by the following factors:
Trigger polarity, which selects the polarity of TTL the level (+5 V or 0 V) to open gate.
Gate Delay, which determines how long after the trigger signal the gate becomes active.
Figure 8-22. Level Mode
Analyzing the Measurement Results 8-39
Measuring the Carrier to Noise Ratio
RBW Filter Response Time
You don't need to care about the setting time for the RBW lter because the 4395A implements
the RBW lter using digital processing.
Video bandwidth (VBW) can be set without concern for the gate length setting. The analyzer
implements the video lter using digital processing. The video lter of the analyzer requires no
settling time for normal operation. Therefore, it is not aected by the gate length setting.
8-40 Analyzing the Measurement Results
Performing Time Gated Spectrum Analysis
Performing Time Gated Spectrum Analysis
Time gated spectrum analysis involves the following steps:
1. Determining the Gate Trigger Parameters
2. Connecting the Gate Trigger Source
3. Setting the Center and Span Frequency
4. Adjusting the Gate Trigger
5. Setting the RBW/VBW and Using the Averaging Function
6. Measuring the Spectrum
Note
Performing this measurement requires Option 1D6.
Step 1: Determining the Gate Trigger Parameters.
1. Connect the target signal and the trigger signal to the input port of an oscilloscope (see
Figure 8-23).
Figure 8-23. Time Domain Measurement Conguration
2. Adjust the oscilloscope to display the two signals.
3. Using the oscilloscope, check the following parameters:
For the target signal:
Pulse repetition width (PRI)
Signal width ( )
Signal delay (SD)
For the trigger signal:
Pulse width (if you use the level trigger mode)
Analyzing the Measurement Results 8-41
Performing Time Gated Spectrum Analysis
The signal delay (SD) is the delay inherent in the signal (that is, SD is the length of time after
the trigger, but before the signal of interest occurs and becomes stable).
Figure 8-24. Target and Trigger Signal Timing on the Oscilloscope
4. Determine the gate parameters using the following equations:
Gate delay = SUT + SD
Figure 8-25 shows the scheme of these parameters.
Open the \gate" during the time the signal is in a stable condition. The time from the start
time of a signal and the open time of a gate is the \set up time" (SUT).
Figure 8-25. Gate Parameters
8-42 Analyzing the Measurement Results
Performing Time Gated Spectrum Analysis
Step 2: Connecting the Gate Trigger Source.
1. Connect the RF signal source to the R input of the 4395A.
2. Connect the trigger output from the signal source to the EXT TRIGGER connector on the
rear panel of the 4395A.
Figure 8-26. Time Gated Measurement Conguration
Step 3: Setting the Center and Span Frequency.
Set up the center and span frequency of the 4395A to display the target signal.
Step 4: Adjusting the Gate Trigger.
1. Press 4Trigger5 CONTINUOUS to activate a gate trigger.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Choose TRIGGER: [ ] .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Choose GATE [ ] .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Select the gate control mode. Select LEVEL or EDGE by toggling GATE CTL: LEVEL and
EDGE to the required mode.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. If you have selected the LEVEL trigger mode, set the trigger polarity for starting the gate.
Press RETURN . And then toggle TRIG PLRTY to POS neg (positive) or pos NEG (negative).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6. Choose GATE [ ] GATE DELAY .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
7. Set a gate delay time.
8. If you have selected the EDGE trigger mode, choose GATE LENGTH . Then set the gate open
length.
You can see the gate trigger status by monitoring the GATE Output terminal using an
oscilloscope. The GATE Output terminal is located on the 4395A's rear panel.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Analyzing the Measurement Results 8-43
Performing Time Gated Spectrum Analysis
Setting the RBW/VBW and Using the Averaging Function
Setting the Resolution Bandwidth.
1. Press 4Bw/Avg5.
2. Press RES BW and set the resolution bandwidth in accordance with Table 8-1.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
8-44 Analyzing the Measurement Results
Performing Time Gated Spectrum Analysis
You must specify a gate length longer than the minimum gate length listed in Table 8-1.
Otherwise, the sweep does not start.
Table 8-1. Allowable RWB Settings and Minimum Gate Length
RBW
Minimum Gate Length1
1 MHz
6 sec
300 kHz
22 sec
100 kHz
44 sec
30 kHz
170 sec
10 kHz
660 sec
3 kHz
1.4 msec
1 kHz
5.3 msec
300 Hz
22 msec
100 Hz
43 msec
30 Hz
170 msec
10 Hz
680 msec
3 Hz
1.4 sec
1 Hz
Gated sweep is not available.2
1 If the gate control mode is \level", add the gate delay setting
to the listed value.
2 5.5 sec when the gate control mode is \level".
Setting the Video Bandwidth (VBW).
1. Choose VIDEO BW .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Set the video bandwidth.
You can set any video bandwidth (VBW) without concern for the gate length setting. The
4395A implements the video lter using digital processing. The video lter of the 4395A
requires no settling time for normal operation. Therefore, it is not aected by the gate length
setting.
You can also use the averaging function to reduce the variation of the trace.
Analyzing the Measurement Results 8-45
Performing Time Gated Spectrum Analysis
Measuring the Spectrum.
1. Adjust the span setting to t the trace to your requirement.
2. Perform your measurement.
Before Time Gating (VBW = 30 kHz)
After Time Gating (VBW = 300 Hz)
Figure 8-27. Time Gated Spectrum Analysis
8-46 Analyzing the Measurement Results
Measuring Zero Span
Measuring Zero Span
1. Determine the following parameters:
Sweep Time
Number of Display Points (NOP)
2. Press 4Center5. Then enter the frequency of the target signal.
3. Press 4Span5 and choose ZERO SPAN to set the frequency span to 0 Hz.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Press 4Sweep5.
5. Press 4Sweep5 and choose SWEEP TIME , and then enter the sweep time.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6. Press 4Sweep5 and choose NUMBER of POINTS . Then enter your desired number of points
(NOP).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Note
Table 8-2 lists default settings when the span is switched to normal span or
zero span in spectrum analyzer mode.
Table 8-2.
Default Settings When Switched to Normal Span or Zero
Span
Switched to Normal
Span
Switched to Zero Span
RBW mode
Auto
Manual
RBW
Automatically
determined
3 MHz
Sweep time mode
Auto (Fixed1 )
Manual (Fixed1 )
Sweep time
Automatically
determined
32 sec
NOP2
Automatically
determined
801
Detection mode
Positive peak
Sample
1 Sweep time mode can not be changed in spectrum analyzer mode.
2 Number of display points
You must specify an RBW equal to or greater than 3 kHz. If your specied
value is smaller than 3 kHz, the 4395A automatically sets the RBW to 3 kHz.
When you change the sweep time in zero span measurement of spectrum
analyzer mode, the sweep time is limited by the number of display points. If
you want to set a shorter sweep time than the limited sweep time, reduce
the number of display points with 4Sweep5 NUMBER of POINTS , and then set a
desired sweep time with SWEEP . If you want to set a longer sweep time than
the limited sweep time, increase the number of display points, and then set a
desired sweep time.
The minimum time resolution and maximum sweep time in measuring zero
span are listed in Table 8-3.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Analyzing the Measurement Results 8-47
Measuring Zero Span
Table 8-3. Minimum Time Resolution
RBW
Min. Time
Max. Sweep Time
Resolution
(NOP=801)
5 MHz
40 nsec
1.28 msec
3 MHz
40 nsec
2.56 msec
1.5 MHz
80 nsec
5.12 msec
800 kHz
160 nsec
10.24 msec
400 kHz
320 nsec
20.48 msec
200 kHz
640 nsec
40.96 msec
100 kHz
1.28 sec
81.9 msec
40 kHz
2.56 sec
163.8 msec
20 kHz
5.12 sec
327.7 msec
10 kHz
10.24 sec
655.4 msec
5 kHz
20.48 sec
1.311 sec
3 kHz
40.96 sec
2.621 sec
The 4395A uses an exclusive lter for 5 MHz resolution bandwidth to
improve the response time. Accurate measurements with a 5 MHz RBW
require the center frequency to be equal to the signal frequency.
Reading Transition Time Using the Marker
1. Press 4Utility5.
2. Toggle MKR TIME on OFF to ON off .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Move the marker using the
.
4. Read the transition time that is displayed on the upper right of the grid.
When you are measuring the zero span, the marker displays the same frequency on every point
of trace. Using the marker time function, you can change have the 4395A display time values
instead of frequency. The marker displays transition time from the left end of the grid.
8-48 Analyzing the Measurement Results
Measuring Zero Span
Figure 8-28. Marker Time
Analyzing the Measurement Results 8-49
Tracking Unstable Harmonics Using the Search Track Function
Tracking Unstable Harmonics Using the Search Track Function
1. Set the frequency range to display the carrier and the harmonics.
2. Press 4Search5 and choose SEARCH: PEAK to move the marker to the peak.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press 4Marker5 and choose 1MODE MENU TRACKING 1MKR to set up the marker as a reference
1marker that can move with the carrier.
4. Press 4Search5 and toggle SEARCH TRK on OFF to ON off to cause the search function to be
activated every time the 4395A performs a sweep process.
5. Choose MULTIPLE PEAKS PEAKS RIGHT to search for the carrier and harmonics under the
search track.
6. Press 4Utility5. Then toggle MKR LIST on OFF to ON off .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Even if the frequency of a carrier changes, the 4395A automatically tracks the carrier and the
harmonics at the end of the sweep. Then the analyzer lists the dierence between the carrier
and the harmonics in the lower half of the screen.
If you wish to ignore the peaks other than the harmonics, you can use the peak threshold. For
more information, See \To Dene the Peak for Search (To Ignore Unnecessary Peaks)".
Carrier Frequency: 50 MHz
55 MHz
Figure 8-29. Tracking Unstable Harmonics Using Search Track
8-50 Analyzing the Measurement Results
Typical Impedance Measurement Techniques
Typical Impedance Measurement Techniques
This section describes typical impedance measurement techniques. The topics covered include:
Applying DC bias
Equivalent circuit analysis
Determining Q value using the width search function
Port extension
Applying DC Bias
The 4395A option 001 DC source can be used to supply up to 640 V / 6100 mA of DC
voltage/current to external circuit or DUT through the DC SOURCE port on the front panel.
This section explains how to supply DC bias to the DUT on impedance measurement mode.
1. Make sure that the 4395A's DC SOURCE port is inactive. (The softkey label under 4Source5
should be DC OUT on OFF .)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Connect a BNC cable between the DC SOURCE port and the impedance test kit's DC
SOURCE INPUT port (see Figure 8-30).
The 4395A can apply DC voltage bias up to 640V or dc current bias up to 620 mA.
Caution
Figure 8-30. Connecting DC SOURCE to Impedance test kit
Do not attempt to perform calibration or xture compensation while the
4395A is applying DC bias. Doing so could damage the calibration or xture
compensation standard.
Analyzing the Measurement Results 8-51
Typical Impedance Measurement Techniques
Setting the Upper Limit for DC Bias
The 4395A can control DC bias so that a user-specied upper limit (current or voltage) is not
exceeded. This feature ensures that the device under DC bias is protected from excessively
high voltage or current.
DC bias can be applied in one of two modes: current control and voltage control. You can set
the upper limit voltage for current control mode, or the upper limit current for voltage control
mode.
Caution
Before applying DC bias, you must set the upper limit to protect the DUT.
To set the DC bias upper limit, follow these steps:
1. Press 4Source5.
2. Select one of the following two options:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To apply DC bias in voltage control mode, toggle DC SRC [CURRENT] to
DC SRC [VOLTAGE] .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To apply DC bias in current control mode, toggle DC SRC [VOLTAGE] to
DC SRC [CURRENT] .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Set the upper limit voltage or current.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
For voltage control mode, choose DC CURRENT LIMIT and enter the upper limit current
using the numeric keys.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
For current control mode, choose DC VOLTAGE LIMIT and enter the upper limit voltage
using the numeric keys.
Setting up and Applying Output Voltage/Current
1. Press 4Source5.
2. Press DC VOLTAGE (for voltage control mode) or DC CURRENT (for current control mode),
and enter output DC voltage or current using the numeric keys.
3. Toggle DC OUT on OFF to ON off to apply the DC voltage or current to the DUT.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
8-52 Analyzing the Measurement Results
Typical Impedance Measurement Techniques
Equivalent Circuit Analysis
The 4395A provides a function that automatically calculates approximate values of specic
parameters of an equivalent circuit that corresponds to a DUT. This function supports ve
circuit models. In addition, the resulting parameter values can be used to simulate the
frequency-based characteristics of the equivalent circuit; this allows you to compare the
simulated characteristics with the actually measured characteristics.
Menus Associated with Equivalent Circuit Analysis
To use the equivalent circuit analysis function, open the Equivalent Circuit Menu by pressing
and choosing EQUIV KIT MENU . The Equivalent Circuit Menu provides access to two
submenus: Select Equivalent Circuit Menu and Dene Equivalent Circuit Parameter Menu.
These three menus are described in this section.
Equivalent Circuit Menu. You can open the equivalent circuit analysis menu by
pressing 4Display5 and choosing MORE EQUIV KIT MENU . This menu provides such options
as for calculating the equivalent circuit parameters or simulating the equivalent circuit's
characteristics under swept frequency.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4Display5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Softkey Label
Description
SELECT EQV CKT [ ] Opens the Select Equivalent Circuit Menu, which
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DISP EQV PARM [ ]
DEFINE EQV PARAMS
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CALCULATE EQV PARAMS
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SIMULATE F-CHRST
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
RETURN
lets you to select one of the ve supported circuit
models.
Shows or hides the equivalent circuit constants.
Opens the Dene Equivalent Circuit Parameter
Menu, which lets you enter the equivalent circuit
parameter values.
Calculates the equivalent circuit parameters. While
the calculation is being performed, a message
Calculating EQV parameters is displayed. After
the calculation is completed, the values of the
equivalent parameters are displayed.
Simulates the frequency characteristics by using the
current equivalent circuit parameters and shows
simulation results on the screen using memory trace.
In other words, simulation results are stored into the
memory trace.
Returns to the previous menu.
Analyzing the Measurement Results 8-53
Typical Impedance Measurement Techniques
Select Equivalent Circuit Menu. This menu lets you to select one of the ve supported circuit
models. The 4395A calculates the parameter values within the range you specied using the
marker search function.
Softkey Label
Description
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CKT A Selects equivalent circuit A, which is used to
simulate inductors with high core loss.
B Selects equivalent circuit B, which is used to
simulate inductors in general and resistors.
C Selects equivalent circuit C, which is used to
simulate high-value resistors.
D Selects equivalent circuit D, which is used to
simulate capacitors.
E Selects equivalent circuit E, which is used to
simulate resonators.
CALCULATE EQV PARAMS Same as CALCULATE EQV PARAMS in the Equivalent
Circuit Menu.
SIMULATE F-CHRST Same as SIMULATE F-CHRST in the Equivalent
Circuit Menu.
RETURN Returns to the Equivalent Circuit Menu.
NNNNN
NNNNN
NNNNN
NNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Dene Equivalent Circuit Parameter Menu. This menu lets you enter the equivalent circuit
parameter values.
Softkey Label
Description
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Sets R1 value.
Sets C1 value.
Sets L1 value.
Sets C0 value.
Same as SIMULATE F-CHRST in the Equivalent
Circuit Menu.
RETURN Returns to the Equivalent Circuit Menu.
PARAMETER R1
C1
L1
C0
SIMULATE F-CHRST
NNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
As shown in Table 8-4, each equivalent circuit model is suitable for analyzing specic type(s) of
device.
8-54 Analyzing the Measurement Results
Typical Impedance Measurement Techniques
Table 8-4. Equivalent Circuit Selection Guide
Equivalent Circuit
Typical Frequency
Characteristics
Type of Devices
A
Inductors with high core loss
B
Inductors and resistors
C
High-value resistors
D
Capacitors
E
Resonators
Analyzing the Measurement Results 8-55
Typical Impedance Measurement Techniques
Using the Equivalent Circuit Analysis Function
Calculating Approximate Values of Equivalent Circuit Constants.
1. Press 4Display5 and choose MORE EQUIV CKT MENU to display the equivalent circuit menu.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Choose SELECT CKT [ ] to display the equivalent circuit models.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Select one of the following:
Type of DUT
Softkey
Coils with high core loss
Coils in general / Resistors
High-value resistors
Capacitors
Resonators
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CKT A
B
C
D
E
NNNNN
NNNNN
NNNNN
NNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Choose CALCULATE EQV PARAM to calculate the equivalent circuit parameters.
After a beep, the calculated equivalent parameters are displayed on the screen. To hide
the equivalent parameters, press 4Display5 and choose MORE EQUIV CKT MENU . Then toggle
DISP EQV PARM [ON] to [OFF] .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
You can simulate a frequency characteristic trace from the equivalent circuit parameters
obtained and compare it with the measured trace.
5. Press 4Display5 MORE EQUIV CKT MENU .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6. Choose SIMULATE F-CHRST .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
After a beep, the simulated trace is displayed. The simulated trace is stored in the memory
trace. To turn o the simulated trace, press 4Display5 and choose DISPLAY [ ] DISPLAY: DATA .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Simulating a Trace from the Equivalent Circuit Parameters. You can also simulate the
frequency characteristics of an equivalent circuit by entering its parameters.
1. Press 4Display5 and choose MORE EQUIV CKT MENU to display the equivalent circuit menu.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Choose SELECT EQV CKT [ ] to display the equivalent circuit models.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Select the equivalent circuit model. Then choose RETURN .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Choose DEFINE EQV PARAMS .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. Enter the equivalent circuit parameter value for the activated parameters.
6. Choose SIMULATE F-CHRST to simulate the frequency characteristics.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
After a beep, the simulated frequency characteristics are displayed.
8-56 Analyzing the Measurement Results
Typical Impedance Measurement Techniques
Determining Q Value Using the Width Search Function
The width search function analyzes a resonator and displays the center point, width, and
quality factor (Q) for the specied bandwidth.
To use the width search function, open the Widths Menu by pressing 4Search5 and choosing
WIDTH [ ] . The Widths Menu provides access to a submenu called Width Value Menu, which
lets you specify the bandwidth search criteria.
These two menus are described in this section.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Widths Menu
This menu controls the width search function.
Softkey Label
Description
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SEARCH IN Searches for the cut-o point on the trace that is
within the current cut-o points.
SEARCH OUT Searches for the cut-o point on the trace outside
the current cut-o points.
WIDTHS on OFF Turns on the width search feature and calculates the
center frequency of a lobe on the trace, width, Q,
and cut-o point deviation from the center stimulus
value. The cut-o point that denes the width
parameters is set using the WIDTH VALUE softkey.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The 1marker is automatically changed to the
tracking 1marker when WIDTHS is turned on. When
WIDTHS is ON, the (normal) 1marker cannot be
selected.
WIDTH VALUE Sets a measurement value of a cut-o point that
denes the start and stop points for a width search.
The width search feature analyzes the center point
and the width between the trace down from (or up
to) the anti-resonance point or resonance point and
the quality factor (Q) for the resonator. Width units
are in the units of the current format.
RETURN Returns to the Search Menu.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Width Value Menu
This menu lets you specify the search criteria for the width search function.
Analyzing the Measurement Results 8-57
Typical Impedance Measurement Techniques
Softkey Label
Description
p
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
MKRVAL/( 2) Sets the width value to the value that equals the
marker value divided by square root of 2.
p
MKRVAL*( 2) Sets the width value to the value that equals the
marker value multiplied by square root of 2.
MKRVAL/2 Sets the width value to the value that equals the
marker value divided by 2.
FIXD VALUE Makes the width value the active function and sets
the width value to the value specied by this
softkey.
RETURN Returns to the Widths Menu.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure 8-31 shows an example of using the bandwidth search function.
Figure 8-31. Q Measurement Examples
Using the Anti-Resonance Point
1. Press 4Search5 to make the marker active.
2. Toggle SEARCH TRK on OFF to ON off . Then choose MAX to move the marker to the
anti-resonance point on the trace.
3. Press 4Search5 and choose WIDTH [ ] WIDTH VALUE MKRVAL/(p2) RETURN .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Toggle WIDTH on OFF to ON off . The width value, Q factor, and several parameters are
displayed on the screen.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Using the Resonance Point
1. Press 4Search5 to make the marker active.
2. Toggle SEARCH TRK on off to ON off . Then choose MIN to move the marker to the
resonance point on the trace.
3. Press 4Search5 and choose WIDTH [ ] WIDTH VALUE MKRVAL3(p2) RETURN .
4. Toggle WIDTH on OFF to ON off . The width value, Q factor, and several parameters are
displayed on the screen.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Using the Admittance Chart
1. Press 4Utility5 to make the marker active. Then choose SMTH/POLAR MENU G+jB to read
conductance and susceptance (assuming that the admittance circle has been displayed on
the admittance chart).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
8-58 Analyzing the Measurement Results
Typical Impedance Measurement Techniques
2. Press 4Search5 and toggle SEARCH TRK on OFF to ON off . Then choose MAX to move the
marker to the point where the G value is maximum on the trace (resonance point).
3. Press 4Search5 and choose WIDTH [ ] WIDTH VALUE MKRVAL/2 RETURN
4. Toggle WIDTH on OFF to ON off . The width value, Q factor, and several parameters are
displayed on the screen.
The 4395A searches half of the maximum conductance points on the admittance circle.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Port Extension
The 43961A impedance test kit has ACP-7 connectors that are intended for direct connection
with a test xture. However, you can use the 4395A's port extension feature to connect an
extension cable between the test kit and xture.
Note
You must determine the electrical length of the extension cable before using it
with the aid of the port extension feature.
Follow these steps:
1. Connect the cable to the APC-7 connector of the 43961A impedance test kit.
2. Press 4Cal5 and choose MORE PORT EXTENSION
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Choose EXTENSION VALUE and enter the equivalent electrical length using the numeric
keys.
4. Toggle EXTENSION on OFF to ON off .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. If the cable's velocity factor is known, you can set the cable length more accurately. To set
the velocity factor, press 4Cal5 and choose MORE VELOCITY FACTOR .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Analyzing the Measurement Results 8-59
Advanced Techniques for Optimizing
Measurements
9
This chapter introduces you to advanced measurement techniques on using the 4395A that
have not been covered in the previous chapters. It explains how to use these techniques to
optimize your measurement tasks.
Topics covered include:
Reducing sweep time (using list sweep)
Improving dynamic range
Adjusting the IF bandwidth
Using list sweep function
Performing GO/NO-GO test of a lter (using limit line)
Simultaneous measurement with dierent settings (using dual channel)
Stabilizing the trace
Advanced Techniques for Optimizing Measurements 9-1
Reducing Sweep Time (Using List Sweep)
Reducing Sweep Time (Using List Sweep)
The analyzer has a list sweep function that can sweep frequency according to a predened
sweep segment list. Each sweep segment is independent. For the network/impedance analyzer
mode, each segment can have a dierent number of sweep points, power level, and IF
bandwidth value. For the spectrum analyzer mode, each segment can have a dierent number
of points and RBW. Furthermore, the output voltage or current at DC SOURCE port can be set
for each segment in all analyzer modes (option 001 only). This section covers:
Planning the sweep list
Editing a sweep list
Executing the List Sweep
Planning the sweep list
1. Specify sweep segments.
A segment looks like a normal sweep setting. The list sweep function can combine up to 51
segments settings for network or impedance analyzer mode and 15 segments settings for
spectrum analyzer mode into 1 sweep.
You may want to use the list sweep function primarily to reduce the time required for
the sweep process. The 4395A does not require that the sweep segments be contiguous.
Therefore, you can speed up the sweep process using the following strategy:
Dierentiate the sweep range of interest from other sweep ranges in terms of the number
of points (Figure 9-1).
Figure 9-1. Reducing Sweep Time by Optimizing the Number of Display Points
2. Determine the following parameters before editing the sweep list.
Parameter
Description
Sweep Parameter
Frequency of each segment. Each segment cannot be continuous.
Zero span can be set.
Number of display points. You can adjust the display area for each
segment by setting this parameter. Total number of points for all
segments is 801 points maximum.
Number of points
9-2 Advanced Techniques for Optimizing Measurements
Reducing Sweep Time (Using List Sweep)
RBW
IF BW
Output Power
DC Voltage or
Current(Option 001)
This parameter is for the spectrum analyzer mode. You can set the
resolution bandwidth for the each segment individually. This is useful
if you want to display higher resolution only for the specic segment.
This parameter for the network analyzer and impedance analyzer
mode. You can set the IF bandwidth for each segment individually.
This is useful if you want to display higher dynamic range only for
the specic segment.
Output power from the RF OUT port of each segment. The allowable
range is 050 dBm to +15 dBm. (NA, ZA mode only)
DC output voltage or current from the DC SOURCE port on the front
panel.
Editing a Sweep List
1. Press 4Sweep5 SWEEP TYPE MENU EDIT LIST to call the sweep list editor.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Press EDIT to edit the sweep list.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure 9-2. List Sweep Editor
3. Enter the frequency range of the segment.
Move the marker to the start point. Then press SEGMENT: MKR!START .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Move the marker to the stopping point. Then press MKR!STOP .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Press 4Start5 to enter the start sweep parameter. Then press 4Stop5 to enter the stop sweep
parameter.
4. Press MORE NUMBER of POINTS . Then enter the number of points for the segment.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. Press POWER . Then enter the output power level for the segment. (NA, ZA mode only)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6. Set the internal lter bandwidth:
When in spectrum analyzer mode, press RES BW to set the resolution bandwidth.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Advanced Techniques for Optimizing Measurements 9-3
Reducing Sweep Time (Using List Sweep)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
When in network or impedance analyzer mode, press IF BW to set the IF bandwidth.
7. Press DC VOLTAGE or DC CURRENT and enter DC output voltage or current.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
8. Press RETURN SEGMENT DONE to complete editing the segment.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
9. Press ADD to edit the next segment.
NNNNNNNNNNN
10. Repeat steps 3 through 9 until you complete editing of all required segments.
11. When you nish editing all the segments, press LIST DONE to complete the sweep list.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The segments do not have to be entered in any particular order. The analyzer automatically sorts them in increasing
order of sweep parameter value.
Figure 9-3. Sweep List Edit Display
To Modify or Delete the Segment
1. Press 4Sweep5 SWEEP TYPE MENU EDIT LIST SEGMENT .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Select the segment you want to delete or modify:
Enter the segment number you want to modify. Then press 4215.
Move the cursor, \>", to the segment you want to modify by using the 4*5, the 4+5, or the
.
3. Do either of the following:
To
Press
Modify specied segment
Delete specied segment
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
EDIT
DELETE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. When you nish editing, press LIST DONE .
9-4 Advanced Techniques for Optimizing Measurements
Reducing Sweep Time (Using List Sweep)
Executing the List Sweep
1. Press 4Sweep5.
2. Press SWEEP TYPE MENU .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press LIST FREQ .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. If you use the DC output, press 4Source5. Then toggle DC OUT on OFF to ON off .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Notes
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
If you want to delete an edited sweep list, press 4Sweep5 SWEEP TYPE MENU EDIT LIST
CLEAR LIST CLEAR LIST YES LIST DONE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
You can save and recall the edited sweep list with all other instrument settings by pressing
STATE . See \To Save an Analyzer Setting or Measurement Data" in Chapter 8 for more
information.
4Save5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Advanced Techniques for Optimizing Measurements 9-5
Improving Dynamic Range (NA Mode)
Improving Dynamic Range (NA Mode)
This section introduces you two techniques for enhancing the dynamic range of 4395A. These
are:
Adjusting the IF Bandwidth
Using List Sweep
You can increase the dynamic range by applying the highest allowable power. The output
power can be set by pressing 4Source5 POWER .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Averaging can also enhance the dynamic range. See \To Use the Averaging Function" for
further information.
Adjusting the IF Bandwidth
Adjusting the IF bandwidth can lower the noise ower. For example, if you changed the IF
bandwidth to 1/10 of the current setting (say, 100 Hz instead of 1 kHz), the measurement noise
oor would lower by approximately 10 dB. This technique increases the dynamic range, but
slows down the sweep process.
1. Press 4Bw/Avg5.
2. Press IF BW .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press 4*5 or 4+5, or enter an IF bandwidth value directly from the numeric keypad.
IF Bandwidth 30 kHz
IF Bandwidth 100 Hz
Figure 9-4. Setting IF Bandwidth (IFBW)
9-6 Advanced Techniques for Optimizing Measurements
Improving Dynamic Range (NA Mode)
Using List Sweep
Figure 9-5 shows the sweep list modied from the list of the previous example(Figure 9-3) to
improve dynamic range. Segments 1 and 3 have a narrow IF bandwidth and a higher power
level for the stopband of the lter. Segment 2 has a wide IF bandwidth and lower power level
for passband.
1. Press 4Sweep5 SWEEP TYPE MENU EDIT LIST .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. To modify segment 1, press SEGMENT 415 4215 EDIT .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press POWER 15 4215 IFBW 30 4215 SEGMENT DONE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. To modify segments 2 and 3, see Figure 9-5 for the values and modify them in a manner
similar to steps 2 and 3.
5. Press LIST DONE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6. Press LIST FREQ .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure 9-5. Dynamic Range Enhancement
Advanced Techniques for Optimizing Measurements 9-7
Performing GO/NO-GO Test of a Filter (using limit line)
Performing GO/NO-GO Test of a Filter (using limit line)
The limit line is constructed by connecting the segment points as shown in Figure 9-6.
Figure 9-6. Limit Line Image
For example, if you want to specify four points for the limit test, the limit line image is as
shown in Figure 9-7. Each point has frequency information and an upper and a lower limit
value. Enter these values as described in the \Editing a Limit Line Table" procedure.
Figure 9-7. Frequency, Upper and Lower Limit
In this example, the limit line connects four limit points. If a measured trace exceeds the upper
or lower limit line, the limit test fails.
9-8 Advanced Techniques for Optimizing Measurements
Performing GO/NO-GO Test of a Filter (using limit line)
This section covers:
Planning the Limit Line
Editing a Limit Line Table
Executing a Limit Line Test
To Oset the Limit Line
Planning the Limit Lime
1. Determine the following parameters before editing the limit line:
Parameter
Description
Sweep Parameter
Upper Limit
Lower Limit
Frequency of each segment.
Upper limit level of each segment.
Lower limit level of each segment.
Editing a Limit Line Table
1.
2.
3.
4.
Set up the frequency range of the grid before starting the limit line edit.
If you want to use marker to set the segment, press 4Marker5.
Press 4System5.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNN
Press LIMIT MENU . Then toggle LIMIT LINE on OFF to ON . This makes it easier to
understand the status of the limit line while you are editing it.
5. Press EDIT LIMIT LINE to call the limit line editor.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6. If an old limit line table is still in the limit line editor, press CLEAR LIST CLEAR LIST YES
to clear it.
7. Press EDIT to edit the rst segment.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure 9-8. Limit Line Editor
8. Enter the frequency of the segment in one of the following ways:
Advanced Techniques for Optimizing Measurements 9-9
Performing GO/NO-GO Test of a Filter (using limit line)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Press SWP PARAM . Then enter the frequency of the segment.
Move the marker to the point you want to use as the frequency of the segment. Then
press MKR!SWP PARAM .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
9. Press UPPER LIMIT . Then enter a upper limit value.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
10. Press LOWER LIMIT . Then enter a lower limit value.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
11. Press DONE to end editing the segment.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
12. Press ADD to edit the next segment.
NNNNNNNNNNN
13. Repeat steps 7 through 11 until all segments are dened.
14. When you nish editing all segments, press DONE to complete editing the limit line table.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
You can enter the limit value using the middle and width method by pressing MIDDLE VALUE
and DELTA LIMIT . You then enter the amplitude value as a middle amplitude value with a
delta limit. The upper and lower limit lines appear at an equal positive and negative distance
from the specied middle amplitude.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To Modify or Delete the Segment
1. Press 4System5 LIMIT MENU EDIT LIMIT LINE SEGMENT .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Select the segment you want to delete or modify:
Enter the segment number you want to modify. Then press 4215.
Move cursor, \>", to the segment you want to modify by using the 4*5, the 4+5, or the
3. Do either of the following:
To
Press
Modify specied segment
Delete specied segment
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
EDIT
DELETE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Executing a Limit Line Test
To Make a Limit Line Test Active
1. Press 4System5.
2. Press LIMIT MENU .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Toggle LIMIT TEST on OFF to ON off .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
If the limit line test passes, a green PASS message appears on the right of the grid. If it fails, a
red FAIL message is displayed. You can set the analyzer to beep if the limit line test fails. (See
the \To Beep When the Limit Test is Failed" procedure.)
9-10 Advanced Techniques for Optimizing Measurements
.
Performing GO/NO-GO Test of a Filter (using limit line)
Figure 9-9. Limit Line Test
To Beep When the Limit Test is Failed
1. Press 4System5.
2. Press LIMIT MENU .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Toggle BEEP FAIL on OFF to ON off .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Advanced Techniques for Optimizing Measurements 9-11
To Oset the Limit Line
To Oset the Limit Line
1. Press 4System5 LIMIT MENU .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Press LIMIT LINE OFFSETS .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press the following keys:
To move line
Press
Horizontally
Vertically
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SWP PARAM OFFSET
AMPLITUDE OFFSET
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Then move the limit line by entering an oset value using one of the following:
To
Use
Move continuously
Move with steps
Enter oset value directly
4 5 4 5
* +
405
. . . 495 and unit keys
5. To move the limit line vertically to the marker position:
a. Press 4Marker5 Then move the marker to the point you want to set as the oset value.
b. Press 4System5 LIMIT MENU LIMIT LINE OFFSETS MKR! AMP. OFS. .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6. When you are nished osetting the limit line, press RETURN .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Before Oset
After Oset
Figure 9-10. Osetting Limit Lines
To clear the oset, enter 0 for all the oset values.
9-12 Advanced Techniques for Optimizing Measurements
Stabilizing the Trace
Stabilizing the Trace
When the trace is not stable and the marker value changes frequently, it is dicult to read the
measured value. You can use the following techniques to stabilize the trace:
Stop the sweep.
Use the averaging function.
Use the maximum or minimum hold function.
Capture the unstable signal using signal track.
To Stop the Sweep
1. Press 4Trigger5.
2. Press SWEEP: HOLD .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The sweep is stopped immediately (even if the sweep is in progress). If you want to restart the
sweep, press CONTINUOUS to start a free-run sweep or press SINGLE to make a single sweep.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To Use the Averaging Function
1. Press 4Bw/Avg5.
2. Press AVERAGING FACTOR .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. If needed, enter the averaging factor (number of times). Then press the 4215. Default
averaging factor is 16.
4. Toggle AVERAGING on OFF to ON off .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The averaging notation (Avg) appears on left side of the grid when averaging is turned on.
The averaging notation indicates the number of times averaging has been performed. When
averaging is completed, the counter stops incrementing. However, the trace continues updating
with each sweep.
Averaging requires a sweep with a specied number of times that is enough for an averaging
factor to complete the averaging. You can set the number of sweeps by using the number of
groups function.
If you want to change the setting of any parameter when averaging, you can restart averaging
from the 0 count.
To restart the averaging, press 4Bw/Avg5 AVERAGING RESTART . This resets averaging counter to
0.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To Use Maximum or Minimum Hold Function
1. Press 4Display5.
2. Press DATA HOLD [OFF] .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To Hold
Press
Maximum Level
Minimum Level
NNNNNNNNNNN
MAX
MIN
NNNNNNNNNNN
Advanced Techniques for Optimizing Measurements 9-13
Stabilizing the Trace
\Max" (or \Min") appears on the right of the grid when the maximum (minimum) hold function
is activated.
To turn o the maximum or minimum hold, press 4Display5 DATA HOLD [ ] HOLD: OFF .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure 9-11. Maximum Holding the Drifting Signal
To Capture an Unstable Signal Using Signal Track
1. Press 4Display5 DUAL CHAN on OFF to ON off .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Press 4Chan 15.
3. Press 4Search5.
4. Press SEARCH: PEAK to move the marker to the peak of the drifting test signal.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. Toggle SIGNAL TRK on OFF to ON off .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The signal track function captures the peak that is indicated by the marker and places it in the
center of the grid for each sweep. If the peak is unstable horizontally, use this function. The
analyzer automatically changes the center frequency to keep the peak in the center of the grid.
Figure 9-12 shows a display when signal track is ON at channel 1. Figure 9-13 shows a display
after the analyzer sweeps a few times. At channel 1, the center frequency has been changed to
maintain the drifting signal at the center of the display. Channel 2 shows that signal frequency
has drifted to a higher frequency.
9-14 Advanced Techniques for Optimizing Measurements
Stabilizing the Trace
Figure 9-12. Display When Starting Signal Track
Figure 9-13. Display After Signal Has Drifted
Advanced Techniques for Optimizing Measurements 9-15
10
Examples of Applications
This chapter contains example applications of the 4395A for each of network, spectrum, and
impedance analyzer modes.
Note
In this manual, the following abbreviations are used:
NA mode: Network analyzer mode
SA mode: Spectrum analyzer mode
ZA mode: Impedance analyzer mode
Network Measurement (NA Mode)
Filter transmission measurement
6 dB bandwidth
Ripple
Magnitude and phase characteristics
Expanded phase characteristics
Reection measurement
Return loss and reection coecient
Standing wave ratio (SWR)
S-parameters measurement
Impedance measurement
Admittance measurement
Gain compression measurement
Absolute output level measurement
Spectrum Measurement (SA Mode)
AM signal measurement
Carrier amplitude and frequency measurement using the marker
Modulating frequency and modulation index measurement using 1Marker
FM Signal Measurement
Frequency deviation of wide band FM signal
Impedance Measurement (ZA Mode)
Evaluation of a chip capacitor
Capacitance (C) and dissipation factor (D) under swept frequency
jZj and (Phase) under swept frequency
Equivalent circuit analysis
Evaluation of a crystal resonator
Readout of resonance frequency (Fr ) and crystal impedance (CI)
Equivalent circuit analysis
Admittance chart
Using the marker
Evaluation of a varactor diode - DC bias sweep using list sweep function
Measuring capacitance under DC bias conditions
Examples of Applications
10-1
Measuring Transmission Characteristics of a Filter (NA Mode)
Measuring Transmission Characteristics of a Filter (NA Mode)
Insertion loss and gain are ratios of the output to input signals. The following procedure
measures the insertion loss and gain of a 83.16 MHz SAW bandpass lter. This measurement can
be used to obtain the key lter parameters.
Measurement Setup
Connection
Set up the 4395A as shown in Figure 10-1.
Figure 10-1. Transmission Measurement Setup
Analyzer Settings
Press 4Preset5. Then set the analyzer's controls as follows:
Desired Settings
Key Strokes
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
MEASUREMENT block
Select Network Analyzer
4Meas5 ANALYZER TYPE NETWORK ANALYZER
ACTIVE CHANNEL block
Select channel 1
4Chan 1 5(default)
MEASUREMENT block
Select S21 (or B/R) measurement 4Meas5 S-PARAMETERS
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Trans:FWD S21 [B/R]
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
4Format5 FORMAT:LOG MAG
SWEEP block
10-2 Examples of Applications
(default)
IF BW 3 kHz
4Bw/Avg5 435 4k/m5
Center frequency 83.16 MHz
4Center5 485 435 4.5 415 465 4M/5
Span frequency 500 MHz
4Span5 455 405 405 4k/m5
Measuring Transmission Characteristics of a Filter (NA Mode)
Performing Calibration
Perform a frequency response calibration for this measurement as follows:
1. Press 4Cal5 CALIBRATE MENU RESPONSE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Connect a THRU calibration standard between the measurement cables in place of the DUT.
3. Press THRU to perform a frequency response calibration data measurement.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Press DONE: RESPONSE . ( CORRECTION on OFF is automatically set to ON off .)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Measurement
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Replace the THRU standard with the DUT. Press 4Scale Ref5 AUTO SCALE if the trace needs to be
rescaled. Note that the display shows the complete response of the bandpass lter under test.
Read Out Insertion Loss Using the Marker
1. Press 4Search5 MAX to move the marker to the maximum value of trace. The marker reads out
the insertion loss and displays it at the upper right of the display.
2. Press 4Marker5 1MODE MENU 1MKR to turn on the 1Marker (at the position of the marker).
NNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Enter 415 455 405 4k/m5 to move the marker to the point oset from the 1marker. The 1marker
value shows the relative attenuation at the oset position (see Figure 10-2).
Figure 10-2. Response of a SAW Filter
6 dB Bandwidth
The analyzer calculates the bandwidth of the DUT between two equal power levels. In this
example, it calculates the 06 dB bandwidth relative to the lter center frequency.
1. Press 4Search5 MAX to move the marker to the maximum value of the trace.
NNNNNNNNNNN
2. Press WIDTHS [OFF]
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
0
215.
4 5 465 4
3. Press WIDTHS on OFF to ON off . The analyzer calculates the 06 dB bandwidth, center
frequency, Q (Quality Factor), insertion loss, and dierences between the center frequency
and the cuto frequencies of the DUT. It then lists the results at the upper right hand of the
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Examples of Applications
10-3
Measuring Transmission Characteristics of a Filter (NA Mode)
display. Sub-marker 1 on the trace shows the passband center frequency while sub-markers
2 and 3 show the location of the 06 dB cuto points.
Figure 10-3. Using the Marker to Determine 6 dB Bandwidth
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To have the 4395A calculate the bandwidth between other power levels, select WIDTH VALUE
and enter the number (for example, enter 03 4215 for 03 dB).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Press 4Marker5 PRESET MKRS when you are nished with this measurement.
Ripple
Passband ripple is the variation in insertion loss over a specied portion of the passband.
1. Press 4Display5 DUAL CHAN on OFF to ON off to display channel 2 below channel 1.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Press 4Sweep5 COUPLED CH ON off to on OFF .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press 4Marker5 485 435 4.5 415 465 4M/5.
4. Press 4Marker!5 MKR!XCH MENU ZOOMING APERTURE 415 405 4215.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. Press MKR XCH ZOOM .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6. Press 4Chan 25 4Search5 MAX . Then press 4Marker!5 MKR!REFERENCE 4Scale Ref5 SCALE/DEV 415
4215 to magnify the trace and resolve the ripple.
7. Press 4Search5 SEARCH: PEAK . Then press 4Marker5 1MODE MENU 1MKR .
NNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
8. Press 4Search5 SEARCH: PEAK PEAK DEF MENU PEAK PLRTY POS neg to pos NEG . Then
press RETURN RETURN SEARCH: PEAK . The passband ripple is automatically given as the
peak-to-peak variation between the markers. The ripple value is displayed at the upper
right of the display. Depending on the peak size, you may need to dene the peak size using
the peak denition feature of the 4395A.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
10-4 Examples of Applications
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Measuring Transmission Characteristics of a Filter (NA Mode)
Figure 10-4. Using Peak Search to Determine Ripple
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Press 4Chan 15 4Marker5 PRESET MKRS , and 4Chan 25 4Marker5 PRESET MKRS when you are nished
with this measurement.
Measuring Phase Response
A two input ratio measurement can also provide information about the phase shift of a
network. The analyzer can translate this information into a related parameter, group delay.
With the same connection, instrument settings, and calibration used in the previous example
(see \Measurement Setup" in \Measuring Transmission Characteristics of a Filter (NA Mode)"),
make the following changes:
1. Press 4Chan 15 4Sweep5 COUPLED CH on OFF to ON off to couple sweep parameters of channel
2 to channel 1.
2. Press 4Chan 25 4Format5 PHASE to display the phase response on channel 2.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
If the trace needs to be rescaled, press 4Scale Ref5 and AUTO SCALE .
Figure 10-5 shows the phase response of the bandpass lter. Notice the linear phase shift
through the passband and the rapid uctuations that occur outside this region. The random
phase of the broadband noise oor causes the spurious out-of-band response.
This format displays phase over the range of 0180 to +180 degrees. As phase increases beyond
these values, a sharp 360 degree transition occurs in the display as the trace \wraps" between
+180 and 0180 degrees. This wrap causes the characteristic \sawtooth" display usually seen
on devices with linearly increasing (or decreasing) phase responses.
Examples of Applications
10-5
Measuring Transmission Characteristics of a Filter (NA Mode)
Figure 10-5. Amplitude and Phase Response of a SAW Filter
Using the Expanded Phase Mode
The 4395A can display phase beyond 6180 degrees.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Press 4Format5 EXP PHASE on OFF to
ON off . Then press 4Scale Ref5 AUTO SCALE . The phase is displayed with \no wrap" (see
Figure 10-6).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure 10-6. Expanded Phase Mode
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Press 4Format5 EXP PHASE ON off to on OFF to turn o the expanded phase mode.
10-6 Examples of Applications
Reection Measurement (NA)
Reection Measurement (NA)
When making a reection measurement, the 4395A monitors the signal going to the DUT and
uses it as the reference. It compares the reected signal from the DUT to the reference signal.
The ratio of the incident and reected signals is the reection coecient of the DUT or, when
expressed in decibels, the return loss.
Reection measurements require the connection of a directional device, such as a directional
coupler, to separate the power reected from the DUT. This separation is necessary so that it
can be measured independently of the incident power (see Figure 10-7).
Figure 10-7. Reection Measurement
Multi-Port Test Devices
When the device has more than one port, connect high-quality terminations (loads) to all unused DUT ports to
terminate them into their characteristic impedance (usually 50 or 75 ). If this is not done, reections o the unused
ports will cause measurement errors.
The S-parameter test set automatically switches the termination at the unused port for each S-parameter
measurement. When using a transmission/reection test set, terminate the unused input port of the analyzer with a
high quality load.
The signal reected from the DUT is measured as a ratio with the incident signal. It can
be expressed as a reection coecient, a return loss, or as SWR. These measurements are
mathematically dened as:
Examples of Applications
10-7
Reection Measurement (NA)
return loss(dB) = 020 log()
reected power
reection coecient =
incident power
= (magnitude only)
= 0 (magnitude and phase)
= S11 or S22 (magnitude and phase)
1+
SWR =
10
Measurement Setup
Connection
Set up the 4395A as shown in Figure 10-8.
Figure 10-8. Reection Measurement Setup
Analyzer Settings
Press 4Preset5. Then set the 4395A's controls as follows:
Desired Setting
Key Strokes
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
MEASUREMENT block
Select network analyzer
4Meas5 ANALYZER TYPE NETWORK ANALYZER
ACTIVE CHANNEL block
Select channel 1
4Chan 1 5
MEASUREMENT block
SWEEP block
(default)
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Select S11
4Meas5 S-PARAMETERS Refl:FWD S11 [A/R]
Select LOG MAG format
4Format5 FORMAT: LOG MAG
Center frequency 70 MHz
4Center5 475 405 4M/5
Span frequency 100 kHz
4Span5 415 405 405 4k/m5
(default)
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
(default)
Performing Calibration
Perform an S11 , 1-port calibration for this measurement. The following procedure is for using 7
mm standards.
10-8 Examples of Applications
Reection Measurement (NA)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
1. Press 4Cal5 CALIBRATE MENU S11 1-PORT .
2. Connect the OPEN standard to port 1. Then press [S11]: OPEN . (The softkey label OPEN
is underlined when the measurement is complete.)
3. Connect the SHORT standard to port 1. Then press SHORT . (The softkey label SHORT is
underlined when the measurement is complete.)
4. Connect the LOAD standard to port 1. Then press LOAD . (The softkey label LOAD is
underlined when the measurement is complete.)
5. Press DONE: 1-PORT CAL . ( CORRECTION on OFF is automatically set to ON off .)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Note
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The next example \S-Parameters Measurement" uses the calibration corrections
you just completed. Do not change the calibration settings before doing the
example.
Measurement
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Connect the DUT to the test set. Press 4Scale Ref5 AUTO SCALE if the trace needs to be rescaled.
Return Loss and Reection Coecient
The return loss characteristics are displayed in the Log Mag format in Figure 10-9. The
value inside the passband is greater than outside the passband. A large value for return loss
corresponds to a small reected signal just as a large value for insertion loss corresponds to a
small transmitted signal.
Figure 10-9. Return Loss
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To display the same data in terms of reection coecient, press 4Format5 MORE
FORMAT: LIN MAG . This redisplays the existing measurement in a linear magnitude format
that varies from 0=1.00 at the top of the display (100% reection) to 0.00 at the bottom of the
display (perfect match).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Examples of Applications
10-9
Reection Measurement (NA)
Standing Wave Ratio (SWR)
To display the reection measurement data as standing wave ratio (swr), press 4Format5 MORE
SWR . The analyzer reformats the display in the non-unit measure of SWR (with SWR = 1, a
perfect match, at the bottom of the display).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNN
Figure 10-10. SWR
10-10 Examples of Applications
Reection Measurement (NA)
S-Parameters Measurement
S-parameters S11 and S22 are no dierent from the measurements made in the previous section.
S11 is the complex reection coecient of the DUT's input. S22 is the complex reection
coecient of the DUT's output. In both cases, all unused ports must be properly terminated.
To display the trace on the polar chart, press 4Format5 POLAR CHART . The results of a typical
S11 measurement is shown in Figure 10-11. Each point on the polar trace corresponds to a
particular value of both magnitude and phase.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Polar Chart Shows Magnitude and Phase
Magnitude
The center of the circle represents a reection coecient 0 of 0, that is, a perfect match or no reected signal.
The outermost circumference of the scale represents a 0 = 1.00, or 100 % reection.
Phase
The 3 o'clock position corresponds to zero phase angle, that is, the reected signal is at the same phase as the
incident signal.
Phase dierences of 90, 180, and 270 degrees correspond to the 12, 9, and 6 o'clock positions on the polar
display, respectively.
Figure 10-11. S11 on Polar Chart
Data Readout Using the Marker
Press 4Marker5 and use the knob to position the marker at any desired point on the trace. Then
read the frequency, magnitude, and phase in the upper right hand corner of the display. Or,
enter the frequency of interest from the data entry key pad to read the magnitude and phase
at that point.
To read the marker data in logarithmic, linear, real/imaginary, impedance (R+jX), admittance
(G+jB), or SWR/phase formats, press 4Utility5 SMTH/POLAR MENU and select the desired format.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Examples of Applications
10-11
Reection Measurement (NA)
Impedance Measurement
The amount of power reection from a device is directly related to the impedance values of
both the device and the measuring system. In fact, each value of the reection coecient (0)
uniquely denes a device impedance. For example:
0=0 occurs when the device and test set impedance are the same.
A short circuit has a reection coecient of 0=1 6 180 (=01).
An open circuit has a reection coecient of 0=1 6 0 (=1).
Every other value for 0 also corresponds uniquely to a complex device impedance, according to
the equation:
1+0
Zn =
100
Where Zn is the DUT impedance normalized to (that is, divided by) the measuring system's
characteristic impedance (usually 50 or 75 ). The network analyzer has a default impedance
of 50 . To set the impedance to 75 , press 4Cal5 MORE SET Z0 . The network analyzer uses
the formula above to convert the reection coecient measurement data to impedance data.
1. Press 4Format5 SMITH CHART . The display shows the complex impedance of the DUT over the
frequency range selected.
2. Press 4Marker5 to turn on the marker. Then use the knob to read the resistive and reactive
components of the complex impedance at any point along the trace. The marker displays a
complex impedance readout.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure 10-12. Impedance Measurement
10-12 Examples of Applications
Reection Measurement (NA)
Admittance Measurement
1. Press 4Format5 MORE ADMITTANCE CHART . The display shows the complex impedance of the
DUT over the frequency range selected.
2. Use the knob to read the resistive and reactive components of the complex impedance at
any point along the trace. The marker displays complex impedance readout.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure 10-13. Admittance Measurement
Examples of Applications
10-13
Gain Compression Measurement (NA)
Gain Compression Measurement (NA)
An important measure of active circuits is how well they handle a signal frequency with a
varying input amplitude. By using the power sweep function in the network analyzer mode,
measurements such as gain compression or automatic gain control slope can be made.
Measurement Setup
Connection
Set up the 4395A as shown in Figure 10-14.
Figure 10-14. Gain Compression Measurement Setup
10-14 Examples of Applications
Gain Compression Measurement (NA)
Analyzer Settings
Press 4Preset5. Then set the 4395A's controls as follows:
Desired Settings
Key Strokes
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
MEASUREMENT block
Select network analyzer
4Meas5 ANALYZER TYPE NETWORK ANALYZER
ACTIVE CHANNEL block
Select channel 1
4Chan 15
(default)
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
MEASUREMENT block
Select S21 (or B/R) measurement 4Meas5 S-PARAMETERS
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Trans:FWD S21 [B/R]
SWEEP block
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
(default)
Select LOG MAG format
4Format5 FORMAT: LOG MAG
IF BW 1 kHz
4Bw/Avg5 415 4k/m5
Select power sweep
4Sweep5 SWEEP TYPE MENU POWER SWEEP
CW frequency 250 MHz
4Source5 CW FREQ 425 455 405 4M/5
Start power 05 dBm
4Start5 4 5 455 4
Stop power 15 dBm
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
0
215
4Stop5 415 455 4215
Performing Calibration
Perform a power response calibration for this measurement as follows:
1. Press 4Cal5 CALIBRATION MENU RESPONSE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Connect a THRU calibration standard between the measurement cables in place of the DUT
(see Figure 10-14).
3. Press THRU to perform a power response calibration data measurement.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Press DONE: RESPONSE . ( CORRECTION on OFF is automatically set to ON off .)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Measurement
5. Replace the THRU standard with the DUT.
6. Press 4Scale Ref5 AUTO SCALE if the trace needs rescaling.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
7. Press 4Search5 MAX to move the marker to the maximum point on the trace.
NNNNNNNNNNN
8. Press 4Marker5 1MODE MENU 1MKR to set the 1marker to the maximum point.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
9. Press 4Search5 TARGET
Figure 10-15.)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
0
215 to search for the point of the gain compression.
4 5 415 4
(See
Examples of Applications
10-15
Gain Compression Measurement (NA)
Figure 10-15. Gain Compression
Absolute Output Level Measurement
The analyzer can show the characteristics input level versus output level by using the absolute
measurement capability in the network analyzer mode.
1. Press 4Marker5 MKR [UNCOUPLE] to MKR [COUPLE] to couple the marker between both
channels.
2. Press 4Chan 25 4Meas5 MORE B to select the absolute measurement at the B input.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNN
3. Press 4Display5 DATA MATH [DATA] OFFSET . Then input the value of the attenuator that
is connected between the DUT and the B input. In this example measurement, a 30 dB
attenuator is used. Therefore, enter 30 4215.
4. The 4395A displays the input versus output power levels. The marker shows the input and
output power levels at the 01 dB gain compression point.
5. Press 4Display5 DUAL CHAN on OFF to ON off to display both channel (see Figure 10-16).
Note that you must subtract 6 dB from the input value readout. This is necessary because
the input signal is attenuated by the power splitter that is between the RF OUT and the
DUT.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
10-16 Examples of Applications
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Gain Compression Measurement (NA)
Figure 10-16.
Input vs. Output Power Level at the 01 dB Gain Compression Point
Examples of Applications
10-17
AM Signal Measurement (SA)
AM Signal Measurement (SA)
In this example, the following parameters for AM signal measurement are derived:
Carrier amplitude (Ec ) and frequency (fc )
Modulating frequency (fm ) and modulation index (m)
Test Signal
The following test signal is used in this example:
AM Signal
Frequency (fc ): 100 MHz
Modulating signal frequency (fm ): 10 kHz
Measurement Setup
Connection
Connect the test signal source to the R input port.
Analyzer Settings
Press 4Preset5. Then set the 4395A's controls as follows:
Desired Setting
Key Strokes
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
MEASUREMENT block
Select Spectrum Analyzer
4Meas5 ANALYZER TYPE SPECTRUM ANALYZER
ACTIVE CHANNEL block
Select channel 1
4Chan 1 5(default)
MEASUREMENT block
Select R input port
4Meas5 SPECTRUM: R
SWEEP block
Center frequency 100 MHz
4Center5 415 405 405 4M/5
Span frequency 200 kHz
4Span5 425 405 405 4k/m5
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
(default)
Carrier Amplitude and Frequency Measurement Using the Marker
Press 4Scale Ref5 and enter the reference value if the trace needs rescaling.
1. Press 4Search5 to turn the marker on.
2. Press MAX to search for the carrier signal. The carrier amplitude and frequency are
displayed in the upper right corner as shown in Figure 10-17.
NNNNNNNNNNN
10-18 Examples of Applications
AM Signal Measurement (SA)
Figure 10-17. Carrier Amplitude and Frequency of AM Signal
The marker shows that the carrier amplitude (Ec ) is 020.305 dBm and frequency (fc ) is 100
MHz.
Modulating Frequency and Modulation Index Measurement Using 1Marker
3. Press 4Marker5 1MODE MENU 1MKR .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Press 4Search5 SEARCH: PEAK NEXT PEAK to search for a sideband. The oset value from the
carrier is displayed as the marker sweep parameter value shown in Figure 10-18. This value
is the modulation frequency.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure 10-18. Modulating Frequency of AM Signal
The 1marker shows that the sideband amplitude value relative to the carrier is 019.708 dB (see
Figure 10-18). The modulation index (m) can be derived from the following equation:
20
m = 2 2 10 1Mkr
= 20:68%
Examples of Applications
10-19
AM Signal Measurement (SA)
where 1Mkr is the 1marker value shown in Figure 10-18.
10-20 Examples of Applications
FM Signal Measurement (SA)
FM Signal Measurement (SA)
This example describes how to derive the frequency deviation (1fpeak ) value.
Test Signal
The following test signal is used in this example:
Wide band FM Signal
Carrier frequency: 100 MHz.
Modulating frequency: 1 kHz.
Frequency deviation: 1 MHz.
Measurement Setup
Connection
Connect the test signal to the R input port.
Analyzer Settings
Press 4Preset5. Then set the 4395A's controls as follows:
Desired Setting
Key Strokes
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
MEASUREMENT block
Select Spectrum Analyzer
4Meas5 ANALYZER TYPE SPECTRUM ANALYZER
ACTIVE CHANNEL block
Select channel 1
4Chan 15(default)
MEASUREMENT block
Select R input port
4Meas5 SPECTRUM: R
Reference scale level 010 dBm
4Scale/Ref5 4 5 415 405 4
Center frequency 100 MHz
4Center5 415 405 405 4M/5
Span frequency 5 MHz
4Span5 455 4M/5
RBW 300 Hz
4Bw/Avg5 435 405 405 4
SWEEP block
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
0
(default)
215
215
Frequency Deviation of Wide Band FM Signal
Press 4Scale Ref5 and enter reference value if the trace needs rescaling.
Frequency Deviation
1. Press 4Search5 SEARCH: PEAK .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Press 4Marker5 1MODE MENU 1MKR .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press 4Search5 SEARCH: PEAK NEXT PEAK .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Examples of Applications
10-21
FM Signal Measurement (SA)
Figure 10-19. Wide Band FM Signal Measurement
The frequency deviation (1fpeak ) can be derived roughly from the following equation:
j1M krj
1fpeak =
2
where 1Mkr is the marker sweep parameter value shown in Figure 10-19. In this example, the
frequency deviation is about 987.5 kHz.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Press 4Marker5 PRESET MKRS when you are nished with this measurement.
Carrier Level and Modulating Frequency
The carrier level and modulating frequency can be derived using a method similar to the AM
signal measurement. In this example, the zooming function is used to measure the carrier and
the adjacent signal.
1. Press 4Marker5 415 405 405 4M/5 to put the maker on the carrier frequency.
2. Press 4Marker!5 ZOOMING APERTURE 405 4.5 425 4215.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press MKR ZOOM to zoom up to the carrier signal.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Press 4Bw/Avg5 415 405 4215.
5. Press 4Scale Ref5 and enter reference vale if the trace needs rescaling.
6. Press 4Marker5 415 405 405 4M/5 to move the marker to the career frequency. The carrier
amplitude can be read as the marker value.
7. Press 4Marker5 1MODE MENU 1MKR to put the 1maker on the carrier.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
8. Press 4Search5 SEARCH: PEAK NEXT PEAK LEFT (or NEXT PEAK RIGHT ) to move the marker
to the sideband.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
10-22 Examples of Applications
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FM Signal Measurement (SA)
Figure 10-20. Zooming Carrier Signal of FM Signal
Examples of Applications
10-23
Evaluation of a Chip Capacitor (ZA Mode)
Evaluation of a Chip Capacitor (ZA Mode)
As a typical application of impedance analyzer mode, this example shows how to evaluate the
impedance characteristics of a chip under swept frequency. Also, it shows how to determine
the equivalent circuit parameters of a chip capacitor using the equivalent circuit analysis
function of the 4395A. Note that using the 4395A as an impedance analyzer requires the
43961A Impedance Test Kit as well as Option 010.
Measurement Setup
Connection
Set up the 4395A as shown in Figure 10-21.
Figure 10-21. Connecting the Impedance Test Kit
Analyzer Settings
Press 4Preset5. Then set the 4395A's controls as follows:
10-24 Examples of Applications
Evaluation of a Chip Capacitor (ZA Mode)
Desired Settings
Key Strokes
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
MEASUREMENTblock
Select impedance analyzer mode 4Meas5 ANALYZER TYPE
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
IMPEDANCE ANALYZER
ACTIVE CHANNELblock
Select channel 1
4Chan 15(default)
SWEEPblock
Select LOG FREQ mode.
4Sweep5 SWEEP TYPE MENU
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
SWEEP TYPE: LOG FREQ
Sweep start frequency 100 kHz
4Start5 415 405 405 4k/m5
Sweep stop frequency 500 MHz
4Stop5 455 405 405 4M/5
Output level 0.5 dBm
4Source5 POWER 4.5 455 4
IF bandwidth 300 Hz
Averaging factor 8
FFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFF
215
215
4Bw/Avg5 IF BW 435 405 405 4
AVERAGING FACTOR 485 4215
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
AVERAGING on OFF (to ON off )
Calibration
A proper calibration is requisite for the 4395A to perform measurements within the guaranteed
accuracy range. Calibrating the 4395A for impedance analyzer mode requires three dierent
terminations: 0 S (OPEN), 0 (SHORT), and 50 (LOAD).
Note
Be sure to use the calibration kit included in the 43961A package.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
1. Press 4Cal5 and choose CALIBRATE MENU .
2. Connect the 0S termination to the OUTPUT port, and choose OPEN . Wait until the OPEN
softkey's label is underlined to indicate that the OPEN calibration is complete.
3. Remove the 0S termination.
4. Connect the 0 termination to the OUTPUT port, and choose SHORT . Wait until the SHORT
softkey's label is underlined to indicate that the SHORT calibration is complete.
5. Remove the 0 termination.
6. Connect the 50 termination to the OUTPUT port, and choose LOAD . Wait until the LOAD
softkey's label is underlined to indicate that the LOAD calibration is complete.
7. Choose DONE: CORRECTION .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
8. Make sure that a \Cor" marker is displayed at the left-hand edge of the screen.
Connecting the Test Fixture
The test xture used in this example is the 16192A Parallel Electrode SMD Test Fixture.
Connect the test xture to the test kit referring to the documentation for the 16192A Parallel
Electrode SMD Test Fixture.
Examples of Applications
10-25
Evaluation of a Chip Capacitor (ZA Mode)
Figure 10-22. Connecting the Test Fixture
Setting the Electrical Length of the Test Fixture
Connecting a test xture adds an extra electrical length to the test circuit. This electrical
length, which is specic to the test xture you use, must be known to the 4395A so that it can
compensate for the extra electrical length and eliminate errors due to phase shifts.
The 4395A incorporates a database of Agilent test xtures with their own electrical lengths.
This database contains the electrical length of the 16192A test xture.
To set the electrical length of the test xture, follow these steps:
1. Press 4Meas5.
2. Choose FIXTURE [NONE] SELECT FIXTURE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. As the model number for the test xture you are going to use, select 16192 .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Choose RETURN .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. A \Del" marker appears at the left edge of the screen.
Fixture Compensation
Fixture compensation is a process that calibrates the 4395A with a test xture installed,
thereby eliminating errors produced between the test xture electrode and the impedance test
kit's OUTPUT port.
Normally, the 4395A must be xture-compensated for the OPEN and SHORT circuit states. It
can optionally be xture-compensated for the LOAD state.
Note
For how to connect standard devices, refer to the documentation that comes
with the test xture you use.
To carry out xture compensation, follow these steps:
10-26 Examples of Applications
Evaluation of a Chip Capacitor (ZA Mode)
1. Press 4Cal5 and choose FIXTURE COMPEN COMPEN MENU .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Make sure that the test circuit is in the open state.
3. Choose OPEN . Wait until the OPEN softkey's label is underlined to indicate that the OPEN
compensation is complete.
4. Connect the appropriate short device to the test xture.
5. Choose SHORT . Wait until the SHORT softkey's label is underlined to indicate that the
SHORT compensation is complete.
6. Choose DONE: COMPEN .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
7. Check that a \Cmp" marker is displayed in place of the \Cor" marker.
Capacitance and Dissipation Factor under Swept Frequency
Setting Measurement Parameters
To begin impedance measurement, the 4395A must know which characteristics it should
measure and how it should report the measured values.
1. Press 4Chan 15 to activate Channel 1.
2. Press 4Meas5 and choose MORE 1/5 MORE 2/5 MORE 3/5 SER(Cs) to instruct the 4395A to
measure Cs (serial capacitance) for Channel 1.
3. Press 4Chan 25 to activate Channel 2.
4. Press 4Meas5 and choose MORE 4/5 D FACTOR(D) to instruct the 4395A to measure D
(dissipation factor) for Channel 2.
5. Press 4Bw/Avg5 AVERAGING FACTOR 485 4215.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6. Toggle AVERAGING on OFF to ON off .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
7. Press 4Display5 and toggle DUAL CHAN on OFF to ON off to turn ON the dual channel
function.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Measurement
Connect the DUT to the test xture referring to the documentation that comes with the
16192A test xture.
Press 4Chan 15 4Scale Ref5 AUTO SCALE , 4Chan 25 4Scale Ref5 AUTO SCALE if the trace needs rescaling.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Examples of Applications
10-27
Evaluation of a Chip Capacitor (ZA Mode)
Figure 10-23.
Cs and D Characteristics of a Chip Capacitor under Swept Frequency
jZj and (Phase) under Swept Frequency
Follow these steps:
1. Press 4Chan 15 to activate Channel 1.
2. Press 4Meas5 and choose MORE 5/5 IMPEDANCE: |Z| to instruct the 4395A to measure jZj
for Channel 1.
3. Press 4Format5 and choose FORMAT: LOG Y-AXIS .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Press 4Scale Ref5 and choose AUTO SCALE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. Press 4Chan 25 to activate Channel 2.
6. Press 4Meas5 and choose z .
NNNNNNN
7. Press 4Scale Ref5 and choose AUTO SCALE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The 4395A displays the jZj and characteristics under swept frequency, as shown in
Figure 10-24.
10-28 Examples of Applications
Evaluation of a Chip Capacitor (ZA Mode)
Figure 10-24.
jZj and Characteristics of a Chip Capacitor under Swept Frequency
Equivalent Circuit Analysis
The 4395A provides a function that automatically calculates approximate values of specic
parameters of an equivalent circuit that corresponds to a DUT. This function supports ve
circuit models. In addition, the resulting parameter values can be used to simulate the
frequency-based characteristics of the equivalent circuit; this allows you to compare the
simulated characteristics with the actually measured characteristics.
To analyze equivalent circuit parameters, follow these steps:
1. Press 4Display5 and choose MORE EQUIV CKT MENU to access the equivalent circuit menu.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Choose SELECT EQV CKT [A] and select D as the equivalent circuit model to use.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNN
3. Choose CALCULATE EQV PARAMS to calculate the parameters of the equivalent circuit.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Preceded by a beep, the values of the equivalent circuit parameters appear at the bottom of
the screen.
Figure 10-25. Equivalent Circuit Parameters
Examples of Applications
10-29
Evaluation of a Chip Capacitor (ZA Mode)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To hide the equivalent circuit parameters from the screen, press 4Display5, choose MORE
EQUIV CKT MENU . Then choose DISP EQV PARM [ON] so that the softkey label changes to
[OFF] .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
You may wish to use the resulting parameter values to simulate the frequency-based
characteristics of the equivalent circuit and compare them with the actually measured
characteristics. To do so, follow these steps:
4. Press 4Display5.
5. Choose MORE EQUIV CKT MENU SIMULATE F-CHRST .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Preceded by a beep, the simulation results appear on the screen. They are also stored in the
trace memory.
Figure 10-26.
Simulation of Frequency-based Characteristics Using Resulting
Equivalent Circuit Parameters
You can simulate the frequency-based characteristics with desired parameter values you
dened. Press 4Display5 MORE EQUIV CKT MENU DEFINE EQV PARAMS , enter each parameter
values using R1 , C1 , L1 ,and C0 ,and then press SIMULATE F-CHRST .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNN NNNNNNNN NNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To hide the simulation results from the screen, press 4Display5 and choose DISPLAY [DATA&MEM]
DISPLAY: DATA for both 4Chan 15 and 4Chan 25.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
10-30 Examples of Applications
Evaluation of a Crystal Resonator (ZA Mode)
Evaluation of a Crystal Resonator (ZA Mode)
Measurement Setup
Connection
Connect the 4395A with the 43961A Impedance Test Kit in the same procedure as described in
\Evaluation of a Chip Capacitor (ZA Mode)".
Analyzer Settings
Press 4Preset5. Then set the 4395A's controls as follows:
Desired Settings
Key Strokes
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
MEASUREMENT block
Select impedance analyzer mode 4Meas5 ANALYZER TYPE
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
IMPEDANCE ANALYZER
ACTIVE CHANNEL block
Select channel 1
4Chan 15(default)
SWEEP block
Center frequency 24 MHz
4Center5 425 445 4M/5
Span frequency 200 kHz
4Span5 425 405 405 4k/m5
Output level 0.5 dBm
4Source5 POWER 4.5 455 4x15
IF bandwidth 300 Hz
4Bw/Avg5 IF BW 435 405 405 4
Averaging factor 8
FFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFF
215
AVERAGING FACTOR 485 4215
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
AVERAGING on OFF (to ON off )
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Calibration
Calibrate the 4395A as described in \Evaluation of a Chip Capacitor (ZA Mode)".
Connecting the Test Fixture
The test xture used in this example is the 16092A Spring Clip Test Fixture. Connect the test
xture to the test kit referring to the documentation for the 16092A Spring Clip Test Fixture.
Setting the Electrical Length of the Test Fixture
Connecting a test xture adds an extra electrical length to the test circuit. This electrical
length, which is specic to the test xture you use, must be known to the 4395A so that it can
compensate for the extra electrical length and eliminate errors due to phase shifts.
Although the 4395A incorporates a database of Agilent test xtures with their own electrical
lengths, the 16092A test xture is not contained in this database. Therefore, you need to
manually set its electrical length.
Follow these steps:
1. Press 4Meas5.
2. Choose FIXTURE [NONE] MODIFY [NONE] DEFINE EXTENSION .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. The 16092A test xture has an electrical length of 0.0034 m. To enter this electrical length,
press 4.5 405 405 435 445 4215.
Examples of Applications
10-31
Evaluation of a Crystal Resonator (ZA Mode)
4. Choose LABEL FIXTURE ERASE TITLE . Press 415 465 405 495 425, and then choose DONE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. Choose KIT DONE (MODIFIED) .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6. A \Del" marker appears at the left edge of the screen.
Fixture Compensation
Carry out xture compensation as described in \Evaluation of a Chip Capacitor (ZA Mode)".
Setting Measurement Parameters
1. Press 4Chan 15 to activate Channel 1.
2. Press 4Meas5 and check that IMPEDANCE: MAG(|Z|) is currently selected.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press 4Format5 and choose LOG Y-AXIS .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Press 4Chan 25 to activate Channel 2.
5. Press 4Meas5 and check that z is currently selected.
NNNNNNN
6. Press 4Format5 and check that FORMAT: LIN Y-AXIS is currently selected.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
7. Press 4Bw/Avg5 AVERAGING FACTOR 485 4215.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
8. Toggle AVERAGING on OFF to ON off .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
9. Press 4Display5 and toggle DUAL CHAN on OFF to ON off to turn OFF the dual channel
display.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Measurement
Connect the DUT to the test xture referring to the documentation that comes with the
16092A Spring Clip Test Fixture.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
If the trace needs rescaling, press 4Scale Ref5 and choose enter AUTO SCALE after activating
Channel 1 with 4Chan 15 key.
Figure 10-27. Frequency-based Characteristics of a Crystal Resonator
10-32 Examples of Applications
Evaluation of a Crystal Resonator (ZA Mode)
Readout of Resonance Frequency (Fr ) and Crystal Impedance (CI)
1. Press 4Chan 25 to activate Channel 2.
2. Press 4Search5 and toggle SEARCH TRK on OFF to ON off to turn ON the search track
function.
3. Choose TARGET .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Press 405 4215 and choose SEARCH LEFT .
The marker moves to the zero phase (0 ) point on the lower-frequency side. This is the point
at which the resonance frequency (Fr ) and crystal impedance (CI) occur.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure 10-28. Readout of the Fr and CI Values of a Crystal Resonator
Equivalent Circuit Analysis
The 4395A supports the 4-element equivalent circuit model, which is suitable for evaluating
crystal resonator.
1. Press 4Display5 and choose MORE EQUIV CKT MENU to access the equivalent circuit menu.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Choose SELECT EQV CKT [A] and select E as the equivalent circuit model to use.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNN
3. Choose CALCULATE EQV PARAMS to calculate the parameters of the equivalent circuit.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Preceded by a beep, the values of the equivalent circuit parameters appear at the bottom of
the screen.
Examples of Applications
10-33
Evaluation of a Crystal Resonator (ZA Mode)
Figure 10-29. Equivalent Circuit Parameters
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To hide the equivalent circuit parameters from the screen, press 4Display5 MORE EQV CKT MENU
and toggle DISP EQV PARM [ON] to [OFF] .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
You may wish to use the resulting parameter values to simulate the frequency-based
characteristics of the equivalent circuit and compare them with the actually measured
characteristics. To do so, follow these steps:
4. Press 4Display5 and choose MORE EQUIV CKT MENU SIMULATE F-CHRST .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To hide the simulation results from the screen, press 4Display5 and choose DISPLAY [DATA&MEM]
DISPLAY: DATA for both channels.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure 10-30.
Simulation of Frequency-based Characteristics Using Resulting
Equivalent Circuit Parameters
10-34 Examples of Applications
Evaluation of a Crystal Resonator (ZA Mode)
Admittance Chart
1. If the results of equivalent circuit simulation are currently displayed for Channel 1, hide the
results by pressing 4Chan 15 4Display5 and choosing DISPLAY [DATA&MEM] DISPLAY: DATA
RETURN MORE EQUIV CKT MENU DISP EQV PARM [ON] .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. With the marker located at the resonance frequency (Fr ) point, press 4Marker!5 and choose
MKR!CENTER to set the sweep center frequency to the resonance frequency.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press 4Chan 15 4Meas5 and choose MORE [1/5] ADMITTNCE: MAG(|Y|) .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Press 4Format5 and choose COMPLEX PLANE to select the complex plane format.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. Press 4Display5 and choose DUAL CHAN ON off to on OFF to turn OFF the dual channel
display.
6. Press 4Scale Ref5 and choose AUTO SCALE to rescale the trace.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
7. Adjust the span by pressing 4Span5 and then 4+5 or 4*5. If the number of sweep points is
so small that the admittance chart does not form a circular shape, increase the number of
sweep points by pressing 4Sweep5 and choosing NUMBER OF POINTS then pressing 4*5. (Press
4Scale Ref5 AUTO SCALE if required.)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
On a complex plane, the measurement parameters are always expressed as complex numbers
even if you have selected a scalar parameter such as jYj.
Figure 10-31. Admittance Chart for a Crystal Resonator
Using the Marker
1. To move the marker, press 4Marker5 and turn the rotary knob.
The real and imaginary parts of the complex number that corresponds to the marker position
are shown at the upper left corner of the grid area (see Figure 10-31).
If necessary, press 4Scale Ref5 and rescale the trace.
Examples of Applications
10-35
Evaluation of a Varactor Diode - DC Bias Sweep Using List Sweep Function (ZA Mode)
Evaluation of a Varactor Diode - DC Bias Sweep Using List
Sweep Function (ZA Mode)
This section provides an example application of impedance analyzer mode in which the 4395A's
internal DC source (Option 001) is controlled through the list sweep function to evaluate the
characteristics of a varactor diode under DC bias conditions.
Measurement Setup
Connection
Connect the 4395A with the 43961A Impedance Test Kit in the same procedure as described
in \Evaluation of a Chip Capacitor (ZA Mode)". Connect the BNC(m)-BNC(m) cable included
in the 43961A package between the 4395A's DC SOURCE connector and the 43961A's DC
SOURCE Input connector.
Analyzer Settings
Press 4Preset5. Then set the 4395A's controls as follows:
Desired Settings
Key Strokes
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
MEASUREMENT block
Select impedance analyzer mode 4Meas5 ANALYZER TYPE
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
IMPEDANCE ANALYZER
ACTIVE CHANNEL block
Select channel 1
4Chan 1 5(default)
MEASUREMENT block
Cp (parallel capacitance)
4Meas5 MORE 1/5 MORE 2/5 MORE 3/5
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
CAPACITANCE: PRL(C p)
Averaging factor 8
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
215
4Bw/Avg5 AVERAGING FACTOR 485 4
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
AVERAGING on OFF (to ON off )
SWEEP block
Hold trigger
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
4Trigger5 SWEEP: HOLD
Dening the Sweep List
The list sweep function controls the sweep process in accordance with a user-dened sweep
list. To dene the sweep list, follow these steps:
1. Press 4Source5 and check that DC source output is turned o. (Softkey label must be
DC OUT on OFF ).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Check that DC SRC [VOLTAGE] (voltage mode) is currently selected.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Choose DC CURRENT LIMIT and press 415 405 4k/m5 to set the upper limit current to 10
mA . (Note that you may need to specify a greater or smaller value depending on the
specications of the actual DUT).
4. Press 4Sweep5 and choose SWEEP TYPE MENU EDIT LIST to begin editing the sweep list.
First, you dene segment 1 of the sweep list.
5. Choose ADD SEGMENT: START and press 435 405 405 4M/5. This denes both start and stop
frequency for segment 1 to be 300 MHz, and instructs the 4395A to keep the frequency for
segment 1 constant at 300 MHz.
6. Do not change the number of points. (default value is 2)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
10-36 Examples of Applications
Evaluation of a Varactor Diode - DC Bias Sweep Using List Sweep Function (ZA Mode)
7. Choose MORE POWER and press 405 415 435 4215 to set the power for segment 1 to 013 dBm.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
8. Choose DC VOLTAGE and press 405 425 485 4215 to set the DC bias voltage for segment 1 to
028 V.
9. Choose RETURN SEGMENT DONE to nish dening segment 1.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
10. Repeat steps 4 through 8 above for each of segments 2 through 15, increasing the DC bias
voltage in 2 V increments from one segment to another. Note that, when you add a new
segment by choosing ADD , the new segment inherits the denitions for the immediately
preceding segment. Therefore, you can create the sweep list by just changing the DC
SOURCE setting for each subsequent segment.
NNNNNNNNNNN
Table 10-1. Sweep List for Evaluating a Varactor Diode
Segment Number Start Frequency Stop Frequency Measuring Point Power IF Bandwidth DC Bias Voltage
1
300 MHz
300 MHz
2
2
300 MHz
300 MHz
2
3
300 MHz
300 MHz
2
4
300 MHz
300 MHz
2
5
300 MHz
300 MHz
2
6
300 MHz
300 MHz
2
7
300 MHz
300 MHz
2
8
300 MHz
300 MHz
2
9
300 MHz
300 MHz
2
10
300 MHz
300 MHz
2
11
300 MHz
300 MHz
2
12
300 MHz
300 MHz
2
13
300 MHz
300 MHz
2
14
300 MHz
300 MHz
2
15
300 MHz
300 MHz
2
013 dBm
013 dBm
013 dBm
013 dBm
013 dBm
013 dBm
013 dBm
013 dBm
013 dBm
013 dBm
013 dBm
013 dBm
013 dBm
013 dBm
013 dBm
2 Hz
2 Hz
2 Hz
2 Hz
2 Hz
2 Hz
2 Hz
2 Hz
2 Hz
2 Hz
2 Hz
2 Hz
2 Hz
2 Hz
2 Hz
028 V
026 V
024 V
022 V
020 V
018 V
016 V
014 V
012 V
010 V
08 V
06 V
04 V
02 V
00 V
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
11. When you have nished dening segment 15, choose LIST DONE to exit from edit mode.
12. Choose LIST FREQ to set the sweep mode to list sweep.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Calibration
Calibrate the 4395A as described in \Evaluation of a Chip Capacitor (ZA Mode)".
Caution
Do not attempt to perform calibration or xture compensation while the 4395A
is applying external DC bias. Doing so could damage the calibration or xture
compensation standard.
Examples of Applications
10-37
Evaluation of a Varactor Diode - DC Bias Sweep Using List Sweep Function (ZA Mode)
Connecting the Test Fixture
Connect the 4395A with the 16192A Test Fixture as described in \Evaluation of a Chip
Capacitor (ZA Mode)".
Setting the Electrical Length of the Test Fixture
Set the electrical length of the 16192A Test Fixture as described in \Evaluation of a Chip
Capacitor (ZA Mode)".
Fixture Compensation
Carry out xture compensation as described in \Evaluation of a Chip Capacitor (ZA Mode)".
Measuring Capacitance under DC Bias Conditions
1. Connect the DUT.
2. Press 4Source5 and toggle DC OUT on OFF to ON off .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure 10-32. Characteristics of a Varactor Diode under DC Bias Sweep
In this example, you learned how to evaluate the capacitance characteristics of a varactor
diode under DC voltage bias conditions using the list sweep function. Other possible
applications of the list sweep function include evaluating the capacitance of a capacitor under
DC voltage bias conditions and evaluating the characteristics of a coil under DC current bias
conditions.
10-38 Examples of Applications
11
Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
These specications are the performance standards or limits against which the instrument
is tested. When shipped from the factory, the 4395A meets the specications listed in this
section. The performance test procedures are covered in the 4395A Service Manual.
Specications describe the instrument's warranted performance over the temperature range
of 0 C to 40 C (except as noted). Supplemental characteristics are intended to provide
information that is useful in applying the instrument by giving non-warranted performance
parameters. These are denoted as SPC (supplemental performance characteristics), typical or
nominal . Warm up time must be greater than or equal to 30 minutes after power on for all
specications.
Network Measurement
Source Characteristics
Frequency Characteristics
Range : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 10 Hz to 500 MHz
Resolution : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 1 mHz
Frequency reference
Accuracy
at 2365 C, referenced to 23 C : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <65.5 ppm
Aging : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <62.5 ppm/year (SPC)
Initial achievable accuracy : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <61.0 ppm (SPC)
Temperature stability
at 2365 C, referenced to 23 C : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <62ppm (SPC)
Precision frequency reference (option 1D5)
Accuracy
at 0 C to 40 C, referenced to 23 C : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <60.13 ppm
Aging : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <60.1 ppm/year (SPC)
Initial achievable accuracy : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <60.02 ppm (SPC)
Temperature stability
at 0 C to 40 C, referenced to 23 C : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <60.01 ppm (SPC)
Output Characteristics
Power range : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 050 dBm to +15 dBm
Level accuracy
at 0 dBm output, 50 MHz, 2365 C, : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 61.0 dB
Level linearity
Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
11-1
Network Measurement
Output Power
040 dBm
< 040 dBm
Linearity1
61.0 dB
61.5 dB
1 at relative to 0 dBm output, 50 MHz, 2365 C
Flatness
at 0 dBm output, relative to 50 MHz, 2365 C : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 62 dB
Resolution : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 0.1 dB
Spectral Purity Characteristics
Harmonics
at +10 dBm output : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <030 dBc
Non-harmonics spurious
at +10 dBm output : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <030 dBc
Noise sidebands
at 10 kHz oset from carrier : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <095 dBc/Hz
Power sweep range : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 20 dB max.
Power sweep linearity
deviation from linear power referenced to the stop power level : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 60.5 dB
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 50 nominal
Impedance
Return loss
frequency 200 MHz : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : >15 dB (SPC)
frequency > 200 MHz : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : >7 dB (SPC)
Connector : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Type N female
11-2 Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
Network Measurement
Receiver Characteristics
Input Characteristics
Frequency range : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 10 Hz to 500 MHz
Input attenuator : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 0 to 50 dB, 10 dB step
Full scale input level (R,A,B)
Attenuator setting [dB]
Full scale input level1 [dBm]
0
10
20
30
40
50
0
+10
+20
+30
+30
010
1 Note that it is dierent from the full scale input level in
spectrum measurement.
IF bandwidth (IFBW)
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 2, 10, 30, 100, 300, 1 k, 3 k, 10 k, 30 kHz
Note: The IFBW should be set equal to or less than 1/5 of the lowest frequency in the sweep
range.
Noise level (referenced to full scale input level, 2365 C)
at 10 Hz frequency < 100 Hz, IFBW=2 Hz : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 085 dB (SPC)
at 100 Hz frequency < 100 kHz, IFBW=10 Hz : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 085 dB
at 100 kHz frequency, IFBW=10 Hz : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : (0115 + f/100 MHz)dB
Input crosstalk
for input R . . . +10 dBm input, input attenuator: 20 dB
for input A, B . . . input attenuator: 0 dB
at frequency<100 kHz
R through A, B : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <0100 dB
others : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <0100 dB (SPC)
at frequency100 kHz
R through A, B : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <0120 dB
others : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <0120 dB (SPC)
Source Crosstalk (for input A, B)(typical for input R)
at +10 dBm output, <100 kHz , input attenuator: 0 dB : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <0100 dB
at +10 dBm output, 100 kHz , Input attenuator: 0 dB : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <0120 dB
Impedance change by multiplexer switching
at Input attenuator 0 dB : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <0.5 % (SPC)
at Input attenuator 10 dB and above : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <0.1 % (SPC)
Connector : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Type N female
Impedance : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 50 nominal
Return loss
10 Hz frequency < 100 kHz
100 kHz frequency 100 MHz
100 MHz < frequency
0 dB
25 dB1
25 dB1
15 dB1
Input attenuator
10 dB
20 dB to 50 dB
25 dB1
25 dB
15 dB
25 dB1
25 dB1
15 dB1
1 SPC
Maximum input level
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : +30 dBm (at input attenuator: 40 dB or 50 dB)
Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
11-3
Network Measurement
Maximum safe input level
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : +30 dBm or
67 Vdc (SPC)
Magnitude Characteristics
Absolute amplitude accuracy (R, A, B)
at 010 dBm input, input attenuator: 10 dB, frequency 100 Hz, IFBW3 kHz, 2365 C,
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <61.5 dB
Ratio accuracy (A/R, B/R) (typical for A/B)
at 010 dBm input, input attenuator: 10 dB, IFBW3 kHz, 2365 C,
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <62 dB
Dynamic accuracy (A/R, B/R) (typical for A/B)
Input Level
(relative to full scale input level)
0 dB input level > 010 dB
010 dB input Level 060 dB
060 dB > input level 080 dB
080 dB > input level 0100 dB
Dynamic Accuracy1
frequency 100 Hz
60.4 dB
60.05 dB
60.3 dB
63 dB
1 A input level (B input level for B/R)= full scale input level 010 dB, R input
level (B input level for A/B)= full scale input level 010 dB, IFBW = 10 Hz,
2365 C
At the following points, measurement error may exceed the specications:
124.0 MHz, 136.0 MHz, 415.0 MHz
Figure 11-1. Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy
11-4 Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
Network Measurement
Residual responses : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <080 dB full scale input level (SPC)
Trace noise (A/R, B/R, A/B)
at 50 MHz, 020 dBm input, both inputs: full scale input level 010 dB, IFBW=300 Hz
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <0.005 dB rms (SPC)
Stability (A/R, B/R, A/B) : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : < 60.01 dB/ C (SPC)
Phase Characteristics
Measurements format : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Standard format, Expanded phase format
Frequency response (deviation from linear phase) (A/R, B/R) (SPC for A/B)
at 010 dBm input, input attenuator: 10 dB, IFBW3 kHz, 2365 C
:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::<
Dynamic accuracy (A/R, B/R) (SPC for A/B)
Input Level
(relative to full scale input level)
0 dB input level > 010 dB
010 dB input level 060 dB
060 dB > input level 080 dB
080 dB > input level 0100 dB
612
Dynamic Accuracy1
frequency 100 Hz
63
60.3
61.8
618
1 A input level (B input level for B/R) = full scale input level 010 dB, R input
level (B input level for A/B) = full scale input level 010 dB, IFBW = 10 Hz,
2365 C
At the following points, measurement error may exceed the specications:
124.0 MHz, 136.0 MHz, 415.0 MHz
Figure 11-2. Phase Dynamic Accuracy
Trace noise (A/R, B/R, A/B)
at 50 MHz, 020 dBm input, both inputs: full scale input level 010 dB, IFBW=300 Hz
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <0.04 rms (SPC)
Stability (A/R, B/R, A/B) : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : < 60.1 / C (SPC)
Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
11-5
Network Measurement
Group Delay Characteristics
Aperture [Hz]
Accuracy
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 0.25 % to 20 % of span
In general, the following formula can be used to determine the accuracy, in seconds, of a
specic group delay measurement:
P haseAccuracy [degree]
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Aperture
[Hz ]2360[ degree]
Sweep Characteristics
Sweep type : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Linear frequency, Log frequency, Power, List frequency
Trigger type : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Hold, Single, Number of groups, Continuous
Trigger source : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Internal (free run), External, Manual, GPIB (bus)
Event trigger : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : On point, On sweep
NOP(Number of Points) : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 2 to 801
Measurement Throughput 1
(msec, SPC, IFBW=30 kHz, after through calibration)
Measurement points
Amplitude
Amplitude/Phase
51
75
75
201
165
215
401
305
400
801
580
770
Includes system retrace time and RF switching time. Add 80 msec at start frequency < 5
MHz.
1
11-6 Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
Spectrum Measurement
Spectrum Measurement
Frequency Characteristics
Frequency range : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 10 Hz to 500 MHz
Frequency readout accuracy
AN [H z ]
))
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 6((freq readout[Hz ]) 2 (freq ref accuracy) + RBW [Hz ] + SP
(NOP 01)
where NOP means number of display points
Frequency reference
Accuracy
at 2365 C, referenced to 23 C : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <65.5 ppm
Aging : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <62.5 ppm/year (SPC)
Initial achievable accuracy : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <61.0 ppm (SPC)
Temperature stability
at 2365 C, referenced to 23 C : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <62 ppm (SPC)
Precision frequency reference (option 1D5)
Accuracy
at 0 C to 40 C, referenced to 23 C : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <60.13 ppm
Aging : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <60.1 ppm/year (SPC)
Initial achievable accuracy : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <60.02 ppm (SPC)
Temperature stability
at 0 C to 40 C, referenced to 23 C : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <60.01 ppm (SPC)
Resolution bandwidth (RBW)
Range
3 dB RBW at span > 0 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 1 Hz to 1 MHz, 1-3 step
3 dB RBW at span = 0
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 3k, 5k, 10k, 20k, 40k, 100k, 200k, 400k, 800k, 1.5M, 3M, 5MHz
Selectivity (60 dB BW / 3 dB BW)
at span > 0 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <3
Mode : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Auto or Manual
Accuracy
at span > 0 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <610%
at span = 0 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <630%
Video bandwidth (VBW)
Range
at span > 0 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 3 mHz to 3 MHz, 1-3 step, 0.003 VBW/RBW 1
Noise sidebands
(Carrier Frequency: 10 MHz, 100 MHz, 500 MHz)
Oset from Carrier
1 kHz
100 kHz
Noise Sidebands
097 dBc/Hz
0110 dBc/Hz
<
<
Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
11-7
Spectrum Measurement
Figure 11-3. Noise Sidebands
Amplitude Characteristics
Amplitude range : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : displayed average noise level to +30 dBm
Reference value setting range : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 0100 dBm to +30 dBm
Level accuracy
at 020 dBm input, 50MHz, input attenuator: 10 dB, 2365 C : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <60.8 dB
Frequency response
at 020 dBm input, input attenuator: 10 dB, referenced to level at 50 MHz, 2365 C
frequency 100 Hz : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <61.3 dB
frequency < 100 Hz : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <63.0 dB
Amplitude delity1
Log scale2
Input level
(dB to full scale input level)
0 to 030 dB
030 to 040 dB
040 to 050 dB
050 to 060 dB
060 to 070 dB
070 to 080 dB
11-8 Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
Amplitude Fidelity
60.05 dB
60.07 dB
60.15 dB
60.35 dB
60.8 dB
61.8 dB
Spectrum Measurement
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <63%
Amplitude delity shows an extent of nonlinearity referenced to the full scale input level
010 dB.
2
RBW=10 Hz, 020 dBm reference value +30 dBm, referenced to full scale input
level010 dB, input attenuator: auto, 2365 C
Note: Refer to Input attenuator part for the denition of full scale input level.
Linear scale2
1
Displayed average noise level
at reference value040 dBm, input attenuator: auto or 0 dB
at frequency1 kHz : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 0120 dBm/Hz
at 100 kHz : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 0133 dBm/Hz
at 10 MHz1 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : (0145 + frequency/100 MHz) dBm/Hz
1
at start frequency 10 MHz
Figure 11-4. Typical Displayed Average Noise Level
On-screen dynamic range
Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
11-9
Spectrum Measurement
Figure 11-5. Typical On-screen Dynamic Range (Center: 50 MHz)
Spurious responses
Second harmonic distortion (2365 C)
at single tone input with full scale input level010 dB, input signal frequency 100 kHz
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <070 dBc
Third order inter-modulation distortion (2365 C)
at two tones input with full scale input level016 dB, separation 100 kHz
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <070 dBc
Other spurious (2365 C)
at single tone input with full scale input level010 dB, input signal frequency 500 MHz,
RBW 100 kHz, 1KHz frequency oset 300MHz
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <070 dBc
(<060 dBc (SPC) if there are input signals in the following frequency range:
14.7 MHz to 15.9 MHz, 29.5 MHz to 31.7 MHz, 414.7 MHz to 415.9 MHz)
Residual response
at reference value setting 040 dBm, input attenuator: auto or 0 dB : : : : : : : : : : <0108 dBm
See \EMC" under \Others" in \Common to Network/Spectrum/Impedance Measurement".
Typical dynamic range
11-10 Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
Spectrum Measurement
Figure 11-6. Typical Dynamic Range at Inputs R, A, and B
Input attenuator
Setting range : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 0 dB to 50 dB, 10 dB step
Attenuator Setting
Full Scale Input Level1
0 dB
10 dB
20 dB
30 dB
40 dB
50 dB
0 dBm
+10 dBm
+20 dBm
+30 dBm
020 dBm
010 dBm
1 Note that it is dierent from the full scale input level in
network measurement.
Mode : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Auto or Manual
(In auto mode, the attenuator is set to minimum value which ensures full scale input level
reference level)
Input attenuator switching uncertainty
30 dB, referenced to 10 dB : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <61.0 dB
40 dB, referenced to 10 dB : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <61.5 dB
Temperature drift : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : <60.05 dB/ C (SPC)
at attenuator:
at attenuator:
Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
11-11
Spectrum Measurement
Scale
Log : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 0.1 dB/div to 20 dB/div
Linear
at watt : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 1.0 2 10012 W/div
at volt : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 1.0 2 1009 V/div
Measurement format : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Spectrum or Noise (/Hz)
Display unit : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : dBm, dBV, dBV, V, W
Sweep Characteristics
Sweep type : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Linear frequency, List frequency
Trigger type : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Hold, Single, Number of groups, Continuous,
Trigger source : : : : : : : : : Internal (free run), External, Manual, Level gate(Option 1D6), Edge
gate(Option 1D6), GPIB (bus)
Sweep time (excluding each sweep setup time)
RBW
SPAN
Typical Sweep Time
1 MHz
100 kHz
10 kHz
1 kHz
100 Hz
10 Hz
1 Hz
|
500 MHz
100 MHz
10 MHz
1 MHz
100 kHz
10 kHz
1 kHz
Zero Span
180 ms
300 ms
240 ms
190 ms
270 ms
2.0 s
11 s
|1
1 See the next item for sweep time at zero span
Zero span
RBW
Minimum Resolution
Maximum Sweep Time
5 MHz
100 kHz
3 k Hz
40 ns
1.28 s
40.96 s
1.28 ms
81.92 ms
2.62 s
Number of display points
at span > 0 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 2 to 801 points (automatically set)
at span = 0 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 2 to 801 points (selectable)
Input Characteristics
Input Port
Crosstalk
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : R, A, B
from any input to other inputs, at the same input attenuator settings
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :<
0100 dB (SPC)
Connector : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Type N female
Impedance : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 50 nominal
Return Loss
10 Hz frequency < 100 kHz
100 kHz frequency 100 MHz
100 MHz < frequency
1 (SPC)
11-12 Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
0 dB
25 dB1
25 dB1
15 dB1
Input Attenuator
10 dB
20 dB to 50 dB
25 dB1
25 dB
15 dB
25 dB1
25 dB1
15 dB1
Spectrum Measurement
Input Level : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : +30 dBm max. at input attenuator: 50 dB
Maximum safe input level : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : +30 dBm or 67 Vdc (SPC)
Specications when Option 1D6 Time-Gated spectrum analysis is installed
All specications are identical to the standard 4395A except the following items.
Gate length
Range : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 6 s to 3.2 s
Resolution
Range of Gate Length(Tl )
6 sTl 25 ms
25 ms<Tl 64 ms
64 ms<Tl 130 ms
130 ms<Tl 320 ms
320 ms<Tl 1.28 s
1.28 s<Tl 3.2 s
Resolution
0.4 s
1 s
2 s
5 s
20 s
100 s
Gate delay
Range : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 0.8 s to 3.2 s
Resolution
Range of Gate Delay (Td )
0.8 sTd 25 ms
25 ms<Td 64 ms
64 ms<Td 130 ms
130 ms<Td 320 ms
320 ms<Td 1.28 s
1.28 s<Td 3.2 s
Resolution
0.4 s
1 s
2 s
5 s
20 s
100 s
Additional Amplitude Error
Log scale : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : < 0.3 dB (SPC)
Linear scale : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : < 3% (SPC)
Gate Control Modes : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Edge (positive/negative) or Level
Gate Trigger Input (External Trigger Input is used)
Connector : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : BNC female
level : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : TTL
Gate Output
Connector : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : BNC female
level : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : TTL
Specications when Option 1D7 50 to 75
Input Impedance Conversion is
installed
Insertion loss for Conversion Pad
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 5.7 dB nominal
Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
11-13
4395A Option 010 Impedance Measurement
4395A Option 010 Impedance Measurement
The following specications are applied when the 43961A Impedance Test Kit is connected to
the 4395A.
Measurement Functions
Measurement parameters
Display parameters
Z, Y, L, C, Q, R, X, G, B, jZj,z, R, X, jYj, y , G, B, j0j, , 0x, 0y, Cp, Cs, Lp, Ls, Rp, Rs, D,
Q
Display Formats
Vertical lin/log scale
Complex plane
Polar/Smith/admittance chart
Sweep Parameters
Linear frequency sweep
Logarithmic frequency sweep
List frequency sweep
Power sweep (in dBm unit)
IF Bandwidth
2, 10, 30, 100, 300, 1k, 3k, 10k, 30k [Hz]
Calibration
OPEN/SHORT/LOAD 3 term calibration
Fixture compensation
Port extension correction
Measurement Port Type
APC-7
Output Characteristics
Frequency range : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 100 kHz to 500 MHz
Frequency resolution : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 1 mHz
Output impedance : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 50 nominal
Output Level
when the measurement port is terminated by 50 1 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 056 to +9 dBm
when the measurement port is open : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 0.71 mVrms to 1.26 Vrms
1
Note: When the measurement port is terminated with 50 , the signal level at the
measurement port is 6 dB lower than the signal level at the RF OUT port.
11-14 Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
4395A Option 010 Impedance Measurement
Resolution : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 0.1 dB
Level accuracy
frequency < 1 MHz : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 6(A + 3 [dB])
frequency 1 MHz : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 6(A + 1 [dB])
where, A is the sum total of level accuracy, level linearity, and level atness specications
for output characteristics of network measurement.
Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
11-15
Measurement Basic Accuracy (Supplemental Performance Characteristics)
Measurement Basic Accuracy (Supplemental Performance
Characteristics)
Measurement accuracy is specied at the connecting surface of the APC-7 connector of the
43961A under the following conditions: 1
Warm up time : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : > 30 minutes
Ambient temperature
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 23 C 6 5 C,
within 61 C from the temperature at which calibration is performed
Signal level (setting) : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 0 to +15 dBm
Correction : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : ON
IFBW (for calibration and measurement) : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 300 Hz
Averaging factor (for calibration and measurement) : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 8
1
At the following points, measurement error may exceed the performance described in this
section:
124.0 MHz, 136.0 MHz, 415.0 MHz
11-16 Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
Measurement Basic Accuracy (Supplemental Performance Characteristics)
Figure 11-7. Impedance Measurement Accuracy
jZj - Accuracy
jZj accuracy
accuracy
Za = A + (B=jZm j + C 2 jZm j) 2 100 [%]
a = sin01 (Za =100)
Where, jZm j is jZj measured. A, B, and C are obtained from Figure 11-7.
Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
11-17
Measurement Basic Accuracy (Supplemental Performance Characteristics)
jYj - Accuracy
jYj accuracy
Ya = A + (B 2 jYm j + C=jYmj) 2 100 [%]
a = sin01 (Ya =100)
accuracy
Where, jYm j is jYj measured. A, B, and C are obtained from Figure 11-7.
R - X Accuracy (Depends on D)
Accuracy
D 0.2
Ra
6Xm 2 Xa =100 [
]
Xa
Xa [%]
Where,
D can be calculated as:
5<D
Ra=cos [%]
Ra [%]
Xa =sin [%]
6Rm 2 Ra =100 [
]
R=X , or
R=(2f 2 Ls ), or
R 2 2f
can be calculated as:
0.2 < D 5
2 Cs
tan01 (X=R), or
tan01 (2f
2 Ls =R), or
tan01 (1=(R 2 2f 2 Cs ))
Ra = A + (B=jRm j + C 2 jRmj) 2 100 [%]
Xa = A + (B=jXm j + C 2 jXm j) 2 100 [%]
Rm and Xm are the measured R and X, respectively. A, B, and C are obtained from Figure 11-7.
G - B Accuracy (Depends on D)
Accuracy
D 0.2
Ga
6Bm 2 Ba =100 [S]
Ba
Ba [%]
Where,
D can be calculated as:
5<D
Ga =cos [%]
Ga [%]
Ba =sin [%]
6Gm 2 Ga =100 [S]
G=B , or
G=(2f 2 Cp ), or
G 2 2f
can be calculated as:
0.2 < D 5
2 Lp
tan01 (B=G), or
tan01 (2f
2 Cp=G), or
tan01 (1=(G 2 2f 2 Lp ))
Ga = A + (B 2 jGm j + C=jGmj) 2 100 [%]
Ba = A + (B 2 jBm j + C=jBm j) 2 100 [%]
11-18 Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
Measurement Basic Accuracy (Supplemental Performance Characteristics)
Gm and Bm are the measured G and B, respectively. A, B, and C are obtained from Figure 11-7.
D Accuracy
Accuracy
D 0.2
Da
Za =100
(Za =100) 2 (1 + D2 )
Accuracy
D 0.2
0.2 < D
La
La =100
La (1 + D)
0.2 < D
Where, Za is jZj accuracy.
L Accuracy (Depends on D)
Where, La = A + (B=jZl j + C 2 jZl j) 2 100 [%]
jZl j = 2f 2 Lm, f is frequency in Hz, and Lm is measured L. A, B, and C are obtained from
Figure 11-7.
C Accuracy (Depends on D)
Accuracy
D 0.2
0.2 < D
Ca
Ca
Ca (1 + D)
Where, Ca = A + (B=jZc j + C 2 jZcj) 2 100 [%]
jZc j = (2f 2 Cm )01, f is frequency in Hz, and Cm is measured C. A, B, and C are obtained from
Figure 11-7.
Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
11-19
Common to Network/Spectrum/Impedance Measurement
Common to Network/Spectrum/Impedance Measurement
Display
LCD
Size/Type : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 8.4 inch color LCD
Number of pixels : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 640 2 480
Eective Display Area : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 160 mm 2 115 mm(600 2 430 dots)
Number of display channels : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 2
Format : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : single, dual (split or overwrite)
Number of traces
For measurement : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 2 traces
For memory : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 2 traces
Data math : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : gain 2 data 0 oset,
gain 2 (data 0 memory) 0 oset,
gain 2 (data + memory) 0 oset,
gain 2 (data/memory ) 0 oset
Data hold : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Maximum hold, Minimum hold
Marker
Number of markers
Main marker : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 1 for each channel
Sub-marker : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 7 for each channel
1marker : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 1 for each channel
Hard copy
Mode
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Dump mode only (including color dump mode)
Storage
Built-in exible disk drive
Type : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 3.5 inch, 1.44 MByte or 720 KByte,
1.44 MByte format is used for disk initialization
Memory : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 512 KByte, can be backed up by ash memory
Backup Memory
Charge time : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 1 hour Typical
Operating time of the battery backup : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 72 hours Typical
GPIB
Interface
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : IEEE 488.1-1987, IEEE 488.2-1987,
Interface function
IEC 625, and JIS C 1901-1987 standards compatible.
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : SH1, AH1, T6, TE0, L4, LE0, SR1, RL1,
Data transfer formats
PP0, DC1, DT1, C1, C2, C3, C4, C11, E2
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : ASCII,
32 and 64 bit IEEE 754 Floating point format,
DOS PC format (32 bit IEEE with byte order reversed)
11-20 Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
Common to Network/Spectrum/Impedance Measurement
Printer parallel port
Interface : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : IEEE 1284 Centronics standard compliant
Printer control language : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP PCL3 Printer Control Language
Connector : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : D-SUB (25-pin)
Option 001 DC Voltage/Current Source
The setting of option 001 DC voltage/current source is independent of Channel 1 and Channel 2
settings.
Voltage
Range : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 040 V to +40 V
Resolution : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 1 mV
Current limitation
at Voltage setting = 025 V to +25 V : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 6100 mA
at Voltage setting = 040 V to 025 V, 25 V to 40 V : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 620 mA
Current
Range : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 020 A to 0100 mA, 20 A to 100 mA
Resolution : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 20 A
Voltage limitation
at Current setting = 020 mA to +20 mA : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 640 V
at Current setting = 0100 mA to 020 mA, 20 mA to 100 mA : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 625 V
Accuracy
Voltage
at 2365 C : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 6(0.1 % + 4 mV + Idc 1 [mA]25 [
] mV)
Current
at 2365 C : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 6(0.5 % + 30 A + Vdc 2 [V]/10 [k
] mA)
1
2
Probe Power
Output voltage
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : +15 V (300 mA),
current at DC source connector
voltage at DC source connector
012.6 V (160 mA), GND nominal
Specications When HP Instrument BASIC Is Operated
Keyboard : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : PS/2 style 101 English keyboard
Connector : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : mini-DIN
8 bit I/O port
Connector : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : D-SUB (15-pin)
Level : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : TTL
Number of Input/Output bit : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 4 bit for Input, 8 bit for Output
Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
11-21
Common to Network/Spectrum/Impedance Measurement
Figure 11-8. 8 bit I/O Port Pin Assignments
24-bit I/O Interface
Connector : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : D-SUB (36-pin)
Level : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : TTL
I/O : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 8-bit for input or output, 16-bit for output
Figure 11-9. 24-bit I/O Interface Pin Assignment
11-22 Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
Common to Network/Spectrum/Impedance Measurement
Pin No.
Table 11-1. Signal Source Assignment
Signal Name
Signal Standard
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
GND
INPUT1
OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
OUTPUT PORT A0
OUTPUT PORT A1
OUTPUT PORT A2
OUTPUT PORT A3
OUTPUT PORT A4
OUTPUT PORT A5
OUTPUT PORT A6
OUTPUT PORT A7
OUTPUT PORT B0
OUTPUT PORT B1
OUTPUT PORT B2
OUTPUT PORT B3
OUTPUT PORT B4
OUTPUT PORT B5
OUTPUT PORT B6
OUTPUT PORT B7
I/O PORT C0
I/O PORT C1
I/O PORT C2
I/O PORT C3
I/O PORT D0
I/O PORT D1
I/O PORT D2
I/O PORT D3
PORT C STATUS
PORT D STATUS
WRITE STROBE SIGNAL
32
33
+5V PULLUP
SWEEP END SIGNAL
34
35
36
0V
TTL level, pulse input (pulse width: 1s or above)
TTL level, latch output
TTL level, latch output
TTL level, latch output
TTL level, latch output
TTL level, latch output
TTL level, latch output
TTL level, latch output
TTL level, latch output
TTL level, latch output
TTL level, latch output
TTL level, latch output
TTL level, latch output
TTL level, latch output
TTL level, latch output
TTL level, latch output
TTL level, latch output
TTL level, latch output
TTL level, latch output
TTL level, latch output
TTL level, latch output
TTL level, latch output
TTL level, latch output
TTL level, latch output
TTL level, latch output
TTL level, latch output
TTL level, latch output
TTL level, input mode: LOW, output mode: HIGH
TTL level, input mode: LOW, output mode: HIGH
TTL level, active low, pulse output (width: 10 s;
typical)
TTL level, active low, pulse output (width: 20 s;
typical)
+5V
+5V, 100 mA MAX
TTL level, PASS: HIGH, FAIL: LOW, latch output
PASS/FAIL SIGNAL
PASS/FAIL WRITE STROBE TTL level, active low, pulse output (width: 10 s;
typical)
SIGNAL
Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
11-23
Common to Network/Spectrum/Impedance Measurement
General Characteristics
Input and Output Characteristics
External reference input
Frequency : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 10 MHz 610 ppm (SPC)
Level : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 05 dBm to +5 dBm (SPC)
Input impedance : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 50 nominal
Connector : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : BNC female
Internal Reference Output
Frequency : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 10 MHz nominal
Level : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 0 dBm (SPC)
Output Impedance : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 50 nominal
Connector : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : BNC female
Reference oven output (Option 1D5)
Frequency : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 10 MHz nominal
Level : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 0 dBm (SPC)
Output impedance : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 50 nominal
Connector : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : BNC female
External trigger input
Level : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : TTL
Pulse width (Tp ) : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 2 s Typically
Polarity : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : positive/negative selective
Connector : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : BNC female
External program Run/Cont input
Connector : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : BNC female
Level : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : TTL
Gate output (Option 1D6)
Level : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : TTL
Connector : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : BNC female
Figure 11-10. Trigger Signal (External trigger input)
S-parameter test set interface
11-24 Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
Common to Network/Spectrum/Impedance Measurement
Connector
Caution
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : D-SUB (25-pin)
Do not connect a printer to this connector. If you connect a printer with the
S-parameter test set interface connector (TEST SET-I/O INTERCONNECT), it
may cause damage to the printer.
Figure 11-11. S-Parameter Test Set Interface Pin Assignments
External monitor output
Connector : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : D-SUB (15-pin HD)
Display resolution : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 640 2 480 VGA
Internal Clock
Charge time : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 1 hour (SPC)
Capacity : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 72 hours (SPC)
Operation Conditions
Temperature
Disk drive non-operating condition : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 0 C to 40 C
Disk drive operating condition : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 10 C to 40 C
Humidity
at wet bulb temperature 29 C, without condensation
Disk drive non-operating condition : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 15% to 95% RH
Disk drive operating condition : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 15% to 80% RH
Altitude : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 0 to 2,000 m
Warm up time : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 30 minutes
Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
11-25
Common to Network/Spectrum/Impedance Measurement
Non-operation Conditions
Temperature
Humidity
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 020 C to 60 C
at wet bulb temperature 45 C, without condensation : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 15% to 95% RH
Altitude : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 0 to 4,572 m
Others
EMC
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Complies with CISPR 11 (1990) / EN 55011 (1991) : Group 1, Class A
Complies with EN 50082-1 (1992) / IEC 1000-4-2 (1995) : 4 kV CD, 8 kV AD
Complies with EN 50082-1 (1992) / IEC 1000-4-3 (1995) : 3 V/m, 27 MHz to 1 GHz
Complies with EN 50082-1 (1992) / IEC 1000-4-4 (1995) : 1 kV / Main,0.5kV / Signal Line
Complies with IEC 1000-3-2 (1995) / EN 61000-3-2 (1995)
Complies with IEC 1000-3-3 (1994) / EN 61000-3-3 (1995)
Note: When tested at 3 V/m according to IEC 801-3/1984, the residual response will be within specications over
the full immunity test frequency range of 27 MHz to 1000 MHz except when the analyzer frequency is
identical to the transmitted interference signal test frequency.
This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.
Cet appareil ISM est conforme a la norme NMB-001 du Canada.
Safety
: : : : : : : : Complies with IEC 1010-1 (1990), Amendment 1 (1992), Amendment 2 (1995)
Certied by CSA-C22.2 No.1010.1-92
Power requirements
: : : : : : : 90 V to 132 V, or 198 V to 264 V (automatically switched), 47 to 63 Hz, 300 VA max.
Weight : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 21 kg (SPC)
Dimensions (with Option 001, 1CN, 1D5, and 1D7) (SPC)
Figure 11-12. Front View
11-26 Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
Common to Network/Spectrum/Impedance Measurement
Figure 11-13. Rear View
Figure 11-14. Side View
Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
11-27
Typical System Performance
System Performance at Network Measurement
Typical System Performance
Introduction
The performance of the 4395A Network/Spectrum Analyzer (analyzer) depends not only on
the performance of the analyzer but also on the conguration, the user-selected operating
conditions, and the measurement calibration.
This section explains the residual errors remaining in a measurement system after accuracy
enhancement. It provides information to calculate the total measurement uncertainty
of dierent congurations. Graphs at the beginning of the section show examples of the
performance that can be calculated using the methods in this section.
The sources of measurement errors are explained, with an error model owgraph and
uncertainty equations. Information is provided for conversion of the dynamic accuracy error
(in dB) to a linear value for use in the uncertainty equations. The eects of temperature drift
on measurement uncertainty are illustrated with graphs.
Typical system performance tables are provided for an 7 mm and 3.5mm systems using an
85046A test set, for 50 type-N systems using the 85046A and 87512A test sets, and 75 type-N systems using the 85046B and 87512B test sets.
Procedure and blank worksheets are supplied to compute the total error-corrected
measurement uncertainty of a system. These procedures combine the terms in the tables, the
uncertainty equation, and the nominal S-parameter data of the device under test.
Comparison of Typical Error-Corrected Measurement Uncertainty
Figure 11-15 through Figure 11-22 are examples of the measurement uncertainty data that
can be calculated using the information provided in this section. These gures compare the
reection and transmission measurement uncertainty of a 7 mm system using dierent levels of
error correction. Each gure shows uncorrected values and residual uncertainty values after
response calibration, response and isolation calibration, and full one or two port calibration.
The data applies to a frequency range of 300 kHz to 500 MHz with a stable temperature (no
temperature drift), using compatible 7 mm calibration devices from the 85031B calibration kit.
The results shown in Figure 11-15 through Figure 11-22 can be obtained using the 85046A.
Dierent measurement calibration procedures provide comparable measurement improvement
for the following compatible connector types and test sets (using the compatible calibration
kits):
3.5 mm connectors
87511A and 87511A with 50 type-N connectors
87511B and 87511B with 75 type-N connectors
11-28 Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
Typical System Performance
Reection Uncertainty of a One-Port Device
Figure 11-15. Total Reection Magnitude Uncertainty of One-Port Device
Figure 11-16. Total Reection Phase Uncertainty of One-Port Device
Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
11-29
Typical System Performance
Reection Uncertainty of a Two-Port Device
Figure 11-17. Total Reections Magnitude Uncertainty of Two-Port Device
Figure 11-18. Total Reection Phase Uncertainty of Two-Port Device
11-30 Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
Typical System Performance
Transmission Uncertainty of a Low-Loss Device
Figure 11-19. Total Transmission Magnitude Uncertainty of a Low-Loss Device
Figure 11-20. Total Transmission Phase Uncertainty of a Low-Loss Device
Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
11-31
Typical System Performance
Transmission Uncertainty of a Wide Dynamic Range Device
Figure 11-21.
Total Transmission Magnitude Uncertainty of a Wide Dynamic Range Device
Figure 11-22. Total Transmission Phase Uncertainty of a Wide Dynamic Range Device
11-32 Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
Types of Residual Measurement Errors
Types of Residual Measurement Errors
Network analysis measurement errors can be separated into three types: systematic, random,
and drift errors. Measurement errors that remain after measurement calibration are called
residual measurement errors. See \Calibration for Network Measurement" in Appendix A for a
detailed description of the systematic errors corrected by measurement calibration.
Residual Systematic Errors
These errors result from imperfections in the calibration standards, connector standards
and interface, interconnecting cables, and instrumentation. These are the errors that aect
transmission and reection measurements.
Transmission Measurements Reection Measurements
Dynamic accuracy
Eective switch port match
Eective load match
Eective source match
Switch tracking
Multiplexer switching Uncertainty
Frequency error
Eective crosstalk
Eective directivity
Eective transmission tracking Eective reection tracking
Cable stability
Residual Random Errors
These non-repeatable errors are due to trace noise, noise oor, and connector repeatability.
They aect both transmission and reection measurements.
Residual Drift Errors
These errors stem from frequency drift and instrumentation drift. They aect both kinds of
measurements. Instrumentation drift is primarily temperature related.
Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
11-33
System Error Model
System Error Model
Any measurement result is the vector sum of the actual test device response plus all error
terms. The precise eect of each error term depends upon its magnitude and phase relationship
to the actual test device response. When the phase of an error response is not known, phase
is assumed to be worst case (0 or 180 degrees). Random errors such as noise and connector
repeatability are generally combined in a root-sum-of the squares (RSS) manner. The error term
related to thermal drift is combined on a typical basis as shown in each uncertainty equation
given in the following paragraphs.
Figure 11-23 shows the error model for the analyzer with the 85046A/B S-parameter test set.
This error model shows the relationship of the various error sources in the forward direction
and can be used to analyze overall measurement performance. The model for signal ow in the
reverse direction is similar. Note the appearance of the dynamic accuracy, noise errors, switch
errors, and connector repeatability terms in both the reection and transmission portions of the
model.
A
Figure 11-23. 4395A/85046A System Error Model
Table 11-2. Parameters of System error Model
= Dynamic Accuracy
(Am = Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy)
U
= Multiplexer Switching Uncertainty
(Um = Magnitude Multiplexer Switching
Uncertainty)
(Ap = Phase Dynamic Accuracy)
(Up = Phase Multiplexer Switching Uncertainty)
Nl = Noise Floor
Ms = Residual Source Match
Nh = High Level Noise
Ml = Residual Load Match
Tsw = Switch Tracking
C
= Residual Crosstalk
Msw = Switch Port Match
Tr = Residual Reection Tracking
Rr1 = Port 1 Reection Repeatability
Tt = Residual Transmission Tracking
Rr2 = Port 2 Reection Repeatability
Sr1 = Port 1 Cable Reection Stability
Rt1 = Port 1 Transmission Repeatability
Sr2 = Port 2 Cable Reection Stability
Rt2 = Port 2 Transmission Repeatability
St1 = Port 1 Cable Transmission Stability
Trd = Reection Tracking Drift
St2 = Port 2 Cable Transmission Stability
Ttd = Transmission Tracking Drift
D
= Residual Directivity
For measurement of one-port devices, set the crosstalk (C), load match (Ml ), transmission tracking (Tt ),
transmission tracking drift (Ttd ), port 2 connector repeatability (Rr2 , Rt2 ), and port 2 cable stability (Sr2 , St2 )
error terms to zero.
11-34 Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
Reection Uncertainty Equations
Reection Uncertainty Equations
Total Reection Magnitude Uncertainty (Erm)
An analysis of the error model yields an equation for the reection magnitude uncertainty. The
equation contains all of the rst order terms and the signicant second order terms. The error
term related to thermal drift is combined on a worst case basis with the total of systematic and
random errors. The four terms under the radical are random in character and are combined on
an RSS basis. The terms in the systematic error group are combined on a worst case basis. In
all cases, the error terms and the S-parameters are treated as linear absolute magnitudes.
Erm(linear) = Vr + S11 Trd(magnitude)
and
E
Erm(log) = 20log 1 6 rm
S11
where
p
Vr = Sr + W2r + X2r + Y2r + Z2r
Sr = systematic error
= (1 + Tsw )(D + Sr1) + (Tsw + Tr )S11 + (Msw + Ms + Sr1 )S211
+ (Ml + Sr2 + Msw )S21 S12 + (Am + Um )S11
Wr = random low-level noise
= 3Nl
Xr = random high-level noise
= 3Nh S11
Yr = random port1 repeatability
= Rr1 + 2Rt1S11 + Rr1S211
Zr = random port2 repeatability
= Rr2S21 S12
Total Reection Phase Uncertainty (Erp)
Reection phase uncertainty is determined from a comparison of the magnitude uncertainty
with the test signal magnitude. The worst case phase angle is computed. This result is
combined with the error terms related to thermal drift of the total system, port 1 cable
stability, phase dynamic accuracy, and phase multiplexer switching uncertainty.
Vr 0 (Am + Um )S11
+ Trd(phase) + 2St1 + Ap + Up
Erp = arcsin
S11
Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
11-35
Transmission Uncertainty Equations
Transmission Uncertainty Equations
Total Transmission Magnitude Uncertainty (Etm)
An analysis of the error model in Figure 11-23 yields an equation for the transmission
magnitude uncertainty. The equation contains all of the rst order terms and some of the
signicant second order terms. The error term related to thermal drift is combined on a worst
case basis with the total of systematic and random errors. The four terms under the radical
are random in character and are combined on an RSS basis. The terms in the systematic error
group are combined on a worst case basis. In all cases, the error terms are treated as linear
absolute magnitudes.
Etm(linear) = Vt + S21 Ttd(magnitude)
and
E
Etm(log) = 20log 1 6 tm
S21
where
p
Vt = St + W2t + X2t + Y2t + Z2t
St = systematic error
= C + (Tsw + Tt )S21 + (Msw + Ms + Sr1)S11 S21 + (Msw + Ml + Sr2)S21 S22 + (Am + Um )S21
Wt = random low-level noise
= 3Nl
Xt = random high-level noise
= 3Nh S21
Yt = random port1 repeatability
= Rt1 S21 + Rr1 S11 S21
Zt = random port2 repeatability
= Rt2 S21 + Rr2 S22 S21
Total Transmission Phase Uncertainty (Etp)
Transmission phase uncertainty is calculated from a comparison of the magnitude uncertainty
with the test signal magnitude. The worst case phase angle is computed. This result is
combined with the error terms related to phase dynamic accuracy, cable phase stability,
thermal drift of the total system, and phase multiplexer switching uncertainty.
Vt 0 (Am + Um )S21
+ Ttd(phase) + St1 + St2 + Ap + Up
Etp = arcsin
S21
11-36 Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
Dynamic Accuracy
Dynamic Accuracy
The dynamic accuracy value used in the system uncertainty equations is obtained from the
analyzer's dynamic accuracy typical values. The typical value for magnitude dynamic accuracy
is in dB, and it must be converted to a linear value to be used in the uncertainty equations. In
addition, the analyzer's dynamic accuracy typical values are given for an input signal level
from full scale in dB. This must be converted to a relative error (relative to the power at which
the measurement calibration occurs) to be used in the system uncertainty equations.
Dynamic Accuracy (linear) = 10
6DynAcc(dB)
20
71
Dynamic Accuracy (dB) = 20log(1 6 Dynamic Accuracy (linear))
Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy
Typical magnitude dynamic accuracy can be expressed in the following equations:
Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy = Ed1m + Ed2m + Ed3m
Ed1m = 1:39 2 1002 L2
Ed2m = 1:73 2 1003
6:95 2 1007
Ed3m =
L
where,
L = Measurement level (linear, relative to full scale level)
Ed1m = Magnitude compression error (dominant at high measurement level range)
Ed2m = Magnitude residual error (dominant at middle measurement level range)
Ed3m = Magnitude A/D converter dierential nonlinearity error (dominant at low
measurement level range)
Determining Relative Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Error Contribution
Typical magnitude dynamic accuracy error contribution to system performance is expressd
bellow:
Magnitude dynamic accuracy error = jEd1mMEAS 0 Ed1mREF j
+ max(Ed2mMEAS ; Ed2mREF)
+ Ed3mMEAS + Ed3mREF
where,
Sux ref means errors at calibration
Sux meas means errors at DUT measurement
Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
11-37
Dynamic Accuracy
Phase Dynamic Accuracy
Typical phase dynamic accuracy can be expressed by the following equations:
Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy = Ed1p + Ed2p + Ed3p
Ed1p = 1:00L2
Ed2p = 0:10
6:13 2 1005
Ed3p =
L
where,
L = Measurement level (linear, relative to full scale level)
Ed1p = Phase compression error (dominant at high measurement level range)
Ed2p = Phase residual error (dominant at middle measurement level range)
Ed3p = Phase A/D converter dierential nonlinearity error (dominant at low measurement
level range)
Determining Relative Phase Dynamic Accuracy Error Contribution
Typical dynamic accuracy error contribution to system performance is expressd bellow:
Phase dynamic accuracy error = jEd1pMEAS 0 Ed1pREF j
+ max(Ed2pMEAS ; Ed2pREF)
+ Ed3pMEAS + Ed3pREF
where,
Sux ref means errors at calibration
Sux meas means errors at DUT measurement
Six example graphs are provided: Figure 11-24 and Figure 11-25 show the typical magnitude
and phase dynamic accuracy error with a reference power level of full scale, Figure 11-26 and
Figure 11-27 with a reference power level of 020 dB from full scale, and Figure 11-28 and
Figure 11-29 with a reference power level of 060 dB from full scale.
11-38 Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
Dynamic Accuracy
Dynamic Accuracy Error Contribution
Figure 11-24.
Typical Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Error
(@Reference Power Level=Full Scale)
Figure 11-25.
Typical Phase Dynamic Accuracy Error
(@Reference Power Level=Full Scale)
Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
11-39
Dynamic Accuracy
Dynamic Accuracy Error Contribution
Figure 11-26.
Typical Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Error
(@Reference Power Level=020 dB from Full Scale)
Figure 11-27.
Typical Phase Dynamic Accuracy Error
(@Reference Power Level=020 dB from Full Scale)
11-40 Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
Dynamic Accuracy
Dynamic Accuracy Error Contribution
Figure 11-28.
Typical Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Error
(@Reference Power Level=060 dB from Full Scale)
Figure 11-29.
Typical Phase Dynamic Accuracy Error
(@Reference Power Level=060 dB from Full Scale)
Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
11-41
Eects of Temperature Drift
Eects of Temperature Drift
Figure 11-30 to Figure 11-33 are graphs showing the eects of temperature drift on
error-corrected measurement uncertainty values. Values are shown for changes of 61 C,
63 C and 65 C from the ambient temperature. Figure 11-30 and Figure 11-31 show total
reection magnitude and phase uncertainty with temperature drift following an S11 one-port
calibration. Figure 11-32 and Figure 11-33 shows the total transmission magnitude and phase
uncertainty with temperature drift following a full two-port error correction. The graphs apply
to measurements up to 500 MHz.
11-42 Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
Eects of Temperature Drift
Temperature Drift with S11 One-Port Calibration
Figure 11-30. Total Reection Magnitude Uncertainty (@One-Port Cal)
Figure 11-31. Total Refection Phase Uncertainty (@One-Port Cal)
Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
11-43
Eects of Temperature Drift
Temperature Drift with Full Two-Port Calibration
Figure 11-32. Total Transmission Magnitude Uncertainty (@Full Two-Port Cal)
Figure 11-33. Total Transmission Phase Uncertainty (@Full Two-Port Cal)
11-44 Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
System performance with Dierent Test Sets and Connector Types
System performance with Dierent Test Sets and Connector
Types
The tables in the following pages provides typical system performance for sytems using
dierent test sets and dierent connector types. The values listed are for uncorrected
measurements and for corrected measurements after measurement calibration. The linear
value is shown in parenthesis with the dB value.
Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
11-45
System performance with Dierent Test Sets and Connector Types
Table 11-3.
Typical System Performance for Devices with 7 mm Connectors
4395A with 87511A Test Set (300 kHz to 500 MHz)
Symbol
Error Terms
D
Directivity
Ms
Source Match
Tr
Reection Tracking
Ml
Load Match
Tt
Trans. Tracking
C
Cross Talk
Rr1
Rt1
Rr2
Rt2
Nl
Nh
Am ,Ap
Um ,Up
St1
Sr1
St2
Sr2
Ttd
Trd
Tsw
Msw
Port1 Re. Connector
Repeatability
Port1 Trans. Connector
Repeatability
Port2 Re. Connector
Repeatability
Port2 Trans. Connector
Repeatability
Low-Level Noise 2
High Level Noise 2 , 4
Dynamic Accuracy Error
Multiplexer Switching
Uncertainty
Port1 Cable Trans.
Phase Stability5
Port1 Cable Re.
Stability5
Port2 Cable Trans.
Phase Stability5
Port2 Cable Re.
Stability5
Trans. Tracking Drift
Re. Tracking Drift
Switch Tracking
Switch Port Match
Typical Residual after Accuracy Enhancement1 , 2
Uncorrected Response Only Response and Isolation One-Port Full two port
035 dB
(1.82100
020 dB
2
)
(0.10)
63 dB
(0.41)
020 dB
(0.10)
63 dB
(0.41)
0100 dB
(1.021005 )
035 dB
(1.82100
020 dB
2
)
(0.10)
61 dB
(0.12)
020 dB
(0.10)
60.1 dB
(0.01)
0100 dB
(1.021005 )
050 dB3
(3.22100 )
020 dB
3
(0.10)
60.9 dB
(0.11)
020 dB
(0.10)
60.1 dB
(0.01)
0110 dB
(3.221006 )
070 dB (3.221004 )
070 dB (3.22100
)
070 dB (3.22100
)
070 dB (3.22100
)
4
4
4
050 dB
(3.221003 )
040 dB
(0.01)
60.05 dB
(5.821003 )
{
{
{
0110 dB from full scale (3.22100
Magnitude:0.001 dB (1.22100 )
6
050 dB
(3.221003 )
040 dB
(0.01)
60.05 dB
(5.821003 )
042 dB
(7.921003 )
60.03 dB
(5.821003 )
0110 dB
(3.221006 )
)
4
See \Dynamic Accuracy" in Chapter 11.
Magnitude:60.002 dB (2.3 21004 ) Phase:0.015 degrees
0.05 2 f (GHz) degrees
070 dB (3.22100
4
)
0.05 2 f (GHz) degrees
070 dB (3.22100
4
)
Magnitude: 0.01 dB/ C (1.221003 / C)
Phase:6 6[0.1+0.152f(GHz)]degrees/ C
Phase:6 6[0.1+0.152f(GHz)]degrees/ C
Magnitude: 0.01 dB/ C (1.221003 / C)
60.03 dB (3.521003 )
070 dB (3.221004 )
1 Accuracy enhancement procedures are performed using 85031B 7 mm calibration kit. Enviromental temperature is 23 C
63 C at calibration: 61 C from calibration temperature must be maintained for valied measurement calibration.
2 With IF bandwidth of 10 Hz.
3 With impedance matched load.
4 High-level noise is the RMS of a continuous measurement of a short circuit or thru.
5 Arrived at by bending 11857D cables out perpendicular to front panel and reconnecting. Stability is much better with
less exing.
6 Arrived at using 11857D cables and full 2-port calibration. Drift is much better without calbes and with 1-port
calibration. For this case, drift typically is [0.1 + 0.05 2f (GHz)] 2 1 C, degrees.
11-46 Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
System performance with Dierent Test Sets and Connector Types
Table 11-4.
Typical System Performance for Devices with 3.5 mm Connectors
4395A with 87511A Test Set (300 kHz to 500 MHz)
Symbol
Error Terms
D
Directivity
Ms
Source Match
Tr
Reection Tracking
Ml
Load Match
Tt
Trans. Tracking
C
Cross Talk
Rr1
Rt1
Rr2
Rt2
Nl
Nh
Am ,Ap
Um ,Up
St1
Sr1
St2
Sr2
Ttd
Trd
Tsw
Msw
Port1 Re. Connector
Repeatability
Port1 Trans. Connector
Repeatability
Port2 Re. Connector
Repeatability
Port2 Trans. Connector
Repeatability
Low-Level Noise 2
High Level Noise 2 , 4
Dynamic Accuracy Error
Multiplexer Switching
Uncertainty
Port1 Cable Trans.
Phase Stability5
Port1 Cable Re.
Stability5
Port2 Cable Trans.
Phase Stability5
Port2 Cable Re.
Stability5
Trans. Tracking Drift
Re. Tracking Drift
Switch Tracking
Switch Port Match
Typical Residual after Accuracy Enhancement1 , 2
Uncorrected Response Only Response and Isolation One-Port Full two port
035 dB
(1.82100
020 dB
2
)
(0.10)
63 dB
(0.41)
020 dB
(0.10)
63 dB
(0.41)
0100 dB
(1.021005 )
035 dB
(1.82100
020 dB
2
)
(0.10)
61 dB
(0.12)
020 dB
(0.10)
60.1 dB
(0.01)
0100 dB
(1.021005 )
040 dB
040 dB3
(0.01)
020 dB
(0.10)
61 dB
(0.12)
020 dB
(0.10)
60.1 dB
(0.01)
0110 dB
(3.221006 )
070 dB (3.221004 )
070 dB (3.22100
)
070 dB (3.22100
)
070 dB (3.22100
)
4
4
4
(0.01)
036 dB
(0.02)
60.14 dB
(0.016)
{
{
0110 dB
(3.221006 )
0110 dB from full scale (3.22100
Magnitude:0.001 dB (1.22100 )
6
040 dB
(0.01)
036 dB
(0.02)
60.14 dB
(0.016)
038 dB
(0.013)
60.05 dB
(1.621002 )
0110 dB
(3.221006 )
)
4
See \Dynamic Accuracy" in Chapter 11.
Magnitude:60.002 dB (2.3 21004 ) Phase:0.015 degrees
0.05 2 f (GHz) degrees
070 dB (3.22100
4
)
0.05 2 f (GHz) degrees
070 dB (3.22100
4
)
Magnitude: 0.01 dB/ C (1.221003 / C)
Phase:6 6[0.1+0.152f(GHz)]degrees/ C
Phase:6 6[0.1+0.152f(GHz)]degrees/ C
Magnitude: 0.01 dB/C (1.221003 / C)
60.03 dB (3.521003 )
070 dB (3.221004 )
1 Accuracy enhancement procedures are performed using 85033C 3.5 mm calibration kit. Enviromental temperature is
23 C 63 C at calibration: 61 C from calibration temperature must be maintained for valied measurement calibration.
2 With IF bandwidth of 10 Hz.
3 With impedance matched load.
4 High-level noise is the RMS of a continuous measurement of a short circuit or thru.
5 Arrived at by bending 11857D cables out perpendicular to front panel and reconnecting. Stability is much better with
less exing.
6 Arrived at using 11857D cables and full 2-port calibration. Drift is much better without calbes and with 1-port
calibration. For this case, drift typically is [0.1 + 0.05 2f (GHz)] 2 1 C, degrees.
Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
11-47
System performance with Dierent Test Sets and Connector Types
Table 11-5.
Typical System Performance for Devices with 50 Type-N Connectors
4395A with 87511A Test Set (300 kHz to 500 MHz)
Symbol
Error Terms
D
Directivity
Ms
Source Match
Tr
Reection Tracking
Ml
Load Match
Tt
Trans. Tracking
C
Cross Talk
Rr1
Rt1
Rr2
Rt2
Nl
Nh
Am ,Ap
Um ,Up
St1
Sr1
St2
Sr2
Ttd
Trd
Tsw
Msw
Port1 Re. Connector
Repeatability
Port1 Trans. Connector
Repeatability
Port2 Re. Connector
Repeatability
Port2 Trans. Connector
Repeatability
Low-Level Noise 2
High Level Noise 2 , 4
Dynamic Accuracy Error
Multiplexer Switching
Uncertainty
Port1 Cable Trans.
Phase Stability5
Port1 Cable Re.
Stability5
Port2 Cable Trans.
Phase Stability5
Port2 Cable Re.
Stability5
Trans. Tracking Drift
Re. Tracking Drift
Switch Tracking
Switch Port Match
Typical Residual after Accuracy Enhancement1 , 2
Uncorrected Response Only Response and Isolation One-Port Full two port
035 dB
(1.82100
020 dB
2
)
(0.10)
63 dB
(0.41)
020 dB
(0.10)
63 dB
(0.41)
0100 dB
(1.021005 )
035 dB
(1.82100
020 dB
2
)
(0.10)
61 dB
(0.12)
020 dB
(0.10)
60.1 dB
(0.01)
0100 dB
(1.021005 )
047 dB3
(4.52100 )
020 dB
3
(0.10)
60.9 dB
(0.11)
020 dB
(0.10)
60.1 dB
(0.01)
0110 dB
(3.221006 )
065 dB (5.621004 )
065 dB (5.62100
)
065 dB (5.62100
)
065 dB (5.62100
)
4
4
4
047 dB
(4.521003 )
035 dB
(0.02)
60.06 dB
(6.921003 )
{
{
{
0110 dB from full scale (3.22100
Magnitude:0.001 dB (1.22100 )
6
047 dB
(4.521003 )
035 dB
(0.02)
60.06 dB
(6.921003 )
042 dB
(7.921003 )
60.05 dB
(6.921003 )
0110 dB
(3.221006 )
)
4
See \Dynamic Accuracy" in Chapter 11.
Magnitude:60.002 dB (2.3 21004 ) Phase:0.015 degrees
0.05 2 f (GHz) degrees
070 dB (3.22100
4
)
0.05 2 f (GHz) degrees
070 dB (3.22100
4
)
Magnitude: 0.01 dB/ C (1.221003 / C)
Phase:6 6[0.1+0.152f(GHz)]degrees/ C
Phase:6 6[0.1+0.152f(GHz)]degrees/ C
Magnitude: 0.01 dB/ C (1.221003 / C)
60.03 dB (3.521003 )
070 dB (3.221004 )
1 Accuracy enhancement procedures are performed using 85032B 50 type-N calibration kit. Enviromental temperature
is 23 C 63 C at calibration: 61 C from calibration temperature must be maintained for valied measurement calibration.
2 With IF bandwidth of 10 Hz.
3 With impedance matched load.
4 High-level noise is the RMS of a continuous measurement of a short circuit or thru.
5 Arrived at by bending 11857D cables out perpendicular to front panel and reconnecting. Stability is much better with
less exing.
6 Arrived at using 11857D cables and full 2-port calibration. Drift is much better without calbes and with 1-port
calibration. For this case, drift typically is [0.1 + 0.05 2f (GHz)] 2 1 C, degrees.
11-48 Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
System performance with Dierent Test Sets and Connector Types
Table 11-6.
Typical System Performance for Devices with 75 Type-N Connectors
4395A with 87511B Test Set (300 kHz to 500 MHz)
Symbol
Error Terms
D
Directivity
Ms
Source Match
Tr
Reection Tracking
Ml
Load Match
Tt
Trans. Tracking
C
Cross Talk
Rr1
Rt1
Rr2
Rt2
Nl
Nh
Am ,Ap
Um ,Up
St1
Sr1
St2
Sr2
Ttd
Trd
Tsw
Msw
Port1 Re. Connector
Repeatability
Port1 Trans. Connector
Repeatability
Port2 Re. Connector
Repeatability
Port2 Trans. Connector
Repeatability
Low-Level Noise 2
High Level Noise 2 , 4
Dynamic Accuracy Error
Multiplexer Switching
Uncertainty
Port1 Cable Trans.
Phase Stability5
Port1 Cable Re.
Stability5
Port2 Cable Trans.
Phase Stability5
Port2 Cable Re.
Stability5
Trans. Tracking Drift
Re. Tracking Drift
Switch Tracking
Switch Port Match
Typical Residual after Accuracy Enhancement1 , 2
Uncorrected Response Only Response and Isolation One-Port Full two port
033 dB
(2.22100
020 dB
2
)
(0.10)
63 dB
(0.41)
020 dB
(0.10)
63 dB
(0.41)
0100 dB
(1.021005 )
033 dB
(2.22100
020 dB
2
)
(0.10)
61 dB
(0.12)
020 dB
(0.10)
60.1 dB
(0.01)
0100 dB
(1.021005 )
044 dB3
(6.32100 )
020 dB
3
(0.10)
60.9 dB
(0.11)
020 dB
(0.10)
60.1 dB
(0.01)
0104 dB
(6.321006 )
065 dB (5.621004 )
065 dB (5.62100
)
065 dB (5.62100
)
065 dB (5.62100
)
4
4
4
044 dB
(6.321003 )
035 dB
(0.02)
60.06 dB
(6.921003 )
{
{
{
0104 dB from full scale (6.32100
Magnitude:0.001 dB (1.22100 )
6
044 dB
(6.321003 )
035 dB
(0.02)
60.06 dB
(6.921003 )
042 dB
(7.921003 )
60.05 dB
(6.921003 )
0104 dB
(6.321006 )
)
4
See \Dynamic Accuracy" in Chapter 11.
Magnitude:60.002 dB (2.3 21004 ) Phase:0.015 degrees
0.05 2 f (GHz) degrees
070 dB (3.22100
4
)
0.05 2 f (GHz) degrees
070 dB (3.22100
4
)
Magnitude: 0.01 dB/ C (1.221003 / C)
Phase:6 6[0.1+0.152f(GHz)]degrees/ C
Phase:6 6[0.1+0.152f(GHz)]degrees/ C
Magnitude: 0.01 dB/C (1.221003 / C)
60.03 dB (3.521003 )
070 dB (3.221004 )
1 Accuracy enhancement procedures are performed using 85036B 75 type-N calibration kit. Enviromental temperature
is 23 C 63 C at calibration: 61 C from calibration temperature must be maintained for valied measurement calibration.
2 With IF bandwidth of 10 Hz.
3 With impedance matched load.
4 High-level noise is the RMS of a continuous measurement of a short circuit or thru.
5 Arrived at by bending 11857D cables out perpendicular to front panel and reconnecting. Stability is much better with
less exing.
6 Arrived at using 11857D cables and full 2-port calibration. Drift is much better without calbes and with 1-port
calibration. For this case, drift typically is [0.1 + 0.05 2f (GHz)] 2 1 C, degrees.
Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
11-49
System performance with Dierent Test Sets and Connector Types
Table 11-7.
Typical System Performance for Devices with 50 Type-N Connectors
4395A with 87512A Test Set (100 Hz to 500 MHz)
Symbol
Error Terms
D
Directivity
Ms
Source Match
Tr
Typical Residual after Accuracy Enhancement1 , 2
Uncorrected Response Only3 Response and Isolation3 One-Port one pass two port
040 dB
{
{
{
024 dB
024 dB
Reection Tracking
(0.063)
{
024 dB
Ml
Load Match
022 dB
022 dB4
022 dB
Tt
Trans. Tracking
C
Cross Talk
Rr1
Rt1
Rr2
Rt2
Nl
Port1 Re. Connector
Repeatability
Port1 Trans. Connector
Repeatability
Port2 Re. Connector
Repeatability
Port2 Trans. Connector
Repeatability
Low-Level Noise 2
Nh
High Level Noise 2 , 5
Am ,Ap Dynamic Accuracy Error
Um ,Up Multiplexer Switching
Uncertainty
St1
Port1 Cable Trans.
Phase Stability6
Sr1
Port1 Cable Re.
Stability6
St2
Port2 Cable Trans.
Phase Stability6
Sr2
Ttd
Trd
Port2 Cable Re.
Stability6
Trans. Tracking Drift
Re. Tracking Drift
(0.079)
60.8 dB
(0.096)
{
(0.01)
025 dB
(0.056)
60.83 dB
(0.1)
{
(0.063)
{
(0.063)
{
(0.079)
60.2 dB
(0.023)
{
(0.079)
60.2 dB
(0.023)
{
{
{
065 dB (5.62100
)
065 dB (5.62100
)
065 dB (5.62100
)
065 dB (5.62100
)
4
4
4
4
040 dB
(0.01)
025 dB
(0.056)
60.83 dB
(0.1)
040 dB
(0.01)
60.05 dB
(5.821003 )
0110 dB
(3.221006 )
0110 dB from full scale at 100 kHz (3.22100 )
090 dB from full scale at <100 kHz (3.22100 )
Magnitude:0.003 dB (3.52100 )
6
5
4
See \Dynamic Accuracy" in Chapter 11.
Magnitude:60.017 dB (2.0 21003 ) Phase:0.1 degrees
0.05 2 f (GHz) degrees
070 dB (3.22100
4
)
0.05 2 f (GHz) degrees
070 dB (3.22100
4
Magnitude: 0.01 dB/ C (1.121003 / C)
Magnitude: 0.01 dB/ C (1.121003 / C)
)
Phase:7 6[0.1+0.152f(GHz)]degrees/ C
Phase:7 6[0.1+0.152f(GHz)]degrees/ C
1 Accuracy enhancement procedures are performed using 85032B 50 type-N calibration kit. Enviromental temperature is
23 C 63 C at calibration: 61 C from calibration temperature must be maintained for valied measurement calibration.
2 With IF bandwidth of 10 Hz.
3 Transmission Only
4 @ f 500 kHz.
5 High-level noise is the RMS of a continuous measurement of a short circuit or thru.
6 Arrived at by bending 11857D cables out perpendicular to front panel and reconnecting. Stability is much better with less
exing.
7 Arrived at using 11857D cables and full 2-port calibration. Drift is much better without calbes and with 1-port calibration.
For this case, drift typically is [0.1 + 0.05 2f (GHz)] 2 1 C, degrees.
11-50 Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
System performance with Dierent Test Sets and Connector Types
Table 11-8.
Typical System Performance for Devices with 75 Type-N Connectors
4395A with 87512B Test Set (100 Hz to 500 MHz)
Symbol
D
Ms
Tr
Ml
Tt
C
Rr1
Rt1
Rr2
Rt2
Nl
Error Terms
Directivity
Source Match
Reection Tracking
Load Match
Trans. Tracking
Cross Talk
Port1 Re. Connector
Repeatability
Port1 Trans. Connector
Repeatability
Port2 Re. Connector
Repeatability
Port2 Trans. Connector
Repeatability
Low-Level Noise 2
Nh
High Level Noise 2 , 3
Am ,Ap Dynamic Accuracy Error
Um ,Up Multiplexer Switching
Uncertainty
St1
Port1 Cable Trans.
Phase Stability4
Sr1
St2
Sr2
Ttd
Trd
Port1 Cable Re.
Stability4
Port2 Cable Trans.
Phase Stability4
Port2 Cable Re.
Stability4
Trans. Tracking Drift
Re. Tracking Drift
Typical Residual after Accuracy Enhancement1 , 2
One-Port
040 dB (0.01)
025 dB (0.056)
60.83 dB (0.1)
{
{
{
065 dB (5.621004 )
065 dB (5.62100
)
065 dB (5.62100
)
065 dB (5.62100
)
4
4
4
0104 dB from full scale at 100 kHz (6.32100 )
084 dB from full scale at <100 kHz (6.32100 )
0.003 dB (3.52100 )
6
5
4
See \Dynamic Accuracy" in Chapter 11.
Magnitude:0.017 dB (221003 ) Phase:0.1 degrees
[0.052f(GHz)] degrees
070 dB (3.22100
4
)
[0.052f(GHz)] degrees
070 dB (3.22100
4
Magnitude: 0.01 dB/ C (1.121003 / C)
Magnitude: 0.01 dB/ C (1.121003 / C)
)
Phase:5 6[0.1+0.152f(GHz)] degrees/ C
Phase:5 6[0.1+0.152f(GHz)] degrees/ C
1 Accuracy enhancement procedures are performed using 85036B 75 type-N calibration kit. Enviromental
temperature is 23 C 63 C at calibration: 61 C from calibration temperature must be maintained for valied
measurement calibration.
2 With IF bandwidth of 10 Hz.
3 High-level noise is the RMS of a continuous measurement of a short circuit or thru.
4 Arrived at by bending 11857D cables out perpendicular to front panel and reconnecting. Stability is much better
with less exing.
5 Arrived at using 11857D cables and full 2-port calibration. Drift is much better without calbes and with 1-port
calibration. For this case, drift typically is [0.1 + 0.05 2f (GHz)] 2 1 C, degrees.
Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
11-51
Determining Expected System performance
Determining Expected System performance
The uncertainty equations, dynamic accuracy calculations, and tables of system performance
values provided in the preceding pages can be used to calculate the expected system
performance. The following pages explain how to determine the residual errors of a particular
system and combine them to obtain total error-corrected residual uncertainty values, using
worksheets provided. The uncertainty graphs at the beginning of this System performance
section are examples of the results that can be calculated using this information.
Procedures
Table 11-9 is a worksheet used to calculate the residual uncertainty in reection measurements.
Table 11-10 is a worksheet for residual uncertainty in transmission measurements. Determine
the linear values of the residual error terms and the nominal linear S-parameter data of the
device under test as described below and enter these values in the worksheets. Then use the
instructions and equations in the worksheets to combine the residual errors for total system
uncertainty performance.
S-parameter Values. Convert the S-parameters of the test device to their absolute linear
terms.
Noise Floor. See the Receiver Noise Level Performance Test in the Service Manual to
determine the actual noise oor performance of your measurement setup.
Crosstalk. See the Input Crosstalk Performance Test. Connect an impedance-matched load to
each of the test ports and measure S21 or S12 after calibration. Turn on the marker statistics
function, and measure the mean value of the trace. Use the mean value plus one standard
deviation as the residual crosstalk value of your system.
Dynamic Accuracy. Determine the absolute linear magnitude dynamic accuracy as described
under Dynamic Accuracy In this chapter.
Other Error Terms. See Table 11-3 through Table 11-8, depending on the test set and
connector type in your system. Find the absolute linear magnitude of the remaining error
terms.
Combining Error Terms. Combine the above terms using the reection or transmission
uncertainty equation in the worksheets.
11-52 Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
Determining Expected System performance
Table 11-9. Reection Measurement Uncertainty Worksheet
In the columns below, enter the appropriate values for each term.
Error Term
Directivity
Reection tracking
Source match
Load match
Dynamic accuracy (magnitude) 1
Dynamic accuracy (phase) 1
Multiplexer Switching Uncertainty
(magnitude)
Multiplexer Switching Uncertainty
(phase)
S11
S21
S12
Noise oor
High level noise
Connector reection repeatability
Connector transmission repeatability
Magnitude drift due to temperature
Phase drift due to temperature
Cable reection stability
Cable transmission phase stability
Switch Tracking
Switch Port Match
Frequency:
Symbol
Linear Value
dB Value
D
Tr
Ms
Ml
Am
Ap
Um
Up
S11
S21
S12
Nl
Nh
Rr1 , Rr2
Rt1 , Rt2
Trd (mag)
Trd(phase)
Sr1 , Sr2
St1 , St2
Tsw
Msw
Magnitude
Combine Systematic Errors. In the space provided, enter the appropriate linear values from the list of errors.
Then combine these errors to obtain the total sum of systematic errors.
+
)=
(
+
)2(
(1 + Tsw )2(D + Sr1 )
(Tsw + Tr )2S11
(
+
)2
=
(Msw + Sr1 + Ms )2S11 2S11
(
+
+
)2
2
=
(
+
+
)2
2
=
(Msw + Sr2 + Ml )2S21 2S12
(
+
)2
=
(Am +Um ) 2 S11
+
+
+
+
=
Subtotal: k + l + m + n + o
Combine Random Errors. In the space provided, enter the appropriate linear values from the list of errors.
Then combine these errors in an RSS fashion to obtain a total sum of the random errors.
32Nl
32
=
32
2
=
32Nh 2S11
+22
2
+
2
2
=
Rr1 + 22Rt1 2S11 + Rr1 2S11 2S11
2
2
=
R
r2 2S21 2S12
p
p 2 + 2 + 2 + 2
w 2 + x2 + y2 + z2
=
Subtotal: S + R
Total Magnitude Errors:
Erm (linear) = Vr + Trd (mag) 2 S11
Erm (log) = 20 Log(16Erm /S11 )
+(
20 Log(16
Phase
Erp = Arcsin[(Vr 0 (Am +Um ) 2
S11 )/S11 ] + Trd (phase) + 22St1 +
Ap + Up
Arcsin[(
0(
+
)2
+
=
2
)=
)=
/
)/
]+
+22
(k)
(l)
(m)
(n)
(o)
(S)
(w)
(x)
(y)
(z)
(R)
(Vr )
dB
+
+
=6
deg.
1 With IF bandwidth of 10 Hz.
Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
11-53
Determining Expected System performance
Table 11-10. Transmission Measurement Uncertainty Worksheet
In the columns below, enter the appropriate values for each term.
Symbol
Error Term
Crosstalk
Transmission tracking
Source match
Load match
Dynamic accuracy (magnitude) 1
Dynamic accuracy (phase) 1
Multiplexer Switching Uncertainty
(magnitude)
Multiplexer Switching Uncertainty
(phase)
S11
S21
S12
S22
Noise oor
High level noise
Connector reection repeatability
Connector transmission repeatability
Magnitude drift due to temperature
Phase drift due to temperature
Cable reection stability
Cable transmission phase stability
Switch Tracking
Switch Port Match
Frequency:
Linear Value
dB Value
C
Tt
Ms
Ml
Am
Ap
Um
Up
S11
S21
S12
S22
Nl
Nh
Rr1 , Rr2
Rt1 , Rt2
Ttd (mag)
Ttd (phase)
Sr1 , Sr2
St1 , St2
Tsw
Msw
Magnitude
Combine Systematic Errors. In the space provided, enter the appropriate linear values from the list of errors.
Then combine these errors to obtain the total sum of systematic errors.
C
=
(k)
(Tsw + Tt ) 2 S21
(
+
)2
=
(l)
(Msw + Sr1 + Ms )2S11 2S21
(
+
+
)2
2
=
(m)
(
+
+
)2
2
=
(n)
(Msw + Sr2 + Ml )2S21 2S22
(
+
)2
=
(o)
(Am +Um ) 2 S21
+
+
+
+
=
(S)
Subtotal: k + l + m + n + o
Combine Random Errors. In the space provided, enter the appropriate linear values from the list of errors.
Then combine these errors in an RSS fashion to obtain a total sum of the random errors.
32
=
(w)
3 2 Nl
3 2 Nh 2 S21
32
2
=
(x)
Rt1 2S21 + Rr1 2S11 2S21
2
+
2
2
=
(y)
2
+
2
2
=
(z)
R
t2 2S21 + Rr2 2S22 2S21
p
p 2 + 2 + 2 + 2
=
w 2 + x2 + y2 + z2
(R)
S+R
Total Magnitude Errors:
Etm (linear) = Vt + Ttd (mag) 2 S21
Etm (log) = 20 Log(16Etm /S21 )
+(
20 Log(16
Phase
Etp = Arcsin[(Vt 0 (Am +Um ) 2
S21 )/S21 ] + Ttd (phase) + St1 + St2
+ Ap + Up
Arcsin[(
0(
1 With IF bandwidth of 10 Hz.
11-54 Specications and Supplemental Characteristics
+
)2
+
=
2
)=
)=
/
)/
]+
+
+
(Vt )
dB
+
+
=6
deg.
12
Accessories and Options
Options Available
DC SOURCE (Option 001)
DC SOURCE supplies up to 640 V / 6100 mA of DC voltage/current.
High Stability Frequency Reference (Option 1D5)
This option, a 10 MHz crystal in temperature stabilized oven, improves the source signal
frequency accuracy and stability. This option can be retrotted using the 4395U Upgrade Kit
Option 1D5.
Time-Gated Spectrum Analyzer (Option 1D6)
This option allows the capability of intermittent or burst signal spectrum measurement. This
option can be retrotted using the 4395U Upgrade Kit Option 1D6.
50 to 75 Input Impedance Conversion (Option 1D7)
This option oers 75 input impedance for the spectrum measurement. The 11852B option
004 50 to 75 minimum loss pads and 50 to 75 Supplemental characteristics are supplied
with this option. This option can be retrotted using the 4395U Upgrade Kit Option 1D7.
Impedance Measurement Function (Option 010)
This option allows the capability of impedance measurement function. This option can be
retrotted using the 43961A Impedance Test Kit. This option can be retrotted using the 4396U
Upgrade Kit Option 010.
Handle Kit (Option 1CN)
This option is a rack mount kit containing a pair of handles and the necessary hardware to
mount the instrument.
Rack Mount Kit (Option 1CM)
This option is a rack mount kit containing a pair of anges and the necessary hardware to
mount the instrument, with handles detached, in an equipment rack with 482.6 mm (19 inches)
horizontal spacing.
Rack Mount and Handle Kit (Option 1CP)
This option is a rack mount kit containing a pair of anges, and the necessary hardware to
mount the instrument with handles attached in an equipment rack with 482.6 mm (19 inches)
horizontal spacing.
Accessories and Options 12-1
Measurement accessories available
Measurement accessories available
Test Sets
87511A/B S Parameter Test Set
These test sets contain the hardware required to measure all four S-parameters of a two-port
50 or 75 device. An RF switch in the test set is controlled by the analyzer so that reverse
measurement can be made without changing the connections to the DUT (device under test).
Each test set also contains two internal dc bias tees for biasing active devices. The test port
connectors for the 87511A are precision 7 mm connectors, and the 87511B test port connectors
are 75 type-N(f).
87512A/B Transmission/Reection Test Set
These test sets contain the hardware required to measure simultaneous transmission and
reection characteristics of a 50 or 75 device in one direction only. The test port connector is
50 type-N(f) on the 87512A and 75 type-N(f) on the 87512B.
Active Probes
41800A Active Probe (5 Hz to 500 MHz)
This is a high input impedance probe for in-circuit measurements that cover the frequency
range of 5 Hz to 500 MHz.
41802A 1 M
Input Adapter (5 Hz to 100 MHz)
This adapter allows use of a high impedance probe. It has a frequency range of 5 Hz to 100
MHz.
1141A Dierential Probe
This is an FET dierential probe with 200 MHz bandwidth and 3000:1 cmrr. The 1141A must
be used with the 1142A Probe Control and Power Module.
Power Splitters
11850C,D Three-way Power Splitters
These are four-port, three-way power splitters. One output arm is used as the reference for
the network analyzer in making ratio measurements and the other two output arms are test
channels. The 11850C has a frequency range of DC to 3 GHz and an impedance of 50 . The
11850D has a frequency range of DC to 2 GHz and an impedance of 75 .
11667A Power Splitter
This is a two-way power splitter with one output arm used for reference and one for test. It
has a frequency range of DC to 18 GHz and an impedance of 50 .
12-2 Accessories and Options
Measurement accessories available
Calibration Kits
The following calibration kits contain the precision standards (and the required adapters) for
the indicated connector types. The standards facilitate measurement calibration (also called
vector error correction). Refer to the applicable data sheet and ordering guide for additional
information. Part numbers for the standards are in their respective manuals.
85033D 3.5 mm Calibration Kit
85031B 7 mm Calibration Kit
85032B 50 Type-N Calibration Kit
85036B 75 Type-N Calibration Kit
Cables
The following RF cables are used to return the transmitted signal to the test set when
measuring two-port devices. These cables provide shielding for high dynamic range
measurements.
11857D 7 mm Test Port Return Cable Set
These are a pair of test port return cables for use with the 87511A Option 001 S-parameter test
set. The cables can be used when measuring devices with connectors other than 7 mm by using
the appropriate precision adapters.
11857B 75 Type-N Test Port Return Cable Set
These are a pair of test port return cables for use with the 87511B S-parameter test set.
11851B 50 Type-N RF Cable Set
This kit contains the three phase-matched 50 type-N cables necessary to connect the 87512A
transmission/reection test kits or a power splitter to the analyzer. It also contains an RF cable
used to return the transmitted signal of a two-port device to the network analyzer.
BNC Cables
P/N 8120-1838 50
BNC Cable (30 cm)
P/N 8120-1839 50
BNC Cable (61 cm)
P/N 8120-1840 50
BNC Cable (122 cm)
Adapters
11852B 50 to 75 Minimum Loss Pad (DC to 2 GHz)
This device converts the impedance from 50 (type-N, female) to 75 (type-N, male) or
from 75 to 50 . It provides a low SWR impedance match between a 75 DUT and the
analyzer or a 50 measurement accessory. An 11852B pad is included with the 87512B 75 transmission/reection test kit. Three 11852B pads are included with the 11850D 75 power
splitter and one is included with the 4395A Option 1D7.
Adapter Kits
The following adapter kits contain the connection hardware required for making measurements
on devices of the indicated connector type.
11853A 50 Type-N Adapter Kit
11854A 50 BNC Adapter Kit
Accessories and Options 12-3
Measurement accessories available
11855A 75 Type-N Adapter Kit
11856A 75 BNC Adapter Kit
12-4 Accessories and Options
System accessories available
System accessories available
Printer
The analyzer can output displayed measurement results directly to supported peripherals, not
using external computers. Supported printers are as follows.
Table 12-1. Supported Printers and Printing Modes
Printer
Monochrome Printing Fixed Color Printing Variable Color Printing
HP DeskJet 340J
HP DeskJet 505
HP DeskJet 560C
HP DeskJet 694C
HP DeskJet 850C
HP DeskJet 1200
HP DeskJet 1600CM
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
GPIB cable
An GPIB cable is required to interface the analyzer with a computer, or other external
instrument. The following cables are available:
10833A (1 m)
10833B (2 m)
10833C (3 m)
10833D (0.5 m)
External Monitors
The analyzer can control the built-in LCD and an external monitor simultaneously. Color
monitors supporting VGA can be used as an external monitor.
Accessories and Options 12-5
A
Basic Measurement Theory
This chapter provides additional information on analyzer features beyond the basics covered in
the previous chapters. It deals with the following topics:
System Overview
Data Processing Flow
Network Analyzer Basic
Network Measurement Basic
S-parameters
Conversion
Smith Chart
Polar Chart
Electrical Delay
Averaging
IF Band Reduction
Group Delay
Spectrum Analyzer Basic
Detection Mode
Swept and FFT Mode
Resolution Bandwidth (rbw)
Selectivity of the RBW
Noise Measurement
Gated Sweep for Spectrum Measurement
Measurement and Display Points
Limit Line Concept
Marker
GPIB
Calibration for Network Measurement
Basic Measurement Theory A-1
System Overview
System Overview
The 4395A has three analyzer modes; network, spectrum, and impedance (available with
option 010).
In network analyzer mode, the 4395A measures the reection and transmission characteristics
of devices and networks by applying a known swept signal and measuring the response of the
test device. The signal transmitted through the device or reected from its input is compared
with the incident signal generated by a swept RF source. The signals are applied to a receiver
for measurement, signal processing, and display. The network analyzer system consists of a
source, signal separation devices, a receiver, and a display.
In spectrum analyzer mode, the 4395A measures the amplitude and frequency of a signal
spectral line by sweeping the tuning frequency of the receiver. The test signal is applied to a
receiver through an input attenuator. The spectrum analyzer consists of an input attenuator, a
receiver, and a display.
Impedance analyzer mode is available with option 010, and requires the 43961A RF impedance
test kit as well. In impedance analyzer mode, the 4395A applies test signals to the DUT
through the impedance test kit, and determines the impedance characteristics of the DUT by a
method called the I-V analysis method, that is, by measuring the voltage (V) and current across
the DUT. The 4395A's impedance analyzer system consists of a signal source, a test kit (the
43961A RF impedance test kit), a receiver, and a data display device.
Figure A-1 is a schematic block diagram that briey illustrates the 4395A's principle of
operation. For more information, refer to Service Manual (English)(Agilent part number:
04395-90100), which describes the 4395A's principle of operation in greater detail with a
complete block diagram.
Figure A-1. Schematic block diagram
A-2 Basic Measurement Theory
Data Processing
Data Processing
Overview
The 4395A's receiver converts the R, A, and B input signals into useful measurement
information. This conversion occurs in two main steps. First, the high frequency input signal is
translated to xed low frequency IF signals using analog mixing techniques (see the \Theory of
Operation" in the Service Manual for details). Second, the IF signals are converted into digital
data by an analog-to-digital converter (adc). From this point on, all further signal processing
is performed mathematically by the analyzer microprocessor and digital signal processor. The
following paragraphs describe the sequence of math operations and the resulting data arrays
as the information ows from the ADC to the display. They provide a good foundation for
understanding most of the measurement functions and the order in which they are performed.
The 4395A has three data processing ow paths: one is for network analyzer mode, another
for spectrum analyzer mode, and the other is for impedance analyzer mode. The data ow is
automatically changed when analyzer mode is changed.
Figure A-2, Figure A-3, and Figure A-4 provide data processing ow diagrams that represent
the ow of numerical data from IF detection to display. The data passes through several math
operations (shown as single-line boxes). Most of these operations can be selected and controlled
through the front panel MEASUREMENT block menus. The data is also stored in data arrays
(shown as double-line boxes). These arrays are places in the ow path where the data is
accessible via GPIB or using the internal disk drive or the memory disk.
Note
While only a single ow path is shown, two identical paths are available that
correspond to channel 1 and channel 2. When the channels are uncoupled,
each channel can be independently controlled so that the data processing
operations for one can be dierent from the other.
Data Processing for Network Measurement
Basic Measurement Theory A-3
Data Processing
Figure A-2. Data Processing for Network Measurement
Digital Filter
The digital lter detects the IF signal by performing a discrete Fourier transform (DFT) on the
digital data. The samples are converted into complex number pairs (real plus imaginary, R+jI)
that represent both the magnitude and phase of the IF signal. The lter shape can be altered
by selecting the IF bandwidth in Hz from the 10, 30, 100, 300, 1 k, 3 k, 10 k, and 40 k choices.
Changing the lter shape is a highly eective technique for noise reduction.
Ratio Calculations
These calculations are performed if the selected measurement is a ratio of two inputs (for
example, A/R or B/R). This is simply a complex divide operation. If the selected measurement is
absolute (for example, A or B), no operation is performed. The R, A, and B values are also split
into channel data at this point.
A-4 Basic Measurement Theory
Data Processing
Frequency Characteristics Correction by Corrective Data Arrays
This corrects the frequency response for absolute measurement value, using corrective
data arrays. If the selected measurement is ratio (for example, A/R or B/R), no operation is
performed.
Averaging
This is one of the noise reduction techniques. This calculation involves taking the complex
exponential average of up to 999 consecutive sweeps. See \Averaging (Sweep Averaging)"
under the heading \Network Measurement Basics" in this chapter.
Raw Data Arrays
These arrays store the results of all the preceding data processing operations. When full 2-port
error correction is on, the raw data arrays contain all four S-parameter measurements required
for accuracy enhancement. When the channels are uncoupled (coupled channels off), there
may be as many as eight raw data arrays. These arrays are directly accessible via GPIB, or
using the internal disk drive or the memory disk. Note that the numbers here are still complex
pairs.
Calibration Coecient Arrays
When a measurement calibration has been performed and correction is turned on, error
correction removes the repeatable systematic errors (stored in the calibration coecient arrays)
from the raw data arrays. This can vary from simple vector normalization to full 12-term error
correction.
The calibration coecient arrays themselves are created during a measurement calibration
using data from the raw data arrays. These are subsequently used whenever correction is on,
and are accessible via GPIB, or using the internal disk drive or the memory disk.
Data Arrays
The results of error correction are stored in the data arrays as complex number pairs. These
arrays are accessible via GPIB or by using the internal disk drive or the memory disk.
Memory Arrays
If the data-to-memory operation is performed (using the DATA!MEMORY softkey), the data
arrays are copied into the memory arrays (data trace arrays are also copied into the memory
trace array at same time). These arrays are accessible using the internal disk drive or the
memory disk. When accessed via GPIB, these arrays are read-only.
If memory is displayed, the data from the memory arrays goes through the same data
processing ow path as the data from the data arrays.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Electrical Delay and Phase Oset
This involves adding or subtracting a linear phase in proportion to frequency. This is equivalent
to \line-stretching" or articially moving the measurement reference plane. For more
information, see \Electrical Delay" under the heading \Network Measurement Basics" in this
chapter. .
Conversion
Transforms S-parameter measurement data into equivalent complex impedance (Z) or
admittance (Y) values, to inverse S-parameters (1/S), or to phase multiples of 4, 8, or 16. See
\Conversion Function" under the heading \Network Measurement Basics" in this chapter. .
Basic Measurement Theory A-5
Data Processing
Format
This converts complex number pairs into a scalar representation for display, according to the
selected format. This includes group delay calculations. Note that, once complex data has been
formatted, it cannot be restored. See \Group Delay" for information on group delay principles.
Data Hold
This keeps the maximum or minimum value at each display point when the data hold function
is turned on.
Data Math
This calculates the complex ratio of the two (data/memory), the dierence (data0memory), or
summation (data+memory) when the data math function is selected. In addition, this function
multiplies the ratio, dierence, or summation by a constant, or subtracts a constant from them.
Data Trace Arrays
The results are stored in the data trace arrays. It is important to note those marker values and
marker functions are all derived from the data trace arrays. Limit testing is also performed on
this array. The data trace arrays are accessible via GPIB, or using the internal disk drive or the
memory disk.
Memory Trace Arrays
If the data-to-memory operation is performed, the data trace arrays are copied into the
memory trace arrays (data arrays are also copied into the memory array at same time). These
arrays are accessible using the internal disk drive or the memory disk. When accessed via
GPIB, these arrays are read-only.
Scaling
These operations prepare the formatted data for display on the LCD. This is where the
appropriate reference line position, reference line value, and scale calculations are performed.
A-6 Basic Measurement Theory
Data Processing
Data Processing for Spectrum Measurement
Figure A-3. Data Processing for Spectrum Measurement
Decimation Windowing
This function reduces the sampling rate to resolve the spectrum closer than the frequency
resolution (which is decided by an inherent sampling rate and nite sampling number).
Fast Fourier Transform (fft)
This operation transforms a time domain signal into a frequency domain data using the Fast
Fourier Transform.
Basic Measurement Theory A-7
Data Processing
Absolute Squared (ABS2 )
This calculates the power of the spectrum.
Video Averaging
Video Averaging is one of the noise reduction techniques. The video bandwidth can be selected
to be RBW/1, RBW/3, RBW/10, RBW/100, or RBW/300.
Detection
This detects the value of a given display point in one of three modes: positive, negative,
and sample. For more information, see \Detection Modes" under the heading \Network
Measurement Basics" in this chapter.
Attenuator Adjustment
This adjustment corrects the value to what it was before being attenuated.
Averaging
Refer to \Averaging" under \Data Processing for Network Measurement" in this chapter.
Frequency Characteristics Level Correction
This process digitally corrects for frequency response errors in the analog down-conversion
path.
Raw Data Arrays
These arrays store the results of all the data produced by the peak detector. These arrays
are directly accessible via GPIB or by using the internal disk drive or the memory disk. In
spectrum analyzer mode, row data arrays hold only the real number part of values.
Memory Arrays
If the data-to-memory operation is performed (using the DATA!MEMORY softkey), the data
arrays are copied into the memory arrays (data trace arrays are also copied into the memory
trace arrays at same time). These arrays are accessible using the internal disk drive or the
memory disk. When accessed via GPIB, these arrays are read-only. are also output via GPIB,
but data cannot be input into them via GPIB.
If memory is displayed, the data from the memory arrays goes through the same data
processing ow path as the data from the data arrays.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Format/Unit conversion
This converts the measured values (dB value) to other unit (dBV, dBV, watt, an d volt). When
noise measurement is selected, this divides measured values by the equivalent noise bandwidth
to measure noise level directly.
Data Hold
Refer to \Data Hold" under \Data Processing for Network Measurement" in this chapter.
Data Math
Refer to \Data Math" under \Data Processing for Network Measurement" in this chapter.
A-8 Basic Measurement Theory
Data Processing
Data Trace Array
Refer to \Data Trace Array" under \Data Processing for Network Measurement" in this
chapter. Note that, in spectrum analyzer mode, data trace arrays hold only the real number
part of data.
Memory Trace Array
Refer to \Memory Trace Array" under \Data Processing for Network Measurement" in this
chapter. Note that, in spectrum analyzer mode, memory trace arrays hold only the real number
part of data.
Scaling
Refer to \Scaling" under \Data Processing for Network Measurement" in this chapter.
Basic Measurement Theory A-9
Data Processing
Data Processing for Impedance Measurement
Figure A-4. Data Processing for Impedance Measurement
Digital Filter
Refer to \Digital Filter" under \Data Processing for Network Measurement" in this chapter.
Voltage/Current Ratio
This is simply a complex divide operation. The R and A values are split into channel data at
this point.
A-10 Basic Measurement Theory
Data Processing
I-V to Reection Coecient Conversion
Converts the calculated V/I (voltage/current ratio) into 0 (reection coecient) data. The
4395A uses the reection coecient as its internal data.
Calibration Coecient Arrays/Calibration
During calibration, the 4395A measures three types of standards and stores them in the
calibration coecient arrays. This data is used to carry out S11 1 port calibration against the 0
value determined through the I-V ! 0 conversion and to determine the APC-7 calibration level
of the 43961A.
Averaging
Refer to \Averaging" under \Data Processing for Network Measurement" in this chapter.
Raw Data Arrays
These arrays store the results of all the preceding data processing operations as reection
coecients (0). These arrays are directly accessible via GPIB, or using the internal disk drive or
the memory disk. Note that the numbers here are still complex pairs.
Fixture Compensation Coecient Arrays/Fixture Compensation
During xture compensation, 4395A measures three types of standards and stores them in the
xture compensation coecient arrays. This data is used to remove errors attributable to the
xture. These arrays are directly accessible via GPIB, or using the internal disk drive or the
memory disk.
Data Arrays
The results of xture compensation are stored in the data arrays as complex number pairs.
These arrays are accessible via GPIB or by using the internal disk drive or the memory disk.
Memory Arrays
If the data-to-memory operation is performed (using the DATA!MEMORY softkey), the data
arrays are copied into the memory arrays (data trace arrays are also copied into the memory
trace arrays at same time). These arrays are accessible using the internal disk drive or the
memory disk. When accessed via GPIB, these arrays are read-only.
If memory is displayed, the data from the memory arrays goes through the same data
processing ow path as the data from the data arrays.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Conversion
When impedance or admittance is specied as a measurement parameter, the 4395A converts
the corresponding reection coecient into the impedance or admittance value. In this case,
however, the raw data, data, and memory arrays store the data as reection coecients, not as
an impedance value.
Format
Refer to \Format" under \Data Processing for Network Measurement" in this chapter.
Data Hold
Refer to \Data Hold" under \Data Processing for Network Measurement" in this chapter.
Basic Measurement Theory A-11
Data Processing
Data Math
Refer to \Data Math" under \Data Processing for Network Measurement" in this chapter.
Data Trace Array
Refer to \Data Trace Array" under \Data Processing for Network Measurement" in this
chapter.
Memory Trace Array
Refer to \Memory Trace Array" under \Data Processing for Network Measurement" in this
chapter.
Scaling
Refer to \Scaling" under \Data Processing for Network Measurement" in this chapter.
A-12 Basic Measurement Theory
Network Measurement Basics
Network Measurement Basics
S-parameters
S-parameters (scattering parameters) are a convention that characterizes the way a device
modies signal ow. A brief explanation is provided here of the S-parameters of a two-port
device. For additional details see Agilent Technologies Application Notes A/N 95-1 and A/N 154.
S-parameters are always a ratio of two complex (magnitude and phase) quantities. S-parameter
notation identies these quantities using the numbering convention:
S out in
Where the rst number (out) refers to the port where the signal is emerging and the second
number (in) is the port where the signal is incident. For example, the S-parameter S21 identies
the measurement as the complex ratio of the signal emerging at port 2 to the signal incident at
port 1.
Figure A-5 is a representation of the S-parameters of a two-port device, together with an
equivalent ow graph. In the illustration, \a" represents the signal entering the device and \b"
represents the signal emerging. Note that a and b are not related to the A and B input ports on
the analyzer.
Figure A-5. S-Parameters of a Two-Port Device
S-parameters are exactly equivalent to the more common description terms below, requiring
only that the measurements are taken with all DUT ports properly terminated.
Basic Measurement Theory A-13
Network Measurement Basics
S-Parameter Denition
Test Set Description
Direction
1
S
Input reection Coecient
FWD
1j2
2
S
Forward gain
FWD
1j2
1j1
S
Reverse
gain
REV
2
2
S
Output reection coecient
REV
2j1
11
21
12
22
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
a =0
a =0
a =0
a =0
Conversion Function
This function converts the measured reection or transmission data to the equivalent complex
impedance (Z) or admittance (Y) values. This is not the same as a two-port Y or Z parameter
conversion, as only the measured parameter is used in the equations. Two simple one-port
conversions are available, depending on the measurement conguration.
An S11 or S22 trace measured as reection can be converted to an equivalent parallel
impedance or admittance using the model and equations shown in Figure A-6.
Figure A-6. Reection Impedance and Admittance Conversions
In a transmission measurement, the data can be converted to its equivalent series impedance or
admittance using the model and equations shown in Figure A-7.
Figure A-7. Transmission Impedance and Admittance Conversions
Avoid using Smith chart, SWR, and delay formats for displaying Z and Y conversions, as
these formats are not easily interpreted. Marker values are impedance values in units for Z
conversions, or admittance values in S units for Y conversions in any format.
A-14 Basic Measurement Theory
Network Measurement Basics
Smith Chart
A Smith chart is used in reection measurements to provide a readout of the data in terms of
impedance. The intersecting lines on a Smith chart represent constant resistance and constant
reactance values, normalized to the characteristic impedance, Z0 , of the system. Reactance
values in the upper half of the Smith chart circle are positive (inductive) reactance, and in the
lower half of the circle are negative (capacitive) reactance.
Polar Chart
Each point on the polar format corresponds to a particular value of both magnitude and phase.
Quantities are read vectorally: the magnitude at any point is determined by its displacement
from the center (which has zero value), and the phase by the angle counterclockwise from
the positive x-axis. Magnitude is scaled in a linear fashion, with the value of the outer circle
usually set to a ratio value of 1. Because there is no frequency axis, frequency information is
read from the markers.
Electrical Delay
The electrical delay function simulates a variable length loss-free transmission line that can
be added to or removed from a receiver input to compensate for interconnecting cables, etc.
This function is similar to the mechanical or analog \line stretchers" of conventional network
analyzers. Delay is annotated in units of time with secondary labeling in electrical length,
associated with equivalent length of the transmission line if a value for VELOCITY FACTOR (see
below) is specied.
To obtain the characteristics of the DUT itself free of the inuence of interconnecting cables,
use ELECTRICAL DELAY under ELECTRICAL DELAY MENU , and enter the following setting:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Electrical delay1t =
where:
F (Hz)
1 (degree)
1
[sec]
F 2 360
Measuring frequency
Dierence between measuring frequency without cables and that with the
cables connected
In this case, the 4395A displays the electrical length of the interconnecting cable to compensate
for, along with the value of electrical delay:
1l = vo 2 1t[m]
where:
vo (=2.997925E8) (m/sec)
light velocity in vacuum
If the average relative permittivity (r ) of the DUT is known over the frequency span, the
length calculation can be adjusted to reect the actual length of the DUT more closely. This
can be done by entering the relative velocity factor for the DUT using VELOCITY FACTOR
under the 4Cal5 key:
1
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
p
r
assuming a relative permeability of 1.
Basic Measurement Theory A-15
Network Measurement Basics
Averaging (Sweep Averaging)
Averaging computes each data point based on an exponential average of consecutive sweeps
weighted by a user-specied averaging factor. Each new sweep is averaged into the trace
until the total number of sweeps is equal to the averaging factor, for a fully averaged trace.
Each point on the trace is the vector sum of the current trace data and the data from the
previous sweep. A high averaging factor gives the best signal-to-noise ratio, but slows the trace
update time. Doubling the averaging factor reduces the noise by 3 dB. The algorithm used for
averaging is:
S(n)
1
A(n) =
+ (1 0 ) 2 A(n01)
n
n
where:
A(n) = current average (1 n F)
S(n) = current measurement (1 n F)
F = average factor
IF Band Reduction
IF bandwidth reduction lowers the noise oor by reducing the receiver input bandwidth. It
has an advantage over averaging in reliably ltering out unwanted responses such as spurs,
odd harmonics, higher frequency spectral noise, and line-related noise. Sweep-to-sweep
averaging, however, is better at ltering out very low frequency noise. A tenfold reduction in
IF bandwidth (from 200 Hz to 20 Hz, for example) lowers the measurement noise oor by about
10 dB.
Another dierence between sweep-to-sweep averaging and variable IF bandwidth is the sweep
time. Averaging displays the rst complete trace faster but takes several sweeps to reach a
fully averaged trace. IF bandwidth reduction lowers the noise oor in one sweep, but the
sweep time may be slower.
Group Delay
For many networks, the linearity of the phase shift over a range of frequencies is an important
parameter.
Group delay is the measurement of signal transmission time through a test device. It is dened
as the derivative of the phase characteristic with respect to frequency. Because the derivative
is the instantaneous slope (or rate of change of phase with frequency), a perfectly linear phase
shift results in a constant slope, and therefore a constant group delay (Figure A-8).
A-16 Basic Measurement Theory
Network Measurement Basics
Figure A-8. Constant Group Delay
Note, however, that the phase characteristic typically consists of both linear (rst order) and
higher order (deviations from linear) components. The linear component can be attributed to
the electrical length of the test device and represents the average signal transit time. The
higher order components are interpreted as variations in transit time for dierent frequencies,
and represent a source of signal distortion (Figure A-9).
Figure A-9. Higher Order Phase Shift
The 4395A computes group delay from the phase slope. Phase data is used to nd the
phase deviation, 1', at the center point of a specied frequency aperture, 1f, to obtain an
approximation for the rate of change of phase with frequency (Figure A-10). This value, g ,
represents the group delay in seconds assuming linear phase change over 1f.
Basic Measurement Theory A-17
Network Measurement Basics
Figure A-10. Rate of Phase Change Versus Frequency
When deviations from linear phase are present, changing the frequency step can result in
dierent values for group delay. Note that in this case the computed slope varies as the
aperture 1f is increased (Figure A-11). A wider aperture results in loss of the ne grain
variations in group delay. This loss of detail is the reason that in any comparison of group delay
data it is important to know the aperture used to make the measurement.
Figure A-11. Variations in Frequency Aperture
In determining the group delay aperture, there is a tradeo between resolution of ne detail
and the eects of noise. Noise can be reduced by increasing the aperture, but this will tend to
smooth out the ne detail. More detail will become visible as the aperture is decreased, but the
noise will also increase, possibly to the point of obscuring the detail. A good practice is to use a
smaller aperture to assure that small variations are not missed, then increase the aperture to
smooth the trace.
A-18 Basic Measurement Theory
Spectrum Measurement Basics
Spectrum Measurement Basics
Detection Modes
The analyzer displays the value measured at the display point specied by NOP. However,
analyzer sweeps with the resolution specied by RBW. Detection chooses one level measured
between display points for displaying the trace. One of three detection modes can be selected:
Positive Peak Mode
Negative Peak Modes
Sample Mode
These modes are as described in the following subsections.
Positive and Negative Peak Modes
Positive and negative peak modes store signal maximums and minimums between the display
points, respectively, in a data array.
Sample Mode
In the sample mode, the signal value at the display point is placed in a data array. Sample
mode is used to measure noise level.
Swept Spectrum Analyzers versus FFT Analyzers
Usually, two analyzers are used to analyze waveforms transformed from the time domain test
signal to the frequency domain; one is a swept spectrum analyzer and the other is an FFT
analyzer.
When measuring signals over a wide frequency span with a wide RBW, swept spectrum
analyzers are better than FFT analyzers. This is true because the FFT analyzer requires a large
memory and a fast AD converter to measure the signal and therefore, is not practical. When
measuring signals with narrow RBW, FFT analyzers are better than swept spectrum analyzers
because the swept spectrum analyzer requires much more time to measure (sweep) the signal.
The FFT analyzer can measure the signal in very short time.
In spectrum analyzer mode, the 4395A operates as a step FFT analyzer which supports
high-speed sweep throughout the entire RBW.
Basic Measurement Theory A-19
Spectrum Measurement Basics
Figure A-12. Swept Spectrum Analyzers versus Step FFT Analyzers
A-20 Basic Measurement Theory
Spectrum Measurement Basics
Selectivity of the RBW
The selectivity of the RBW is the ratio of the 60 dB bandwidth to 3 dB bandwidth (RBW) of the
lter. The selectivity denes the shape of the lter. This factor is important when resolving
small signal that is adjacent to a large signal. The small adjacent signal is hidden by the large
signal even when the resolution bandwidth is set to smaller than the dierence of frequency
between the signals. To resolve small adjacent signals, the resolution bandwidth must be set so
that the small signal is not hidden by the large signals as shown in Figure A-13.
Figure A-13. Resolving Small Adjacent Signal
Because the 4395A uses a digital lter technique, the selectivity of the analyzer is better
(smaller) than a conventional spectrum analyzer (which uses analog lter technique). This
means the 4395A can detect a small signal that could not be detected by a conventional
spectrum analyzer.
Basic Measurement Theory A-21
Spectrum Measurement Basics
Noise measurement
Noise Format and Marker Noise Form
When a spectrum analyzer measures noise, the power shown by an analyzer is in proportion
to RBW (because spectrum analyzers measure total power coming thorough RBW). For noise
measurement, the measurement value is usually normalized by an equivalent noise bandwidth
of an RBW lter (frequency). The noise format automatically normalizes noise power by the
equivalent noise bandwidth and displays the trace on the screen. The marker noise form also
reads out the noise level normalized, even if the format is the spectrum.
Sample Detection Mode for Noise Measurement
For noise measurement, the sample detection mode is best. Because the power of noise
is uniformly distributed over frequency, it is not necessary to measure all the frequencies
between the display points. It is sucient to measure only the display points. This is why the
sample detection mode is used for noise measurement.
VBW for Noise Measurement
You should specify a smaller VBW when using the 4395A to measure noise levels.
To obtain accurate noise level measurements, it is essential to determine the average value
over a relatively long period. With a smaller VBW, the 4395A can determine the average time
domain at each measurement point.
A-22 Basic Measurement Theory
I-V Measurement Method
Impedance Measurement Basics
I-V Measurement Method
Basic Concept of I-V Method
Figure A-14. I-V Measurement Method
The unknown impedance, Z, can be calculated from the measured voltage and current using
Ohm's law: (See circuit A in Figure A-14.)
Z=
V
I
The current, I, can be also obtained by the voltage level of the known resistance, R0.
Z=
V1
V
= 1 R0
I
V2
See circuit B in Figure A-14.
The 4395A uses circuit B to determine the unknown impedance.
How This Is Dierent From Impedance Conversion in the Network
Analyzer Mode
The network analyzer part of the 4395A has an impedance conversion feature that converts
the reection coecient to impedance. The reection is determined by the impedance of the
DUT.
100
(01 0 1)
Z = R0
1+0
If the DUT impedance is equal to the characteristic impedance, there is no reection. When the
impedance is an innite value like OPEN, the all input signal is reected.
When the impedance is greater than characteristic impedance, the measurement error is
increased. For example, for an impedance of 2 k
, a 1 percent error in the reection coecient
is converted to a 24 percent error in impedance.
Basic Measurement Theory A-23
I-V Measurement Method
However, with the I-V method, the measurement error does not depend on the impedance of
the DUT because the I-V method measures the impedance directly from the ratio of the voltage
and current. Using the I-V method, you can measure a wide range impedance with constant
accuracy. This is the major advantage of the I-V method.
The 4395A, when combined with the 43961A, uses a RF I-V measurement method to measure
the impedance of a DUT at higher frequencies. While the RF I-V measurement method is
based on the same principal as the I-V measurement method, it is possible to operate at higher
frequencies by using an impedance matched measurement circuit (50 ) and a precision coaxial
test port.
A-24 Basic Measurement Theory
Impedance Measurement Scheme
Impedance Measurement Scheme
Measurement Block Diagram
With the 43961A connected, the measurement circuit is as shown in Figure A-15.
Figure A-15. Impedance Test Kit Block Diagram
The source signal is output from RF OUT port. VV voltmeter is R port receiver that measures a
voltage. VI voltmeter is A port receiver that measures a voltage of R0 to obtain a current.
Test Signal Level at DUT
The test signal level actually applied to the DUT depends on the test signal level from the
4395A, the output impedance, the insertion loss of the Impedance Test Kit, and the impedance
of the DUT.
Figure A-16 shows the simplied equivalent circuit of the 4395A and 43961A.
Figure A-16. Test Signal Level
Basic Measurement Theory A-25
Impedance Measurement Scheme
The output signal is divided by the input impedance (R0 ) and the impedance of the DUT. You
can use the following equation to determine the signal level actually applied to the DUT:
VDUT = VSET
ZDUT
2 (Z
DUT
+ R0 )
[V ]
Where,
VDUT
Voltage level that is actually applied to the DUT.
VSET
Voltage level that is set. See below.
ZDUT
Impedance of the DUT.
R0
Input impedance, 50 .
The 4395A denes the output level as the level when the RF OUT port is 50 terminated.
Therefore, you can calculate the voltage from dBm,
VSET =
Where,
PSET
q
P
10
10 SET
2 0:001 2 R0
Output power setting level. [dBm]
A-26 Basic Measurement Theory
Measurement Points and Display Points
Measurement Points and Display Points
In a network measurement, the analyzer measures at only the display points specied by NOP.
In a spectrum measurement, the analyzer measures all the frequencies between the display
points (except for sampling detection mode). This is done so that the analyzer can detect
spectrums existing between the display points
Figure A-17. Measurement Points and Display Points
Basic Measurement Theory A-27
Channel Coupling
Channel Coupling
When the 4395A is operating in network analyzer mode, you can couple the two channels
so that the sweep parameters are linked across the two channels. But, when one channel
measures a ratio measurement and the other one measures an absolute measurement (for
example A/R and B), sweep parameters can not be linked.
In channel coupling mode, the following parameters are linked:
Frequency
Number of points
Source power level
Number of groups
IF bandwidth
Sweep time
Trigger type
Sweep type
In addition, if both channels have the same input parameter (such as S11 or A/R), the following
parameters are linked:
Calibration type
Calibration coecient
The following parameters always have the same value between the two channels, whether or
not the channels are coupled:
Trigger source
List sweep table
Calibration kit type and data
The following parameters are always set for each channel independently, whether or not the
channels are coupled:
Measurement parameter
Display Format
Title
Traces displayed
Scale value
Electrical delay
Phase oset
Averaging (on/o, factor)
Linking of sweep parameter values for the two channels is independent of the
DUAL CHAN on OFF softkey under the 4Display5 key and of the MKR [UNCOUPLED] / [COUPLED]
softkey under the 4Marker5 key. COUPLED CH OFF becomes an alternate sweep function when
dual channel display is on. In this mode, the 4395A alternates between the two sets of sweep
parameter values for measurement of data and both are displayed.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
A-28 Basic Measurement Theory
Limit Line Concept
Limit Line Concept
These are lines drawn on the display to represent upper and lower limits or device
specications with which to compare the DUT. Limits are dened by specifying several
segments, where each segment is a portion of the sweep parameter span. Each limit segment
has an upper and a lower starting limit value.
Limits can be dened independently for the two channels with up to 18 segments for each
channel (a total of 36 for both channels). These can be in any combination of the two limit
types.
Limit testing compares the measured data with the dened limits, and provides pass or fail
information for each measured data point. An out-of-limit test condition is indicated in the
following ways:
Displaying a FAIL message on the screen
Emitting a beep
Displaying an asterisk in tabular listings of data
Writing a bit into GPIB event status register B (for more information on GPIB event status
registers, refer to 4395A Programming Guide)
Limits are entered in tabular form. Limit lines and limit testing can be either on or off while
limits are dened. As new limits are entered, the tabular columns on the display are updated,
and the limit lines (if on) are modied to the new denitions. The complete limit set can be
oset in either sweep parameter or amplitude value.
How Limit Lines are Entered
Before limit lines can be explained, the concept of \segments" must be understood. A segment
is the node of two limit lines.
Figure A-18. The Concept of Segments as a Point between Two Sets of Limit Lines
Basic Measurement Theory A-29
Limit Line Concept
As you can see in Figure A-18, segments are distinct points that dene where limit lines begin
or end. Limit lines span the distance between segments and represent the upper and lower test
limits. Figure A-18 shows another important aspect of limit lines. The far left hand side of a set
of limit lines will continue from the minimum sweep parameter value (start) and the far right
hand side of a set of limit lines will continue until the maximum sweep parameter value (stop).
A segment is placed at a specic sweep parameter value (a single frequency for example). The
rst segment denes the limit line value from the minimum sweep parameter value. Once
its sweep parameter value is entered, the upper and lower test limit (+5 dB and 05 dB for
example) need to be supplied.
Dening a second segment denes where the rst set of limit lines ends. This process is
repeated to create dierent sets of limit lines, each having new upper and lower limits. Up to
18 segments can be entered.
Limits can be dened independently for the two channels.
The example in Figure A-18 shows a combination of limit lines that change instantly and
gradually.
Segment 1 is at 2 MHz and has an upper and lower limit of +5 and 05 dB, respectively.
Notice the upper and lower limit lines start at the start frequency (1 MHz) and end at
segment 1.
Segment 2 is also at 2 MHz with dierent upper and lower limits of +10 dB and 010 dB,
changing the limit values instantly.
Segment 3 is at 3 MHz with the same limit value as segment 2 to obtain a at limit lines.
Segment 4 is at 4 MHz with upper and lower limit values of +15 dB and 015 dB, changing
the limit values gradually. Notice the upper and lower limit lines start at the segment and
continue until the stop frequency (5 MHz).
Note
Limit lines cannot be cut. Therefore, when limit lines are needed partially
along the sweep parameter axis, the non-limit-testing portion must also be
entered. Set the non-limit-testing portion by forcing the upper and lower limit
values out of range (+500 dB and 0500 dB for example).
Both an upper limit and a lower limit (or delta limits) must be dened. If only
one limit is required for a particular measurement, force the other limit out of
range (+500 dB or 0500 dB for example).
Turning ON/OFF Limit Line/Limit Test
Limit lines and limit testing features are off unless explicitly turned on by the user. After
entering the limit line information, you can turn on the limit line feature and optionally
the limit testing features. Turning these features off has no eect on the entered limit line
information.
Segments Entering Order Needs Notice
Generally, the segments do not have to be entered in any particular order. The analyzer
automatically sorts them and lists them on the display in increasing order of sweep parameter
value.
One exception is when two segments have the same sweep parameter value as described in
Figure A-18. If the same sweep parameter values exist, the analyzer draws the limit lines
according to entered segment order. For example, in Figure A-18, segment 1 should be entered
in advance of segment 2.
A-30 Basic Measurement Theory
Limit Line Concept
Saving the Limit Line Table
Limit line information is lost if the LINE switch is turned o. However, the 4Save5 and 4Recall5
keys can save limit line information along with all other current analyzer settings. Limit line
table information can be saved on a disk.
Osetting the Sweep Parameter or Amplitude of the Limit Lines
All limit line entries can be oset in either sweep parameter or amplitude values. The oset
aects all segments simultaneously.
Supported Display Formats
Limit lines are displayed only in Cartesian format. In polar and Smith chart formats, limit
testing of one value is available. The value tested depends on the marker mode and is the
magnitude or the rst value in a complex pair. The message \NO LIMIT LINES DISPLAYED" is
shown on the display in polar and Smith formats.
Use a Sucient Number of Points or Errors May Occur
Limits are checked only at the actual measured data points. If you do not select a sucient
number of points, it is possible for a device to be out of specication without a limit test failure
indication.
To avoid this, be sure to specify a high enough number of points. In addition, if specic sweep
parameter points must be checked, use the list sweep features described in \Reducing Sweep
Time (Using List Sweep)" in Chapter 9 so that the actual measured data points are checked.
Displaying, Printing, or Plotting Limit Test Data
The \list values" feature in the copy menu prints or displays a table of each measured sweep
parameter value. The table includes limit line and limit test information (if these functions are
turned on). If limit testing is on, an asterisk \3" is listed next to any measured value that is out
of limits.
If the limit lines are on, and other listed data allows sucient space, the following information
is also displayed:
Upper limit and lower limit
The margin by which the device passes or fails the nearest limit
Results of Plotting or Printing the Display with Limit Lines ON
If limit lines are on, they are shown when you print or plot the display. If limit testing is on,
the PASS or FAIL message is included as well.
Basic Measurement Theory A-31
Markers
Markers
Three Types of Markers
Three types of markers are provided for each channel. The rst is the movable marker that is
displayed on the screen (as 5) when 4Marker5, 4Maker!5, 4Search5, or 4Utility5 is pressed. When a
marker is turned on and no other function is active, the marker can be controlled with the
knob, or the step keys.
The second is the sub-markers that appear at the present marker position when a softkey in
the sub-marker menu is pressed. The seven sub-markers can be displayed for each channel at
same time (a total of 14).
The third is the 1marker that denes a reference position of the delta mode. This type of
marker includes three variations: 1marker(normal), tracking 1marker, and xed 1marker.
Marker Value
Markers have a sweep parameter value (the x-axis value in a Cartesian format) and a
measurement value (the y-axis value in a Cartesian format). In a polar, Smith, or admittance
chart format, the second part of a complex data pair is also provided as an auxiliary
measurement value.
The marker can be moved to any point on the trace, Its measurement and sweep parameter
values are displayed at the top right corner of the graticule for each displayed channel (in units
appropriate to the display format). The displayed marker measurement values are valid even
when the measured data is above or below the range displayed on the graticule. When marker
list is turned on, sweep parameter values and measurement values of all markers are listed on
the graticule. In a polar, Smith , or admittance chart format, auxiliary measurement values of
all markers are also listed.
Marker Time Mode
When marker time mode is turned on, the x-axis is changed to the time scale. The start point
of the x-axis is 0 seconds and the stop point indicates the sweep time. The markers have a time
instead of a sweep parameter value.
Continuous/Discrete Mode
Marker values of the network analyzer are normally continuous (that is, they are interpolated
between measured points). Alternatively, they can be set to read only discrete measured
points. The marker of the spectrum analyzer always reads only the discrete measured point.
Marker on the Data Trace or on the Memory Trace
If both data and memory are displayed, you can select which marker values apply to the data
trace or the memory trace. If data or memory is displayed (not both), the marker values apply
to the trace displayed. In a data math display (data+memory, data0memory, or data/memory),
the marker values apply to the trace resulting from the memory math function.
A-32 Basic Measurement Theory
Markers
1Mode
With the use of a delta marker, a delta marker mode is available that displays both the sweep
parameter and measurement values of the marker relative to the reference. Any position on
the trace or a xed point can be designated as the delta marker. The 1marker can be put on
a current position of the marker. If the delta reference is the xed 1marker, both its sweep
parameter value and its magnitude value (y-axis value) can be set arbitrarily anywhere in the
display area (not necessarily on the trace). If the delta marker is the tracking 1marker, its
sweep parameter value can be controlled and its measurement value is the value of the trace
at that sweep parameter value.
Marker Search Function
Markers can search for the trace maximum/minimum, mean point, any other point, peak
maximum/minimum or peak-to-peak value of all or part of the trace. The marker and
sub-markers can be used together to search for specied bandwidth cuto points and calculate
the bandwidth. Statistical analysis uses markers to provide a readout of the mean, standard
deviation, and peak-to-peak values of all or part of the trace.
Width Function
The bandwidth search feature analyzes a bandpass or band reject trace and calculates the
center point, bandwidth, and Q (quality factor) for the specied bandwidth. These parameters
depend on the 1marker mode. The following table shows how each parameter is determined
for each 1marker mode.
Table A-1. Obtaining Parameters in 1 Marker Mode
Parameter
Tracking 1 marker
Fixed 1 marker
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
BW
Displays the bandwidth value set by WIDTH VALUE .
center
Displays the center sweep parameter value between the cuto points (this is marked by
sub-marker 1).
Q
Displays the Q value (= cent/BW) of the trace.
Insertion Loss
Displays the absolute value of the marker.
1F (Left)
Displays the sweep parameter value dierence Displays the sweep parameter value dierence
between marker 2 and the xed 1marker.
between marker 2 and the center frequency
specied by the 4Center5 key.
1F (Right)
Displays the sweep parameter value dierence Displays the sweep parameter value dierence
between marker 3 and the xed 1marker.
between marker 3 and center frequency
specied by the 4Center5 key.
Displays the dierence between the marker
and the xed 1marker.
Figure A-19 shows an example of the bandwidth search feature.
Basic Measurement Theory A-33
Markers
Figure A-19. Bandwidth Search Example
A-34 Basic Measurement Theory
Markers
Peak Denition
The search function provides the dene peak feature, which species the properties of the
peaks searched for by the peak search function. The dene peak feature also allows the peak
search function to discriminate peaks from noise.
The peak denitions are dierent for the network analyzer mode and the spectrum analyzer
mode.
Peak Denition for Network Analyzer Mode
The following parameters are used in the peak denition for the network measurement:
Peak polarity (positive or negative)
1X, 1Y (gradient)
Threshold value
The search functions search for a peak where the parameters of the peak match the following
conditions:
The search functions search for a peak where the parameters of the peak match the following
conditions:
11XY 2SP AN min(1yL , 1yR )
(NOP 01)
and
Threshold Peak Amplitude Value
where:
1yL, 1yR are the dierence in amplitude value between a peak and the adjacent
measurement points on both sides.
That is, the search functions search for a peak where, the gradient is greater than 1Y/1X, and
the amplitude is greater than the threshold value. The search functions ignore a peak when the
amplitude value is less than the threshold even if the peak polarity is set to negative.
Figure A-20. Peak Denition for Network Analyzer Mode
Basic Measurement Theory A-35
Markers
Peak Denition for Spectrum Analyzer Mode
The following parameters are used in the peak denition for the spectrum measurement:
1Y (dierence of amplitude between a peak and an adjacent local minimum point)
Threshold value
The search functions search for a peak where the parameters of the peak match the following
conditions:
1Y min(max(1yL , 1yR ), 1yTH )
where:
1yL , 1yR are the dierence in amplitude value between a peak and the adjacent local
minimum point.
1yTH is the dierence between a peak and the threshold value.
That is, the search functions search for a peak where the dierence of amplitude between
the peak and the smaller of the adjacent local minimum points is greater than 1Y, and the
dierence between the peak and the threshold is greater than 1Y.
The peak polarity is always positive for the spectrum analyzer peak search functions.
Figure A-21. Peak Denition for Spectrum Analyzer Mode
A-36 Basic Measurement Theory
GPIB
GPIB
The analyzer is factory-equipped with a remote programming digital interface using the
General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB). This allows the analyzer to be controlled by an external
computer that sends commands or instructions to and receives data from the analyzer using the
GPIB. In this way, a remote operator has the same control of the instrument available to a local
operator from the front panel, except for the line power switch.
In addition, the analyzer itself can use GPIB to directly control compatible peripherals, without
the use of an external controller. It can output measurement results directly to a compatible
printer or plotter.
This section provides an overview of GPIB operation. More complete information on
programming the analyzer remotely over GPIB is provided in Programming Manual. The
Programming Manual includes examples of remote measurements using an HP 9000 series 200
or 300 computer with BASIC programming. The Programming Manual assumes familiarity
with front panel operation of the instrument.
A complete general description of the GPIB is available in Tutorial Description of the General
Purpose Interface Bus, Agilent publication 5952-0156. For more information on the IEEE 488.1
standard, see IEEE Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation, published
by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc., 345 East 47th Street, New York
10017, USA.
How GPIB Works
The GPIB uses a party-line bus structure in which up to 15 devices can be connected on one
contiguous bus. The interface consists of 16 signal lines and 6 grounded lines in a shielded
cable. With this cabling system, many dierent types of devices including instruments,
computers, plotters and printers can be connected in parallel.
Every GPIB device must be capable of performing one or more of the following interface
functions:
Talker
A talker is a device capable of sending device-dependent data when addressed to talk.
There can be only one active talker at any given time. Examples of this type of device are
voltmeters, counters, and tape readers. The analyzer is a talker when it sends trace data or
marker information over the bus.
Listener
A listener is a device capable of receiving device-dependent data when addressed to listen.
There can be any number of active listeners at any given time. Examples of this type of
device are printers, power supplies, and signal generators. The analyzer is a listener when it is
controlled over the bus by a computer.
Controller
A controller is a device capable of managing the operation of the bus and addressing talkers
and listeners. There can be only one active controller at any time. Examples of controllers
include desktop computers and minicomputers. In a multiple-controller system, active control
can be passed between controllers, but there can only be one system controller that acts as the
master, and can regain active control at any time. The analyzer is an active controller when it
plots or prints in the addressable mode. The analyzer is a system controller when it is in the
system controller mode.
Basic Measurement Theory A-37
GPIB
GPIB Requirements
Number of Interconnected Devices:
Interconnection Path/ Maximum Cable
Length:
Message Transfer Scheme:
Data Rate:
Address Capability:
Multiple Controller Capability:
15 maximum.
20 meters maximum or 2 meters per device, whichever
is less.
Byte serial/bit parallel asynchronous data transfer using
a 3-line handshake system.
Maximum of 1 megabyte per second over limited
distances with tri-state drivers. Actual data rate
depends on the transfer rate of the slowest device
involved.
Primary addresses: 31 talk, 31 listen. A maximum of 1
active talker and 14 active listeners at one time.
In systems with more than one controller (like the
analyzer system), only one can be active at any given
time. The active controller can pass control to another
controller, but only one system controller is allowed.
GPIB Capabilities of the 4395A
As dened by the IEEE 488.1 standard, the analyzer has the following capabilities:
SH1
Full source handshake.
AH1
Full acceptor handshake.
T6
Basic talker, answers serial poll, unadresses if MLA is issued. No talk-only
mode.
TE0
Does not have extended address of talker.
L4
Basic listener, unadresses if MTA is issued. No listen-only mode.
LE0
Does not have extended address of listener.
SR1
Complete service request (SRQ) capabilities.
RL1
Complete remote/local capability including local lockout.
PP0
Does not respond to parallel poll.
DC1
Complete device clear.
DT1
Responds to a group execute trigger.
C1, C2, C3, C4 System controller capabilities in system controller mode.
C11
Pass control capabilities in addressable mode.
E2
Tri-state drivers.
A-38 Basic Measurement Theory
GPIB
Bus Mode
The analyzer uses a single-bus architecture. The single bus allows both the analyzer and the
host controller to have complete access to the peripherals in the system.
Figure A-22. Analyzer Single Bus Concept
Two dierent modes are possible, system controller and addressable.
System
This mode allows the analyzer to control peripherals directly in a stand-alone
environment (without an external controller). This mode can only be selected
Controller
manually from the analyzer front panel. Use this mode for operation when no
computer is connected to the analyzer. Printing and plotting use this mode.
Addressable
This is the traditional programming mode, in which the computer is involved in
all peripheral access operations. When the external controller is connected to
the analyzer through GPIB (as shown in Figure A-22), this mode allows you to
control the analyzer over GPIB in the talker mode in order to send data, and in
the listener mode to receive commands. It also allows the analyzer to take or
pass control in order to plot and print.
Setting Addresses
In GPIB communications, each instrument on the bus is identied by an GPIB address. This
address code must be unique to each instrument on the bus. These addresses are not aected
when you press 4Preset5 or cycle the power. For more information on how to set the address,
refer to the description of the 4Local5 key in Appendix B \Softkey Reference".
Basic Measurement Theory A-39
Calibration for Network Measurement
Calibration for Network Measurement
Introduction
Network measurement calibration is an accuracy enhancement procedure that eectively
reduces the system errors that cause uncertainty in measuring a DUT. It measures known
standard devices, and uses the results of these measurements to characterize the system.
This section explains the theoretical fundamentals of accuracy enhancement and the sources of
measurement errors. It describes the dierent measurement calibration procedures available in
the analyzer, which errors they correct, and the measurements for which each should be used.
The later part of this section provides further information on characterizing systematic errors
and using error models to analyze the overall measurement performance.
Accuracy Enhancement
If it were possible for a perfect measurement system to exist, it would have innite dynamic
range, isolation, and directivity characteristics, no impedance mismatches in any part of
the test setup, and at frequency response. Vector accuracy enhancement, also known
as measurement calibration or error correction, provides the means to simulate a perfect
measurement system.
In any high frequency measurement, there are measurement errors associated with the
system that contribute uncertainty to the results. Parts of the measurement setup such as
interconnecting cables and signal separation devices (as well as the analyzer itself) all introduce
variations in magnitude and phase that can mask the actual performance of the DUT.
For example, crosstalk due to the channel isolation characteristics of the analyzer can
contribute an error equal to the transmission signal of a high-loss test device. For reection
measurements, the primary limitation of dynamic range is the directivity of the test setup.
The measurement system cannot distinguish the true value of the signal reected by the
DUT from the signal arriving at the receiver input due to leakage in the system. For both
transmission and reection measurements, impedance mismatches within the test setup cause
measurement uncertainties that appear as ripples superimposed on the measured data.
Measurement calibration simulates a perfect analyzer system. It measures the magnitude and
phase responses of known standard devices, and compares the measurement with actual device
data. It uses the results to characterize the system and eectively remove the system errors
from the measurement data of a test device, using vector math capabilities internal to the
analyzer.
When measurement calibration is used, the dynamic range and accuracy of the measurement
are limited only by system noise and stability, connector repeatability, and the accuracy to
which the characteristics of the calibration standards are known.
Sources of Measurement Errors
Network analysis measurement errors can be separated into systematic, random, and drift
errors.
Correctable systematic errors are the repeatable errors that the system can measure. These are
errors due to mismatch and leakage in the test setup, isolation between the reference and test
signal paths, and system frequency response.
The system cannot measure and correct for the non-repeatable random and drift errors. These
errors aect both reection and transmission measurements. Random errors are measurement
variations due to noise and connector repeatability. Drift errors include frequency drift,
A-40 Basic Measurement Theory
Calibration for Network Measurement
temperature drift, and other physical changes in the test setup between calibration and
measurement.
The resulting measurement is the vector sum of the DUT response plus all error terms. The
precise eect of each error term depends upon its magnitude and phase relationship to the
actual test device response.
In most high frequency measurements the systematic errors are the most signicant source
of measurement uncertainty. Because each of these errors can be characterized, their eects
can be eectively removed to obtain a corrected value for the test device response. For the
purpose of vector accuracy enhancement these uncertainties are quantied as directivity,
source match, load match, isolation (crosstalk), and frequency response (tracking). Each of
these systematic errors is described below.
Random and drift errors cannot be precisely quantied, so they must be treated as producing a
cumulative uncertainty in the measured data.
Directivity
Normally a device that can separate the reverse from the forward traveling waves (a
directional bridge or coupler) detects the signal reected from the DUT. Ideally the coupler
would completely separate the incident and reected signals, and only the reected signal
would appear at the coupled output (Figure A-23-a).
Figure A-23. Directivity
However, an actual coupler is not perfect (Figure A-23-b). A small amount of the incident
signal appears at the coupled output due to leakage as well as to reection from the
termination in the coupled arm. Also, reections from the main coupler output connector
appear at the coupled output, adding uncertainty to the signal reected from the device. The
gure of merit for how well a coupler separates forward and reverse waves is directivity. The
greater the directivity of the device, the better the signal separation. Directivity is the vector
sum of all leakage signals appearing at the analyzer receiver input due to the inability of the
signal separation device to separate incident and reected waves, and to residual reection
eects of test cables and adapters between the signal separation device and the measurement
Basic Measurement Theory A-41
Calibration for Network Measurement
plane. The error contributed by directivity is independent of the characteristics of the test
device and it usually produces the major ambiguity in measurements of low reection devices.
Source Match
Source match is dened as the vector sum of signals appearing at the analyzer receiver input
due to the impedance mismatch at the test device looking back into the source. Source match
is degraded by adapters and extra cables. A non-perfect source match leads to mismatch
uncertainties that aect both transmission and reection measurements. Source match is most
often given in terms of return loss in dB (therefore, the larger the number, the smaller the
error.
In a reection measurement, the source match error signal is caused by some of the reected
signal from the DUT being reected from the source back toward the DUT and re-reected
from the DUT (Figure A-24).
In a transmission measurement, the source match error signal is caused by reection from
the test device that is re-reected from the source.
Figure A-24. Source Match
The error contributed by source match is a mismatch error caused by the relationship between
the actual input impedance of the test device and the equivalent match of the source. It is a
factor in both transmission and reection measurements. Mismatch uncertainty is particularly
a problem in measurements where there is a large impedance mismatch at the measurement
plane.
A-42 Basic Measurement Theory
Calibration for Network Measurement
Load Match
Load match error results from an imperfect match at the output of the test device. It is caused
by impedance mismatches between the test device output port and port 2 of the measurement
system. As illustrated in Figure A-25, some of the transmitted signal is reected from port
2 back to the test device. A portion of this wave can be re-reected to port 2, or part can
be transmitted through the device in the reverse direction to appear at port 1. If the DUT
has low insertion loss (for example a transmission line), the signal reected from port 2 and
re-reected from the source causes a signicant error because the DUT does not attenuate the
signal signicantly on each reection. Load match is usually given in terms of return loss in dB
(therefore, the larger the number, the smaller the error).
Figure A-25. Load Match
The error contributed by load match depends on the relationship between the actual output
impedance of the test device and the eective match of the return port (port 2). It is a factor
in all transmission measurements and in reection measurements of two-port devices. Load
match and source match are usually ignored when the test device insertion loss is greater than
about 6 dB. This happens because the error signal is greatly attenuated each time it passes
through the DUT. However, load match eects produce major transmission measurement errors
for a test device with a highly reective output port.
Isolation (Crosstalk)
Leakage of energy between analyzer signal paths contributes to error in a transmission
measurement much as directivity does in a reection measurement. Isolation is the vector sum
of signals appearing at the analyzer receivers due to crosstalk between the reference and test
signal paths, including signal leakage within the test set and in both the RF and IF sections of
the receiver.
The error contributed by isolation depends on the characteristics of the DUT. Isolation is a
factor in high-loss transmission measurements. However, analyzer system isolation is more than
sucient for most measurements, and correction for it may be unnecessary. For measuring
devices with high dynamic range, accuracy enhancement can provide improvements in isolation
that are limited only by the noise oor.
Basic Measurement Theory A-43
Calibration for Network Measurement
Frequency Response (Tracking)
This is the vector sum of all test setup variations in which magnitude and phase change as a
function of frequency. This includes variations contributed by signal separation devices, test
cables, and adapters, and variations between the reference and test signal paths. This error is a
factor in both transmission and reection measurements.
For further explanation of systematic error terms and the way they are combined and
represented graphically in error models, see the later section, titled Accuracy Enhancement
Fundamentals - Characterizing Systematic Errors.
Compensation for Measurement Errors
There are twelve dierent error terms for a two-port measurement that can be corrected
by accuracy enhancement in the analyzer. These are directivity, source match, load match,
isolation, reection tracking, and transmission tracking, each in both the forward and reverse
direction. The analyzer has several dierent measurement calibration routines to characterize
one or more of the systematic error terms and remove their eects from the measured
data. The procedures range from a simple frequency response calibration to a full two-port
calibration that eectively removes all twelve error terms.
The Response Calibration eectively reduces the frequency response errors of the test setup
for reection or transmission measurements. This calibration procedure may be adequate
for measurement of well-matched low-loss devices. This is the simplest error correction to
perform, and should be used when extreme measurement accuracy is not required.
The Response and Isolation Calibration eectively removes frequency response and crosstalk
errors in transmission measurements, or frequency response and directivity errors in reection
measurements. This procedure may be adequate for measurement of well-matched high-loss
devices.
The S11 and S22 One-Port Calibration procedures provide directivity, source match, and
frequency response vector error correction for reection measurements. These procedures
provide high accuracy reection measurements of one-port devices or properly terminated
two-port devices.
The Full Two-Port Calibration provides directivity, source match, load match, isolation,
and frequency response vector error correction, in both forward and reverse directions, for
transmission and reection measurements of two-port devices. This calibration provides
the best magnitude and phase measurement accuracy for both transmission and reection
measurements of two-port devices, and requires an S-parameter test set.
The One-Path Two-Port Calibration provides directivity, source match, load match, isolation,
and frequency response vector error correction in one direction. It is used for high accuracy
transmission and reection measurements using a transmission/reection test kit, such as the
87512A, B. (The DUT must be manually reversed between sweeps to accomplish measurements
in both the forward and reverse directions.)
All the calibration procedures described above are accessed from the 4CAL5 key.
A-44 Basic Measurement Theory
Calibration for Network Measurement
Modifying Calibration Kits
For most applications, use the default cal kit models. Modifying calibration kits is necessary
only if unusual standards are used or the very highest accuracy is required. Unless a cal kit
model is provided with the calibration devices used, a solid understanding of error correction
and the system error model are essential to making modications. Read all of this section.
During measurement calibration, the analyzer measures actual, well-dened standards and
mathematically compares the results with ideal \models" of those standards. The dierences
are separated into error terms which are later reduced during error correction. Most of the
dierences are due to systematic errors - repeatable errors introduced by the analyzer, test
set, and cables - which are correctable. However, the dierence between the standard's
mathematical model and its actual performance has an adverse aect; it reduces the system's
ability to remove systematic errors, and thus degrades error-corrected accuracy. Therefore,
in addition to the default cal kit models, a \user kit" is provided that can be modied to an
alternate calibration standards model.
Several situations exist that may require a user-dened cal kit:
You use a connector interface dierent from the four built-in cal kits. (Examples: SMA, or
BNC.)
You are using standards (or combinations of standards) that are dierent from the predened
cal kits. (For example, using three oset SHORTs instead of an OPEN, SHORT, and LOAD to
perform a 1-port calibration.)
You want to improve the built-in standard models for predened kits. Remember that the
more closely the model describes the actual performance of the standard, the better the
calibration. (Example: The 7 mm LOAD is determined to be 50.4 instead of 50.0 .)
Unused standards for a given cal type can be eliminated from the default set, to eliminate
possible confusion during calibration. (Example: A certain application requires calibrating a
male test port. The standards used to calibrate a female test port can be eliminated from the
set, and will not be displayed during calibration.)
Glossary
This section provides a glossary of terms related to calibration.
A standard is a specic, well-dened, physical device used to determine systematic errors.
A standard type is one of ve basic types that dene the form or structure of the model to
be used with that standard (for example, a SHORT or a LOAD).
Standard coecients are numerical characteristics of the standards used in the model
selected.
A standard class is a grouping of one or more standards that determines which standards are
used in a particular calibration procedure.
Dening the Standards
Standard denition is the process of mathematically modeling the electrical characteristics
(delay, attenuation, and impedance) of each calibration standard. These electrical
characteristics (coecients) can be mathematically derived from the physical dimensions and
material of each calibration standard, or from its actual measured response. The parameters of
the standards can be listed in Standards Denitions, Table A-2.
Basic Measurement Theory A-45
Calibration for Network Measurement
Table A-2. Standard Denitions
Standard
NO. Type
C0
210015 F
Oset Oset Oset Standard
C2
Delay Loss
Z0
Label
210027 F/Hz 210036 F/Hz2 ps M
/s C1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Each standard must be identied as one of ve \types": OPEN, SHORT, LOAD, DELAY/THRU,
or arbitrary impedance.
Standard Types
OPEN
OPENs assigned a terminal impedance of innite ohms, but delay and loss osets may
still be added. For information of the delay and loss osets, see the \Oset and Delay"
paragraph.
As a reection standard, an OPEN oers the advantage of broadband frequency
coverage. However, an OPEN rarely has perfect reection characteristics because
fringing (capacitance) eects cause phase shift that varies with frequency. This can be
observed in measuring an OPEN termination after calibration, when an arc in the lower
right circumference of the Smith chart indicates capacitive reactance. These eects are
impossible to eliminate, but the calibration kit models include the OPEN termination
capacitance at all frequencies for compatible calibration kits. The capacitance model is a
second order polynomial (squared term), as a function of frequency, where the polynomial
coecients are user-denable. The capacitance model equation is:
C = C0 + C1 2 F + C2 2 F 2
where F is the measurement frequency.
SHORT
SHORTs are assigned a terminal impedance of 0 , but delay and loss osets may still be
added.
LOAD
LOADs are assigned a terminal impedance equal to the system characteristic impedance Z0 ,
but delay and loss osets may still be added. If the LOAD impedance is not Z0, use the
arbitrary impedance standard denition.
DELAY/THRU
DELAY/THRUs are assigned a transmission line of specied length, for calibrating
transmission measurements.
ARBITARY IMPEDANCE
A-46 Basic Measurement Theory
Calibration for Network Measurement
ARBITRARY IMPEDANCEs are assigned a standard type (LOAD), but with an arbitrary
impedance (dierent from system Z0 ).
Oset and Delay
Osets may be specied with any standard type. This means dening a uniform length of
transmission line to exist between the standard being dened and the actual measurement
plane. For reection standards, the oset is assumed to be between the measurement plane
and the standard (one-way only). For transmission standards, the oset is assumed to exist
between the two reference planes (in eect, the oset is the THRU). Three characteristics of
the oset can be dened: its delay (length), loss, and impedance.
Oset Delay species the one-way electrical delay from the measurement (reference) plane
to the standard, in seconds (s). (In a transmission standard, oset delay is the delay from
plane to plane.) Delay can be calculated from the precise physical length of the oset, the
permittivity constant of the medium, and the speed of light.
Oet Loss species energy loss, due to skin eect, along a one-way length of coaxial cable
oset. The value of loss is entered as ohms/nanosecond (or Giga ohms/second) at 1 GHz.
Oset Z0 species the characteristic impedance of the coaxial cable oset. This is not the
impedance of the standard itself.
Note
Numerical data for most Agilent Technologies calibration kits is provided in the
calibration kit manuals.
Specifying the Standard Class
Once a standard is specied, it must be assigned to a standard class. This is a group of from
one to seven standards that is required to calibrate for a single error term. The standards
within a single class are assigned to locations A through G as listed on the Standard Class
Assignments Table (Table A-3). A class often consists of a single standard, but may be composed
of more than one standard.
Table A-3. Standard Class Assignments Table
Class
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Standard
Class label
S11A
S11B
S11C
S22A
S22B
S22C
Forward Transmission
Reverse Transmission
Forward Match
Reverse Match
Response
Response & Isolation
Basic Measurement Theory A-47
Calibration for Network Measurement
The number of standard classes required depends on the type of calibration being performed,
and is identical to the number of error terms corrected. (Examples: A response cal requires
only one class, and the standards for that class may include an OPEN, or SHORT, or THRU. A
1-port cal requires three classes. A full 2-port cal requires 10 classes, not including two for
isolation.)
The number of standards that can be assigned to a given class may vary from none (class not
used) to one (simplest class) to seven. When a certain class of standards is required during
calibration, the analyzer will display the labels for all the standards in that class (except when
the class consists of a single standard). This does not, however, mean that all standards in a
class must be measured during calibration. Only a single standard per class is required. Note
that it is often simpler to keep the number of standards per class to the bare minimum needed
(often one) to avoid confusion during calibration.
Standards are assigned to a class simply by entering the standard's reference number
(established while dening a standard) under a particular class.
Each class can be given a user-denable label.
Note
The class assignments table can be displayed on screen and printed using 4COPY5
function.
Note
Agilent Technologies strongly recommends that you read application note
8510-5A before attempting to view or modify calibration standard denitions.
The part number of this application note is 5956-4352. Although the
application note is written for the 8510 family of network analyzers, it also
applies to the 4395A.
A-48 Basic Measurement Theory
Calibration for Network Measurement
Accuracy Enhancement Fundamentals-Characterizing Systematic Errors
One-Port Error Model
In a measurement of the reection coecient (magnitude and phase) of an unknown device,
the measured data diers from the actual, no matter how carefully the measurement is made.
Directivity, source match, and reection signal path frequency response (tracking) are the
major sources of error (Figure A-26).
Figure A-26. Sources of Error in a Reection Measurement
Measuring reection coecient. The reection coecient is measured by rst separating
the incident signal (I) from the reected signal (R), then taking the ratio of the two values
(Figure A-27). Ideally, (R) consists only of the signal reected by the test device (S11A ).
Figure A-27. Reection Coecient
Directivity Error. However, all of the incident signal does not always reach the unknown (see
Figure A-28). Some of (I) may appear at the measurement system input due to leakage through
the test set or other signal separation device. Also, some of (I) may be reected by imperfect
adapters between signal separation and the measurement plane. The vector sum of the leakage
and miscellaneous reections is directivity, EDF . Understandably, the measurement is distorted
when the directivity signal combines vectorally with the actual reected signal from the
unknown, S11A .
Basic Measurement Theory A-49
Calibration for Network Measurement
Figure A-28. Eective Directivity EDF
Source match error. Because the measurement system test port is never exactly the
characteristic impedance (50 or 75 ), some of the reected signal is re-reected o the test
port, or other impedance transitions further down the line, and back to the unknown, adding
to the original incident signal (I). This eect causes the magnitude and phase of the incident
signal to vary as a function of S11A and frequency. Leveling the source to produce constant
(I) reduces this error, but because the source cannot be exactly leveled at the test device
input, leveling cannot eliminate all power variations. This re-reection eect and the resultant
incident power variation are caused by the source match error, ESF (Figure A-29).
Figure A-29. Source Match ESF
Frequency response error. Frequency response (tracking) error is caused by variations in
magnitude and phase atness versus frequency between the test and reference signal paths.
These are due mainly to imperfectly matched receiver circuits and dierences in length and
loss between incident and test signal paths. The vector sum of these variations is the reection
signal path tracking error, ERF (Figure A-30).
A-50 Basic Measurement Theory
Calibration for Network Measurement
Figure A-30. Reection Tracking ERF
How calibration standards are used to quantify these error terms. It can be shown that
these three errors are mathematically related to the actual data, S11A, and measured data,
S11M , by the following equation:
S11A(ERF )
S11M = EDF +
1 0 ESF S11A
If the value of these three \E" errors and the measured test device response were known for
each frequency, the above equation could be solved for S11A to obtain the actual test device
response. Because each of these errors changes with frequency, their values must be known
at each test frequency. These values are found by measuring the system at the measurement
plane using three independent standards whose S11A is known at all frequencies.
The rst standard applied is a \perfect load" that makes S11A = 0 and essentially measures
directivity (Figure A-31). \Perfect load" implies a reection-free termination at the
measurement plane. All incident energy is absorbed. With S11A = 0 the equation can be solved
for EDF , the directivity term. In practice, of course, the \perfect load" is dicult to achieve,
although very good broadband LOADs are available in the 4296A compatible calibration kits.
Figure A-31. \Perfect Load" Termination
Because the measured value for directivity is the vector sum of the actual directivity plus
the actual reection coecient of the \perfect load," any reection from the termination
represents an error. System eective directivity becomes the actual reection coecient of the
\perfect load" (Figure A-32). In general, any termination having a return loss value greater
than the uncorrected system directivity reduces reection measurement uncertainty.
Basic Measurement Theory A-51
Calibration for Network Measurement
Figure A-32. Measured Eective Directivity
Next, a SHORT termination whose response is known to a very high degree establishes another
condition (Figure A-33).
Figure A-33. Short Circuit Termination
The OPEN gives the third independent condition. In order to accurately model the phase
variation with frequency due to radiation from the OPEN connector, a specially designed
shielded OPEN is used for this step. (The OPEN capacitance is dierent with each connector
type). Now the values for EDF , directivity, ESF , source match, and ERF , reection frequency
response, are computed and stored (Figure A-34).
A-52 Basic Measurement Theory
Calibration for Network Measurement
Figure A-34. Open Circuit Termination
Now the unknown is measured to obtain a value for the measured response, S11M , at each
frequency (Figure A-35).
Figure A-35. Measured S11
This is the one-port error model equation solved for S11A. Because the three errors and S11M
are now known for each test frequency, S11A can be computed as follows:
S11A =
S11M 0 EDF
ESF (S11M 0 EDF ) + ERF
For reection measurements on two-port devices, the same technique can be applied, but
the test device output port must be terminated in the system characteristic impedance. This
termination should be at least as good (have as low a reection coecient) as the LOAD used to
determine directivity. The additional reection error caused by an improper termination at the
test device output port is not incorporated into one-port error model.
Basic Measurement Theory A-53
Calibration for Network Measurement
Two-Port Error Model
The error model for measurement of the transmission coecients (magnitude and phase) of
a two-port device is derived in a similar manner. The major sources of error are frequency
response (tracking), source match, load match, and isolation (Figure A-36). These errors are
eectively removed using the full two-port error model
Figure A-36. Major Sources of Error
Measuring Transmission Coecient. The transmission coecient is measured by taking the
ratio of the incident signal (I) and the transmitted signal (T) (Figure A-37). Ideally, (I) consists
only of power delivered by the source, and (T) consists only of power emerging at the test
device output.
Figure A-37. Transmission Coecient
Load Match Error. As in the reection model, source match can cause the incident signal to
vary as a function of test device S11A . Also, because the test setup transmission return port is
never exactly the characteristic impedance, some of the transmitted signal is reected from the
test set port 2, and from other mismatches between the test device output and the receiver
input, to return to the test device. A portion of this signal may be re-reected at port 2, thus
aecting S21M , or part may be transmitted through the device in the reverse direction to
appear at port 1, thus aecting S11M . This error term, which causes the magnitude and phase
of the transmitted signal to vary as a function of S22A, is called load match, ELF (Figure A-38).
A-54 Basic Measurement Theory
Calibration for Network Measurement
Figure A-38. Load Match ELF
The measured value, S21M , consists of signal components that vary as a function of the
relationship between ESF and S11A as well as ELF and S22A , so the input and output reection
coecients of the test device must be measured and stored for use in the S21A error correction
computation. Thus, the test setup is calibrated as described above for the reection to establish
the directivity, EDF , source match, ESF , and reection frequency response, ERF , terms for the
reection measurements.
Now, that a calibrated port is available for reection measurements, the THRU is connected and
load match, ELF , is determined by measuring the reection coecient of the THRU connection.
Transmission signal path frequency response is then measured with the THRU connected. The
data is corrected for source and load match eects, then stored as transmission frequency
response, ETF .
Isolation Errors. Isolation, EXF , represents the part of the incident signal that appears at the
receiver without actually passing through the test device (Figure A-39). Isolation is measured
with the test set in the transmission conguration and with terminations installed at the points
where the test device will be connected.
Figure A-39. Isolation EXF
Error Terms the 4395A Can Reduce. Thus there are two sets of error terms, forward and
reverse, with each set consisting of six error terms, as follows:
Forward
Directivity, EDF
Isolation, EXF
Source Match, ESF
Load Match, ELF
Transmission Tracking, ETF
Basic Measurement Theory A-55
Calibration for Network Measurement
Reection Tracking, ERF
Reverse
Directivity, EDR
Isolation, EXR
Source Match, ESR
Load Match, ELR
Transmission Tracking, ETR
Reection Tracking, ERR
The 87511A, B S-parameter Test sets can measure both the forward and reverse characteristics
of the test device without the need to manually remove and physically reverse it. With these
test sets, the full two-port error model illustrated in Figure A-40 eectively removes both the
forward and reverse error terms for transmission and reection measurements.
The 87512A, B Transmission/Reection Test kits cannot switch between forward and reverse
directions, so the reverse error terms cannot be automatically measured. Therefore, with
the one-path two-port calibration, the forward error terms are duplicated and used for both
forward and reverse measurements by manually reversing the test device.
Figure A-40. Full Two-Port Error Model
The following equations show the full two-port error model equations for all four S-parameters
of a two-port device. Note that the mathematics for this comprehensive model use all forward
and reverse error terms and measured values. Thus, to perform full error correction for any
one parameter, all four S-parameters must be measured.
A-56 Basic Measurement Theory
Calibration for Network Measurement
S11A =
S21A =
S12A =
1+
1+
1+
S11M 0EDF
ERF
S11M 0EDF
ERF
S11M 0EDF
ERF
S22A =
1+
S11M 0EDF
ERF
1+
ESF
ESF
S22M 0EDR
ERR
1+
1+
ESF
1+
h
1+
ESF
1+
i 0
ESR
S21M 0EXF
ETF
0
ESR 0 ELF
ESR
ESF
ESF
S22M 0EDR
ERR
0
0 ELR
ESR
0
i ESR
0
0
S12M 0EXR
ETR
S21M 0EXF
ETF
S21M 0EXF
ETF
S12M 0EXR
ETR
S21M 0EXF
ETF
S21M 0EXF
ETF
S21M 0EXF
ETF
S22M 0EDR
ERR
S11M 0EDF
ERF
ESR
S22M 0EDR
ERR
S11M 0EDF
ERF
S22M 0EDR
ERR
S22M 0EDR
ERR
1+
1+
S22M 0EDR
ERR
S11M 0EDF
ERF
h
S21M 0EXF
ETF
ELF
S12M 0EXR
ETR
ELF ELR
S12M 0EXR
ETR
ELF ELR
S12M 0EXR
ETR
S12M 0EXR
ETR
ELF ELR
S12M 0EXR
ETR
ELR
ELF ELR
In addition to the errors removed by accuracy enhancement, other systematic errors exist
due to limitations of dynamic accuracy, test set switch repeatability, and test cable stability.
These, combined with random errors, also contribute to total system measurement uncertainty.
Therefore, after accuracy enhancement procedures are performed, residual measurement
uncertainties remain.
Basic Measurement Theory A-57
Saving and Recalling Instrument States and Data
Saving and Recalling Instrument States and Data
This section describes storage devices, the save and recall functions, and the information you
need to save instrument states and data into les.
Additional information on how to save and recall instrument states is provided in the \To Save
and Recall the Settings and Data" in Chapter 8.
Note
The 4Save5 and 4Recall5 keys do not access Instrument BASIC programs.
Instrument BASIC has its own menus (under the 4System5 key) for accessing the
built-in disk drive and the memory disk. See Programming Manual for detail.
Storage Devices
The analyzer supports two storage devices, a built-in exible disk drive and a memory disk.
The exible disk drive should be used to store large numbers of les and long term data
storage. The memory disk should be used to store temporary tentative data and instrument
states and to store or retrieve data quickly.
Note
Use the built-in exible disk to store important data because the memory disk
data is lost when the power is turned o.
Disk Requirements
The analyzer's disk drive uses a 720 Kbyte , or 1.44 Mbyte 3.5 inch micro-exible disk.
Disk Formats
The analyzer's built-in disk drive can access both LIF (logical interchange format) and DOS
formatted disks. The disk drive and the memory disk can also initialize a new disk in either LIF
or DOS format. Note that the analyzer can initalize 1.44 Mbyte disks only.
The following list shows the applicable DOS formats for the analyzer.
720 Kbyte, 80 tracks, double-sided, 9 sectors/track
1.44 Mbyte, 80 tracks, double-sided, 18 sectors/track
Memory Disk Capacity
The memory disk capacity is 512 Kbyte. The memory disk capacity can be changed. This
capacity includes the directory area. The capacity of data area depends on the disk format
type.
A-58 Basic Measurement Theory
File Types And Data Saved
Copy Files Between the Memory Disk and the Flexible Disk
A copy function is provided to copy les between the memory disk and the exible disk.
FILE UTILITIES in the SAVE menu displays the softkeys used to copy les. The GPIB
command FILC is also available to copy les.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Note
When you copy les using this function, use the same disk format type for both
the memory disk and the exible disk. This copy function cannot copy les
when the format of the memory disk is dierent from the format of the exible
disk.
File Types And Data Saved
Binary Files and ASCII Files
The analyzer supports two le formats, binary and ASCII, that are used to save data on a disk.
Binary les are used to save measurement conditions and data using the SAVE function and to
retrieve binary data using the RECALL function. External controllers and Instrument BASIC
can read measurement data from binary data les. ASCII measurement data or screen image
les can be read by commonly available IBM PC based software for data analysis or other
secondary functions. The RECALL function cannot read ASCII les.
Note
When saving internal data arrays, note that ASCII data les cannot be recalled
on the analyzer. If you need to recall the data, save the le in binary format.
This binary data can be recalled and saved as an ASCII le at any time.
Data Groups
Instrument States and Internal Data Arrays (STATE)
This group consists of the instrument states that include raw calibration coecients (network
analyzer only), the data arrays, and the memory arrays. (Binary Files Only)
Internal Data Arrays (DATA ONLY)
The internal data arrays that are stored in the analyzer's memory consists of the following
six data arrays. See \Data Processing" for complete information on each data array and their
relationships.(Binary and ASCII Files)
Raw data arrays contain raw, uncalibrated measurement data.
Calibration Coecients arrays contain the expanded calibration coecients obtained by
calibration of the network analyzer.
Data arrays contain the calibrated data obtained using the calibration coecients.
Memory arrays contain the memory data arrays obtained using the DATA!MEM operation.
Data Trace arrays contain the formatted data.
Memory Trace arrays contain the formatted data of the \memory arrays."
These arrays can be saved selectively to suit the application. For example, when measuring
several devices with the same measurement settings, you may need to save only the trace
Basic Measurement Theory A-59
File Types And Data Saved
arrays for each device. Saving only the necessary arrays reduces the disk space required
and the disk access time. In addition, saving internal data also allows the analysis of the
measurement results using an external controller. See \File Structure of Internal Data Arrays
File for Binary Files" for more information.
Graphics image (GRAPHICS)
The analyzer saves the graphics image of the screen as a graphics le in the TIFF (Tagged Image
File Format) format. The TIFF format is used in a wide range of drawing software programs (in
binary format only).
File Type and Data Group Combinations
You can select and save to a disk one of the following four combinations of the two le types
and the four data groups.
Binary File
Instrument states and internal data arrays (STATE)
Internal data arrays (DATA ONLY binary)
Graphics image (GRAPHICS)
ASCII File
Internal data arrays (DATA ONLY ascii)
Note
DATA ONLY does not save instrument settings such as start and stop
frequencies. BE CAREFUL! Always make sure that you save the existing
STATE if you want to use the setup again.
A-60 Basic Measurement Theory
File Names
File Names
All data saved using the built-in disk drive and the memory disk has an identifying le name. A
le name consists of the lower and upper case alphabet, numbers, and valid symbol characters.
Up to 8 characters can be used for a le name. The following table shows the valid characters
for LIF and DOS le names.
Table A-4. Valid Characters for File Names
Valid Characters
Description
LIF
DOS Format
A-Z
A-Z
Upper case alphabet
a-z
a-z
Lower case alphabet
0-9
0-9
Numeric characters
$ & # % ' ! () -
@ ^ fg ~
Symbol characters
One of the following suxes or extensions is automatically added to the le name depending
on the data group type stored in the le.
Table A-5. Suxes and Extensions Added Automatically
Data Groups
Suxes for LIF Extensions for
DOS
FFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Instrument States and Internal Data Arrays ( STATE )
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Internal Data Arrays ( DATA ONLY (binary) )
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Internal Data Arrays as an ASCII File ( DATA ONLY (ASCII) )
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
Graphics Image as an TIFF File ( GRAPHICS )
_S
.STA
_D
.DTA
_I
.TXT
_T
.TIF
Auto Recall Function
When the 4395A is turned on, it looks for a le named \AUTOREC" from the built-in exible disk
or memory disk, and if found, the 4395A automatically reads the le to retrieve its data.
Note
When you save the AUTOREC le into the memory disk, you must perform
memory disk backup operation. Otherwise, the AUTOREC le is lost when the
power is turned o.
When the 4395A is turned ON, the 4395A looks for the AUTOREC le on the
exible disk rst. If there is no AUTOREC le on the exible disk, the 4395A
looks for it on the memory disk.
Basic Measurement Theory A-61
File Structure
File Structure
File Structure of Internal Data Arrays File for Binary Files
Note
Binary and ASCII le structures are not compatible.
When internal data arrays are saved as a binary le, the arrays' le consists of a le header at
the top of the le and the data groups following the le header.
File Header
Every internal data array le begins with a le header. Figure A-41 shows the header structure.
Figure A-41. File Header Structure
Six data switches dene the data groups that follow the le head. Each one-byte switch is
either 1 or 0 (decimal value) if the applicable data group exists or not, respectively. The data
group to be followed is in the same order of these switches. For example, when the data
switches, RAW DATA and DATA TRACE are 1 (on), while the others are off, only the RAW
DATA and DATA TRACE (in this order) groups will follow the header.
Data Group
Data group of each channel begins with a header and consists of the same structured data
segments. The number of data segments depends on the data group type as follows:
RAW DATA of the network analyzer consists of a header and four data segments per channel
as shown in Figure A-42. They will follow the le header in this order:
A-62 Basic Measurement Theory
File Structure
Figure A-42. RAW Data Group Structure for the Network Analyzer
RAW DATA of the spectrum analyzer consists of a header and a data segment by a channel as
shown in Figure A-43. They will follow the le header in this order:
Figure A-43. RAW Data Group Structure for the Spectrum Analyzer
CAL of the network analyzer consists of 12 data segments by a channel as shown in
Figure A-44. The rst half of the segments are for channel 1 and the second half of the
segments are for channel 2. The contents of each segment depend on the type of calibration
performed. CAL data is available for only the network analyzer.
Basic Measurement Theory A-63
File Structure
Figure A-44. CAL Data Group Structure for the Network Analyzer
Figure A-45. CAL Data Group Structure for the Spectrum Analyzer
DATA consists of a header and a data segment by a channel.
MEMORY consists of a header and a data segment by a channel.
DATA TRACE consists of a header and a data segment by a channel.
A-64 Basic Measurement Theory
File Structure
MEMORY TRACE consists of a header and a data segment by a channel.
Figure A-46. DATA, MEMORY, DATA TRACE and MEMORY TRACE Data Group Structure
Analyzer Type is a two-byte INTEGER value. This shows the analyzer type of each channel.
\0" is set when the network analyzer is selected and \1" is set when the spectrum analyzer is
selected.
Number Of Points (NOP) is a two-byte INTEGER value. This number is equal to the number
of complex or real data that follows the NOP.
DATA is a set of the values for each measurement point. The values are IEEE 754 double
precision oating number. When the network analyzer mode is selected, the values are two
numbers (the rst value is the real part, the second value is the imaginary part). The data
size in bytes can be determined by 162NOP. When the spectrum analyzer mode is selected,
the values are one number and the data size in bytes can be determined by 82NOP.
Basic Measurement Theory A-65
File Structure
File Structure of Internal Data Arrays File for ASCII File
Numerical data and strings in an ASCII data le are separated by a tab, and a string is bound by
double quotation marks.
Status Block and Data Block
An ASCII data le consists of a status block and data blocks. The status block consists of two
lines, the revision number and the date code. The data block consists of three parts, the state
part, the title line, and the data part.
State
The state part consists of the following instrument states:
Channel number
Title on the screen
Measurement type
Format type (and Unit)
Number of points
Sweep time
Sweep type
Source power or CW frequency
IF, or RBW and VBW bandwidth
Title
The title part consists of the data array names saved. Data array names are described in
the next section.
Data
The data part consists of sweep parameter and numerical data of data arrays.
Table A-6 shows an example of an ASCII data le.
A-66 Basic Measurement Theory
File Structure
Table A-6. Contents of ASCII Files
Block Names
Contents
Status Block
State
Data Block
Title
Data6 , 7
"4395A REV1.00"
"DATE: mmm dd yyyy"1
"CHANNEL: 1"
"TITLE: This is a title." 2
"MEAS TYPE: A/R"
"FORMAT TYPE: LOG MAG"
"NUMBER of POINTS: 201"
"SWEEP TIME: 12.2 ms"
"SWEEP TYPE: LIST FREQ"
"SOURCE POWER: 0 dBm"3
"BANDWIDTH: 3 kHz"
"Frequency" !"Raw [S11] Real"!"Raw [S11] Imag"!1114 , 5
3.00000E+5!8.20007E-1!4.09729E-1!1114
1.52238E+7!9.32143E-1!-4.1914E-2!111
..
..
..
1 This is the date when the le is saved.
2 This line is listed when the title is dened (displayed).
3 Shows the power level of the source for a frequency sweep. If power sweep is selected, the CW frequency is listed
(for example "CW FREQ: 100 MHz").
4 \!" means tab code. Data is separated by the tab code.
5 This line lists the names of the data array saved in this le. Titles used in the ASCII les are shown in Table A-7
through Table A-10.
6 Each line lists the measurement data at each measurement point. The number of lines in the data block is the same
as the number of points.
7 In the network analyzer mode, complex data is saved. In the spectrum analyzer mode, only real data is saved.
Basic Measurement Theory A-67
File Structure
File Structure for Single Channel and Dual Channel
If you save an ASCII le when DUAL CHANNEL is turned OFF, the ASCII data le consists of
the active channel's data. If DUAL CHANNEL is turned ON, the ASCII data le consists of the
data of both channels 1 and 2. The channel 2 data follows the channel 1 data as follows:
File Structures for Single and Dual Channels
Dual Channel ON
Dual Channel OFF
Status Block
Status Block
Data Block
of
Active Channel
Data Block
of
Channel 1
(end of le)
Status Block
Data Block
of
Channel 2
Data Array Names for the Spectrum Analyzer
Data array names are used in the title line of the data block. Each data array of the spectrum
analyzer has one name, Table A-7 lists all names.
Table A-7. Data Groups and Data Array Names for Spectrum Analyzer
Data Groups
Data Array Names
Raw Data
Data
Memory
Data Trace
Memory Trace
Raw
Data
Memory
Data Trace
Memory Trace
A-68 Basic Measurement Theory
Descriptions
Raw data array.
Corrected Data arrays
Corrected Memory arrays
Data Trace arrays
Memory Trace arrays
File Structure
Data Array Names for the Network Analyzer
Data array names are used in the title line of the data block. Each real and imaginary part of
the internal data array of the network analyzer has one name, Table A-8 lists all names.
Table A-8.
Data Groups and Data Array Names for the Network Analyzer Mode
Data Groups
Raw Data
Calibration Data1
Data
Memory
Data Trace
Memory Trace
Descriptions
Data Array Names
Real Part
Imaginary Part
Raw[S11] Real
Raw[S21] Real
Raw[S12] Real
Raw[S22] Imag
Cal[1] Real
Cal[2] Real
Cal[3] Real
Cal[4] Real
Cal[5] Real
Cal[6] Real
Cal[7] Real
Cal[8] Real
Cal[9] Real
Cal[10] Real
Cal[11] Real
Cal[12] Real
Data Real
Memory Real
Data Trace Real
Memory Trace Real
Raw[S11] Imag
Raw[S21] Imag
Raw[S12] Imag
Raw[S22] Imag
Cal[1] Imag
Cal[2] Imag
Cal[3] Imag
Cal[4] Imag
Cal[5] Imag
Cal[6] Imag
Cal[7] Imag
Cal[8] Imag
Cal[9] Imag
Cal[10] Imag
Cal[11] Imag
Cal[12] Imag
Data Imag
Memory Imag
Data Trace Imag
Memory Trace Imag
Raw data arrays for S11 meas.
Raw data arrays for S21 meas.
Raw data arrays for S12 meas.
Raw data arrays for S22 meas.
Er,2 Et,2 Ex,3 Ed,3 , 4 or Edf5
Et,3 Er,3 Es,4 or Esf5
Er4 or Erf5
Exf5
Elf5
Etf5
Edr5
Esr5
Err5
Exr5
Elr5
Etr5
Corrected Data arrays
Corrected Memory arrays
Data Trace arrays
Memory Trace arrays
1 For more information on calibration, see \Calibration for Network Measurement". Calibration data is available for
only network analyzer mode.
2 When response calibration is used.
3 When response and isolation calibration are used.
4 When 1 port calibration is used.
5 When 2 port calibration is used.
Data Groups of the Spectrum Analyzer
Every data group of the spectrum analyzer consists of one data array.
Data Groups of the Network Analyzer
Every data group of the network analyzer consists of data arrays. The number of data
arrays depends on the data group types. The saved data arrays RAW and CAL depend on the
instrument state.
RAW DATA of the network analyzer consists of eight data arrays. The data arrays saved
depend on the calibration type and the measurement type. If RAW DATA is saved in an ASCII
data le when 2-port calibration is used, all eight RAW data arrays will be saved in the ASCII
data le for any measurement type. If another calibration type is used, the data arrays saved
depend on the measurement type. Table A-9 lists the RAW data array combinations that are
saved for each measurement type selected.
Basic Measurement Theory A-69
Save Data Format
Table A-9. Network Measurement Type Versus Raw Data Saved
Raw Data Arrays Saved1
Measurement Type
A/R
B/R
A/B
A
B
R
S11
S12
S21
S22
"Raw[S11]
"Raw[S21]
"Raw[S12]
"Raw[S11]
"Raw[S21]
"Raw[S12]
"Raw[S11]
"Raw[S12]
"Raw[S21]
"Raw[S22]
Real","Raw[S11]
Real","Raw[S21]
Real","Raw[S12]
Real","Raw[S11]
Real","Raw[S21]
Real","Raw[S12]
Real","Raw[S11]
Real","Raw[S12]
Real","Raw[S21]
Real","Raw[S22]
Imag"
Imag"
Imag"
Imag"
Imag"
Imag"
Imag"
Imag"
Imag"
Imag"
1 When 2-port calibration is turned ON, all Raw Data is saved.
CAL DATA of the network analyzer consists of twenty data arrays. The data arrays saved
depend on the calibration type used. Table A-10 lists the CAL data arrays that are saved for
each calibration type selected.
Table A-10.
Calibration Type for Network Measurement Versus CAL Data Saved
Calibration Type
Response
Response and Isolation
1 port Calibration
2 port Calibration
CAL Data Saved
"Cal[1]
"Cal[1]
"Cal[2]
"Cal[1]
"Cal[2]
"Cal[3]
"Cal[1]
"Cal[2]
"Cal[3]
"Cal[4]
"Cal[5]
"Cal[6]
"Cal[7]
"Cal[8]
"Cal[9]
"Cal[10]
"Cal[11]
"Cal[12]
Real","Cal[1] Imag"
Real","Cal[1] Imag"
Real","Cal[2] Imag"
Real","Cal[1] Imag"
Real","Cal[2] Imag"
Real","Cal[3] Imag"
Real","Cal[1] Imag"
Real","Cal[2] Imag"
Real","Cal[3] Imag"
Real","Cal[4] Imag"
Real","Cal[5] Imag"
Real","Cal[6] Imag"
Real","Cal[7] Imag"
Real","Cal[8] Imag"
Real","Cal[9] Imag"
Real","Cal[10] Imag"
Real","Cal[11] Imag"
Real","Cal[12] Imag"
1 For more information on error terms, refer to \Calibration for Network Measurement".
DATA of the network analyzer consists of two data arrays.
MEMORY of the network analyzer consists of two data arrays.
DATA TRACE of the network analyzer consists of two data arrays.
MEMORY TRACE of the network analyzer consists of two data arrays.
A-70 Basic Measurement Theory
Error Terms1
Er or Et
Ex or Ed
Et or Er
Ed
Es
Er
Edf
Esf
Erf
Exf
Elf
Etf
Edr
Esr
Err
Exr
Elr
Etr
Save Data Format
Save Data Format
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
When you store the internal data array by 4Save5 DATA ONLY , the stored binary le format is
same as the network/spectrum analyzer except for the calibration and xture compensation
coecients. This section provides the information about the save le format of the calibration
and the xture compensation coecients.
CAL Data Group
This group consists of the calibration and the xture compensation coecients data segements
by a channel as shown in Figure A-47. The rst half of the segments are for channel 1 and the
second half of the segments are for channel 2. The contents of each segment depend on the
type of calibration performed.
Figure A-47. CAL Data Group Structure
Basic Measurement Theory A-71
B
Softkey Reference
Softkey Reference B-1
4Chan 15 4Chan 25 4Meas5
4Chan 15
Description
Select the channel 1 for an active channel.
4Chan 25
Select the channel 2 for an active channel.
Front Panel Key
4Meas5
Network Analyzer
???????????????????????????????
NETWORK: A/R
????????
B/R
????????
A/B
Calculates and displays the complex ratio of the signal at input A to the reference
signal at input R.
Calculates and displays the complex ratio of the signal at input B to the reference
signal at input R.
Calculates and displays the complex ratio of input A to input B.
????????????
MORE
???????????????????????????
NETWORK: R
Measures the absolute power amplitude at input R.
????
A
Measures the absolute power amplitude at input A.
????
Measures the absolute power amplitude at input B.
B
????????????
MORE
CONVERSION [OFF] ! See Conversion
menu
??????????????????????????????
S-PARAMETERS ! See S-parameters
menu
??????????????????????????????????
ANALYZER TYPE ! See Analyzer type
menu
??????????????????????????????????????
CONVERSION [OFF] ! See Conversion
menu
??????????????????????????????
S-PARAMETERS ! See S-parameters menu
??????????????????????????????????????
ANALYZER TYPE ! See Analyzer type
menu
NA S-parameters menu
??????????????????????????????????????????
Re: FWD S11 [A/R]
??????????????????????????????????
?????????????????????????????????????????
Trans:FWD S21 [B/R]
?????????????????????????????????????????
Trans:REV S12 [A/R]
?????????????????????????????????????????
Re: REV S22 [B/R]
????????????????????????????
INPUT PORTS
! See Input port menu
CONVERSION [OFF] ! See Conversion
menu
??????????????????????????????????
ANALYZER TYPE ! See Analyzer type
menu
Conversion menu
????????????????????????????????????
CONVERSION OFF
Congures the S-parameter test set to measure S11 (the complex reection coecient,
magnitude and phase, of the DUT input).
ConguresCongures the S-parameter test set for measurement of S21 (the complex
forward transmission coecient, magnitude and phase, of the DUT).
Congures the S-parameter test set to measure S12 (the complex reverse transmission
coecient, magnitude and phase, of the DUT).
Denes the measurement as S22 (the complex reection coecient, magnitude, and
phase, of the output of the DUT)
??????????????????????????????????????
Turns o all parameter conversion operations.
???????????
Z:Re
Converts reection data to its equivalent impedance values.
??????????????
Z:Trans
Converts transmission data to its equivalent impedance values.
???????????
Y:Re
Converts reection data to its equivalent admittance values.
??????????????
Y:Trans
Converts transmission data to its equivalent admittance values.
?????????
Expresses the data in inverse S-parameter values.
1 S
????????????
MORE
B-2 Softkey Reference
Description
Front Panel Key
4Meas5 Continued
?????????????????????????????????????????????
CONVERSION 4xPHASE
Multiplies phase data by a factor of 4.
??????????????????
8xPHASE
Multiplies phase data by a factor of 8.
????????????????????
Multiplies phase data by a factor of 16.
16xPHASE
?????????????????
RETURN
?????????????????
RETURN
Analyzer type menu
???????????????????????????????????????????
NETWORK ANALYZER
????????????????????????????????????????????
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
??????????????????????????????????????????????
IMPEDANCE ANALYZER
Selects the network analyzer mode as the analyzer type.1
Selects the spectrum analyzer mode as the analyzer type.1
Selects the impedance analyzer mode as the analyzer type.1
?????????????????
RETURN
Spectrum Analyzer
????????????????????????????
SPECTRUM: R
Measures the spectrum at input R.
????
A
Measures the spectrum at input A.
????
B
Measures the spectrum at input B.
?????????????????????????????????????????????
Displays the detection menu that is used to select the type of detection mode (positive,
negative, or sample mode). The detection mode dened is shown in brackets under the
softkey label.
Selects positive peak mode as the detection technique for displaying trace information.
DETECTION [POSITIVE]
????????????????????????????????????????????
DETECTION:POS PEAK
???????????????????????
NEG PEAK
Selects negative peak mode for detection technique.
?????????????????
Selects sample mode for detection technique.
SAMPLE
?????????????????
RETURN
??????????????????????????????????
ANALYZER TYPE
menu
! See Analyzer type
1 Changing analyzer type will preset all the parameters for the active channel.
Softkey Reference B-3
Description
Front Panel Key
4Meas5 Continued
Impedance Analyzer
ZA More menu 1/5
???????????????????????????????????????????????
IMPEDANCE: MAG(|Z|)
Measures absolute magnitude value of impedance.
????????????????????
PHASE( z )
Measures absolute phase value of impedance.
???????????????????
RESIST(R)
Measures resistance value (R).
???????????????????
REACT(X)
Measures reactance value (X).
????????????????????
Displays the Impedance Measurement Menu (2/5).
MORE 1/5
??????????????????????????????????
FIXTURE [NONE]
! See Fixture menu
ANALYZER TYPE ! See Analyzer type
menu
ZA More menu 2/5
????????????????????????????????????????????????
ADMITTNCE: MAG(|Y|)
??????????????????????????????????
Displays the Fixture Menu that is used to select a test xture connected with the
analyzer. The selected test xture is displayed in brackets ([]).
Displays the Analyzer Type Menu that selects the network, spectrum, or impedance
analyzer mode of operation.
Selects an admittance parameter as the measurement parameter.
Measures absolute magnitude value of admittance (jYj).
????????????????????
PHASE( y )
Measures phase value of admittance ( y).
????????????????????????
CONDUCT(G)
Measures conductance value (G).
???????????????????????
SUSCEPT(B)
Measures susceptance value (B).
????????????????????
Displays the Impedance Measurement Menu (3/5).
MORE 2/5
??????????????????????????????????
FIXTURE [NONE]
! See Fixture menu
ANALYZER TYPE ! See Analyzer type
menu
ZA More menu 3/5
???????????????????????????????????
REFL.COEF: |0|
??????????????????????????????????
Selects a reection coecient as the measurement parameter.
Measures absolute magnitude value of reection coecient (j0j).
?????????????????????
PHASE( 0)
Measures phase value of reection coecient ( ).
??????????????????
REAL(0x )
Measures real part of reection coecient (0x ).
??????????????????
IMAG(0y )
Measures imaginary part of reection coecient (0y ).
????????????????????
Displays the Impedance Measurement Menu (4/5).
MORE 3/5
??????????????????????????????????
FIXTURE [NONE]
??????????????????????????????????
! See Fixture menu
! See Analyzer type
ANALYZER TYPE
menu
ZA More menu 4/5
?????????????????????????????????????????
CAPCITNCE: PRL(Cp)
Selects a capacitance or inductance as the measurement parameter.
Measures parallel capacitance (Cp ), which is used for small capacitance measurement.
???????????????
SER(Cs)
Measures series capacitance (Cs ), which is used for large capacitance measurement.
??????????????????????????????????????????
INDUCTNCE: PRL(Lp)
Measures parallel inductance (Lp ), which is used for large inductance measurement.
???????????????
Measures series inductance (Ls ), which is used for small inductance measurement.
SER(Ls)
????????????????????
MORE 4/5
??????????????????????????????????
FIXTURE [NONE]
??????????????????????????????????
! See Fixture menu
! See Analyzer type
ANALYZER TYPE
menu
ZA More menu 5/5
????????????????????????????????????????
RESISTNCE: PRL(Rp)
???????????????
SER(Rs)
??????????????????????????
D FACTOR(D)
Displays the Impedance Measurement Menu (5/5).
Selects a resistance, D, and Q as the measurement parameter.
Measures parallel resistance (Rp ), which is used for large resistance, large inductance,
or small capacitance.
Measures series resistance (Rs ), which is used for small resistance, small inductance, or
large capacitance.
Measures dissipation factor (D).
??????????????????????????
Q FACTOR(Q)
Measures quality factor (Q).
????????????????????
Displays the Impedance Measurement Menu (1/5).
MORE 5/5
??????????????????????????????????
FIXTURE [NONE]
??????????????????????????????????
ANALYZER TYPE
menu
! See Fixture menu
! See Analyzer type
B-4 Softkey Reference
Description
Front Panel Key
4Meas5 Continued
Fixture menu
???????????????????????????????????
SELECT FIXTURE
Displays the Select Fixture Menu.
?????????????????????????????????
FIXTURE: NONE
Sets zero as electrical length value.
????????????
16191
Sets the electrical length that is suitable for the 16191A.
????????????
16192
Sets the electrical length that is suitable for the 16192A.
????????????
16193
Sets the electrical length that is suitable for the 16193A.
????????????
16194
Sets the electrical length that is suitable for the 16194A.
???????????
Sets the electrical length, which is a user dened value.
USER
?????????????????
RETURN
??????????????????????????????????????????????
SAVE USER FXTR KIT
Saves electrical length and label as a user dened xture.
????????????????????????????????
Displays the Modify User Fixture Menu, which are used to dene the electrical length
and label of a selected xture.
Sets the extension value of the user xture.
MODIFY [NONE]
????????????????????????????????????????
DEFINE EXTENTION
?????????????????????????????????
LABEL FIXTURE
Sets the label name of the user xture.
?????????????????????????????????????????????
Completes the procedure of the user xture denition.
KIT DONE (MODIFIED)
?????????????????
RETURN
4Format5
Softkey Reference B-5
Description
Front Panel Key
4Format5
Network Analyzer
?????????????????????????????????????
FORMAT:LOG MAG
??????????????
PHASE
??????????????
DELAY
Displays the log magnitude format.
Displays a Cartesian format of the phase portion of the data (measured in degrees).
This format displays the phase shift versus frequency.
Selects the group delay format. Activated markers give values in seconds.
?????????????????????????????
SMITH CHART
Displays a Smith chart format.
??????????????????????????????
Displays a polar format.
POLAR CHART
????????????
MORE
???????????????????????????????????
FORMAT:LIN MAG
Displays the linear magnitude format.
?????????
Reformats a reection measurement into its equivalent SWR (standing wave ratio)
value.
Displays only the real (resistive) portion of the measured data on a Cartesian format.
This is similar to the linear magnitude format, but can show both positive and negative
values.
Displays only the imaginary (reactive) portion of the measured data on a Cartesian
format. This format is similar to the real format except that reactance data is displayed
on the trace instead of impedance data.
Displays an admittance Smith chart format and displays the circle data menu.
SWR
????????????
REAL
???????????????????????
IMAGINARY
??????????????????????????????????????????
ADMITTANCE CHART
?????????????????
RETURN
???????????????????????????????????????
PHASE UNIT [DEG]
?????????????????????????????????????????
EXP PHASE ON o
???????????????????????????????????????
PHASE UNIT [DEG]
Selects the unit for phase measurement as DEG (degree) or RAD (radian). The unit
selected is shown in brackets.
Turns the expanded phase ON or OFF.
EXP PHASE ON o
Selects the unit for phase measurement as DEG (degree) or RAD (radian). The unit
selected is shown in brackets.
Turns the expanded phase ON or OFF.
Spectrum Analyzer
??????????????????????????????????????
FORMAT:SPECTRUM
Activates a spectrum measurement.
?????????????????????????????????????????
?????????????
NOISE
???????????????????????
UNIT: dBm
Activates a noise level measurement. If the marker is placed in the noise, the rms noise
level is read out normalized to a 1 Hz noise power bandwidth.
Selects dBm as amplitude unit.
???????????
VOLT
Selects volt as amplitude unit.
?????????
dBV
Selects dBV as amplitude unit.
???????????
dBuV
Selects dBV as amplitude unit.
???????????
WATT
Selects watt as amplitude unit.
???????????
VOLT
Selects volt as amplitude unit.
Impedance Analyzer
????????????????????????????????????????
FORMAT:LIN Y-AXIS
Displays the linear magnitude format.
????????????????????????
LOG Y-AXIS
Displays the logarithmic scale format.
??????????????????????????????
POLAR CHART
Displays a polar format.
?????????????????????????????
SMITH CHART
Displays a Smith chart format.
??????????????????????????????????????????
ADMITTANCE CHART
Displays an admittance Smith chart format.
???????????????????????????????????
COMPLEX PLANE
Displays a complex plane format.
???????????????????????????????????????
Selects the unit for phase measurement as DEG (degree) or RAD (radian). The unit
selected is shown in brackets.
Turns the expanded phase ON or OFF.
PHASE UNIT [DEG]
?????????????????????????????????????????
EXP PHASE ON o
B-6 Softkey Reference
4Display5
Front Panel Key
Description
4Display5
???????????????????????????????????????????
DUAL CHAN on OFF
Toggles between the display of both
measurement channels or the active channel only.
???????????????????????????????????????
This is used in conjunction with SPLIT DISP ON o to display both channels.
?????????????????????????????
Displays the current measurement data trace for the active channel.
DISPLAY[DATA]
??????????????????????????????
DISPLAY: DATA
Displays the current measurement data trace for the active channel.
??????????????????
Displays the trace memory for the active channel. If no data is stored in memory for
this channel, a warning message is displayed.
Displays both the current data and the memory traces.
MEMORY
????????????????????????????????????????
DATA and MEMORY
DATA!MEMORY
???????????????????????????????
????????????????????????????????????
Stores the current active measurement data in the memory of the active channel. It
then becomes the memory trace (for use in subsequent math manipulations or display).
When NOP is changed, the memory trace can no longer be used and the data trace will
be displayed.
OVERLAY TRACES
DATA!OVERLAY
????????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????????????????
SELECT PEN COLOR
????????????????????????????????????
CLEAR GRAPHICS
Displays the current data trace on the LCD. The displayed trace is treated as an image
and is not updated when measurement sweep newly occurs. Also, marker cannot be
used to read measurement data at each display point.
????????????????????????????????
Species the pen to be used in displaying a overlay trace by DATA!OVERLAY .
Erases the image of all overlay traces displayed using DATA!OVERLAY .
????????????????????????????????
?????????????????
RETURN
?????????????????????????????????????
DATA HOLD [OFF]
???????????????????????
HOLD: OFF
Displays the following menu to specify the data hold function setting. The selected
option is shown in brackets in the softkey label. Changing the option will clear the data
which is currently held.
Turns o the hold function.
??????????
MAX
Holds the maximum values at each display point.
?????????
Holds the minimum values at each display point.
MIN
?????????????????
RETURN
????????????????????????????????????????
DATA MATH [DATA]
???????????????
Displays the following softkeys and the OFFSET softkey to dene the oset value
using
the data math function. The data math function
selected is shown in brackets
???????????
?????????????
( [DATA] shows that the data math function selected DATA ).
??????????????????????????????????????
DATA MATH: DATA
Turns o all data math functions.
???????????????????????
DATA+MEM
Adds the memory to the data.
???????????????????????
Subtracts the memory from the data.
?????????????????????
DATA/MEM
Divides the data by the memory.
??????????????????????????????????????????????
Returns gain and oset value back to the default values (gain=1, oset=0).
DATA0MEM
DEFAULT GAIN & OFS
???????????????
OFFSET
MKR!OFFSET
????????????????????????????
Enters the marker's amplitude value into the oset value.
???????????????????????????????
Denes the imaginary part of the oset value when using the Smith, Polar, and
admittance chart format. If the format is not one of the above formats, this softkey
performs no function.
Denes the imaginary part of the oset value when using the Smith, Polar, and
admittance chart format. If the format is not one of the above formats, this softkey
performs no function.
OFFSET VALUE
??????????????????????????????????????????
AUX OFFSET VALUE
?????????????????
RETURN
???????????
GAIN
Denes the gain value for the data math function.
?????????????????
RETURN
????????????
MORE
! Display more menu
Softkey Reference B-7
Front Panel Key
Description
4Display5 Continued
NA/SA Display more menu
???????????????????????????????????????
SPLIT DISP ON o
??????????????????????????????????????????????????
Toggles between a full-screen single graticule display of one or both channels, and a
split display with two half-screen
graticules one above the other. The split display can
??????????????????????????????????
be used in conjunction with DUAL CHAN ON to show the measured data of each
channel simultaneously on separate graticules.
DISP ALLOC [ALL INST]
????????????????????????????????????
ALL INSTRUMENT
Selects a full screen single screen or two half-screen graticules.
?????????????????????????????????????????????????????
HALF INSTR HALF BASIC
Selects two half-screens, one graticule display above the HP Instrument BASIC display.
???????????????????????
ALL BASIC
Selects a full screen single HP Instrument BASIC display.
?????????????????????????????
Selects a full screen graticule and three status lines for HP Instrument BASIC under the
graticule.
BASIC STATUS
?????????????????
RETURN
????????????
TITLE
! See Enter text menu
ADJUST DISPLAY ! See Adjust display
menu
????????????????????????????????????????
FREQUENCY BLANK
??????????????????????????????????
Displays the title menu in the softkey labels and the character set in the active entry
area to display the title in the active channel title area on the screen.
Blanks the displayed frequency notation for security purposes. Frequency labels cannot
be restored except by pressing 4Preset5 or by turning the power o and then on.
?????????????????
RETURN
ZA Display more menu
???????????????????????????????????????
SPLIT DISP ON o
??????????????????????????????????????????????????
DISP ALLOC [ALL INST]
Toggles between a full-screen single graticule display of one or both channels, and a
split display with two half-screen
graticules one above the other. The split display can
??????????????????????????????????
be used in conjunction with DUAL CHAN ON to show the measured data of each
channel simultaneously on separate graticules.
Displays the following menu to allocate the BASIC screen area on the display.
????????????????????????????????????
ALL INSTRUMENT
Selects a full screen single screen or two half-screen graticules.
?????????????????????????????????????????????????????
HALF INSTR HALF BASIC
Selects two half-screens, one graticule display above the HP Instrument BASIC display.
???????????????????????
ALL BASIC
Selects a full screen single HP Instrument BASIC display.
?????????????????????????????
Selects a full screen graticule and three status lines for HP Instrument BASIC under the
graticule.
BASIC STATUS
?????????????????
RETURN
B-8 Softkey Reference
Description
Front Panel Key
4Display5 Continued
??????????????????????????????????????
EQUIV CKT MENU
?????????????????????????????????????????????
SELECT EQV CKT [A]
Displays the Equivalent Circuit Menu.
Displays the Select Equivalent Circuit Menu.
???????????????
CKT A
Selects equivalent circuit A, which is used for inductors with high core loss.
????
B
Selects equivalent circuit B, which is used for inductors in general and resistors.
????
C
Selects equivalent circuit C, which is used for high-value resistors.
????
D
Selects equivalent circuit D, which is used for capacitors.
????
E
Selects equivalent circuit E, which is used for resonators.
?????????????????????????????????????????????????????
Calculates the equivalent circuit parameters. While the calculation is being performed,
the message Calculating EQV parameters is displayed. After the calculation is
completed, the values of the equivalent parameters are displayed.
Simulates the frequency characteristics by using the current equivalent circuit
parameters and shows simulation results on the screen using memory trace. In other
words, simulation results are stored into the memory trace.
CALCULATE EQV PARAMS
???????????????????????????????????????
SIMULATE F-CHRST
?????????????????
RETURN
?????????????????????????????????????????
DISP PARM on OFF
Calculates and displays the equivalent circuit parameters.
?????????????????????????????????????????????
Shows the menu below to specify parameters for the selected equivalent circuit.
DEFINE EQV PARAMS
????????????????????????????????
PARAMETER R1
Sets R1 value.
??????
C1
Sets C1 value.
??????
L1
Sets L1 value.
??????
C0
Sets C0 value.
???????????????????????????????????????
Simulates the frequency characteristics by using the current equivalent circuit
parameters and shows simulation results on the screen using memory trace. In other
words, simulation results are stored into the memory trace.
SIMULATE F-CHRST
?????????????????
RETURN
?????????????????????????????????????????????????????
CALCULATE EQV PARAMS
???????????????????????????????????????
SIMULATE F-CHRST
?????????????????
RETURN
????????????
TITLE
! See Enter text menu
ADJUST DISPLAY ! See Adjust display
menu
????????????????????????????????????????
FREQUENCY BLANK
??????????????????????????????????
Calculates the equivalent circuit parameters. While the calculation is being performed,
the message Calculating EQV parameters is displayed. After the calculation is
completed, the values of the equivalent parameters are displayed.
Simulates the frequency characteristics by using the current equivalent circuit
parameters and shows simulation results on the screen using memory trace. In other
words, simulation results are stored into the memory trace.
Returns to the Equivalent Circuit Menu.
Displays the title menu in the softkey labels and the character set in the active entry
area to display the title in the active channel title area on the screen.
Blanks the displayed frequency notation for security purposes. Frequency labels cannot
be restored except by pressing 4Preset5 or by turning the power o and then on.
?????????????????
RETURN
Softkey Reference B-9
Front Panel Key
Description
4Display5 Continued
Adjust display menu
?????????????????????
INTENSITY
Sets the display intensity as a percentage of the brightest setting.
??????????????????????????????????????????????????
BACKGROUND INTENSITY
Sets the background intensity of the display as a percentage of the white level.
?????????????????????????????????
Displays the menu used for color modication of the display elements.
MODIFY COLORS
?????????????????????
CH1 DATA
Selects channel 1 data trace for color modication and displays the color adjust menu.
???????????????????????????????????????????????
Selects channel 1 memory trace and limit line for color modication and displays the
color adjust menu.
Selects channel 2 data trace for color modication and displays the color adjust menu.
CH1 MEM/ LIMIT LINE
?????????????????????
CH2 DATA
???????????????????????????????????????????????
CH2 MEM/ LIMIT LINE
??????????????????????
GRATICULE
???????????????????
WARNING
????????????
Selects channel 2 memory and the reference line and limit line for color modication
and displays the color adjust menu.
Selects the graticule and a portion of softkey text (where there is a choice of a feature
being ON or OFF) for color modication and displays the color adjust menu.
Selects the warning annotation for color modication and displays the color adjust
menu.
MORE
???????????
TEXT
?????????????
IBASIC
????????????
Selects all the non-data text for color modication (for example: softkey labels) and
displays the color adjust menu.
Selects the text on the BASIC screen for color modication and displays the color adjust
menu
MORE
??????????????
PEN 1
Selects pen 1 for color modication and displays the color adjust menu.
??????????????
PEN 2
Selects pen 2 for color modication and displays the color adjust menu.
??????????????
PEN 3
Selects pen 3 for color modication and displays the color adjust menu.
??????????????
PEN 4
Selects pen 4 for color modication and displays the color adjust menu.
??????????????
PEN 5
Selects pen 5 for color modication and displays the color adjust menu.
??????????????
Selects pen 6 for color modication and displays the color adjust menu.
PEN 6
?????????????????
RETURN
?????????????????
RETURN
?????????????????
RETURN
???????????????????????????????????
DEFAULT COLORS
Returns all the color settings back to the factory-set default values.
????????????????????????????
SAVE COLORS
Saves the modied version of the color set to the non-volatile memory.
??????????????????????????????????
Recalls the
previously saved modied version of the color set from the non-volatile
??????????????????????????????????
memory. RECALL COLORS appears only when a color set has been saved.
RECALL COLORS
?????????????????
RETURN
Color adjust menu
??????????
TINT
Adjusts the hue of the chosen attribute.
?????????????????????????
BRIGHTNESS
Adjusts the brightness of the color being modied.
??????????????
COLOR
Adjusts the degree of whiteness of the color being modied.
?????????????????????????????
Resets the color being modied to the default color.
RESET COLOR
?????????????????
RETURN
B-10 Softkey Reference
4Scale Ref5
Front Panel Key
Description
4Scale Ref5
Network Analyzer
???????????????????????????
AUTO SCALE
?????????????????????
SCALE/DIV
????????????????????????????????????????????
REFERENCE POSITION
???????????????????????????????????????
REFERENCE VALUE
MKR!REFERENCE
????????????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????????????
SCALE FOR [DATA]
??????????????????????????????????????????????
D&M SCALE [COUPLE]
????????????????????????????????????????
ATTENUATOR MENU
????????????????????????
Brings the trace data (dened by the SCALE FOR key) in view on the display with
one keystroke. Sweep values are not aected, only scale and reference values. The
analyzer determines the smallest possible scale factor that will put all displayed data
onto the vertical graticule.
Changes the response value scale per division of the displayed trace. In Smith, polar,
and admittance chart formats, this refers to the full scale value at the outer
circumference and is identical to the reference value.
Sets the position of the reference line on the graticule of a Cartesian display (with 0 at
the bottom line of the graticule and 10 at the top line). It has no eect on a Smith,
polar or admittancechart format. The reference position is indicated with a small
triangle just outside the graticule, on the left.
Changes the value of the reference line, moving the measurement trace
correspondingly. In Smith, polar and admittance chart formats, the reference value is
the same as the scale and is the value of the outer circle.
Makes the reference value equal to the marker's absolute value(regardless of the delta
marker value). The marker is eectively moved to the reference line position. In
Smith, polar and admittance chart formats this function makes the full scale value at
the outer circle equal to the marker response value.
Selects one of the \DATA" and \MEMORY" traces to be scaled by prior functions in this
menu.
Couples or uncouples the \DATA" and \MEMORY" traces to be scaled by prior functions
in this menu. This is valid only for those traces obtained by the display menu accessed
from the 4Display5 key.
Displays the menu to control the attenuation at the following ports.
???????????????????
ATTEN R
Controls the attenuation at port R.
????????????????????
ATTEN A
Controls the attenuation at port A.
???????????????????
ATTEN B
Controls the attenuation at port B.
??????????????????????????????????????????????
Controls the attenuation at port 1 of an S-parameter test set that is connected to the
analyzer.
Controls the attenuation at port 2 of an S-parameter test set that is connected to the
analyzer.
TEST SET ATTEN PT1
??????????????????????????????????????????????
TEST SET ATTEN PT1
?????????????????
RETURN
Softkey Reference B-11
Description
Front Panel Key
4Scale Ref5 Continued
Spectrum Analyzer
???????????????????????????????????????
PEAK!REFERENCE
?????????????????????
SCALE/DIV
???????????????????????????????????????
REFERENCE VALUE
???????????????????????????????????????
SCALE FOR [DATA]
??????????????????????????????????????????????
D&M SCALE [COUPLE]
????????????????????????????????????????
ATTENUATOR MENU
Searches for a peak using the marker and applies a sweep parameter at the marker to
the reference value of the sweep parameters for the destination channel. The sweep
parameter specied is an absolute value;not a dierence even if a 1marker is used.
Changes the response value scale per division of the displayed trace.
Changes the value of the reference line, moving the measurement trace
correspondingly. In Smith, polar and admittance chart formats, the reference value is
the same as the scale and is the value of the outer circle.
Selects one of the \DATA" and \MEMORY" traces to be scaled by prior functions in this
menu.
Couples or uncouples the \DATA" and \MEMORY" traces to be scaled by prior functions
in this menu. This is valid only for those traces obtained by the display menu accessed
from the 4Display5 key.
Displays the menu to control the attenuation at the following ports.
???????????????????
ATTEN R
Controls the attenuation at port R.
????????????????????
ATTEN A
Controls the attenuation at port A.
???????????????????
ATTEN B
Controls the attenuation at port B.
???????????????????????????????????????
Sets the automatic and manual spectrum analyzer input attenuator of an input port.
ATT AUTO on OFF
When the automatic attenuator is selected, the value selected ensures that the level
meets the following equation:
Attnuator value(dB) = (Reference value) 0 (20dB)
?????????????????
RETURN
Impedance Analyzer
???????????????????????????
AUTO SCALE
?????????????????????
SCALE/DIV
????????????????????????????????????????????
REFERENCE POSITION
???????????????????????????????????????
REFERENCE VALUE
MKR!REFERENCE
????????????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????????????
SCALE FOR [DATA]
B-12 Softkey Reference
????????????????????????
Brings the trace data (dened by the SCALE FOR key) in view on the display with
one keystroke. Sweep values are not aected, only scale and reference values. The
analyzer determines the smallest possible scale factor that will put all displayed data
onto the vertical graticule.
Changes the response value scale per division of the displayed trace. In Smith, polar,
and admittance chart formats, this refers to the full scale value at the outer
circumference and is identical to the reference value.
Sets the position of the reference line on the graticule of a Cartesian display (with 0 at
the bottom line of the graticule and 10 at the top line). It has no eect on a Smith,
polar or admittance chart format. The reference position is indicated with a small
triangle and a dashed line just outside the graticule, on the left.
Changes the value of the reference line, moving the measurement trace
correspondingly. In Smith, polar and admittance chart formats, the reference value is
the same as the scale and is the value of the outer circle.
Makes the reference value equal to the marker's absolute value(regardless of the delta
marker value). The marker is eectively moved to the reference line position. In
Smith, polar and admittance chart formats this function makes the full scale value at
the outer circle equal to the marker response value.
Selects one of the \DATA" and \MEMORY" traces to be scaled by prior functions in this
menu.
Front Panel Key
Description
4Scale Ref5 Continued
????????????
MORE
???????????????????????????
AUTO SCALE
?????????????????????
SCALE/DIV
????????????????????????
TOP VALUE
????????????????????????????????
BOTTOM VALUE
MKR!REFERENCE
????????????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????????????
SCALE FOR [DATA]
??????????????????????????????????????????????
D&M SCALE [COUPLE]
????????????????????????
Brings the trace data (dened by the SCALE FOR key) in view on the display with
one keystroke. Sweep values are not aected, only scale and reference values. The
analyzer determines the smallest possible scale factor that will put all displayed data
onto the vertical graticule.
Changes the response value scale per division of the displayed trace. In Smith, polar,
and admittance chart formats, this refers to the full scale value at the outer
circumference and is identical to the reference value.
Changes the value at the top line of the graticule, moving the measurement trace
correspondingly.
Changes the value at the bottom line of the graticule, moving the measurement trace
correspondingly.
Makes the reference value equal to the marker's absolute value(regardless of the delta
marker value). The marker is eectively moved to the reference line position. In
Smith, polar and admittance chart formats this function makes the full scale value at
the outer circle equal to the marker response value.
Selects one of the \DATA" and \MEMORY" traces to be scaled by prior functions in this
menu.
Couples or uncouples the \DATA" and \MEMORY" traces to be scaled by prior functions
in this menu. This is valid only for those traces obtained by the display menu accessed
from the 4Display5 key.
????????????
MORE
???????????????????????????
AUTO SCALE
?????????????????????
SCALE/DIV
?????????????????????????????????????????????
REFERENCE X VALUE
?????????????????????????????????????????????
REFERENCE Y VALUE
MKR!REFERENCE
????????????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????????????
SCALE FOR [DATA]
??????????????????????????????????????????????
D&M SCALE [COUPLE]
????????????????????????
Brings the trace data (dened by the SCALE FOR key) in view on the display with
one keystroke. Sweep values are not aected, only scale and reference values. The
analyzer determines the smallest possible scale factor that will put all displayed data
onto the vertical graticule.
Changes the response value scale per division of the displayed trace. In Smith, polar,
and admittance chart formats, this refers to the full scale value at the outer
circumference and is identical to the reference value.
Changes the value of the center position of the X axis, moving the measurement trace
correspondingly.
Changes the value of the center position of the Y axis, moving the measurement trace
correspondingly.
Makes the reference value equal to the marker's absolute value(regardless of the delta
marker value). The marker is eectively moved to the reference line position. In
Smith, polar and admittance chart formats this function makes the full scale value at
the outer circle equal to the marker response value.
Selects one of the \DATA" and \MEMORY" traces to be scaled by prior functions in this
menu.
Couples or uncouples the \DATA" and \MEMORY" traces to be scaled by prior functions
in this menu. This is valid only for those traces obtained by the display menu accessed
from the 4Display5 key.
????????????
MORE
Softkey Reference B-13
4Bw/Avg5
B-14 Softkey Reference
Description
Front Panel Key
4Bw/Avg5
Network Analyzer
???????????????????????????????????????????
AVERAGING RESTART
?????????????????????????????????????????
AVERAGING on OFF
Resets the sweep-to-sweep averaging and restarts the sweep count at 1 at the beginning
of the next sweep. The sweep count for averaging is displayed at the left of the display.
Turns the averaging function on or o for the active channel.
????????????????????????????????????????
AVERAGING FACTOR
Makes the averaging factor the active function. Any value up to 999 can be used.
?????????????????????????????????????
IF BW auto MAN
When the sweep type is log frequency ( LOG FREQ ), you can choose automatic mode
or manual mode for IF bandwidth. (In other sweep types, IF bandwidth is xed to
manual mode.) In auto mode, IF bandwidth is automatically set equal to or less than 1/5
of each measurement
frequency. If you want to set an upper limit of IF bandwidth in
??????????????????????????????????????
auto mode, press AUTO IFBW LIMIT and enter the upper limit with entry keys.
??????????????
IF BW
Selects the bandwidth value for IF bandwidth reduction.
??????????????????????????????????????
AUTO IFBW LIMIT
Sets an upper limit for IF bandwidth when IF bandwidth is set to auto mode.
??????????????????????????????????????????????????
Sets the aperture for the group delay measurements as a percentage of the span.
GROUP DELY APERTURE
Spectrum Analyzer
???????????????????????????????????????????
AVERAGING RESTART
?????????????????????????????????????????
AVERAGING on OFF
????????????????????????????????????????
AVERAGING FACTOR
?????????????????????????????????????????
RES BW AUTO man
??????????????????
RES BW
???????????????????????????????????
RBW/SPAN RATIO
???????????????????????????????????
VBW TYPE [LIN]
??????????????????????
Resets the sweep-to-sweep averaging and restarts the sweep count at 1 at the beginning
of the next sweep. The sweep count for averaging is displayed at the left of the display.
Turns the averaging function on or o for the active channel. Whenever an instrument
state change aecting the measured data is made, the sweep count for averaging is
reset to 1.
Makes averaging factor the active function. Any value up to 999 can be used.
Toggles between automatic and manual resolution bandwidth settings. The automatic
resolution bandwidth species the resolution bandwidth from SPAN and RBW/SPAN
ratio. Selecting the automatic setting in the zero span can fail, showing an error
message.
Selects the bandwidth value for resolution bandwidth reduction.
Makes the RBW/SPAN ratio the active function. The RBW/SPAN ratio species
resolution bandwidth in AUTO mode.
Selects one of the Linear and logarithm types of the post detection lter (VBW).
??????????
[LIN]
The Linear type of VBW is selected. The analyzer enters the
power (linear value) to be measured to the post-detection lter.
In other words, the analyzer calculates logarithms of power
after the post-detection lter.
???????????
The logarithm type of VBW is selected. The analyzer enters the
logarithm value of power to be measured to the post-detection
lter, as same as a conventional analog spectrum analyzer,
which uses a log-amplier. (The analyzer calculates logarithms
of power before the post-detection lter.) The logarithm VBW
makes measurement result 2.5 dB lower than the actual value.
Changes the spectrum analyzer's post-detection lter.
[LOG]
??????????????????????
VIDEO BW
Impedance Analyzer
???????????????????????????????????????????
AVERAGING RESTART
?????????????????????????????????????????
AVERAGING on OFF
????????????????????????????????????????
AVERAGING FACTOR
Resets the sweep-to-sweep averaging and restarts the sweep count at 1 at the beginning
of the next sweep. The sweep count for averaging is displayed at the left of the display.
Turns the averaging function on or o for the active channel. Whenever an instrument
state change aecting the measured data is made, the sweep count for averaging is
reset to 1.
Makes averaging factor the active function. Any value up to 999 can be used.
??????????????????????
?????????????????????????????????????
IF BW auto MAN
When the sweep type is log frequency ( LOG FREQ ), you can choose automatic mode
or manual mode for IF bandwidth. (In other sweep types, IF bandwidth is xed to
manual mode.) In auto mode, IF bandwidth is automatically set equal to or less than 1/5
of each measurement
frequency. If you want to set an upper limit of IF bandwidth in
??????????????????????????????????????
auto mode, press AUTO IFBW LIMIT and enter the upper limit with entry keys.
??????????????
IF BW
Selects the bandwidth value for resolution bandwidth reduction.
??????????????????????????????????????
Sets an upper limit for IF bandwidth when IF bandwidth is set to auto mode.
AUTO IFBW LIMIT
Softkey Reference B-15
4Cal5
Front Panel Key
Description
4Cal5
Network Analyzer
???????????????????????????????????????????
CORRECTION on OFF
?????????????????????????????????????
CALIBRATE MENU
Cal menu
! See NA
???????????????????????????????????????????????????
RESUME CAL SEQUENCE
????????????????????????????????
CAL KIT [7mm]
kit menu
! See NA Cal
????????????
Turns error correction on or o. The analyzer uses the most recent calibration data for the
displayed parameter.
Displays the menu that provides several accuracy enhancement procedures ranging from a simple
frequency response calibration to a full two-port calibration. At the completion of a calibration
procedure, correction is automatically turned on, and the notation \Cor" or \C2" is displayed at
the left of the screen.
Eliminates the need to restart a calibration sequence that was interrupted to access some other
menu. Goes back to the point where the calibration sequence was interrupted.
Displays the menu that selects one of the default calibration kits available for dierent connector
types. This in turn displays additional softkeys used to dene calibration standards other than
those in the default kits (see \Modifying Calibration Kits" in Appendix A). When a calibration kit
has been specied, its connector type is displayed in brackets in the softkey label.
MORE
??????????????????????????????????????
PORT EXTENSIONS
??????????????????????????????????????????
EXTENSIONS on OFF
???????????????????????????????????????????
EXTENSION INPUT R
???????????????????????????????????????????
EXTENSION INPUT A
???????????????????????????????????????????
EXTENSION INPUT B
?????????????????????????????????????????
EXTENSION PORT 1
?????????????????????????????????????????
EXTENSION PORT 2
Goes to the reference plane menu that extends the apparent location of the measurement
reference plane or input.
Toggles the reference plane extension mode. When this function is on, all extensions dened
below are enabled; when o, none of the extensions are enabled.
Adds electrical delay in seconds to extend the reference plane at input R to the end of the cable.
This is used for all R input measurements (including S-parameters).
Adds electrical delay to the input A reference plane for all A input measurements (including
S-parameters).
Adds electrical delay to the input B reference plane for all B input measurements (including
S-parameters).
Extends the reference plane for measurements of S11 , S21 , and S12 .
Extends the reference plane for measurements of S22 , S12 , and S21 .
?????????????????
RETURN
?????????????????????????????????????
VELOCITY FACTOR
Enters the velocity factor used by the analyzer to calculate equivalent electrical length.
???????????????
Sets the characteristic impedance used by the analyzer in calculating measured impedance with
Smith chart markers and conversion parameters. If the test set used is an 85046B test set, or an
87512B Transmission/Reection Test Kit, set Z0 to 75 . Characteristic impedance must be set
correctly before calibration procedures are performed.
Displays softkeys to add or subtract a linear phase slope relative to frequency or a constant phase.
SET Z0
??????????????????????????????????????????????????????
ELECTRICAL DELAY MENU
MKR!DELAY
??????????????????????????
????????????????????????????????????????
ELECTRICAL DELAY
???????????????????????????????
PHASE OFFSET
?????????????????
RETURN
?????????????????
RETURN
B-16 Softkey Reference
Enters the group delay at the marker point of a xed frequency aperture, 20 % of the span, to the
electrical delay to balance the phase of the DUT. This eectively attens the phase trace around
the marker and can measure electrical length or deviation from linear phase. Additional electrical
delay adjustment is required for DUTs without constant group delay over the measured frequency
span. Because this feature adds phase to a variation in phase versus frequency, it is applicable
only for ratioed input
Adjusts the electrical delay to balance the phase shift of the DUT.
Adds or subtracts
a phase oset that is constant
with frequency (rather than linear). This is
????????????????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????????
independent of MARKER!DELAY and ELECTRICAL DELAY
Front Panel Key
Description
4Cal5 Continued
NA Cal menu
??????????????????????????????????
CALIBRATE:NONE
?????????????????????
RESPONSE
?????????????
SHORT
This softkey is underlined if no calibration has been performed or if the calibration data has been
cleared. Unless a calibration is saved on the internal disk, the calibration data is lost when
4Preset5 is pressed, power is cycled on and o, or if an instrument state is recalled.
Displays the frequency response calibration. This is the simplest and fastest accuracy
enhancement procedure. However, it should only be used when extreme accuracy is not required.
It eectively removes the frequency response errors of the test setup for reection or transmission
measurements.
Measures SHORT standard of 7 mm or 3.5 mm cal kit for the response calibration.
????????????
OPEN
Measures OPEN standard of 7 mm or 3.5 mm cal kit for the response calibration.
????????????
THRU
Measures THRU standard of 7 mm or 3.5 mm cal kit for the response calibration.
????????????????????????????????????
Completes the response ??????????????????????????????????
calibration and computes and stores the error coecients. The correction
menu is displayed with CORRECTION ON .
DONE: RESPONSE
??????????????????????????????????????????
RESPONSE & ISOL'N
?????????????????????
RESPONSE
Displays the menus used to perform a response and isolation measurement calibration (used to
measure devices with wide dynamic range). This procedure eectively reduces the same errors as
the response calibration. In addition, it eectively reduces the isolation (crosstalk) error in
transmission measurements or the directivity error in reection measurements. In addition to the
devices required for a simple response calibration, an isolation standard is required. The standard
normally used to correct for isolation is an impedance-matched LOAD (usually 50 or 75 )
standard. Response and directivity calibration procedures for reection and transmission
measurements are provided in the \Performing a Response \& Isolation Calibration" in Chapter 7.
Displays the response standard menu that measures the standard for response calibration.
????????????????????????
ISOL'N STD
Displays the menu that performs an isolation measurement calibration.
??????????????????????????????????????????????????
Completes the response and isolation calibration
and computes and stores the error coecients.
??????????????????????????????????
The correction menu is displayed with CORRECTION ON .
DONE RESP ISOL'N CAL
???????????????????????
S11 1-PORT
????????????????????????
(S11): OPEN
?????????????
SHORT
????????????
LOAD
????????????????????????????????????????
DONE: 1-PORT CAL
???????????????????????
S22 1-PORT
????????????????????????
(S22): OPEN
?????????????
SHORT
????????????
LOAD
????????????????????????????????????????
DONE: 1-PORT CAL
Provides a measurement calibration for reection-only measurements of one-port devices or
properly terminated two-port devices, at port 1 of an S-parameter test set or the test port of a
transmission/reection test kit. This procedure eectively reduces the directivity, source match,
and frequency response errors of the test setup. It provides a higher level of measurement
accuracy than the response and isolation calibration. It is the most accurate calibration procedure
for reection-only measurements. Three standard devices are required: a SHORT, an OPEN, and
an impedance-matched LOAD. The procedure for performing an S11 one-port calibration is
described in the \Performing an S11 1-Port Calibration" in Chapter 7.
When the cal kit is a 7 mm or 3.5 mm cal kit, this softkey measures the OPEN standard and then
the softkey label is underlined. Or, this softkey displays the open standard menu that selects an
OPEN standard and measures the standard when the cal kit is 50 or 75 type-N.
When the cal kit is a 7 mm or 3.5 mm cal kit, this softkey measures the SHORT standard and then
the softkey label is underlined. Or, this softkey displays the short standard menu that selects a
SHORT standard and measures the standard when the cal kit is 50 or 75 type-N.
When the cal kit is a 7 mm or 3.5 mm cal kit, this softkey measures the LOAD standard and then
the softkey label is underlined. Or, this softkey displays the load standard menu that selects a
LOAD standard and measures the standard when the cal kit is 50 or 75 type-N.
Completes the 1-port calibration.
The error coecients are computed and stored. The correction
??????????????????????????????????
menu is displayed with CORRECTION ON . If this key is pressed without measuring all the
required standards, the message CAUTION:ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED is displayed.
???????????????????????
This softkey is similar to S11 1-PORT . It is used for reection-only measurements of one-port
devices or properly terminated two-port devices in the reverse direction (that is, for devices
connected to port 2 of the S-parameter test set).
When the cal kit is a 7 mm or 3.5 mm cal kit, this softkey measures the OPEN standard and then
the softkey label is underlined. Or, this softkey displays the open standard menu that selects an
OPEN standard and measures the standard when the cal kit is 50 or 75 type-N.
When the cal kit is a 7 mm or 3.5 mm cal kit, this softkey measures the SHORT standard and then
the softkey label is underlined. Or, this softkey displays the short standard menu that selects a
SHORT standard and measures the standard when the cal kit is 50 or 75 type-N.
When the cal kit is a 7 mm or 3.5 mm cal kit, this softkey measures the LOAD standard and then
the softkey label is underlined. Or, the softkey displays the load standard menu that selects a
LOAD standard and measures the standard when the cal kit is 50 or 75 type-N.
Completes the 1-port calibration.
The error coecients are computed and stored. The correction
??????????????????????????????????
menu is displayed with CORRECTION ON . If this key is pressed without measuring all the
required standards, the message CAUTION:ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED is displayed.
Softkey Reference B-17
Front Panel Key
Description
4Cal5 Continued
???????????????????????????
FULL 2-PORT
??????????????????????
REFLECT'N
????????????????????????
(S11): OPEN
?????????????
SHORT
????????????
LOAD
????????????????????????
(S22): OPEN
?????????????
SHORT
????????????
LOAD
????????????????????????????????????
REFLECT'N DONE
??????????????????????????????
TRANS-MISSION
?????????????????????????????????????????
FWD. TRANS. THRU
????????????????????????????????????????
FWD. MATCH THRU
????????????????????????????????????????
REV. TRANS. THRU
???????????????????????????????????????
REV. MATCH THRU
?????????????????????????????
TRANS. DONE
?????????????????????
ISOLATION
Displays the series of menus used to perform a complete calibration to measure all four
S-parameters of a two-port device. This is the most accurate calibration for measurements of
two-port devices. It eectively reduces all correctable systematic errors (directivity, source match,
load match, isolation, reection tracking, and transmission tracking) in both the forward and the
reverse direction. Isolation correction can be omitted for measurements of devices with limited
dynamic range.
Start the reection calibration for full 2-port calibration and displays the menu that measures one
port standards for reection calibration.
When the cal kit is a 7 mm or 3.5 mm cal kit this softkey measures the OPEN standard and then
the softkey label is underlined. Or, this softkey displays the open standard menu that selects an
OPEN standard and measures the standard when the cal kit is 50 or 75 type-N.
When the cal kit is a 7 mm or 3.5 mm cal kit, this softkey measures the short standard and then
the softkey label is underlined. Or, the softkey displays the short standard menu that selects a
SHORT standard and measures the standard when the cal kit is 50 or 75 type-N.
When the cal kit is a 7 mm or 3.5 mm cal kit, this softkey measures the load standard and then the
softkey label is underlined. Or, this softkey displays the load standard menu that selects a LOAD
standard and measures the standard when the cal kit is 50 or 75 type-N.
When the cal kit is a 7 mm or 3.5 mm cal kit, this softkey measures the OPEN standard and then
softkey label is underlined. Or, this softkey displays the OPEN standard menu that selects an the
OPEN standard and measures the standard when the cal kit is 50 or 75 type-N.
When the cal kit is a 7 mm or 3.5 mm cal kit, this softkey measures the short standard and then
the softkey label is underlined. Or, this softkey displays the short standard menu that selects a
SHORT standard and measures the standard when the cal kit is 50 or 75 type-N.
When the cal kit is a 7 mm or 3.5 mm cal kit this softkey measures the load standard and then the
softkey label is underlined. Or, this softkey displays the load standard menu that selects a LOAD
standard and measures the standard when the cal kit is 50 or 75 type-N.
Completes the reection calibration for the full 2-port calibration.
The error coecients are
??????????????????????
computed and stored. Full 2-Port menu is displayed, with the REFLECT'N softkey underlined. If
this key is pressed without measuring all the required standards, the message
CAUTION:ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED is displayed.
Starts the transmission calibration and displays the menu that measures frequency response and
load match for transmission calibration.
?????????????????????????????????????????
Measures S21 frequency response, and then FWD. TRANS. THRU is underlined. If the cal kit is
a?????????????????????????????????????????
user kit and two or more standards are assigned to the forward transmission class,
FWD. TRANS. THRU displays the THRU standard menu that selects the THRU standard and
measures it.
????????????????????????????????????????
Measures S11 load match, and then FWD. MATCH THRU is underlined. If the cal kit is a user
????????????????????????????????????????
kit and two or more standards are assigned to the forward match class, FWD. MATCH THRU
displays the THRU standard menu that selects the THRU standard and measures it.
????????????????????????????????????????
Measures S12 frequency response, and then REV. TRANS. THRU is underlined. If the cal kit is
a????????????????????????????????????????
user kit and two or more standards are assigned to the reverse transmission class,
REV. TRANS. THRU displays the THRU standard menu that selects the THRU standard and
measures it.
???????????????????????????????????????
Measures S22 load match, and then REV. MATCH THRU is underlined. If the cal kit is a user kit
???????????????????????????????????????
and two or more standards are assigned to the reverse match class, REV. MATCH THRU displays
the THRU standard menu that selects the THRU standard and measures it.
Completes transmission calibration.
The error coecients?????????????????????????????
are calculated and stored. Full 2-Port
?????????????????????????????
menu is displayed, with TRANSMISSION underlined. If TRANS. DONE is pressed without
measuring all the required standards, the message CAUTION:ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED
is displayed.
Starts the isolation calibration and displays the menu that measures isolation.
?????????????????????????????????
OMIT ISOLATION
Omits correction for isolation from the calibration when it is not required.
????????????????????????????????????????????????
FWD.ISOL'N ISOL'N STD
Measures S21 isolation and then FWD.ISOL'N ISOL'N STD is underlined.
???????????????????????????????????????????????
REV.ISOL'N ISOL'N STD
Measures S12 isolation and then REV.ISOL'N ISOL'N STD is underlined.
???????????????????????????????????
Completes isolation calibration.
The error coecients
are calculated and stored. The full 2-port
?????????????????????
???????????????????????????????????
menu is displayed, with ISOLATION underlined. If ISOLATION DONE is pressed without
measuring all the required standards, the message CAUTION:ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED
is displayed.
ISOLATION DONE
B-18 Softkey Reference
????????????????????????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????????????????????
Front Panel Key
Description
4Cal5 Continued
????????????????????????????????????????
DONE: 2-PORT CAL
??????????????????????????????????????
ONE PATH 2-PORT
??????????????????????
REFLECT'N
????????????????????????
(S11): OPEN
?????????????
SHORT
????????????
LOAD
????????????????????????????????????
REFLECT'N DONE
??????????????????????????????
TRANS-MISSION
?????????????????????????????????????????
FWD. TRANS. THRU
????????????????????????????????????????
FWD. MATCH THRU
?????????????????????????????
TRANS. DONE
?????????????????????
ISOLATION
Completes the full 2-port calibration.
The error coecients are computed and stored. The
??????????????????????????????????
correction menu is displayed with CORRECTION ON and the notation C2 is displayed at the left
????????????????????????????????????????
of the screen. If DONE: 2-PORT CAL is pressed without measuring all the required standards,
the message CAUTION:ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED is displayed
Displays the series of menus used to perform a high-accuracy, two-port calibration without an
S-parameter test set. This calibration procedure eectively reduces directivity, source match, load
match, isolation, reection tracking, and transmission tracking errors in one direction only.
Isolation correction can be omitted for measurements of devices with limited dynamic range. (The
DUT must be manually reversed between sweeps to accomplish measurement of both input and
output responses.) The required standards are a SHORT, an OPEN, a THRU, and an
impedance-matched LOAD. The procedure for performing a one-path 2-port calibration is
described in the \Performing a 1-Path 2-Port Calibration" in Chapter 7.
Start the reection calibration for full 2-port calibration and displays the menu that measures one
port standards for reection calibration.
When the cal kit is a 7 mm or 3.5 mm cal kit this softkey measures the OPEN standard and then
the softkey label is underlined. Or, this softkey displays the open standard menu that selects an
OPEN standard and measures the standard when the cal kit is 50 or 75 type-N.
When the cal kit is a 7 mm or 3.5 mm cal kit this softkey measures the SHORT standard and then
the softkey label is underlined. Or, this softkey displays the short standard menu that selects a
SHORT standard and measures the standard when the cal kit is 50 or 75 type-N.
When the cal kit is a 7 mm or 3.5 mm cal kit this softkey measures the LOAD standard and then
the softkey label is underlined. Or, this softkey displays the load standard menu that selects a
load standard and measures the standard when the cal kit is 50 or 75 type-N.
Completes the reection calibration for the one-path 2-port calibration.
The error coecients are
??????????????????????
computed and stored. One-path 2-Port menu is displayed, with the REFLECT'N softkey
underlined. If this key is pressed without measuring all the required standards, the message
CAUTION:ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED is displayed.
Starts the transmission calibration and displays the menu that measures frequency response and
load match for transmission calibration.
Measures S21 frequency response, and then the softkey is underlined. If the cal kit is user kit and
two or more standards are assigned to the forward transmission class, this softkey displays the
THRU standard menu that selects the THRU standard and measures it.
Measures S11 load match, and then the softkey is underlined. If the cal kit is user kit and two or
more standards are assigned to the forward match class, this softkey displays the THRU standard
menu that selects the THRU standard and measures it.
Completes transmission calibration.?????????????????????????????
The error coecients are calculated and stored. The one-path,
2-Port menu is displayed, with the TRANSMISSION softkey underlined. If this key is pressed
without measuring all the required standards, the message CAUTION:ADDITIONAL STANDARDS
NEEDED is displayed.
Starts the isolation calibration and displays the menu that measures isolation.
?????????????????????????????????
OMIT ISOLATION
Omits correction for isolation from the calibration when it is not required.
????????????????????????????????????????????????
FWD.ISOL'N ISOL'N STD
Measures S21 isolation and then the softkey label is underlined.
???????????????????????????????????????????????
REV.ISOL'N ISOL'N STD
Measures S12 isolation and then the softkey label is underlined.
???????????????????????????????????
Completes isolation calibration.
The error coecients are calculated and stored. One-path 2-port
?????????????????????
menu is displayed, with the ISOLATION softkey underlined. If this key is pressed without
measuring all the required standards, the message CAUTION:ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED
is displayed.
Completes the one-path 2-port calibration.
The error coecients are computed and stored. The
??????????????????????????????????
correction menu is displayed with CORRECTION ON , and the notation C2 is displayed at the left
of the screen. If this key is pressed without measuring all the required standards, the message
CAUTION:ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED is displayed.
ISOLATION DONE
????????????????????????????????????????
DONE: 2-PORT CAL
Softkey Reference B-19
Front Panel Key
Description
4Cal5 Continued
Response standard menu
?????????????
SHORT
Measures SHORT standard of 7 mm or 3.5 mm cal kit for the response calibration.
????????????
OPEN
Measures OPEN standard of 7 mm or 3.5 mm cal kit for the response calibration.
????????????
THRU
Measures THRU standard of 7 mm or 3.5 mm cal kit for the response calibration.
????????????????????????????????
DONE:RESPONSE
Completes the response ??????????????????????????????????
calibration and computes and stores the error coecients. The correction
menu is displayed with CORRECTION ON .
???????????????????
Measures SHORT standard???????
of type-N cal kits connected to the type-N male test port connector for
the response calibration. [M] indicates that the test port connector is male, it does not indicate
the connector type of the standard.
Measures SHORT standard of ??????
type-N cal kits connected to the type-N female test port connector
for the response calibration. [F] indicates that the test port connector is female, it does not
indicate the connector type of the standard.
Measures OPEN standard ???????
of type-N cal kits connected to the type-N male test port connector for
the response calibration. [M] indicates that the test port connector is male, it does not indicate
the connector type of the standard.calibration.
Measures OPEN standard ??????
of type-N cal kits connected to the type-N female test port connector for
the response calibration. [F] indicates that the test port connector is female, it does not indicate
the connector type of the standard.
Measures THRU standard of type-N cal kits for the response calibration.
SHORT[M]
??????????????????
SHORT[F]
?????????????????
OPEN[M]
????????????????
OPEN[F]
????????????
THRU
????????????????????????????????
DONE:RESPONSE
Completes the response ??????????????????????????????????
calibration and computes and stores the error coecients. The correction
menu is displayed with CORRECTION ON .
???????????????????????????
These softkeys measure the standard dened by the user for the response calibration. When only
one standard is assigned to the response calibration, this softkey menu is not displayed and the
standard is measured immediately.
dened std 1
???????????????????????????
dened std 2
???????????????????????????
dened std 3
???????????????????????????
dened std 4
???????????????????????????
dened std 5
???????????????????????????
dened std 6
???????????????????????????
dened std 7
????????????????????????????????
DONE:RESPONSE
B-20 Softkey Reference
Completes the response ??????????????????????????????????
calibration and computes and stores the error coecients. The correction
menu is displayed with CORRECTION ON .
Front Panel Key
Description
4Cal5 Continued
OPEN standard menu
?????????????????
OPEN[M]
????????????????
OPEN[F]
???????????????????????
DONE:OPEN
???????????????????????????
dened std 1
???????????????????????????
Measures OPEN standard ???????
of type-N cal kits connected to the type-N male test port connector for
the response calibration. [M] indicates that the test port connector is male, it does not indicate
the connector type of the standard.
Measures OPEN standard ??????
of type-N cal kits connected to the type-N female test port connector for
the response calibration. [F] indicates that the test port connector is female, it does not indicate
the connector type of the standard.
Completes the OPEN calibration
and computes and stores the error coecients. The correction
??????????????????????????????????
menu is displayed with CORRECTION ON .
These softkeys measure the standard dened by the user for the OPEN calibration. When only one
standard is assigned to the OPEN calibration, this softkey menu is not displayed and the standard
is measured immediately.
dened std 2
???????????????????????????
dened std 3
???????????????????????????
dened std 4
???????????????????????????
dened std 5
???????????????????????????
dened std 6
???????????????????????????
dened std 7
???????????????????????
DONE:OPEN
SHORT standard menu
???????????????????
SHORT[M]
??????????????????
SHORT[F]
Completes the OPEN calibration
and computes and stores the error coecients. The correction
??????????????????????????????????
menu is displayed with CORRECTION ON .
Measures SHORT standard???????
of type-N cal kits connected to the type-N male test port connector for
the response calibration. [M] indicates that the test port connector is male, it does not indicate
the connector type of the standard.
Measures SHORT standard of ??????
type-N cal kits connected to the type-N female test port connector
for the response calibration. [F] indicates that the test port connector is female, it does not
indicate the connector type of the standard.
?????????????????????????
DONE:SHORT
Completes the SHORT calibration
and computes and stores the error coecients. The correction
??????????????????????????????????
menu is displayed with CORRECTION ON .
???????????????????????????
These softkeys measure the standard dened by the user for the SHORT calibration. When only
one standard is assigned to the SHORT calibration, this softkey menu is not displayed and the
standard is measured immediately.
dened std 1
???????????????????????????
dened std 2
???????????????????????????
dened std 3
???????????????????????????
dened std 4
???????????????????????????
dened std 5
???????????????????????????
dened std 6
???????????????????????????
dened std 7
?????????????????????????
DONE:SHORT
Completes the SHORT calibration
and computes and stores the error coecients. The correction
??????????????????????????????????
menu is displayed with CORRECTION ON .
Softkey Reference B-21
Front Panel Key
Description
4Cal5 Continued
LOAD standard menu
???????????????????????????
These softkeys measure the standard dened by the user for the LOAD calibration. When only one
standard is assigned to the LOAD calibration, this softkey menu is not displayed and the standard
is measured immediately.
dened std 1
???????????????????????????
dened std 2
???????????????????????????
dened std 3
???????????????????????????
dened std 4
???????????????????????????
dened std 5
???????????????????????????
dened std 6
???????????????????????????
dened std 7
???????????????????????
DONE:LOAD
Completes the LOAD calibration
and computes and stores the error coecients. The correction
??????????????????????????????????
menu is displayed with CORRECTION ON .
THRU standard menu
These softkeys measure the standard dened by the user for the THRU calibration. When only one
standard is assigned to the THRU calibration, this softkey menu is not displayed and the standard
is measured immediately.
???????????????????????????
dened std 1
???????????????????????????
dened std 2
???????????????????????????
dened std 3
???????????????????????????
dened std 4
???????????????????????????
dened std 5
???????????????????????????
dened std 6
???????????????????????????
dened std 7
???????????????????????
DONE:THRU
B-22 Softkey Reference
Completes the THRU calibration
and computes and stores the error coecients. The correction
??????????????????????????????????
menu is displayed with CORRECTION ON .
Description
Front Panel Key
4Cal5 Continued
NA Cal kit menu
????????????????????????????
CAL KIT:7mm
Selects the 7 mm cal kit model.
?????????????
3.5mm
Selects the 3.5 mm cal kit model.
?????????????????
N 50 Selects the 50 type-N model.
?????????????????
N 75 Selects the 75 type-N model.
?????????????????????
Selects a cal kit model dened or modied by the user. For information, see \Modifying Calibration
Kits" in Appendix A.
Stores the user-modied or user-dened kit into memory, after it has been modied.
USER KIT
?????????????????????????????????
SAVE USER KIT
??????????????????????????????
MODIFY [7mm]
??????????????????????????????????????
DEFINE STANDARD
STD NO.1 [SHORT] !
NA/ZA Standard type menu
????????????????????????????????????
STD NO.2 [OPEN] ! NA/ZA
Standard type menu
???????????????????????????????????
STD NO.3 [LOAD] ! NA/ZA
Standard type menu
????????????????????????????????????????????
STD NO.4 [DEL/THRU] !
NA/ZA Standard type menu
???????????????????????????????????
STD NO.5 [LOAD] ! NA/ZA
Standard type menu
???????????????????????????????????
STD NO.6 [LOAD] ! NA/ZA
Standard type menu
?????????????????????????????????????
STD NO.7 [SHORT] !
NA/ZA Standard type menu
????????????????????????????????????
STD NO.8 [OPEN] ! NA/ZA
Standard type menu
???????????????????????????????
SPECIFY CLASS
?????????????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????
SPECIFY: S11A
??????????
S11B
??????????
S11C
??????????????????????????????
SPECIFY: S22A
??????????
S22B
??????????
S22C
????????????
Displays the modify cal kit menu, where a default cal kit can be user-modied.
Makes the standard number the active function and brings up the dene standard number menus.
The standard number (1 to 8) is an arbitrary reference number used to reference standards when
specifying a class. Each number is similar to a register in that it holds specic information. Each
contains the selected type of device (OPEN, SHORT, or THRU) and the electrical model for that
device.
Selects standard No.1 as the standard denition. The standard type you selected is shown in the
softkey label enclosed with brackets.
Selects standard No.2 as the standard denition. The standard type you selected is shown in the
softkey label enclosed with brackets.
Selects standard No.3 as the standard denition. The standard type you selected is shown in the
softkey label enclosed with brackets.
Selects standard No.4 as the standard denition. The standard type you selected is shown in the
softkey label enclosed with brackets.
Selects standard No.5 as the standard denition. The standard type you selected is shown in the
softkey label enclosed with brackets.
Selects standard No.6 as the standard denition. The standard type you selected is shown in the
softkey label enclosed with brackets.
Selects standard No.7 as the standard denition. The standard type you selected is shown in the
softkey label enclosed with brackets.
Selects standard No.8 as the standard denition. The standard type you selected is shown in the
softkey label enclosed with brackets.
Displays
softkeys that assign a standard to a standard class. After the standards are modied, use
???????????????????????????????
SPECIFY CLASS to specify that a class consists of specic standards.
Enters the standard numbers for the rst class required for an S11 1-port calibration. (For
predened cal kits, this is OPEN (for the 7 mm) or OPENS (for type-N).)
Enters the standard numbers for the second class required for an S11 1-port calibration. (For
predened cal kits, this is SHORT (for the 7 mm) or SHORTS (for the type-N) .)
Enters the standard numbers for the third class required for an S11 1-port calibration. (For
predened kits, this is LOAD.)
Enters the standard numbers for the rst class required for an S22 1-port calibration. (For
predened cal kits, this is OPEN (for the 7 mm) or OPENS (for the type-N).)
Enters the standard numbers for the second class required for an S22 1-port calibration. (For
predened cal kits, this is SHORT (for the 7 mm) or SHORTS (for the type-N).)
Enters the standard numbers for the third class required for an S22 1-port calibration. (For
predened kits, this is LOAD.)
MORE
Softkey Reference B-23
Description
Front Panel Key
4Cal5 Continued
?????????????????????????????????????????
SPECIFY:FWD.TRANS.
???????????????????????
REV.TRANS.
????????????????????????
FWD.MATCH
???????????????????????
REV.MATCH
?????????????????????
RESPONSE
???????????????????????????????????????
RESPONSE & ISO'N
?????????????????
Enters the standard numbers for the forward transmission (THRU) calibration. (For predened
kits, this is THRU.)
Enters the standard numbers for the reverse transmission (THRU) calibration. (For predened kits,
this is THRU.)
Enters the standard numbers for the forward match (THRU) calibration. (For predened kits, this
is THRU.)
Enters the standard numbers for the reverse match (THRU) calibration. (For predened kits, this is
THRU.)
Enters the standard numbers for a response calibration. This calibration corrects for frequency
response in either reection or transmission measurements (depending on the parameter being
measured when a calibration is performed). (For predened kits, the standard is either OPEN or
SHORT for reection measurements or THRU for transmission measurements.)
Enters the standard numbers for a response and isolation calibration. This calibration corrects for
frequency response and directivity in reection measurements or frequency response and isolation
in transmission measurements.
RETURN
?????????????????????????????????????????????
CLASS DONE (SPEC'D)
?????????????????????????????????????????????
CLASS DONE (SPEC'D)
?????????????????????????????
LABEL CLASS
???????????????????????????
LABEL: S11A
??????????
S11B
??????????
S11C
???????????????????????????
LABEL: S22A
??????????
S22B
??????????
S22C
????????????
Completes the class assignment and stores it.
Completes the class assignment and stores it.
Displays softkeys that give the class a meaningful label for future reference. These labels become
softkey labels during a measurement calibration. A label can be up to ten characters long.
Displays the letter menu to dene the label for the rst class required for an S11 1-port calibration.
Displays the letter menu to dene the label for the second class required for an S11 1-port
calibration.
Displays the letter menu to dene the label for the third class required for an S11 1-port
calibration.
Displays the letter menu to dene the label for the rst class required for an S22 1-port calibration.
Displays the letter menu to dene the label for the second class required for an S22 1-port
calibration.
Displays the letter menu to dene the label for the third class required for an S22 1-port
calibration.
MORE
??????????????????????????????????????
LABEL:FWD.TRANS.
Displays the letter menu to dene the label for the forward transmission (THRU) calibration.
???????????????????????
REV.TRANS.
Displays the letter menu to dene the label for the reverse transmission (THRU) calibration.
????????????????????????
FWD.MATCH
Displays the letter menu to dene the label for the forward match (THRU) calibration.
???????????????????????
REV.MATCH
Displays the letter menu to dene the label for the reverse match (THRU) calibration.
?????????????????????
RESPONSE
Displays the letter menu to dene the label for the response calibration.
???????????????????????????????????????
RESPONSE & ISO'N
Displays the letter menu to dene the label for the response and isolation calibration.
????????????????????????????
Completes the procedure to dene labels and store them.
LABEL DONE
????????????????????????????
LABEL DONE
???????????????????????
LABEL KIT
?????????????????????????????????????????????
KIT DONE (MODIFIED)
?????????????????
RETURN
B-24 Softkey Reference
Completes the procedure to dene labels and store them.
Displays the letter menu to dene a label for a new calibration
kit. This label appears in the
????????????????
CAL KIT softkey label in the correction menu and the MODIFY label in the select cal kit menu.
It is saved with calibration data.
Completes the procedure to dene user cal kit.
??????????????????
Front Panel Key
Description
4Cal5 Continued
NA/ZA Standard type menu
????????????????????????????????????
STD TYPE: OPEN
??????
C0
??????
C1
??????
C2
??????????????????????????????????
SPECIFY OFFSET
Specify oset menu
????????????????????????
LABEL STD
! NA/ZA
????????????????????????????????????????????
STD DONE (DEFINED)
?????????????
SHORT
??????????????????????????????????
SPECIFY OFFSET
Specify oset menu
????????????????????????
LABEL STD
! NA/ZA
????????????????????????????????????????????
STD DONE (DEFINED)
????????????
LOAD
??????????????????????????????????
SPECIFY OFFSET
Specify oset menu
????????????????????????
LABEL STD
! NA/ZA
????????????????????????????????????????????
STD DONE (DEFINED)
?????????????????????????
DELAY/THRU
??????????????????????????????????
SPECIFY OFFSET
Specify oset menu
????????????????????????
LABEL STD
! NA/ZA
????????????????????????????????????????????
STD DONE (DEFINED)
????????????????????????????????????????????????
ARBITRARY IMPEDANCE
??????????????????????????????????????????????
Denes the standard type as an OPEN (used for calibrating reection measurements). OPENs are
assigned a terminal impedance of innite ohms (but delay and loss osets can still be added).
Pressing this key also displays a menu for dening the OPEN (including its capacitance).
Enters the C0 term, which is the constant term of the quadratic equation and is scaled by 10015
Farads.
Enters the C1 term, expressed in F/Hz (Farads/Hz) and scaled by 10027 .
Enters the C2 term, expressed in F/Hz2 and scaled by 10036 .
Displays the specify oset menu that denes osets in delay, loss, and standard impedance (Z0 ) for
each standard type.
Displays the letter menu to dene a label for each standard.
Terminates the standard denition. Press this after each standard is dened (including osets).
Denes the standard type as a SHORT, for calibrating reection measurements. SHORTs are
assigned a terminal impedance of 0 . However, delay and loss osets can still be added.
Displays the specify oset menu that denes osets in delay, loss, and standard impedance (Z0 ) for
each standard type.
Displays the letter menu to dene a label for each standard.
Terminates the standard denition. Press this after each standard is dened (including osets).
Denes the standard type as a LOAD (termination). LOADs are assigned a terminal impedance
equal to the system characteristic impedance Z0 . However, delay and loss osets can still be
added. If the LOAD impedance is not Z0 , use the arbitrary impedance standard denition.
Displays the specify oset menu that denes osets in delay, loss, and standard impedance (Z0 ) for
each standard type.
Displays the letter menu to dene a label for each standard.
Terminates the standard denition. Press this after each standard is dened (including osets).
Denes the standard type as a transmission line of specied length, for calibrating transmission
measurements.
Displays the specify oset menu that denes osets in delay, loss, and standard impedance (Z0 ) for
each standard type.
Displays the letter menu to dene a label for each standard.
Terminates the standard denition. Press this after each standard is dened (including osets).
Denes the standard type to be a LOAD with an arbitrary impedance (dierent from system Z0 ).
TERMINAL IMPEDANCE
Species the (arbitrary) impedance of the standard in ohms.
??????????????????????????????????
Displays the specify oset menu that denes osets in delay, loss, and standard impedance (Z0 ) for
each standard type.
Displays the letter menu to dene a label for each standard.
SPECIFY OFFSET
Specify oset menu
????????????????????????
LABEL STD
! NA/ZA
????????????????????????????????????????????
STD DONE (DEFINED)
Terminates the standard denition. Press this after each standard is dened (including osets).
?????????????????
RETURN
Softkey Reference B-25
Description
Front Panel Key
4Cal5 Continued
See NA/ZA Specify oset menu
???????????????????????????????
OFFSET DELAY
???????????????????????????
OFFSET LOSS
???????????????????????
OFFSET Z0
???????????????????????????????????????
Species the one-way electrical delay from the measurement (reference) plane to the standard in
seconds (s). (In a transmission standard, oset delay is the delay from plane to plane.) Delay can
be calculated from the precise physical length of the oset, the permittivity constant of the
medium, and the speed of light.
Species energy loss, due to skin eect, along a one-way length of coaxial cable oset. The value
of loss is entered as /second at 1 GHz.
Species the characteristic impedance of the coaxial cable oset.
STD OFFSET DONE
Completes procedure to specify oset value of standard.
Impedance Analyzer
?????????????????????????????????????
CALIBRATE MENU
Displays the Calibration Operation Menu that is used to perform a calibration measurement.
????????????
OPEN
Measures OPEN standard of the cal kit for calibration.
?????????????
SHORT
Measures SHORT standard of the cal kit for calibration.
????????????
LOAD
Measures LOAD standard of the cal kit for calibration.
????????????????????????????????????????
Completes calibration and then computes and stores the error coecients.
DONE: CORRECTION
???????????????????????????????????????????????????
RESUME CAL SEQUENCE
????????????????????????????????????
FIXTURE COMPEN
???????????????????????????????
COMPEN MENU
????????????
OPEN
Eliminates the need to restart a calibration sequence that was interrupted to access some other
menu. Goes back to the point where the calibration sequence was interrupted. This key also
displays the Calibrate Menu which are used to perform a resumed calibration measurement.
Displays the Fixture Compensation Menu that is used to perform the xture compensation
measurement in order to reduce measurement errors existing in the test xture.
Displays the Compensation Operation Menu which are used to perform a xture compensation
measurement.
Measures OPEN for the xture compensation.
?????????????
SHORT
Measures SHORT standard for the xture compensation.
????????????
LOAD
Measures LOAD standard for the xture compensation.
????????????????????????????????
Completes the xture compensation measurement and then computes and stores the compensation
coecients.
Goes back to the point where the xture compensation sequence was interrupted when that was
interrupted to access some other menu.
Turns OPEN xture compensation ON or OFF.
DONE: COMPEN
?????????????????????????????????????????
RESUME COMP SEQ
?????????????????????????????
OPEN on OFF
???????????????????????????????
SHORT on OFF
Turns SHORT xture compensation ON or OFF.
?????????????????????????????
LOAD on OFF
Turns LOAD xture compensation ON or OFF.
?????????????????
Returns to the Calibration Menu.
RETURN
??????????????????????????????????????????
CAL KIT [IMP 7mm]
?????????????????????????????????????????
CAL KIT: IMP 7mm
Displays the Cal Kit Menu that selects the default calibration kit and a user kit. This key displays
additional softkeys used to dene calibration standards other than those in the default kits. When
a calibration kit has been specied, its label is displayed in brackets in the softkey label.
Selects the 7 mm cal kit model.
?????????????
3.5mm
Selects the 3.5 mm cal kit model.
?????????????????
N 50 Selects the 50 type-N model.
?????????????????
N 75 Selects the 75 type-N model.
?????????????????????
Selects a cal kit model dened or modied by the user. For information, see \Modifying Calibration
Kits" in Appendix A.
Stores the user-modied or user-dened kit into memory, after it has been modied.
USER KIT
?????????????????????????????????
SAVE USER KIT
??????????????????????????????
MODIFY [7mm]
B-26 Softkey Reference
Displays the modify cal kit menu, where a default cal kit can be user-modied.
Description
Front Panel Key
4Cal5 Continued
??????????????????????????????????????
DEFINE STANDARD
?????????????????????????????????????
STD NO.1 [SHORT]
????????????????????????????????????
STD NO.2 [OPEN]
???????????????????????????????????
STD NO.3 [LOAD]
????????????????????????????????????????????
STD NO.4 [DEL/THRU]
???????????????????????????????????
STD NO.5 [LOAD]
???????????????????????????????????
STD NO.6 [LOAD]
?????????????????????????????????????
STD NO.7 [SHORT]
????????????????????????????????????
STD NO.8 [OPEN]
???????????????????????????????
SPECIFY CLASS
Makes the standard number the active function and brings up the dene standard number menus.
The standard number (1 to 8) is an arbitrary reference number used to reference standards when
specifying a class. Each number is similar to a register in that it holds specic information. Each
contains the selected type of device (OPEN, SHORT, or THRU) and the electrical model for that
device.
Selects standard No.1 as the standard denition. The standard type you selected is shown in the
softkey label enclosed with brackets.
Selects standard No.2 as the standard denition. The standard type you selected is shown in the
softkey label enclosed with brackets.
Selects standard No.3 as the standard denition. The standard type you selected is shown in the
softkey label enclosed with brackets.
Selects standard No.4 as the standard denition. The standard type you selected is shown in the
softkey label enclosed with brackets.
Selects standard No.5 as the standard denition. The standard type you selected is shown in the
softkey label enclosed with brackets.
Selects standard No.6 as the standard denition. The standard type you selected is shown in the
softkey label enclosed with brackets.
Selects standard No.7 as the standard denition. The standard type you selected is shown in the
softkey label enclosed with brackets.
Selects standard No.8 as the standard denition. The standard type you selected is shown in the
softkey label enclosed with brackets.
Displays Specify Class Menu.
?????????????????????????????????
SPECIFY: IMP A
Enters the standard numbers for the rst class required for an impedance calibration.
??????????????
IMP B
Enters the standard numbers for the second class required for an impedance calibration.
??????????????
IMP C
Enters the standard numbers for the third class required for an impedance calibration.
?????????????????????????????????????????????
Completes the class assignment and stores it.
CLASS DONE (SPEC'D)
?????????????????????????????
LABEL CLASS
LABEL: IMP A ! See
Enter text menu
??????????????
IMP B ! See Enter text
menu
??????????????
IMP C ! See Enter text
menu
????????????????????????????
LABEL DONE
???????????????????????????????
???????????????????????
LABEL KIT
?????????????????????????????????????????????
KIT DONE (MODIFIED)
Displays Label Class Menu.
Denes a label for the rst class required for an impedance calibration. (For predened cal kits,
this is OPEN.)
Denes a label for the second class required for an impedance calibration. (For predened cal kits,
this is SHORT.)
Denes a label for the third class required for an impedance calibration. (For predened cal kits,
this is LOAD.)
Completes setting the label of class.
Displays
the letter menu to dene a label for a new calibration
kit. This label appears in the
????????????????
??????????????????
CAL KIT softkey label in the correction menu and the MODIFY label in the select cal kit menu.
It is saved with calibration data.
Completes the procedure to dene user cal kit.
?????????????????
RETURN
Softkey Reference B-27
Description
Front Panel Key
4Cal5 Continued
??????????????????????????????????????????
COMPEN KIT [USER]
???????????????????????????????????????
SAVE COMPEN KIT
???????????????????????????????
MODIFY [USER]
??????????????????????????????????????
DEFINE STANDARD
Displays the Compensation Kit Menu that is used to dene user-dene OPEN, SHORT, and LOAD
for xture compensation measurement. When a set of user-dened OPEN, SHORT, and LOAD
values has been specied, its label is displayed in brackets in the softkey label.
Stores the user-modied or user-dened OPEN, SHORT, and LOAD for xture compensation into
memory, after it has been modied.
Displays the Modify Compensation Kit Menu.
Displays the Dene Compensation Standard Menu.
???????????????????????????????????????
OPEN: CONDUCT(G)
Sets a conductance value (G) of OPEN.
??????????????
CAP.(C)
Sets a capacitance value (C) of OPEN.
????????????????????????????????????
SHORT: RESIST.(R)
Sets a resistance value (R) of SHORT.
?????????????????????
INDUCT.(L)
Sets an inductance value (L) of SHORT.
??????????????????????????????????
LOAD: RESIST.(R)
Sets a resistance value (R) of LOAD.
?????????????????????
INDUCT.(L)
Sets an inductance value (L) of LOAD.
????????????????????????????????????????????
Completes the procedure to dene user-dened OPEN, SHORT, and LOAD.
STD DONE (DEFINED)
???????????????????????
LABEL KIT
?????????????????????????????????????????????
KIT DONE (MODIFIED)
?????????????????
Displays the Letter Menu ???????????????????????????
to dene a label for a new set of user-dened OPEN, SHORT, and
LOAD.
????????????????
This label appears in the COMPEN KIT softkey label in the Calibration Menu and the MODIFY
label in the Compensation Kit Menu. It is saved with the data of OPEN, SHORT, and LOAD.
Completes the procedure to dene user-dened OPEN, SHORT, and LOAD for xture
compensation.
RETURN
????????????
MORE
????????????????????????????????????
PORT EXTENSION
???????????????????????????????????????
EXTENSION ON o
??????????????????????????????????????
EXTENSION VALUE
?????????????????
Displays the Port Extensions Menu that is used to extend the apparent location of the
measurement reference plane.
Turns port extension ON or OFF. When this function is ON, all extensions dened below are
enabled; when OFF, none of the extensions are enabled.
Makes the port extension value the active function. This function is used to add electrical delay in
seconds to extend the reference plane at the APC-7 connector on the test head to the end of the
cable.
RETURN
?????????????????????????????????????
VELOCITY FACTOR
Enters the velocity factor used by the analyzer to calculate equivalent electrical length.
???????????????
Sets the characteristic impedance used by the analyzer in calculating measured impedance with
Smith chart markers and conversion parameters. If the test set used is an 85046B test set, or an
87512B Transmission/Reection Test Kit, set Z0 to 75 . Characteristic impedance must be set
correctly before calibration procedures are performed.
SET Z0
?????????????????
RETURN
Spectrum Analyzer
?????????????????????????????????????
LVL CAL DATA R
?????????????????????????????????????
LVL CAL DATA A
Set the level calibration data for the input port R.
Set the level calibration data for the input port A.
?????????????????????????????????????
LVL CAL DATA B
Set the level calibration data for the input port B.
???????????????
Set the input impedance to either 50 or 75 .
SET Z0
B-28 Softkey Reference
4Sweep5
Front Panel Key
Description
4Sweep5
Network/Impedance Analyzer
??????????????????????????????????????????????????
SWEEP TIME AUTO man
???????????????????????????
SWEEP TIME
???????????????
: h:m:s
Toggles between automatic and manual sweep time. The automatic sweep time selects
the optimum sweep time automatically.
????????????
Activates the sweep time function and displays the :h:m:s softkey.
Enters \:" for the manual sweep time entry.
?????????????????
RETURN
??????????????????????????????????????????
NUMBER OF POINTS
???????????????????????????????????????????
COUPLED CH ON o
?????????????????????????????????????????
Sets the number of data points per sweep. Using fewer points allows a faster sweep
time but the displayed trace shows less horizontal detail. Using more points gives
greater data density and improved trace resolution, but slows the sweep.
????????????????????????????????????
Toggles channel coupling of the sweep parameter values. With COUPLED CH ON
(the preset condition), both channels have the same sweep parameter values (the
inactive channel takes on the sweep parameter values of the active channel). If the
channel's analyzer modes are dierent, the channels cannot be coupled.
SWEEP TYPE MENU
????????????????????????????????????????????????
SWEEP TYPE:LIN FREQ
Activates linear frequency sweep mode.
??????????????????????
Activates logarithmic frequency sweep mode. The source is stepped in logarithmic
increments and the data is displayed on a logarithmic graticule.
Activates frequency list mode. If the list is not dened, this softkey performs no
function.
Activates power sweep mode. Used to characterize power-sensitive DUTs. In this mode,
power is swept at a single frequency from a start power value to a stop power value.
Values are selected using the 4START5 and 4STOP5 keys and the entry block.
LOG FREQ
??????????????????????
LIST FREQ
???????????????????????????????
POWER SWEEP
?????????????????????
EDIT LIST
???????????????????
SEGMENT
??????????
EDIT
! See NA/ZA segment menu
????????????????
DELETE
??????????
ADD
! See NA/ZA segment menu
?????????????????????????
CLEAR LIST
???????????????????????
LIST DONE
????????????????????????????????
SEGMENT WAIT
????????????????????????????????????????????
LIST DISP [FREQ BS]
?????????????????
Displays the following softkeys to dene or modify the frequency sweep list.
Determines a segment on the list to be modied. Enter the number of a segment in the
list, or use the step keys to scroll the pointer \>" at the left to the required segment
number. The indicated segment can then be edited or deleted.
Displays the segment menu for spectrum analyzer. The segment indicated by the
pointer \>" at the left can be modied.
Deletes the segment indicated by the pointer \>".
Adds a new segment to be dened with the segment menu for spectrum analyzer. If
the list is empty, a default segment is added and the edit segment menu is displayed so
it can be modied. If the list is not empty, the segment indicated by the pointer \>" is
copied and the edit segment menu is displayed.
Displays the clear list menu.
Denes the frequency sweep list and returns to the sweep type menu.
Species the time to keep the analyzer waiting for measurement start after the setting
for each segment is completed.
When the sweeping mode is set to the frequency list sweep, displays contents of the
trace based on either rules:
???????????????????
FREQ BS
The trace is sorted based on the sweep parameter.
??????????????????????
The trace is sorted the order of acquisition.
ORDER BS
RETURN
Softkey Reference B-29
Front Panel Key
Description
4Sweep5 Continued
NA/ZA segment menu
???????????????????????????????????
SEGMENT: START
Sets the start frequency of a segment.
???????????
STOP
Sets the stop frequency of a segment.
????????????????
CENTER
Sets the center frequency of a segment.
???????????
Sets the frequency span of a segment about a specied center frequency.
SPAN
MKR!MENU
?????????????????????????
MKR!START
?????????????????????????
MKR!STOP
???????????????????????
MKR!CENTER
?????????????????????????????
Sets the sweep parameter start value to the sweep parameter value of the marker.
Sets the sweep parameter stop value to the sweep parameter value of the marker.
Changes the CENTER to the marker's sweep parameter value.
?????????????????
RETURN
????????????
MORE
????????????????????????????????????????
NUMBER of POINTS
Sets the number of data points per sweep.
???????????????
POWER
Sets the power level segment by segment.
??????????????
IF BW
Sets the IF bandwidth segment by segment.
??????????????????????????
DC VOLTAGE
Sets DC voltage for the DC SOURCE port segment by segment.
???????????????????????????
Sets DC current for the DC SOURCE port segment by segment.
DC CURRENT
?????????????????
RETURN
???????????????????????????????
SEGMENT QUIT
Returns to the previous softkey menu without saving the modied segment.
?????????????????????????????????
Saves the modied segment and returns to the previous softkey menu.
SEGMENT DONE
B-30 Softkey Reference
Description
Front Panel Key
4Sweep5 Continued
Spectrum Analyzer
??????????????????????????????????????????????????
SWEEP TIME AUTO man
???????????????????????????
SWEEP TIME
???????????????
: h:m:s
Shows sweep time mode setting. Sweep time mode in spectrum analyzer mode is xed
to auto mode in normal span measurement, and to manual mode in zero span
measurement. You cannot change the sweep time mode. The automatic sweep time
selects the optimum sweep time automatically.
????????????
Activates the sweep time function and displays the :h:m:s softkey.
Enters \:" for the manual sweep time entry.
?????????????????
RETURN
??????????????????????????????????????????
NUMBER OF POINTS
?????????????????????????????????????????
SWEEP TYPE MENU
????????????????????????????????????????????????
SWEEP TYPE:LIN FREQ
??????????????????????
LIST FREQ
?????????????????????
EDIT LIST
???????????????????
SEGMENT
??????????
EDIT
! See SA segment menu
????????????????
DELETE
??????????
ADD
! See SA segment menu
?????????????????????????
CLEAR LIST
???????????????????????
LIST DONE
????????????????????????????????
SEGMENT WAIT
????????????????????????????????????????????
LIST DISP [FREQ BS]
?????????????????
Sets the number of data points per sweep. Using fewer points allows a faster sweep
time but the displayed trace shows less horizontal detail. Using more points gives
greater data density and improved trace resolution, but slows the sweep.
Displays the sweep type menu. Using the softkeys on this menu, one of the following
four sweep types can be selected for the network analyzer mode:
Activates linear frequency sweep mode.
Activates frequency list mode. If the list is not dened, this softkey performs no
function.
Displays the following softkeys to dene or modify the frequency sweep list:
Determines a segment on the list to be modied. Enter the number of a segment in the
list, or use the step keys to scroll the pointer \>" at the left to the required segment
number. The indicated segment can then be edited or deleted.
Provides the segment menu for network analyzer. The segment indicated by the
pointer \>" at the left can be modied.
Deletes the segment indicated by the pointer \>".
Adds a new segment to be dened with the segment menu for network analyzer. If the
list is empty, a default segment is added and the edit segment menu is displayed so it
can be modied. If the list is not empty, the segment indicated by the pointer \>" is
copied and the edit segment menu is displayed.
Displays the clear list menu.
Denes the frequency sweep list and returns to the sweep type menu.
Species the time to keep the analyzer waiting for measurement start after the setting
for each segment is completed.
When the sweeping mode is set to the frequency list sweep, displays contents of the
trace based on either rules:
???????????????????
FREQ BS
The trace is sorted based on the sweep parameter.
??????????????????????
The trace is sorted the order of acquisition.
ORDER BS
RETURN
Softkey Reference B-31
Front Panel Key
Description
4Sweep5 Continued
SA segment menu
???????????????????????????????????
SEGMENT: START
Sets the start frequency of a segment.
???????????
STOP
Sets the stop frequency of a segment.
????????????????
CENTER
Sets the center frequency of a segment.
???????????
SPAN
Sets the frequency span of a segment about a specied center frequency.
?????????????????????????
Displays the menu below to set the sweep parameters using the marker.
MKR!MENU
MKR!START
?????????????????????????
MKR!STOP
???????????????????????
MKR!CENTER
?????????????????????????????
Sets the sweep parameter start value to the sweep parameter value of the marker.
Sets the sweep parameter stop value to the sweep parameter value of the marker.
Changes the CENTER to the marker's sweep parameter value.
?????????????????
RETURN
????????????
MORE
????????????????????????????????????????
NUMBER of POINTS
Sets the number of data points per sweep.
??????????????????
RES BW
Sets the IF bandwidth segment by segment.
??????????????????????????
DC VOLTAGE
Sets DC voltage for the DC SOURCE port segment by segment.
???????????????????????????
Sets DC current for the DC SOURCE port segment by segment.
DC CURRENT
?????????????????
RETURN
???????????????????????????????
SEGMENT QUIT
Returns to the previous softkey menu without saving the modied segment.
?????????????????????????????????
Saves the modied segment and returns to the previous softkey menu.
SEGMENT DONE
4Source5
B-32 Softkey Reference
Description
Front Panel Key
4Source5
Network/Impedance Analyzer
???????????????
POWER
Activates the power level function.
????????????????????
CW FREQ
Sets the frequency for the power sweep.
??????????????????????????????????????
Sets the DC SOURCE port to control either voltage or current.
DC SRC [VOLTAGE]
??????????????????
VOLTAGE
The DC SOURCE port controls voltage (voltage control mode).
???????????????????
???????????????
POWER
The DC SOURCE port controls current (current control mode).
CURRENT
Activates the power level function.
????????????????????
CW FREQ
Sets the frequency for the power sweep.
????????????????????????????????????????
Sets the DC SOURCE port to control either voltage or current.
DC SRC [CURRENT]
???????????
VOLT
The DC SOURCE port controls voltage (voltage control mode).
???????????
???????????????????????????
DC CURRENT
???????????????????????????????????????
DC VOLTAGE LIMIT
?????????????????????????????????
DC OUT ON o
??????????????????????????
DC VOLTAGE
?????????????????????????????????????????
DC CURRENT LIMIT
?????????????????????????????????
DC OUT ON o
Spectrum Analyzer
???????????????
POWER
?????????????????????????????????
RF OUT o ON
??????????????????????????
DC VOLTAGE
?????????????????????????????????????????
DC CURRENT LIMIT
??????????????????????????????????????
DC SRC [VOLTAGE]
The DC SOURCE port controls current (current control mode).
CURR
Sets DC current for the DC SOURCE port.
Sets
the upper limit of the current for the DC SOURCE port when
????????????????????????????????????????
DC SRC [CURRENT] is selected. This command also denes the upper limit value for
altered polarity because the specied value is regarded as an absolute value.
Turns the DC SOURCE port ON or OFF.
Sets DC voltage for the DC SOURCE port.
Sets the upper limit of the voltage for the DC SOURCE port when
DC SRC [VOLTAGE] is selected. This command also denes the upper limit value for
altered polarity because the specied value is regarded as an absolute value.
Turns the DC SOURCE port ON or OFF.
??????????????????????????????????????
Activates the power level function and sets the RF output power level of the analyzer's
internal source. The allowable range is 070 dBm to +20 dBm.
Toggles the signal output on the RF OUT port ON or OFF. In the network analyzer
mode, if the RF output is turned OFF, the status notation \P#" is displayed.
The signal output setting is changed after the 4395A detects the trigger signal.
Sets DC voltage for the DC SOURCE port.
Sets
the upper limit of the voltage for the DC SOURCE port when
??????????????????????????????????????
DC SRC [VOLTAGE] is selected. This command also denes the upper limit value for
altered polarity because the specied value is regarded as an absolute value.
Sets the DC SOURCE port to control either voltage or current.
???????????????
POWER
Activates the power level function.
????????????????????
CW FREQ
Sets the frequency for the power sweep.
???????????????????????????
DC CURRENT
Sets DC current for the DC SOURCE port.
???????????????????????????????????????
ets
the upper limit of the current for the DC SOURCE port when
????????????????????????????????????????
DC SRC [CURRENT] is selected. This command also denes the upper limit value for
altered polarity because the specied value is regarded as an absolute value.
Sets the DC SOURCE port to control either voltage or current.
DC VOLTAGE LIMIT
????????????????????????????????????????
DC SRC [CURRENT]
?????????????????????????????????
DC OUT ON o
?????????????????????????????????
DC OUT ON o
Turns the DC SOURCE port ON or OFF.
Turns the DC SOURCE port ON or OFF.
Softkey Reference B-33
4Trigger5
Front Panel Key
Description
4Trigger5
Network/Impedance Analyzer
??????????????????????????
SWEEP:HOLD
Freezes the data trace on the display and the analyzer stops sweeping and taking data.
The notation \Hld" is displayed at the left of the graticule. If???????????????
the \3" indicator is on (at
the left side of the display), trigger a new sweep by pressing SINGLE .
???????????????
SINGLE
Makes one sweep of data and returns to the hold mode.
??????????????????????????????????????????
Triggers a user-specied number of sweeps and returns to the hold mode. If averaging
is on, set the number of groups at least equal to the averaging factor selected to allow
measurement of a fully averaged trace. Entering the number of groups resets the
averaging counter to 1.
Triggers the sweep automatically and continuously (the trace is updated with each
sweep). This is the standard sweep mode.
Displays the menu used to select the trigger source. The trigger source is common to
both channels.
Selects the internal trigger.
NUMBER of GROUPS
??????????????????????????
CONTINUOUS
??????????????????????????????????????????
TRIGGER:[FREE RUN]
??????????????????????
FREE RUN
??????????????????????
EXTERNAL
Selects the external trigger input from the BNC on the rear panel.
??????????????????
MANUAL
Selects the manual trigger.
??????????????????????????????????????????????????
Toggles the trigger event mode. This function is available in the network analyzer mode
only. When in the spectrum analyzer mode, this softkey does not appear on the menu.
TRIG EVENT[ON SWEEP]
???????????????????????
[ON POINT]
Shows the analyzer triggers each data point in a sweep.
?????????????????????????
????????????????????????????????????????????
TRIG PLRTY POS neg
Shows the analyzer triggers a sweep.
[ON SWEEP]
Selects the trigger signal polarity of an externally generated signal connected to the
rear panel EXT TRIGGER input.
??????????????????
POS neg (positive)
Shows the sweep is started with a low-to-high transition of a
TTL signal.
??????????????????
pos NEG (negative) Shows the sweep is started with a high-to-low transition of a
TTL signal.
?????????????????
RETURN
???????????????????????????????????????
MEASURE RESTART
Aborts the sweep in progress and then restarts the measurement. This can be used to
update a measurement following an adjustment of the DUT or test signal source.
When
a full two-port calibration is in use in the network analyzer mode,
???????????????????????????????????????
MEASURE RESTART initiates an update of both the forward and reverse S-parameter
data.
If the analyzer is???????????????????????????????????????
measuring a number of groups, the sweep counter is reset to 1. If
averaging is on, MEASURE RESTART resets the sweep-to-sweep averaging and is
???????????????????????????????????????????
eectively the same as AVERAGING RESTART .
????????????
???????????????????????????????????????
If the sweep trigger is in the HOLD mode, MEASURE RESTART executes a single
??????????????????????????
sweep. If DUAL CHAN is on (screen displays both measurement channels),
???????????????????????????????????????
MEASURE RESTART executes a single sweep of both channels even if
???????????????????????????
COUPLED CH is o.
B-34 Softkey Reference
Description
Front Panel Key
4Trigger5 Continued
Spectrum Analyzer
??????????????????????????
SWEEP:HOLD
Freezes the data trace on the display and the analyzer stops sweeping and taking data.
The notation \Hld" is displayed at the left of the graticule. If???????????????
the \3" indicator is on (at
the left side of the display), trigger a new sweep by pressing SINGLE .
???????????????
SINGLE
Makes one sweep of data and returns to the hold mode.
??????????????????????????????????????????
NUMBER of GROUPS
Triggers a user-specied number of sweeps and returns to the hold mode.
??????????????????????????
Triggers the sweep automatically and continuously (the trace is updated with each
sweep). This is the standard sweep mode.
Displays the menu used to select the trigger source. The trigger source is common to
both channels.
Selects the internal trigger.
CONTINUOUS
??????????????????????????????????????????
TRIGGER:[FREE RUN]
??????????????????????
FREE RUN
??????????????????????
EXTERNAL
Selects the external trigger input from the BNC on the rear panel.
??????????????????
MANUAL
Selects the manual trigger.
?????????????????????????????
Displays the menu used specify the gate trigger mode, the gate delay, and the gate
length. To select the gate trigger mode, the following two softkeys are provided:
(Option 1D6 only)
Selects the level gate trigger mode.
GATE [LEVEL]
???????????????????????????????????
GATE CTL:LEVEL
????????????
EDGE
Selects the edge gate trigger mode.
???????????????????????????
GATE DELAY
Sets the gate delay. (Option 1D6 only)
??????????????????????????????
Sets the gate length. (Option 1D6 only)
GATE LENGTH
?????????????????
RETURN
????????????????????????????????????????????
TRIG PLRTY POS neg
Selects the trigger signal polarity of an externally generated signal connected to the
rear panel EXT TRIGGER input.
??????????????????
POS neg (positive)
Shows the sweep is started with a low-to-high transition of a
TTL signal.
??????????????????
pos NEG (negative) Shows the sweep is started with a high-to-low transition of a
TTL signal.
?????????????????
RETURN
???????????????????????????????????????
MEASURE RESTART
Aborts the sweep in progress and then restarts the measurement. This can be used to
update a measurement following an adjustment of the DUT or test signal source.
4Center5 4Span5 4Start5 4Stop5
Softkey Reference B-35
Description
Front Panel Key
4Center5
?????????????????????????????????????????????
STEP SIZE AUTO man
Toggles CENTER step policy.
????????????
AUTO
Sets the step policy to be 1-2-5 step.
??????????
Sets
the step policy to linear step specied with
????????????????????????????????????????
CENTER STEP SIZE . (frequency sweep only)
MAN
????????????????????????????????????????
CENTER STEP SIZE
Changes the step size for the center frequency function.
????????????????????????????????????
Changes the CENTER step size to the marker's sweep parameter value.
MKR!CNTR STEP
MKR1!CNTR STEP
??????????????????????????????????????
Changes the CENTER step size to the dierence between the marker and the
delta-marker values.
Changes the CENTER to the marker's sweep parameter value.
MKR!CENTER
?????????????????????????????
MKR1!CENTER
???????????????????????????????
Changes the CENTER to the dierence between the marker and the delta-marker
values.
Searches for a peak using the marker and then changes the CENTER to the sweep
parameter value of that peak.
PEAK!CENTER
???????????????????????????????
4Span5
????????????????????????
Sets the SPAN to the maximum range. The maximum range depends on the analyzer
mode. The following table shows the maximum range of SPAN for each condition:
Sets the SPAN to zero.
FULL SPAN
????????????????????????
ZERO SPAN
MKR1!SPAN
??????????????????????????
Changes the SPAN to the dierence between the marker and the delta-marker values.
4Start5
Denes the start value of the frequency range or power range of the sweep parameter.
When pressed, its function becomes the active function. The value is displayed in the
active entry area and can be changed with the knob, step keys, or numeric keypad.
Current sweep parameter values for the active channel are also displayed along the
bottom of the graticule. In power sweep, the sweep parameter value is in dBm.
Denes the stop value of the frequency range or power range of the sweep parameter.
When pressed, its function becomes the active function. The value is displayed in the
active entry area and can be changed with the knob, step keys, or numeric keypad.
Current sweep parameter values for the active channel are also displayed along the
bottom of the graticule. In power sweep, the sweep parameter value is in dBm.
4Stop5
!
4Marker5 4Marker
5
B-36 Softkey Reference
Description
Front Panel Key
4Marker5
Network/Impedance Analyzer
????????????????????
SUB MKR ! See Sub-marker menu
????????????????????????????????????
CLEAR SUB MKR
! See Sub-marker menu
Displays the sub-marker menu that is used to turn on sub-markers.
Displays the sub-marker menu that is used to turn o sub-markers.
?????????????????????????????
PRESET MKRS
Turns o all markers and cancels all setting of the marker functions.
?????????????????????????????????
Selects a trace from data or memory to be applied for the marker values.
MKR ON [DATA]
?????????????
[DATA]
Shows that the data trace is selected.
?????????????
????????????????????????????????????
MKR [UNCOUPLE]
[MEM]
Shows that the memory trace is selected.
Toggles between the coupled and uncoupled marker mode.
???????????????????
[COUPLE]
Couples the marker sweep parameter values for the two display
channels. Even if the sweep parameter is uncoupled and two
sets of sweep parameter values are shown, the markers track
the same sweep parameter values on each channel as long as
they are within the displayed sweep parameter range.
????????????????????????
Allows the marker sweep parameter values to be controlled
independently on each channel.
Toggles between the continuous and discontinuous marker mode. This softkey appears
only in the network analyzer mode.1
[UNCOUPLE]
?????????????????????????
MKR [CONT]
??????????????????????
[DISCRETE]
Places markers only on the measured trace points as determined
by the sweep parameter settings.
??????????????
Interpolates between the measured points to allow the markers
to be placed at any point on the trace. Displayed marker values
are also interpolated. This is the default marker mode (network
analyzer only).
[CONT]
?????????????????????????????
1MODE MENU
????????????
1MKR
Displays the delta mode menu that is used to dene the dierence in values between
the marker and a 1marker.
Puts the delta-maker on the current position of the marker.
???????????????????????????
FIXED 1MKR
Sets a user-specied xed reference marker, and turns on the 1marker mode.
??????????????????????????????????
Puts a 1marker at the present active marker position and turns on the tracking
1marker.
Turns o the delta marker mode.
TRACKING 1MKR
?????????????????????????
1MODE OFF
??????????????????????????????????????????
FIXED 1MKR VALUE
?????????????????????????????????????????????????????
FIXED 1MKR AUX VALUE
?????????????????
Changes the amplitude value of the xed 1marker. Fixed 1marker amplitude values are
always uncoupled in the two channels.
Changes the auxiliary amplitude value of the xed 1marker (used only with a polar,
Smith, or admittance format in the network analyzer mode). Fixed 1marker auxiliary
amplitude values are always uncoupled in the two channels. When the spectrum
analyzer mode is selected, this softkey does not appear in this menu.
RETURN
1 In the spectrum analyzer mode, the marker is always in the discontinuous mode.
Softkey Reference B-37
Description
Front Panel Key
4Marker5 Continued
Spectrum Analyzer
????????????????????
SUB MKR ! See Sub-marker menu
????????????????????????????????????
CLEAR SUB MKR
! See Sub-marker menu
Displays the sub-marker menu that is used to turn on sub-markers.
Displays the sub-marker menu that is used to turn o sub-markers.
?????????????????????????????
PRESET MKRS
Turns o all markers and cancels all setting of the marker functions.
?????????????????????????????????
Selects a trace from data or memory to be applied for the marker values.
MKR ON [DATA]
?????????????
[DATA]
Shows that the data trace is selected.
?????????????
????????????????????????????????????
MKR [UNCOUPLE]
[MEM]
Shows that the memory trace is selected.
Toggles between the coupled and uncoupled marker mode.
???????????????????
[COUPLE]
Couples the marker sweep parameter values for the two display
channels. Even if the sweep parameter is uncoupled and two
sets of sweep parameter values are shown, the markers track
the same sweep parameter values on each channel as long as
they are within the displayed sweep parameter range.
????????????????????????
Allows the marker sweep parameter values to be controlled
independently on each channel.
Displays the delta mode menu that is used to dene the dierence in values between
the marker and a 1marker.
Puts the delta-maker on the current position of the marker.
[UNCOUPLE]
?????????????????????????????
1MODE MENU
????????????
1MKR
???????????????????????????
FIXED 1MKR
??????????????????????????????????
TRACKING 1MKR
?????????????????????????
1MODE OFF
??????????????????????????????????
1MKR SWP PRM
??????????????????????????????????????????
FIXED 1MKR VALUE
?????????????????????????????????????????????????????
FIXED 1MKR AUX VALUE
?????????????????
Sets a user-specied xed reference marker. The sweep parameter and amplitude
values can be set arbitrarily and can be anywhere in the display area. Unlike other
markers, the xed 1marker need not be on the trace. The xed 1marker is indicated by
a small triangle 1, and the marker sweep parameter and measurement values are
shown relative to this point. The notation 1Mkr is displayed at the top right corner of
the graticule.
Puts a 1marker at the present active marker position and turns on the tracking
1marker.
Turns o the delta marker mode.
Changes the sweep parameter value of the xed 1marker. Fixed 1marker sweep
parameter values can be dierent for the two channels if the channel markers are
uncoupled.
Changes the amplitude value of the xed 1marker. Fixed 1marker amplitude values are
always uncoupled in the two channels.
Changes the auxiliary amplitude value of the xed 1marker (used only with a polar,
Smith, or admittance format in the network analyzer mode). When the spectrum
analyzer mode is selected, this softkey does not appear in this menu.
RETURN
Sub-marker menu
?????????????????????????
SUB MKR 1
???
2
???
3
???
4
???
5
???
6
???
7
?????????????????
RETURN
B-38 Softkey Reference
These keys put a sub-marker at the present marker position.
4Marker!5
Front Panel Key
MKR!CENTER
?????????????????????????????
MKR!START
?????????????????????????
MKR!STOP
???????????????????????
MKR!REFERENCE
????????????????????????????????????
PEAK!CENTER
???????????????????????????????
???????????????????????
MKR ZOOM
??????????????????????????????????????????
ZOOMING APERTURE
MKR!XCH MENU
Description
Changes the sweep parameter center value of the destination channel to the sweep
parameter value of the marker and centers the new span about that value.
Changes the sweep parameter start value of the destination channel to the sweep
parameter value of the marker.
Changes the sweep parameter stop value of the destination channel to the sweep
parameter value of the marker.
Sets the reference value of the destination channel to the marker's amplitude value.
The reference position is not changed even the network analyzer mode is selected. In
the polar, Smith, or admittance chart format of the network analyzer mode, the full
scale value at the outer circle is changed to the marker amplitude value.
Changes the sweep parameter center value of the destination channel to the sweep
parameter value of the peak.
Moves the marker to the center and changes the sweep parameter span value of the
destination channel to the value specied by the zooming aperture. Performing this
function is similar to zooming in on the signal in the center of the sweep range.
Sets the zooming aperture value as a percentage of the span.
????????????????????????????????????
MKR!XCH CENTER
????????????????????????????????????????
MKR!XCH START
????????????????????????????????????
MKR!XCH STOP
??????????????????????????????????
PEAK!XCH CENTER
??????????????????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????????
MKR XCH ZOOM
??????????????????????????????????????????
ZOOMING APERTURE
Applies a sweep parameter at the marker to the center value of the sweep parameters
for the channel that is not active.
Applies a sweep parameter at the marker to the start value of the sweep parameters
for the channel that is not active.
Applies a sweep parameter at the marker to the stop value of the sweep parameters for
the channel that is not active.
Searches for a peak using the marker and applies a sweep parameter at the marker to
the center value of the sweep parameters for the channel that is not active.
Applies a sweep parameter at the marker to the center value of the sweep parameters
for the channel that is not active, and changes the sweep parameter span value of the
channel to \sweep parameter span 2 zooming aperture."
Sets the zooming aperture value as a percentage of the span.
?????????????????
RETURN
4Search5
Softkey Reference B-39
Description
Front Panel Key
4Search5
Network/Impedance Analyzer
???????????????????????????????
SEARCH: PEAK ! See Peak menu
??????????
MAX
Moves the marker to the maximum or minimum peak and displays the peak menu that
is used to search for the next peak.
Moves the marker to the maximum amplitude point on the trace.
?????????
MIN
Moves the marker to the minimum amplitude point on the trace.
????????????????
Moves the marker to a specied target point on the trace and displays to the target
menu that is used to search right and search left to resolve multiple solutions. This
softkey appears in the network analyzer mode only.
Makes the target value to the active function to enter a value and moves the marker to
a specied target point on the trace.
TARGET
????????????????
TARGET
The target value is in units appropriate to the current format. The default target value
is 03 dB.
In delta marker mode, the target value is the value relative to the 1marker. If no
1marker is on, the target value is an absolute value.
Searches the trace for the next occurrence of the target value to the left.
?????????????????????????????
SEARCH LEFT
???????????????????????????????
SEARCH RIGHT
????????????????????
SUB MKR
! See Sub-marker menu
Searches the trace for the next occurrence of the target value to the right.
?????????????????
RETURN
???????????????????????????????????
MULTIPLE PEAKS
! See Print setup menu
?????????????????????????????
Displays softkeys that are used to search multiple peaks and to dene peaks to be
searched.
WIDTHS [OFF]
????????????????????????
SEARCH IN
Searches for the cuto point on the trace that is within the current cuto points.
???????????????????????????
This softkey searches for the cuto point on the trace outside of the current cuto
points.
Turns on the bandwidth search feature and calculates the center sweep parameter
value, bandwidth, Q, insertion loss, and cuto point deviation from the center of a
bandpass or band reject shape on the trace.
The amplitude value that denes the
?????????????????????????????
passband or reject band is set using the WIDTH VALUE softkey.
SEARCH OUT
??????????????????????????????????
WIDTHS on OFF
????????????????
The 1marker is automatically changed to the tracking 1marker when WIDTHS is
????????????????
turned on. When WIDTHS is ON, the (normal) 1marker cannot be selected.
Sets an amplitude parameter (for example, 03 dB) that denes the start and stop points
for a bandwidth search. The bandwidth search feature analyzes a bandpass or band
reject trace and calculates the center point, bandwidth, and Q (quality factor) for the
specied bandwidth. Bandwidth units are in the units of the current format. When the
tracking 1marker or the xed 1marker is on, the bandwidth value specied is the
dierence from the 1marker. For more information on the width function, see \Width
Function" in Appendix A.
Sets the width value to the value that equals the marker value divided by square root
of 2.
Sets the width value to the value that equals the marker value multiplied by square
root of 2.
Sets the width value to the value that equals the marker value divided by 2.
?????????????????????????????
WIDTH VALUE
p
???????????????????????
MKRVAL/ 2
p
????????????????????????
MKRVAL* 2
????????????????????
MKRVAL/2
?????????????????
RETURN
?????????????????
RETURN
????????????????????????????????????????????
SRCH TRACK on OFF
Toggles the search tracking. This is used in conjunction with other search features to
track the search of each new sweep.
???????
ON
Makes the analyzer search every new trace for the specied
target value and puts the active marker on that point.
?????????
When the target is found on the current sweep, it remains at
the same sweep parameter value regardless of changes in trace
amplitude values in subsequent sweeps.
OFF
??????????????????????????????????????????
SRCH RANGE MENU
menu
! See Search range
B-40 Softkey Reference
Displays the Search Range Menu.
Description
Front Panel Key
4Search5 Continued
Peak menu
????????????
PEAK
Moves the marker to the maximum or minimum peak.
?????????????????????????
NEXT PEAK
Moves the marker to the next peak.
??????????????????????????????????????
NEXT PEAK LEFT
Moves the marker to the peak on the left of the present marker position.
????????????????????????????????????????
NEXT PEAK RIGHT
Moves the marker to the peak on the right of the present marker position.
?????????????????????????????????????
Displays the peak denition menu.
PEAK DEF MENU ! See Peak denition
menu
????????????????????
SUB MKR ! See Sub-marker menu
Displays the sub-marker menu that is used to turn on sub-markers.
?????????????????
RETURN
Print setup menu
????????????????????????????????????????????
SEARCH: PEAKS ALL
????????????????????????????
PEAKS RIGHT
??????????????????????????
PEAKS LEFT
PEAK DEF MENU ! See Peak denition
menu
????????????????????????????????????????????
SRCH TRACK on OFF
?????????????????????????????????????
Searches for eight maximum or minimum peaks using the marker and the sub-markers.
Searches to the right of the peak for the nearest seven peaks from the maximum or
minimum peak.
Searches to the left of the peak for the nearest seven peaks from the maximum or
minimum peak.
Displays the peak denition menu.
Toggles the search tracking. This is used in conjunction with other search features to
track the search of each new sweep.
???????
ON
Makes the analyzer search every new trace for the specied
target value and puts the active marker on that point.
?????????
When the target is found on the current sweep, it remains at
the same sweep parameter value regardless of changes in trace
amplitude values in subsequent sweeps.
OFF
?????????????????
RETURN
Search range menu
?????????????????????????????????????????
PART SRCH on OFF
MKR1!SEARCH RNG
??????????????????????????????????????????
MKR!LEFT RNG
??????????????????????????????????
MKR!RIGHT RNG
????????????????????????????????????
?????????????????
Turns partial search on or o. The search range is displayed by two small triangles,
\4", at the bottom of the graticule. If no search range is dened, the search range is
the entire trace.
Sets the partial search range to the range between the marker and 1marker.
Sets the left (lower) border of the partial search range at the current position of the
marker.
Sets the right (higher) border of the partial search range at the current position of the
marker.
RETURN
NA/ZA Dene peak menu
?????????????????????????????????????????
THRESHOLD on OFF
???????????????????????????????????????
THRESHOLD VALUE
MKR!THRESHOLD
Toggles the threshold on and o. When turning on, the analyzer will search a peak
whose amplitude value is greater than or equal to the threshold.
Sets the threshold values.
????????????????????????????????????
Changes the threshold value to the amplitude value of the present marker position.
??????????????????????????????????????????????
Selects the peak polarity for the marker search functions.
PEAK PLRTY POS neg
????????
POS
Selects a positive peak
?????????
????????????????????????????????
PEAK DEF: 1X
????????????????????????????????
Selects a negative peak
NEG
Sets the peak delta 1X value that is used to dene the peak.
PEAK DEF: 1Y
Sets the peak delta 1Y value that is used to dene the peak.
???????????????????????????????????????
Changes the peak delta value to the smaller value of the dierence of amplitude values
between the present maker position and both side display points of the marker.
MKR!PEAK DELTA
?????????????????
RETURN
Softkey Reference B-41
Description
Front Panel Key
4Search5 Continued
Spectrum Analyzer
???????????????????????????????
SEARCH: PEAK ! See Peak menu
Moves the marker to the maximum or minimum peak.
??????????
MAX
Moves the marker to the maximum amplitude point on the trace.
?????????
Moves the marker to the minimum amplitude point on the trace.
MIN
???????????????????????????????????
MULTIPLE PEAKS
! See Print setup menu
????????????????????????????????????????????
SGNL TRACK on OFF
Displays softkeys that are used to search multiple peaks.
Toggles signal tracking on and o.
?????????
[ON]
Moves the signal that is nearest to the marker to the center of
the screen and keeps the signal there.
???????????
????????????????????????????????????????????
SRCH TRACK on OFF
Turns o the signal tracking.
[OFF]
Toggles the search tracking. This is used in conjunction with other search features to
track the search of each new sweep.
???????
ON
Makes the analyzer search every new trace for the specied
target value and puts the active marker on that point.
?????????
When the target is found on the current sweep, it remains at
the same sweep parameter value regardless of changes in trace
amplitude values in subsequent sweeps.
OFF
??????????????????????????????????????????
SRCH RANGE MENU
menu
SA Dene peak menu
?????????????????????????????????????????
THRESHOLD on OFF
! See Search range
???????????????????????????????????????
THRESHOLD VALUE
MKR!THRESHOLD
Displays the search range menu.
Toggles the threshold on and o. When turning on, the analyzer will search a peak
whose amplitude value is greater than or equal to the threshold.
Sets the threshold values.
????????????????????????????????????
Changes the threshold value to the amplitude value of the present marker position.
????????????????????????????????
Sets the peak delta 1Y value that is used to dene the peak.
PEAK DEF: 1Y
?????????????????
RETURN
4Utility5
B-42 Softkey Reference
Front Panel Key
Description
4Utility5
Network/Impedance Analyzer
??????????????????????????????????????
MKR LIST on OFF
???????????????????????????????????????
STATISTICS on OFF
???????????????????????????????????????
MKR TIME on OFF
???????????????????????????????????????
SMTH/POLAR MENU
????????????????????????
REAL IMAG
Toggles the marker list function on and o. In 1 mode, this also lists 1marker.
Calculates and displays the mean, standard deviation, and peak-to-peak values of the
section of the displayed trace in the search range. If Partial Search is o, the statistics
are calculated for the entire trace. The statistics are absolute values.
Sets the x-axis units to time, (the start point is zero and the stop point is the value of
the sweep time). The marker indicates the elapsed time since the sweep started. This
function is useful for testing a DUT's time transition characteristics at a certain xed
frequency by setting the span to zero.
Displays softkeys to select a form of complex marker value on Smith, polar, and
admittance chart.
Displays the values of the marker on a Smith chart as a real and imaginary pair.
???????????????????????????????????
LIN MAG PHASE
Displays a readout of the linear magnitude and the phase of the marker.
????????????????????????????????????
LOG MAG PHASE
Displays the logarithmic magnitude value and the phase of the marker.
???????????
Converts the marker values into rectangular form. The complex impedance values of
the active marker are displayed in terms of resistance, reactance, and equivalent
capacitance or inductance.
Displays the complex admittance values of the marker in rectangular form. The marker
values are displayed in terms of conductance (in Siemens), susceptance, and equivalent
capacitance or inductance.
Displays the SWR and phase of the marker. Magnitude values are expressed in dB and
phase values in degrees.
R+jX
???????????
G+jB
?????????????????????????
SWR PHASE
?????????????????
RETURN
Spectrum Analyzer
??????????????????????????????????????
MKR LIST on OFF
???????????????????????????????????????
STATISTICS on OFF
???????????????????????????????????????
MKR TIME on OFF
????????????????????????????????????????????
NOISE FORM on OFF
????????????????????????????????????
Toggles the marker list function on and o. In 1 mode, this also lists 1marker.
Calculates and displays the mean, standard deviation, and peak-to-peak values of the
section of the displayed trace in the search range. If Partial Search is o, the statistics
are calculated for the entire trace. The statistics are absolute values.
Sets the x-axis units to time, (the start point is zero and the stop point is the value of
the sweep time). The marker indicates the elapsed time since the sweep started. This
function is useful for testing a DUT's time transition characteristics at a certain xed
frequency by setting the span to zero.
Toggles the noise marker on and o. This marker reads out the average noise level
(referenced to a 1 Hz noise power bandwidth) at the marker position.
1Marker reads out spectrum value even if the noise form is turned on.
MKR UNIT MENU
????????????????????
UNIT:dBm
Selects dBm for the marker readout unit.
?????????
dBV
Selects dBV for the marker readout unit.
???????????
dBuV
Selects dBV for the marker readout unit.
???????????
WATT
Selects watt for the marker readout unit.
???????????
Selects volt for the marker readout unit.
VOLT
?????????????????
RETURN
Softkey Reference B-43
4System5
Front Panel Key
Description
4System5
?????????????
IBASIC
Displays the menu used to operate HP Instrument BASIC.
?????????
Step
Allows you to execute one program line at a time.
?????????????????
Continue
Resumes program execution from the point where it paused.
????????
Run
Starts a program from its beginning.
???????????
Pause
Pauses program execution after the current program line is executed.
?????????
Stop
Stops program execution after the current line. To restart the program, press Run .
?????????
Enters into the EDIT mode. In the EDIT mode, the following softkeys are displayed on
the softkey menu area.
Produces the command ASSIGN @Hp4395 TO 800 at the cursor's current position.
Edit
??????????????????????????????????
ASSIGN @Hp4395
????????
????????????????????????????????????
OUTPUT @Hp4395
Produces the command OUTPUT @Hp4395;"" at the cursor's current position.
?????????????????????????????????
ENTER @Hp4395
Produces the command ENTER @Hp4395; at the cursor's current position.
?????????
END
Produces the command END.
???????????????????????
Allows
you to move the cursor to any line number or to a label. After pressing
???????????????????????
GOTO LINE , type a line number or a label and then press 4Return5. The cursor moves
to the specied line or label.
Recalls the last deleted line.
GOTO LINE
????????????????????????????
RECALL LINE
?????????????????????
END EDIT
????????????????????????????????????
COMMAND ENTRY
?????????????????????????????????
SELECT LETTER
Exits the edit mode.
Displays the softkeys that are used to enter BASIC commands. The active entry area
displays the letters, digits, and some special characters. Three sets of letters can be
scrolled using the step keys, 4*5 and 4+5.
Selects the character pointed to by \"".
?????????????
SPACE
Inserts a space.
??????????????????????????
BACK SPACE
Deletes the last character entered.
????????????????????????????
ERASE TITLE
Deletes all characters entered.
????????????
DONE
Terminates command entry and executes the command you entered.
?????????????????
Cancels command and returns to the previous menu.
CANCEL
???????????????????????????????????
ON KEY LABELS
???????????????????????????????
[USER DEFINE]
???????????????????????????????
[USER DEFINE]
???????????????????????????????
[USER DEFINE]
???????????????????????????????
[USER DEFINE]
???????????????????????????????
[USER DEFINE]
???????????????????????????????
[USER DEFINE]
???????????????????????????????
[USER DEFINE]
???????????????????????????????
[USER DEFINE]
B-44 Softkey Reference
Description
Front Panel Key
4System5 Continued
??????????????????????????????????
PROGRAM MENU
???????????????????????????????
Display the list of the executable programs. Pressing the key with a program name
aside will executing the corresponding program.
[USER DEFINE]
???????????????????????????????
[USER DEFINE]
???????????????????????????????
[USER DEFINE]
???????????????????????????????
[USER DEFINE]
???????????????????????????????
[USER DEFINE]
???????????????????????????????
[USER DEFINE]
?????????????????????????
NEXT FILES
????????????????????????????????????
STOR DEV [DISK]
??????????????????????????
LIMIT MENU
! See Lmit test menu
?????????????????????????????????????
RECALL MESSAGE
????????????
Selects
between the exible disk drive and the memory????????????????????
disk as the storage device.
?????????????
[DISK] shows the built-in exible disk is selected and [MEMORY] shows the memory
disk is selected.
Displays the series of menus that denes limits or specications used to test a DUT.
Recalls error messages displayed in the message area. Last 32 messages maximum can
be hold in the memory.
MORE
????????????????????????
SET CLOCK
????????????????????????????????
TIME HH:MM:SS
????????????
HOUR
?????????
MIN
????????
SEC
??????????????
ENTER
?????????????????
CANCEL
?????????????????????????????????
DATE DD/MM/YY
???????????????
MONTH
?????????
DAY
????????????
YEAR
Displays the series of menus that set an internal clock.
Displays the current time on the active entry area and displays the next page to adjust
time.
Enables changing the hour setting using the knob or the numeric entry keys.1
Enables changing the minute setting using the knob or the numeric entry keys.1
Enables changing the second setting using the knob or the numeric entry keys.1
Displays the current time on the active entry area and displays the next page to adjust
time.
Returns to the previous page. Pressing this key does not aect the internal clock
setting.
Displays the current date on the active entry area to adjust date.
Enables changing the month setting using the knob or the numeric entry keys.1
Enables changing the day setting using the knob or the numeric entry keys.1
Enables changing the year setting using the knob or the numeric entry keys.1
??????????????
ENTER
Displays the current date on the active entry area to adjust date.
?????????????????
returns to the previous page. Pressing this key does not aect the internal clock setting.
CANCEL
????????????????????????????????????????????????
DATE MODE:MonDayYear
Changes the displayed date to the \month:day:year" format.
???????????????????????
Changes the displayed date to the \day:month:year" format.
DayMonYear
?????????????????
RETURN
?????????????????????????????????????????
BEEP DONE ON o
???????????????????????????????????????????
BEEP WARN on OFF
?????????????????????????????????????????
FIRMWARE VERSION
Toggles an annunciator that sounds to indicate the completion of operations such as
calibration or instrument state save.
Toggles the warning annunciator. When the annunciator is on it sounds a warning when
a cautionary message is displayed.
Displays the rmware revision in the message area.
?????????????????
RETURN
FFFFFFFFFFFFFF
1 After you change the hour setting, press ENTER to restart the clock.
Softkey Reference B-45
Front Panel Key
Description
4System5 Continued
Lmit test menu
?????????????????????????????????????????
LIMIT LINE on OFF
?????????????????????????????????????????
LIMIT TEST on OFF
????????????????????????????????????????
BEEP FAIL on OFF
????????????????????????????????????
EDIT LIMIT LINE
???????????????????
SEGMENT
??????????
EDIT
????????????????
DELETE
??????????
ADD
?????????????????????????
CLEAR LIST
Turns limit lines on or o. If limits have been dened and limit lines are turned on, the
limit lines are displayed for visual comparison of the measured data in all Cartesian
formats.
Turns limit testing on or o. When limit testing is on, the data is compared with the
dened limits at each measured point. Limit tests occur at the end of each sweep,
whenever the data is updated, and when limit testing is rst turned on.
Limit testing is available for both magnitude and phase values in Cartesian formats. In
the polar, Smith, and admittance chart formats of the network analyzer, the value
tested depends on the marker mode and is the magnitude or the rst value in a
complex pair. The message \NO LIMIT LINES DISPLAYED" is displayed in polar, Smith ,
and admittance chart formats if limit lines are turned on.
Turns the limit fail beeper on or o. When limit testing is on and the fail beeper is on,
a beep is emitted each time a limit test is performed and a failure detected.
Displays a table of limit segments on the lower half of the display. The edit limits menu
is displayed so that limits can be dened or changed.
Species which limit segment in the table to edit. A maximum of eight sets of segment
values are displayed at one time and the list can be scrolled up or down to show other
segment entries. The pointer \>" shows the segment that can be edited or deleted. The
pointer can be moved using the entry
block.??????????
If the table of limits is designated EMPTY,
??????????
new segments can be added using ADD or EDIT .
Displays the limit line entry menu that denes or modies the sweep parameter value
and limit values of a specied segment. If the table is empty, a default segment is
displayed.
Deletes the segment indicated by the pointer \ > ."
Displays the edit segment menu and adds a new segment to the end of the list. The
new segment is???????????????????
initially a duplicate of the segment indicated by the pointer \> " and
selected using SEGMENT . If the table is empty, a default segment is displayed. The
maximum number of segments is 18.
Displays the following softkeys and clears all the segments in the limit test.
???????????????????????????????????
CLEAR LIST YES
Clears all the segments in the limit line and returns to the previous menu.
???????
Cancels clearing the segment and returns to the edit limit menu.
NO
????????????
DONE
???????????????????????????????????????????
LIMIT LINE OFFSETS
???????????????????????????????????????????
SWP PARAM OFFSET
?????????????????????????????????????????
AMPLITUDE OFFSET
MKR!AMP.OFS.
???????????????????????????????
?????????????????
RETURN
?????????????????
RETURN
B-46 Softkey Reference
Sorts the limit segments and displays them on the display in increasing order of sweep
parameter values.
Displays the following three softkeys that oset the complete limit set in either sweep
parameter or amplitude value.
Adds to or subtracts an oset from the sweep parameter value. This allows limits
already dened to be used for testing in a dierent sweep parameter range.
Adds or subtracts an oset in amplitude value. This allows previously dened limits to
be used at a dierent power level.
Move the limits so that they are centered an equal amount above and below the marker
at that sweep parameter value.
Description
Front Panel Key
4System5 Continued
Limit line entry menu
?????????????????????????
SWP PARAM
MKR!SWP PARAM
??????????????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????
UPPER LIMIT
Sets the starting sweep parameter value of a segment using the entry block controls.
Changes the segment sweep parameter value to the present marker sweep parameter
value.
Sets the upper limit value for the segment. Upper and lower limits must be dened. If
no upper limit is required for a particular measurement, force the upper limit value out
of range (for example +500 dB).
???????????????????????????
????????????????????????????
When UPPER LIMIT or LOWER LIMIT is pressed, all the segments in the table are
displayed in terms of upper and lower limits, even if they were dened as delta limits
and middle value.
????????????????????????????
LOWER LIMIT
???????????????????????????
DELTA LIMIT
If you attempt to set an upper limit that is lower than the lower limit, or vice versa,
both limits will be automatically set to the same value.
Sets the limits an equal amount above and below a specied middle value, instead of
setting upper and lower limits separately. If no upper lower is required for a particular
measurement, force the lower limit value out of range (for example 0500 dB).
Sets the limits an equal amount above and below a specied middle value, instead of
setting
upper and lower
limits separately. This is used in conjunction with
??????????????????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
MIDDLE VALUE or MARKER ! MIDDLE , to set limits for testing a device that is
specied at a particular value plus or minus an equal tolerance.
?????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
MIDDLE VALUE
MKR!MIDDLE
????????????????????????????
????????????
DONE
???????????????????????????????
When DELTA LIMITS or MIDDLE VALUE is pressed, all the segments in the table
are displayed in these terms, even if they were dened as upper and lower limits.
?????????????????????????????
Sets the midpoint for DELTA LIMITS . It uses the entry controls to set a specied
amplitude value vertically centered between the limits.
?????????????????????????????
Sets the midpoint for DELTA LIMITS using the marker to set the middle amplitude
value of a limit segment. Move the limits so that the limits are automatically set an
equal amount above and below the present marker amplitude value.
Terminates a limit segment denition and returns to the last menu.
4Local5 4Preset5
Softkey Reference B-47
Front Panel Key
Description
4Local5
????????????????????????????????????????????
SYSTEM CONTROLLER
???????????????????????????????????????????
ADDRESS-ABLE ONLY
?????????????????????????????????
SET ADDRESSES
???????????????????????????????
ADDRESS:INSTR
????????????????????????????????????????????
ADDRESS:CONTROLLER
Sets the analyzer as the system controller. This mode is used when peripheral devices
are to be used and there is no external controller.
This mode can only be selected manually from the analyzer's front panel and can be
used only if no active system controller is connected to the system through GPIB. If
you try to set system controller mode when another system controller is present, the
message \CAUTION: CAN'T CHANGE - ANOTHER CONTROLLER ON BUS" is displayed.
Sets the analyzer as addressable only. This mode is used when an external controller
controls peripheral devices or the analyzer. This mode is also used when the external
computer passes control of the bus to the analyzer.
Displays the following softkeys:
Sets the GPIB address of the analyzer using the entry controls. There is no physical
address switch to set in the analyzer.
Sets the GPIB address the analyzer will use to communicate with the external controller.
?????????????????
RETURN
4Preset5
Presets the instrument state to the preset default value. The preset default values are
listed in Appendix C. 4Preset5 has no eect on the following states:
Analyzer Type
Display Allocation
Title
Display Adjustment
Color Adjustment
Clock Time/Date
Limit Line Table
GPIB Address
GPIB Mode (system controller and addressable)
User Cal Kit Denition
4Copy5
B-48 Softkey Reference
Description
Front Panel Key
4Copy5
??????????????????????????????????????
PRINT [STANDARD]
???????????????????????????
COPY ABORT
?????????????????????????????????????????
COPY TIME on OFF
????????????????????????????
PRINT SETUP
! See Print setup menu
???????????????????????????????????????
ORIENT [PORTRAIT]
?????????????????????
Copies one page of the tabular listings to a printer. Either STANDARD , for a black and
??????????????
white printer, or COLOR , for a color printer, is shown in brackets(\[ ]"). This identies
which printer is selected as the default in the print setup menu. The default setting at
power on is standard. Default text for a color printer is black.
Aborts printing in progress.
Turns the \time stamp" on or o for a print. The time and date are printed out rst,
followed by the information shown on the display.
Displays the print setup menu. This menu allows you to copy the display to a printer
capable of graphics or tabular listing. For information on compatible printers, see
Chapter 12.
Species the orientation of printer sheets. If your printer does not support landscape
printing, this setting is ignored.
????????????????????
PORTRAIT
Portrait orientation
????????????????????????
Landscape orientation
LANDSCAPE
?????????????????????????????????????????
FORM FEED ON o
????????????
MORE
! See Copy more menu
Copy cal kit menu
??????????????????????????????????????????????
STANDARD DEFINITION ! See Copy
standard no. menu
????????????????????????????????????????
CLASS ASSIGNMENT
?????????????????
Species whether to deliver a sheet after one screen is printed out by switching on/o.
When the sheet orientation is specied to LANDSCAPE, the FORMFEED setting is
ignored and sheets are always ejected after each screen printout.
Displays the menu that selects which standard settings are to be hard copied.
Shows the tabular listing of the cal kit class assignment and provides the screen menu
to prepare for hard copy.
RETURN
Copy limit test menu
????????????????????????????
DISPLAY LIST
Displays the limit testing table and the screen menu to prepare for hard copy.
????????????????????????????????????????????????????
DISP MODE: UPR & LWR
Selects the upper and lower formats that display the upper limit and lower limit values.
????????????????????????
Selects the middle and delta formats that display the middle value and the maximum
deviation (limit value) from the middle value.
MID & DLT
?????????????????
RETURN
Copy list sweep menu
????????????????????????????
DISPLAY LIST
Displays the limit testing table and leads to the screen menu to prepare for hard copy.
??????????????????????????????????????????????
DISP MODE: ST & SP
Selects the start/stop format to list the sweep parameter.
???????????????????????????
Selects the center/span format to list the sweep parameter.
CTR & SPAN
?????????????????
RETURN
Copy standard no. menu
These softkeys
provide the tabular listing of the standard denitions of the standard
???
???
number 1 to 8 and provide the screen menu to prepare for hard copy.
????????????????????
STD NO.1
????????????????????
STD NO.2
????????????????????
STD NO.3
????????????????????
STD NO.4
????????????????????
STD NO.5
????????????????????
STD NO.6
????????????????????
STD NO.7
????????????????????
STD NO.8
Softkey Reference B-49
Description
Front Panel Key
4Copy5 Continued
Print setup menu
???????????????????????????????????
PRINT STANDARD
??????????????
COLOR
?????????????????????????????????????????????
PRINT COLOR [FIXED]
????????
DPI
???????????????????????????
TOP MARGIN
?????????????????????????????
LEFT MARGIN
?????????????????????????????????
DEFAULT SETUP
Sets the print command to the default selection (a standard printer that prints in black
only or a PaintJet color printer to yield a black-only print).
Sets the print command to a default of color.
???????????????
Form feed:
Sheet orientation:
Softkey label printing:
Top margin:
Left margin:
?????????????????
??????????????????????
Toggles the printing color between [FIXED] and [VARIABLE]. If FIXED is selected, the
????????????????????
analyzer prints a hard copy with default colors. If VARIABLE is selected, the analyzer
prints a hard copy with colors as similar as possible to the display colors (that can be
adjusted).1
Species the resolution of a printer used for printing by dpi. The range of settable
resolution is between 75 and 600 dpi.
Species the top margin of printing by inch. The settable margin range is between 0
and 5 inches in step of 0.1 inch.
Species the resolution of a printer used for printing by dpi. The range of settable
resolution is between 75 and 600 dpi.
Resets the printing parameters to their default values. These defaults are as follows:
ON
Portraint
OFF
1.0 inch
1.0 inch
RETURN
Screen menu
??????????????????????????????????????
PRINT [STANDARD]
???????????????????????????
COPY ABORT
?????????????????????????????????????????
COPY TIME on OFF
????????????????????????????
PRINT SETUP
! See Print setup menu
????????????????????????
NEXT PAGE
Copies
one page of the tabular listings to a compatible
HP graphics printer. Either
??????????????
?????????????????????
STANDARD , for a black and white printer, or COLOR , for a color printer, is shown in
brackets(\[ ]"). This identies which printer is selected as the default in the print setup
menu. The default setting at power on is standard. Default text for a color printer is
black.
Aborts printing in progress.
Turns printing time and date on or o. The time and date are printed rst then the
information displayed.
Displays the print setup menu. This menu allows you to copy the display to a printer
capable of graphics or tabular listing. For information on compatible printers, see
Chapter 12.
Displays the next page of information in a tabular listing .
????????????????????????
PREV PAGE
Displays the previous page of information in a tabular listing.
?????????????????????????????????????
Turns o the tabular listing and returns the measurement display to the screen.
RESTORE DISPLAY
1 Because of the limited number of printer ink colors, the printed color is not always the same as the displayed color.
B-50 Softkey Reference
Front Panel Key
Description
4Copy5 Continued
NA Copy more menu
???????????????????????????
LIST VALUES ! See Screen menu
???????????????????????????????????????????????????
OPERATING PARAMETERS
menu
! See Screen
Displays the screen menu. This softkey provides
a tabular listing?????????????????????????????????
of all the measured
??????????????????????????
data points and their current values. When DUAL CHAN and COUPLED CHAN are
???????
ON , the measured values of both channels are listed at same time. When
???????
????????????????????????
????????????????????????
LIMIT LINE and LIMIT TEST are ON , the limit information is also listed together
with the measured values. At the same time, the screen menu is displayed to enable
hard copy listings and access new pages of the table.
Displays the screen menu.Provides a tabular listing on the display of the key
parameters for both channels. The screen menu is presented to allow hard copy listings
and access new pages of the table.
???????????????????????????????????????????????????
Parameters listed by OPERATION PARAMETERS
CAL KIT DEFINITION ! See Copy cal kit
menu
?????????????????????????????????????????
LIST SWEEP TABLE ! See Copy list
sweep menu
???????????????????????????????????????
LIMIT TEST TABLE ! See Copy limit test
menu
?????????????????
RETURN
???????????????????????????????????????????
Number of points
Sweep time
Source power
Port-1 and 2 attenuator
Bandwidth
Averaging factor
Averaging switch
Group delay aperture
Calibration kit
Z0
Calibration type
Sweep conditions when the calibration was performed
Phase oset
Port 1 and 2 extension
Input R, A, and B extension
Velocity factor
Displays the copy cal kit menu that prints the calibration kit denitions.
Displays the copy list sweep menu that can display a tabular listing of the list sweep
table and print it.
Displays the copy limit test menu that can display a tabular listing of the limit value for
limit testing and print it.
Softkey Reference B-51
Front Panel Key
Description
4Copy5 Continued
SA Copy more menu
???????????????????????????
LIST VALUES ! See Screen menu
???????????????????????????????????????????????????
OPERATING PARAMETERS
menu
! See Screen
LIST SWEEP TABLE ! See Copy list
sweep menu
???????????????????????????????????????
LIMIT TEST TABLE ! See Copy limit test
menu
?????????????????
RETURN
?????????????????????????????????????????
ZA Copy more menu
???????????????????????????
LIST VALUES ! See Screen menu
???????????????????????????????????????????????????
OPERATING PARAMETERS
menu
! See Screen
CAL KIT DEFINITION ! See Copy cal kit
menu
???????????????????????????????????????????????????
COMPEN KIT DEFINITION ! See Copy
compen kit menu
?????????????????????????????????????????
LIST SWEEP TABLE ! See Copy list
sweep menu
???????????????????????????????????????
LIMIT TEST TABLE ! See Copy limit test
menu
?????????????????
RETURN
???????????????????????????????????????????
4Save5
B-52 Softkey Reference
Displays the screen menu. This softkey provides
a tabular listing?????????????????????????????????
of all the measured
??????????????????????????
data points and their current values. When DUAL CHAN and COUPLED CHAN are
???????
ON , the measured values of both channels are listed at same time. When
???????
????????????????????????
????????????????????????
LIMIT LINE and LIMIT TEST are ON , the limit information is also listed together
with the measured values. At the same time, the screen menu is displayed to enable
hard copy listings and access new pages of the table.
Displays the screen menu.Provides a tabular listing on the display of the key
parameters for both channels. The screen menu is presented to allow hard copy listings
and access new pages of the table.
Displays the copy list sweep menu that can display a tabular listing of the list sweep
table and print it.
Displays the copy limit test menu that can display a tabular listing of the limit value for
limit testing and print it.
Displays the screen menu. This softkey provides
a tabular listing?????????????????????????????????
of all the measured
??????????????????????????
data points and their current values. When DUAL CHAN and COUPLED CHAN are
???????
ON , the measured values of both channels are listed at same time. When
???????
????????????????????????
????????????????????????
LIMIT LINE and LIMIT TEST are ON , the limit information is also listed together
with the measured values. At the same time, the screen menu is displayed to enable
hard copy listings and access new pages of the table.
Displays the screen menu.Provides a tabular listing on the display of the key
parameters for both channels. The screen menu is presented to allow hard copy listings
and access new pages of the table.
Displays the copy cal kit menu that prints the calibration kit denitions.
Displays the copy compen kit menu that prints the calibration kit denitions.
Displays the copy list sweep menu that can display a tabular listing of the list sweep
table and print it.
Displays the copy limit test menu that can display a tabular listing of the limit value for
limit testing and print it.
Description
Front Panel Key
4Save5
?????????????
STATE
Species saving the instrument states, the calibration coecients and measurement
data.
????????????????????????
DATA ONLY
????????????????????????????
SAVE BINARY
Species
saving the internal data arrays which are dened using the
?????????????????????????????????????????
DEFINE SAVE DATA key.
????????????????????????
Species
saving the internal data arrays as an ASCII le. The arrays saved are dened
?????????????????????????????????????????
by the DEFINE SAVE DATA key.
SAVE ASCII
?????????????????????????????????????????
DEFINE SAVE DATA
data menu
????????????????????????????????????
STOR DEV [DISK]
! See Dene save
?????????????????
Selects
between the exible disk drive and the memory????????????????????
disk as the storage device.
?????????????
[DISK] shows the built-in exible disk is selected and [MEMORY] shows the memory
disk is selected.
RETURN
????????????????????
GRAPHICS
Species the le format for saving the screen currently displayed as the TIFF format.
The traces and background are saved in specied colors. Softkeys are also saved.
Displays the Re-save File menu used to update a le that is already saved.
????????????????????????????
RE-SAVE FILE
??????????????????????????????????????????????
BACK UP MEMO DISK
Stores the contents of the memory disk in the backup memory
???????????????????????????????
FILE UTILITIES
??????????????????????????
PURGE FILE
Displays the Purge File menu used to remove a le saved on the disk.
????????????????????????????????????????
Species creating a new directory in a DOS format disk. This function is not available
for LIF les.
Species changing the current directory of a DOS format disk. This function is not
available for LIF les.
Copies les. When a le is copied between the exible disk and the memory disk, the
disk formats of the disk and the memory disk must be same format.
Displays the Initialize menu.
CREATE DIRECTORY
??????????????????????????????????????????
CHANGE DIRECTORY
???????????????????????
COPY FILE
! See Select le menu
?????????????????????????????????
INITIALIZE DISK
????????????????????????????????
INIT DISK: YES
Initializes the ??????????
disk or the memory disk. When the exible disk is selected for
initialization, DISK is displayed in the softkey label, When the memory disk is selected,
??????????????????
MEMORY is displayed.
????????????????????????????
Toggles the disk format between the LIF and DOS formats that are used when
initializing a new disk.
Selects
between the exible disk drive and the memory????????????????????
disk as the storage device.
?????????????
[DISK] shows the built-in exible disk is selected and [MEMORY] shows the memory
disk is selected.
FORMAT [LIF]
????????????????????????????????????
STOR DEV [DISK]
?????????????????
RETURN
????????????????????????????????????
STOR DEV [DISK]
?????????????????
Selects between the exible disk drive and the memory????????????????????
disk as the storage device.
[DISK] shows the built-in exible disk is selected and [MEMORY] shows the memory
disk is selected.
?????????????
RETURN
????????????????????????????????????
STOR DEV [DISK]
Dene save data menu
???????????????????????????
RAW on OFF
Selects between the exible disk drive and the memory????????????????????
disk as the storage device.
[DISK] shows the built-in exible disk is selected and [MEMORY] shows the memory
disk is selected.
?????????????
Toggles saving or not saving the raw data arrays.
???????????????????????????
CAL on OFF
Toggles saving or not saving the calibration coecients arrays.
?????????????????????????????
Toggles saving or not saving the data arrays.
DATA on OFF
????????????????????????????
MEM on OFF
Toggles saving or not saving the memory arrays.
????????????????????????????????????????????
DATA TRACE on OFF
Toggles saving or not saving the trace arrays.
???????????????????????????????????????????
Toggles saving or not saving the memory trace arrays.
MEM TRACE on OFF
?????????????????
RETURN
Softkey Reference B-53
Front Panel Key
Description
4Save5 Continued
Purge le Yes/No menu
??????????????????????????
PURGE: YES
???????
NO
Removes the le and returns to the previous menu.
Returns to the previous menu without purging the le.
Select le menu
???????????????????
le name
???????????????????
le name
???????????????????
le name
???????????????????
le name
???????????????????
le name
???????????????????
le name
Displays the next le names in the softkey label.
?????????????????????????
NEXT FILES
?????????????????
RETURN
4Recall5
Front Panel Key
Description
4Recall5
???????????????????
le name
Selects a le to be loaded and loads the instrument state or data.
???????????????????
le name
???????????????????
le name
???????????????????
le name
???????????????????
le name
???????????????????
le name
?????????????????????????
NEXT FILES
????????????????????????????????????
STOR DEV [DISK]
B-54 Softkey Reference
Selects
between the exible disk drive and the memory????????????????????
disk as the storage device.
?????????????
[DISK] shows the built-in exible disk is selected and [MEMORY] shows the memory
disk is selected.
C
Input Range and Default Settings
When the 4Preset5 key is pressed, or the analyzer is turned ON, the analyzer reverts to a known
state. There are subtle dierences between the preset state and the power-up state.
Some power-up states are recalled from non-volatile memory (battery backup memory). If
power to the non-volatile memory is lost, the analyzer will have certain parameters set to
factory settings. \Results of Power Loss to Battery Backup Memory (Factory Setting)" lists
the factory settings. The operating time of the battery backup memory is approximately
72 hours(typical). The battery is automatically recharged while the instrument is ON. The
recharge time (time required to fully recharge the battery) is approximately 1 hour(typical).
This appendix also contains Table C-2 to Table C-7 which provide descriptions of the calibration
kits predened for the calibraion functions of the network analyzer.
When line power is cycled the analyzer performs a self-test routine. Upon successful
completion of the self-test routine, the instrument state is set to the following preset
conditions. The same conditions are true following a \PRES" or \3RST" command over the GPIB
bus.
Active Channel Block
4Chan 15
and 4Chan 25
Function
Active Channel
Range
Chan 1, Chan2
Preset Value
Chan 1
Power ON default
Chan 1
Input Range and Default Settings C-1
Measurement Block
Measurement Block
4Meas5
Function
Range
Resolution
Power ON default
Preset Value
Ch1:A/R, Ch2:B/R
S11 1
Ch1:A/R, Ch2:B/R
Ch1:S11 , Ch2:S21 1
O, Z:Re, Z:Trans, Y:Re,
Y:Trans, 1/S, 42Phase, 8 2Phase,
162Phase
O
O
Analyzer Type
Network, Spectrum, Impedance
Analyzer type of the Analyzer type of the
active channel before active channel when
the power is turned
presetting2
OFF2
SA:Input Ports
R, A, B
R
R
SA:Detection
POS PEAK, NEG PEAK, SAMPLE
POS PEAK
POS PEAK
ZA:Meas Parameter
j Zj , z , R, X, jYj, y , G, B, j0j, 0 ,
0x , 0y , Cp , Cs , Lp , Ls , Rp, Rs , D, Q
Ch1:jZj, Ch2:z
Ch1:jZj, Ch2:z
ZA:Fixture
NONE, 16191, 16192, 16193,
16194, USER
NONE
NONE
NA:Input Ports
A/R, B/R, A/B, R, A, B
NA:S-parameters
S11 , S21 , S12 , S22
NA: Conversion
1 When an S-parameter test set is connected to the analyzer.
2 Both channel 1 and 2
4Format5
Function
Range
Resolution
Preset Value
Power ON default
NA:Format
LOG MAG, PHASE, DELAY, SMITH
CHART, POLAR CHART, LIN MAG,
SWR, REAL, IMAGINARY,
ADMITTANCE CHART
Ch1: LOG MAG Ch2:
PHASE
Ch1: LOG MAG Ch2:
PHASE
NA/ZA:Phase Unit
DEG, RAD
DEG
DEG
NA/ZA:Expand Phase
ON, OFF
OFF
OFF
SA: Format
SPECTRUM, NOISE
SPECTRUM
SPECTRUM
SA: Unit
dBm, dBV, dBV, WATT, WATT
LOG Y-AXIS, VOLT, VOLT LOG
Y-AXIS
dBm
dBm
ZA:Format
LIN Y-AXIS, LOG Y-AXIS, POLAR
CHART, SMITH CHART,
ADMITTANCE CHART, COMPLEX
PLANE
LIN Y-AXIS
LIN Y-AXIS
C-2 Input Range and Default Settings
Measurement Block
4Display5
Function
Range
Resolution
Preset Value
Power ON default
Dual Channel
ON, OFF
OFF
OFF
Display
DATA, MEMORY, DATA &
MEMORY
DATA
DATA
Data Hold
OFF, MAX, MIN
OFF
OFF
Data Math
DATA, DATA+MEM, DATA0MEM,
DATA/MEM,
OFF
OFF
Gain
1
1
0
0
Aux Oset
6100 to 61/1000
6500 k to 61p
6500, 5 digits
0
0
Split Display
ON, OFF
ON
ON
Display Allocation
All INSTRUMENT, HALF INSTR
HALF BASIC, All BASIC, BASIC
STATUS
No eect
All INSTRUMENT
Title
Max 53 characters
No title
(No title)
Frequency Blank
ON (can not be turn O until
presetting)
OFF
OFF
Intensity
0 to 100 %
No eect
100 %
Background Intensity
0 to 100 %
No eect
0%
Ch1 Data Color
No eect
Yellow
Ch1 Memory/Limit
Line Color
No eect
Green
Ch2 Data Color
No eect
Cyan
Ch2 Memory/Limit
Line Color
No eect
Salmon Pink
Graticule Color
No eect
Gray
Warning Color
No eect
Red
Text Color
No eect
White
IBASIC Text Color
No eect
Green
Pen 1 Color
No eect
White
Pen 2 Color
No eect
Red
Pen 3 Color
No eect
Yellow
Pen 4 Color
No eect
Green
Pen 5 Color
No eect
Cyan
Pen 6 Color
No eect
Modied Blue
Oset
Input Range and Default Settings C-3
Measurement Block
Function
Range
Resolution
Preset Value
Power ON default
Tint
0 to 100
Default settings for
each colors
Default settings for
each colors
Brightness
0 to 100
Default settings for
each colors
Default settings for
each colors
Color
0 to 100
Default settings for
each colors
Default settings for
each colors
ZA:Display Equivalent ON, OFF
Circuit
OFF
OFF
ZA:Equivalent Circuit CKT A, CKT B, CKT C, CKT D,
CKT E
CKT A
CKT A
ZA:Display Equivalent ON, OFF
Parameter
01a1 to +1a
ZA:Parameter R1
OFF
OFF
1a
0
0
ZA:Parameter C1
1a
0
0
1a
0
0
1a
0
0
ZA:Parameter L1
ZA:Parameter C0
01a to +1a
01a to +1a
01a to +1a
1 a=10018
C-4 Input Range and Default Settings
Measurement Block
4Scale Ref5
Function
Range
Resolution
Preset Value
Power ON default
Scale / Div
NA: Log Mag
0.001 to 500
0.001
10
10
NA: Phase
1 p to 500
1p
90
90
NA: Delay
10 f to 10
10 f
10 n
10 n
NA: Smith Chart
10 p to 10 k
10 p
1
1
NA: Polar Chart
10 p to 10 k
10 p
1
1
NA: Lin Mag
1 f to 100 M
0.1f
100 m
100 m
NA: SWR
1 f to 100 M
0.1f
1
1
NA: Real
1 f to 100 M
0.1f
200 m
200 m
NA: Imaginary
1 f to 100 M
0.1f
200 m
200 m
NA: Exp Phase
1 f to 100 M
0.1f
90
90
NA: Admittance Chart
10 p to 10 k
10 p
1
1
SA: Unit dBm
0.1 to 20
0.1
10
10
SA: Unit dBV
0.1 to 20
0.1
10
10
SA: Unit dBV
0.1 to 20
0.1
10
10
SA: Unit WATT
1 f to 100 M
0.1 f
1
1
SA: Unit WATT Log Y-axis
0.001 to 100
0.00001
10
10
SA: Unit Volt
1 f to 100 M
0.1 f
1
1
SA: Unit Volt Log Y-axis
0.001 to 100
0.00001
10
10
ZA: Lin Y-axis
1 f to 100 M
1f
100 m
100 m
ZA: Log Y-axis
1 f to 100 M
1f
10
10
ZA: Polar Chart
10 f to 500 M
10 f
1
1
ZA: Smith Chart
10 f to 500 M
10 f
1
1
ZA: Admittance Chart
10 f to 500 M
10 f
1
1
ZA: Complex Plane
1 f to 100 M
1f
50
50
ZA: Exp Phase
1 f to 100 M
1f
90
90
Input Range and Default Settings C-5
Measurement Block
Function
Range
Resolution
Preset Value
Power ON default
Scale / Div (continued)
ZA: IMPEDANCE: MAG(jZj)
0 to 10
0.01
1k
1k
ZA: RESIST(R)
0 to 10
0.01
1k
1k
ZA: REACT(X)
0 to 10
0.01
1k
1k
ZA: RESISTNCE: PRL(Rp )
0 to 10
0.01
100 k
100 k
ZA: SER: PRL(Rs )
0 to 10
0.01
100 k
100 k
ZA: ADMITTNCE MAG (jYj)
0 to 10
0.01
0.1
0.1
ZA: CONDUCT(G)
0 to 10
0.01
0.1
0.1
ZA: SUSCEPT(B)
0 to 10
0.01
0.1
0.1
ZA: REFL.COEF:MAG(j0j)
0 to 10
0.01
0.2
0.2
ZA: REAL(0x)
0 to 10
0.01
0.2
0.2
ZA: IMAG(0y)
0 to 10
0.01
0.2
0.2
ZA: CAPCITNCE:PRL(Cp)
0 to 10
0.01
100 100 ZA: SER(Cs )
0 to 10
0.01
100 100 ZA: INDUCTNCE:PRL(Lp)
0 to 10
0.01
1
1
ZA: SER(Ls )
0 to 10
0.01
1
1
ZA: PHASE(z )
0 to 10
0.01
36
36
ZA: PHASE(y )
0 to 10
0.01
36
36
ZA: PHASE(r )
0 to 10
0.01
36
36
ZA: D FACTOR(D)
0 to 10
0.01
0.1
0.1
ZA: Q FACTOR(Q)
0 to 10
0.01
100
100
C-6 Input Range and Default Settings
Measurement Block
Function
Range
Resolution
Preset Value
Power ON default
Reference Value
0.1 m
0
0
0.1 m
0
0
NA: Delay
0500 to 500
0500 M to 500 M
00.5 to 0.5
1f
0
0
NA: Smith Chart
10 n to 500
1n
1
1
NA: Polar Chart
10 n to 500
1n
1
1
NA: Lin Mag
0.1 m
0
0
0.1 m
1
1
0.1 m
0
0
0.1 m
0
0
NA: Exp Phase
0500 M to 500 M
0500 M to 500 M
0500 M to 500 M
0500 M to 500 M
0500 M to 500 M
0.1 m
0
0
NA: Admitttance Chart
10 n to 500
1n
1
1
SA: Unit dBm
0.1
0
0
0.1
0
0
SA: Unit dBV(75
)
0100 to 30
0113.0 to 17.0
0111.2 to 18.8
0.1
0
0
SA: Unit dBV(50
)
7.0 to 137.0
0.1
0
0
SA: Unit dBV(75
)
8.8 to 138.8
0.1
0
0
SA: Unit WATT
10 p
0
0
SA: Unit WATT Log Y-axis
010 p to 1.0
01000 to 1000
0.01 m
0
0
SA: Unit Volt(50
)
2.236 to 7.071
1n
0
0
SA: Unit Volt(75
)
2.739 to 8.660
1n
0
0
SA: Unit Volt Log Y-axis
0.01 m
0
0
1f
0
0
ZA: Log Y-axis
01000 to 1000
0500 M to 500 M
0500 M to 500 M
1f
0
0
ZA: Polar Chart
10 f to 500
1p
1
1
ZA: Smith Chart
10 f to 500
1p
1
1
ZA: Admittance Chart
0500 M to 500 M
0500 M to 500 M
0500 M to 500 M
1f
1
1
1f
1
1
1f
0
0
NA: Log Mag
NA: Phase
NA: SWR
NA: Real
NA: Imaginary
SA: Unit dBV(50
)
ZA: Lin Y-axis
ZA: Complex Plane
ZA: Exp Phase
Input Range and Default Settings C-7
Measurement Block
Function
Range
Resolution
Preset Value
Power ON default
Reference Value (continued)
ZA: IMPEDANCE: MAG(jZj)
ZA: RESIST(R)
ZA: REACT(X)
ZA: RESISTNCE: PRL(RP )
ZA: SER: PRL(Rs )
ZA: ADMITTNCE MAG (jYj)
ZA: CONDUCT(G)
ZA: SUSCEPT(B)
ZA: REFL.COEF:MAG(j0j)
ZA: REAL(0x)
ZA: IMAG(0y)
ZA: CAPCITNCE:PRL(Cp)
ZA: SER(Cs )
ZA: INDUCTNCE:PRL(Lp)
ZA: SER(Ls )
ZA: PHASE(z )
ZA: PHASE(y )
ZA: PHASE(r )
ZA: D FACTOR(D)
ZA: Q FACTOR(Q)
0500 M to 500 M
0500 M to 500 M
0500 M to 500 M
0500 M to 500 M
0500 M to 500 M
0500 M to 500 M
0500 M to 500 M
0500 M to 500 M
0500 M to 500 M
0500 M to 500 M
0500 M to 500 M
0500 M to 500 M
0500 M to 500 M
0500 M to 500 M
0500 M to 500 M
0500 M to 500 M
0500 M to 500 M
0500 M to 500 M
0500 M to 500 M
0500 M to 500 M
C-8 Input Range and Default Settings
1f
5k
5k
1f
5k
5k
1f
5k
5k
1f
500 k
500 k
1f
500 k
500 k
1f
500 m
500 m
1f
500 m
500 m
1f
500 m
500 m
1f
0
0
1f
0
0
1f
0
0
1f
500 500 1f
500 500 1f
5
5
1f
5
5
1f
0
0
1f
0
0
1f
0
0
1f
0.5
0.5
1f
500
500
Measurement Block
Function
Range
Resolution
Preset Value
Power ON default
Reference Position
NA: Log Mag
0 to 10
0.01
5
5
NA: Phase
0 to 10
0.01
5
5
NA: Delay
0 to 10
0.01
5
5
NA: Smith Chart
0 to 10
0.01
5
5
NA: Polar Chart
0 to 10
0.01
5
5
NA: Lin Mag
0 to 10
0.01
0
0
NA: SWR
0 to 10
0.01
1
1
NA: Real
0 to 10
0.01
5
5
NA: Imaginary
0 to 10
0.01
5
5
NA: Exp Phase
0 to 10
0.01
5
5
NA: Admittance Chart
0 to 10
0.01
5
5
SA: Unit dBm
10 (xed)
|
10
10
SA: Unit dBV
10 (xed)
|
10
10
SA: Unit WATT
10 (xed)
|
10
10
SA: Unit WATT Log Y-axis
10 (xed)
|
10
10
SA: Unit Volt
10 (xed)
|
10
10
SA: Unit Volt Log Y-axis
ZA:1
10 (xed)
|
10
10
0 to 10
0.01
5
5
1 Except for Log Y-axis or Complex Plane.
Top Value Analyzer Mode:ZA, Format:Log Y-axis
Input Range and Default Settings C-9
Measurement Block
Function
IMPEDANCE: MAG(jZj)
RESIST(R)
REACT(X)
RESISTNCE: PRL(RP )
SER: PRL(Rs )
ADMITTNCE MAG (jYj)
CONDUCT(G)
SUSCEPT(B)
REFL.COEF:MAG(j0j)
REAL(0x)
IMAG(0y)
CAPCITNCE:PRL(Cp)
SER(Cs )
INDUCTNCE:PRL(Lp)
SER(Ls )
PHASE(z )
PHASE(y )
PHASE(r )
D FACTOR(D)
Q FACTOR(Q)
Range
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
Resolution
Power ON default
1f
1M
1M
1f
1M
1M
1f
1M
1M
1f
1M
1M
1f
1M
1M
1f
1
1
1f
1
1
1f
1
1
1f
1
1
1f
1
1
1f
1
1
1f
1m
1m
1f
1m
1m
1f
10
10
1f
10
10
1f
200
200
1f
200
200
1f
200
200
1f
1
1
1f
1000
1000
Bottom Value Analyzer Mode:ZA, Mode:Log Y-axis
C-10 Input Range and Default Settings
Preset Value
Measurement Block
Function
Range
IMPEDANCE: MAG(jZj)
RESIST(R)
REACT(X)
RESISTNCE: PRL(RP )
SER: PRL(Rs )
ADMITTNCE MAG (jYj)
CONDUCT(G)
SUSCEPT(B)
REFL.COEF:MAG(j0j)
REAL(0x )
IMAG(0y )
CAPCITNCE:PRL(Cp )
SER(Cs )
INDUCTNCE:PRL(Lp )
SER(Ls )
PHASE(z )
PHASE(y )
PHASE(r )
D FACTOR(D)
Q FACTOR(Q)
Function
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
01 G to 1 G
Range
Resolution
Preset Value
Power ON default
1f
1
1
1f
1
1
1f
1
1
1f
1
1
1f
1
1
1f
1
1
1f
1
1
1f
1
1
1f
1
1
1f
1
1
1f
1
1
1f
1n
1n
1f
1n
1n
1f
10 p
10 p
1f
10 p
10 p
1f
1
1
1f
1
1
1f
1
1
1f
1
1
1f
1
1
Resolution
Preset Value
Power ON default
Reference X,Y Value
ZA: Complex Plane
01 G to 1 G
0.1 f
0
0
Input Range and Default Settings C-11
Measurement Block
Function
Range
Resolution
Preset Value
Power ON default
NA: Scale for
Data, Memory
Data
Data
NA: Scale Couple
On, O
On
On
NA: Electrical delay
0
0
NA: Phase oset
00.01 to 0.01
6360 0
0
SA: Attenuator mode
Manual, Auto
Auto
Auto
SA: Attenuator at R
input
0, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50 dB
10 dB
20 dB
20 dB
SA: Attenuator at A
input
0, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50 dB
10 dB
20 dB
20 dB
SA: Attenuator at B
and B inputs
0, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50 dB
10 dB
20 dB
20 dB
SA: Scale for
Data, Memory
Data
Data
SA: Scale Couple
On, O
On
On
SA: Max. mixer level
0100 to 010 dBm
010.0
010.0
ZA: Scale for
Data, Memory
Data
Data
ZA: Scale Couple
On, O
On
On
C-12 Input Range and Default Settings
1f
10 dB
Measurement Block
4Bw/Avg5
Function
Range
Resolution
Preset Value
Power ON default
NA: Band width
2, 10, 30, 100, 300, 1 k, 3 k, 10 k,
30 kHz
30 kHz
30 kHz
NA: Averaging
On, O
O
O
NA: Averaging factor
1 to 999
16
16
NA: Group delay
aperture
0.25 to 20 % of span
1%
1%
SA: Resolution Band
width span=0
3 k, 5 k, 10 k, 20 k, 40 k, 100 k,
200 k, 400 k, 800 k, 1.5 M, 3 M
3 MHz
3 MHz
SA: Resolution Band
width span>0
1 to 12106 Hz 1-3 step, Auto
1 M (Auto)
1 M (Auto)
SA: Averaging
On, O
O
O
SA: Averaging factor
1 to 999
16
16
SA: RBW/SPAN ratio
0.01 to 10 % of span
0.2 %
0.2 %
SA: Video Band Width 0.003 to 12106 Hz 1-3 step
1M
1M
ZA: Band width
2, 10, 30, 100, 300, 1 k, 3 k, 10 k,
30 kHz
1 kHz
1 kHz
ZA: Averaging
On, O
O
O
ZA: Averaging factor
1 to 999
16
16
4Cal5
Input Range and Default Settings C-13
Sweep Block
Function
Range
Resolution
Preset Value
Power ON default
NA: Correction
On, OFF
O
O
NA: Calibration Type
None, Response, S11 1port, S22
1port, Full 2port, One path 2port
None
None
NA: Calibration Kit
7 mm, 3.5 mm, N50 , N75 , User
kit
7 mm
7 mm
NA: System
Impedance
1 m
to 52106
50
50
NA: Velocity factor
0.0 to 10.0
1f
1
1
NA: Port1 extension
00.01 to 0.01
00.01 to 0.01
00.01 to 0.01
00.01 to 0.01
00.01 to 0.01
1f
0
0
1f
0
0
1f
0
0
1f
0
0
1f
0
0
SA: System Impedance 50, 75
50
50
SA: Input Z
50, 75
50
50
ZA: Correction
On, OFF
O
O
ZA: Calibration Kit
7 mm, 3.5 mm, N50 , N75 , User
kit
7 mm
7 mm
50
50
NA: Port2 extension
NA: Input R extension
NA: Input A extension
NA: Input B extension
ZA: System Impedance 50
Sweep Block
4Sweep5
C-14 Input Range and Default Settings
Sweep Block
Function
Range
Resolution
Preset Value
Power ON default
NA: Sweep time mode Auto, Man
Auto
Auto
NA: NOP
2 to 801
201
201
NA: Coupled Channel
On, O
On
On
NA: Sweep type
Lin-Freq, Log-Freq, List-Freq,
Power
Lin-Freq
Lin-Freq
NA: List edit mode
(sweep range)
Start-stop, Center-Span
Start-stop
Start-stop
NA: List edit mode
(resolution)
NOP, Step size
NOP
NOP
SA: Sweep time mode Auto, Man
Auto
Auto
SA: NOP for zero
span1
2 to 801
801
801
SA: Sweep type
Lin-Freq, List-Freq
Lin-Freq
Lin-Freq
SA: List edit mode
Start-stop, Center-Span
Start-stop
Start-stop
ZA: Sweep time mode Auto, Man
Auto
Auto
ZA: NOP
2 to 801
201
201
ZA: Coupled Channel
On, O
On
On
ZA: Sweep type
Lin-Freq, Log-Freq, List-Freq,
Power
Lin-Freq
Lin-Freq
1 NOP is automatically set and can not be changed by user, except for ZERO SPAN.
4Source5
Function
Range
050 to +15 dBm
Resolution
Preset Value
Power ON default
0.1 dB
0 dBm
0 dBm
NA: Attenuator port 1 0 to 70 dB
10 dB
0
0
NA: Attenuator port 2 0 to 70 dB
10 dB
0
0
NA: CW frequency
10 Hz to 510 MHz
1 mHz
250 MHz
250 MHz
SA: Power
0 50 to + 15 dBm
0.1 dB
0 dBm
0 dBm
SA: Power OUT
On, O
O
O
ZA: Power
050 to +15 dBm
0.1 dB
0 dBm
0 dBm
ZA: CW frequency
10 Hz to 510 MHz
1 mHz
250 MHz
250 MHz
NA: Power
Input Range and Default Settings C-15
Sweep Block
4Trigger5
Function
Range
Resolution
Preset Value
Power ON default
Trigger type
Continuos, Number of groups,
Single, Hold,
Continuous
Continuous
NA: Trigger Source
Free run, External, Manual, GPIB
Free run
Free run
NA: Trigger event
On point, On sweep
On sweep
On sweep
Trigger polarity
Positive, Negative
Positive
Positive
Gate type
Level, Edge
level
Level
Gate delay
0.8 s to 3.2 s
0.8 s
0.8 sec
Gate length
6 s to 3.2 s
100 s
100 sec
SA: Trigger Source
Free run, External, Manual, GPIB,
Level Gate1 , Edge Gate1
Free run
Free run
1 With option 1D6.
4Center5
Function
Range
NA: Center Frequency 0 Hz to 510 MHz
NA: Step Size mode
Resolution
1 mHz
On(1-2-5 step), O(linear)
SA: Center Frequency 10 Hz to 510 MHz
SA: Step Size mode
On(1-2-5 step), O(linear)
Center step size
1 mHz to 510 MHz
ZA: Step Size mode
On(1-2-5 step), O(linear)
1 mHz
1 mHz
Preset Value
Power ON default
250 MHz
250 MHz
On
On
250 MHz
250 MHz
O
O
10 MHz
10 MHz
On
On
4Span5
Function
Range
NA: Span Frequency
0 Hz to 509.99999 MHz
NA: Span power
0 to 20 dB
SA: Span Frequency
0 Hz to 510 MHz
ZA: Span Frequency
0 Hz to 509.99999 MHz
C-16 Input Range and Default Settings
Resolution
1 mHz
Preset Value
Power ON default
499.99999 MHz
499.99999 MHz
20 dB
20 dB
1 mHz
500 MHz
500 MHz
1 mHz
499.99999 MHz
499.99999 MHz
Marker Block
4Start5
& 4Stop5
Function
Range
Resolution
Preset Value
Power ON default
NA: Start Frequency
10 Hz to 510 MHz
1 mHz
10 Hz
10 Hz
NA: Stop Frequency
10 Hz to 510 MHz
1 mHz
500 MHz
500 MHz
NA: Start power
0.1 dBm
020 dBm
020 dBm
NA: Stop power
050 to +15 dBm
050 to +15 dBm
0.1 dBm
0 dBm
0 dBm
SA: Start Frequency
0 Hz to 510 MHz
1 mHz
0 Hz
0 Hz
SA: Stop Frequency
0 Hz to 510 MHz
1 mHz
500 MHz
500 MHz
ZA: Start Frequency
10 Hz to 510 MHz
1 mHz
100 kHz
100 kHz
ZA: Stop Frequency
10 Hz to 510 MHz
1 mHz
500 MHz
500 MHz
Marker Block
4Marker5
Input Range and Default Settings C-17
Marker Block
Function
Range
Resolution
Preset Value
Power ON default
Marker position
START to STOP
CENTER1
Number of Marker
1
O
O
Number of
Sub-marker
7
All OFF
All OFF
Delta-marker
O, On, FIX, TRAC
O
O
Marker on
O, On
O
O
NA: Marker mode
Cont, Disc
Cont
Cont
CENTER
CENTER
NA: Fixed1mkr
START to STOP
position(Sweep prmtr)
CENTER1
NA: Fixed1mkr
position(Value)
The same as the reference value
(0)
(0)
NA: Fixed1mkr
position(AUX value)
The same as the reference value
(0)
(0)
NA: Marker coupled
On, O
On
On
SA: Fixed1mkr
The same as the reference value
position(Sweep prmtr)
(0)
(0)
SA: Fixed1mkr
position(Value)
The same as the reference value
(0)
(0)
SA: Marker coupled
On, O
O
O
ZA: Marker coupled
On, O
On
On
1 Zero will be returned if the marker position is read using GPIB command after presetting and before the marker turn
to ON.
!5
4Marker
Function
Range
Destination channel
Ch1, Ch2
Zooming aperture
0 to 100 % of SPAN
4Search5
C-18 Input Range and Default Settings
Resolution
0.01
Preset Value
Power ON default
Ch1
Ch1
10 %
10 %
Marker Block
Function
Range
Resolution
Preset Value
Power ON default
Search range
START to STOP
Full SPAN
Full SPAN
NA: Peak polarity
Positive, Negative
Positive
Positive
NA: Width
On, O
O
O
NA: Width value
6500 dB
03 dB
03dB
SA: Signal track
On, O
O
O
NA: Peak def:1X
1 n to 1 G
10 MHz
10 MHz
NA: Peak def:1Y
Depends on format
1 dB
1 dB
SA: Peak def:1Y
Depends on format
15 dB
15 dB
Threshold
On, O
O
O
NA: Threshold value
The same as the reference value
SA: Threshold value
The same as the reference value
0100 dB
0100 dBm
0100 dB
0100 dBm
Part search
On, O
O
O
ZA: Peak polarity
Positive, Negative
Positive
Positive
ZA: Width
On, O
O
O
ZA: Width value
6500 dB
03 dB
03dB
ZA: Peak def:1X
1 n to 1 G
10 MHz
10 MHz
ZA: Peak def:1Y
Depends on format
1 dB
1 dB
4Utility5
Function
Range
Resolution
Preset Value
Power ON default
Marker list
On, O
O
O
NA: Statistics
On, O
O
O
Marker time
On, O
O
O
SA: Statistics
On, O
O
O
SA: Noise form
On, O
O
O
Input Range and Default Settings C-19
Instrument State Block
Instrument State Block
4System5
Function
Range
Resolution
Power ON default
Preset Value
Clock time
00:00:00 to 23:59:59
0:00:00
0:00:00
Clock date
1900 to 2099(year),01 to
12(month),01 to 31(day)
1997,01,01
1997,01,01
Date format
DAYMYEAR,MONDYEAR
MONDYEAR
MONDYEAR
Beeper done
On, O
On
On
Beeper warning
On, O
O
O
Limit Line
On, O
O
O
Limit test
On, O
O
O
Beep Fail
On, O
O
O
No eect
Empty
0
0
0
0
Limit line table
Limit line oset
(Sweep prmtr)
01 G to 1 GHz
Limit line oset (Amp)
01 G to 1 G
1 mHz
4Copy5
Function
Range
Resolution
Preset Value
Power ON default
Print mode
Standard, Color
Standard
Standard
Copy time
On, O
O
O
Print color
Fixed, Variable
Fixed
Fixed
Print resolution
75 to 600
5 dpi
75
75
Print margin(Left)
0 to 5
0.01 inch
1.0
1.0
Print margin(Top)
0 to 5
0.01 inch
1.0
1.0
Limit test table
UL, MDT
UL
UL
List sweep table
(sweep prmtr)
STSP, CTSP
STSP
STSP
C-20 Input Range and Default Settings
Predened Calibration Kits
4Save5
Function
Range
Resolution
Preset Value
Power ON default
Initialize disk format
LIF, DOS
LIF
LIF
Graphics extension
3 characters
.TIF
.TIF
ASCII data extension
3 characters
.TXT
.TXT
Dene Save:Raw
On, O
O
O
Dene Save:Cal
On, O
O
O
Dene Save:Data
On, O
O
O
Dene Save:Mem
On, O
O
O
Dene Save:Trace
data
On, O
On
On
Dene Save:Trace
mem
On, O
On
On
4Local5
Function
Range
Resolution
Preset Value
Power ON default
GPIB address
0 to 30
No eect
No eect
GPIB mode
System controller, Addressable
No eect
No eect
Results of Power Loss to Battery Backup Memory (Factory
Setting)
Function
Factory Setting
GPIB address for 4395A
17
GPIB address for controller
21
Calibration kit denitions
Factory set default (See the following tables)
Real time clock date
09/01/1997
Analyser type
Network Analyzer mode
Input Range and Default Settings C-21
Predened Calibration Kits
Predened Calibration Kits
Table C-1. 3.5 mm Standard Cal Kit
STANDARD
TYPE
NO.
1
SHORT
2
OPEN
3
C0
210-15 F
C1
210-27 F/Hz
OFFSET OFFSET OFFSET STANDARD
C2
DELAY LOSS
Z0
LABEL
210-36 F/Hz2 ps
G
/s
16.695
1.3
50
SHORT
14.491
1.3
50
OPEN
LOAD
0
1.3
50
BROADBAND
4
DELAY/THRU
0
1.3
50
THRU
5
LOAD
0
1.3
50
SLIDING
6
LOAD
0
1.3
50
LOWBAND
7
SHORT
0
1.3
50
SHORT
8
OPEN
0
1.3
50
OPEN
53
150
79.4
0
0
40
Table C-2. 7 mm Standard Cal Kit
STANDARD
NO.
TYPE
1
SHORT
2
OPEN
3
C0
210-15 F
C1
210-27 F/Hz
OFFSET OFFSET OFFSET STANDARD
C2
DELAY LOSS
Z0
LABEL
210-36 F/Hz2 ps
M
/s
0
700
50
SHORT
0
700
50
OPEN
LOAD
0
700
50
BROADBAND
4
DELAY/THRU
0
700
50
THRU
5
LOAD
0
700
50
SLIDING
6
LOAD
0
700
50
LOWBAND
7
SHORT
0
700
50
8
OPEN
0
700
50
92.85
0
79.4
0
7.2
40
OPEN
Table C-3. 50 Type-N Standard Cal Kit
STANDARD
TYPE
NO.
1
SHORT
2
OPEN
3
C0
210-15 F
C1
210-27 F/Hz
OFFSET OFFSET OFFSET STANDARD
LABEL
Z0
DELAY LOSS
C2
M
/s
210-36 F/Hz2 ps
0
700
50
SHORT[M]
0
700
50
OPEN[M]
LOAD
0
700
50
BROADBAND
4
DELAY/THRU
0
700
50
THRU
5
LOAD
0
700
50
SLIDING
6
LOAD
0
700
50
LOWBAND
7
SHORT
17.544
700
50
SHORT[F]
8
OPEN
17.544
700
50
OPEN[F]
108
62
C-22 Input Range and Default Settings
55
17
130
28
Predened Calibration Kits
Table C-4. 75 Type-N Standard Cal Kit
STANDARD
TYPE
NO.
C0
210-15 F
C1
210-27 F/Hz
OFFSET OFFSET OFFSET STANDARD
LABEL
C2
DELAY LOSS
Z0
210-36 F/Hz2 ps
M
/s
1
SHORT
0
2
OPEN
3
LOAD
0
4
DELAY/THRU
0
5
LOAD
0
6
LOAD
0
7
SHORT
17.544
8
OPEN
63.5
41
84
40
56
5
0
17.544
1.132103
75
SHORT[M]
3
75
OPEN[M]
1.132103
75
BROADBAND
1.132103
75
THRU
3
75
SLIDING
1.132103
75
LOWBAND
1.132103
75
SHORT[F]
3
75
OPEN[F]
1.13210
1.13210
1.13210
Input Range and Default Settings C-23
Predened Calibration Kits
Predened Standard Class Assignments
Table C-5. Standard Class Assignments Table (7 mm and 3.5 mm)
CLASS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
STANDARD
CLASS LABEL
S11A
2
OPEN
S11B
1
SHORT
S11C
3
LOAD
S22A
2
OPEN
S22B
1
SHORT
S22C
3
LOAD
Forward Transmission
4
THRU
Reverse Transmission
4
THRU
Forward Match
4
THRU
Reverse Match
4
THRU
Response
1
2
4
RESPONSE
Response & Isolation
1
2
4
RESPONSE
Table C-6. Standard Class Assignments Table (50 Type-N)
CLASS
A
B
S11A
2
8
OPENS
S11B
1
7
SHORTS
S11C
3
S22A
2
8
OPENS
S22B
1
7
SHORTS
S22C
3
LOAD
Forward Transmission
4
THRU
Reverse Transmission
4
THRU
Forward Match
4
THRU
Reverse Match
4
THRU
Response
1
7
2
8
4
RESPONSE
Response & Isolation
1
7
2
8
4
RESPONSE
C-24 Input Range and Default Settings
C
D
E
F
G
STANDARD
CLASS LABEL
LOAD
Predened Calibration Kits
Table C-7. Standard Class Assignments Table (75 Type-N)
CLASS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
STANDARD
CLASS LABEL
S11A
2
8
OPENS
S11B
1
7
SHORTS
S11C
3
S22A
2
8
OPENS
S22B
1
7
SHORTS
S22C
3
LOAD
Forward Transmission
4
THRU
Reverse Transmission
4
THRU
Forward Match
4
THRU
Reverse Match
4
THRU
Response
1
7
2
8
4
RESPONSE
Response & Isolation
1
7
2
8
4
RESPONSE
LOAD
Input Range and Default Settings C-25
D
Manual Changes
Introduction
This appendix contains the information required to adapt this manual to earlier versions or
congurations of the analyzer than the current printing date of this manual. The information
in this manual applies directly to the 4395A Network/Spectrum Analyzer serial number prex
listed on the title page of this manual.
Manual Changes
To adapt this manual to your 4395A, see Table D-1 and Table D-2, and make all the manual
changes listed opposite your instrument's serial number and rmware version.
Instruments manufactured after the printing of this manual may be dierent from those
documented in this manual. Later instrument versions will be documented in a manual
changes supplement that will accompany the manual shipped with that instrument. If your
instrument's serial number is not listed on the title page of this manual or in Table D-1, it may
be documented in a yellow MANUAL CHANGES supplement.
In additions to change information, the supplement may contain information for correcting
errors (Errata) in the manual. To keep this manual as current and accurate as possible,
Agilent Technologies recommends that you periodically request the latest MANUAL CHANGES
supplement.
For information concerning serial number prexes not listed on the title page or in the
MANUAL CHANGE supplement, contact the nearest Agilent Technologies oce.
Turn on the line switch or execute the *IDN? command by GPIB to conrm the rmware
version. See the GPIB Command Reference manual for information on the *IDN? command.
Table D-1. Manual Changes by Serial Number
Serial Prex or Number
Make Manual Changes
JP1KE
Table D-2. Manual Changes by Firmware Version
Version
Make Manual Changes
Manual Changes D-1
Serial Number
Serial Number
Agilent Technologies uses a two-part, nine-character serial number that is stamped on the serial
number plate (see Figure D-1) attached to the rear panel. The rst ve characters are the serial
prex and the last ve digits are the sux.
Figure D-1. Serial Number Plate (sample)
D-2 Manual Changes
Miscellaneous Changes
Miscellaneous Changes
The option system of the 4395A has changed since June 2002. Apply the following changes.
New Option Number
700 (No DC Bias Source)
001 (Add DC Bias Source)
706 (No Time-gated Spectrum
Analysis)
1D6 (Add Time-gated Spectrum
Analysis)
800 (Standard Frequency Reference)
1D5 (High Stability Frequency
Reference)
810 (Add Mini DIN Keyboard)
1CN (Handle Kit)
1CM (Rack Mount Kit)
1CP (Rack Mount & Handle Kit)
0BW (Add Service Manual)
Old Option Number
Standard
same as the left number
Standard
1
Remark
2
same as the left number
Standard
same as the left number
3
1A2 (Delete Mini DIN Keyboard)
same as the left number
same as the left number
same as the left number
same as the left number
4
1 In the previous system, an option for the DC bias source was available only for \Add". In the
new option system, it is available for \Add" and \No", requiring the customer to select either
of them.
2 In the previous system, an option for the time-gated spectrum analysis was available only for
\Add". In the new option system, it is available for \Add" and \No", requiring the customer to
select either of them.
3 In the previous system, an option for the frequency reference was available only for the high
stability frequency reference. In the new option system, it is available for the high stability and
standard references, requiring the customer to select either of them.
4 In the previous option system, the keyboard comes as one of standard accessories. In the new
option system, it will be attached only when you choose option 810.
The option system of the 4395A has changed since May 2003. Apply the following changes.
New Option Number
ABA (Add Manual set (English))
ABJ (Add Manual set (Japanese))
ABF (Add Manual set (French))
-
Old Option Number
ABA (Include Manual set (English))
ABJ (Include Manual set (Japanese))
ABF (Include Manual set (French))
0B1 (Delete Manual Sets)
0B1 (Add Manual Sets)
1
Remark
1
1
2
1 In the previous system, the option number is used to choose the language of the operation
manual set (standard accessory). In the new option system, it is used to add an operation
manual set (optional accessory) of the language the customer desires.
2 No selection of addition/deletion is required for the operation manual set because it is only
available as an optional accessory in the new option system. When 2 or more sets are required,
specify option ABA,ABJ * (number of required sets).
Manual Changes D-3
Error Messages
This section lists the error messages that are displayed on the analyzer display or transmitted
by the instrument over GPIB. Each error message is accompanied by an explanation, and
suggestions are provided to help in solving the problem. Where applicable, references are
provided to the related chapter of the appropriate manual.
When displayed, error messages are preceded with the word \CAUTION:." That part of the
error message has been omitted here for the sake or brevity. Some messages without the
\CAUTION:" are for information only, and do not indicate an error condition. The messages are
listed rst in alphabetical order because the displayed messages do not contain the message
number. The messages are then listed in numerical order to make them easier to nd if they
are read over the GPIB.
In addition to error messages, The analyzer's status is indicated by status notations in the
left margin of the display. Examples are 3, Cor, and Avg. Sometimes these appear together
with error messages. A complete listing of status notations and their meanings is provided in
Chapter 4 of this manual.
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
173
A
ACTIVE/SYSTEM CONTROLLER REQUIRED
When the 4395A and its peripherals are controlled using the Instrument BASIC, you must set
the GPIB system's control mode to the system controller mode.
10
ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED
Error correction for the selected calibration class cannot be computed until all the necessary
standards have been measured.
84
ANALYZER TYPE MISMATCH
The analyzer receives a command that is not available for the current analyzer type. Please
conrm GPIB command or change analyzer type before sending the command.
B
17
BACKUP DATA LOST
Data checksum error on the battery backup memory has occurred. The battery is recharged for
approximately 10 minutes after power was turned on.
Messages-1
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
0160 Block data error
This error, as well as errors 0161 and 0168, are generated when analyzing the syntax of a
block data element. This particular error message is used if the analyzer cannot detect a more
specic error.
0168 Block data not allowed
A legal block data element was encountered but was not allowed by the analyzer at this point
in parsing.
C
13
CALIBRATION ABORTED
The calibration in progress was terminated due to a change of the active channel or stimulus
parameters.
11
CALIBRATION REQUIRED
No valid calibration coecients were found when you attempted to turn calibration on.
126
CAN'T CHANGE NUMBER OF POINTS
The number of points of the spectrum analyzer mode cannot be to change manually, except in
zero span.
133
CAN'T CHANGE ON LIST SWEEP
When list sweep is selected, the following parameters are not allowed to be changed:
CENTER, SPAN, START, STOP
NOP
IFBW or RBW
POWER
DC SOURCE
Modify the list table to change these parameters in the list sweep.
97
CAN'T CHANGE WHILE DATA MATH ON
The setting cannot be changed when the data math function is used.
99
CAN'T CHANGE WHILE DUAL CHAN OFF
The Cross channel cannot be turned on when dual channel is o. Turn on the dual channel
before the cross channel is turned on.
82
CAN'T CHANGE- ANOTHER CONTROLLER ON BUS
The analyzer cannot assume the mode of system controller until the active controller is
removed from the bus or relinquishes the bus. See Programming Manual.
134
CAN'T COUPLE IN CURRENT INPUTS
When one channel measures a ratio measurement, and the other one measures an absolute
measurement (for example: A/R and B), COUPLED CH can not be turned on.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Messages-2
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
114
CAN'T SAVE GRAPHICS WHEN COPY IN PROGRESS
If you attempt to save graphics when a print is in progress, this error message is displayed.
1
CAN'T SET RBW AUTO IN ZERO SPAN
The RBW AUTO mode cannot be selected in the zero span. The RBW must be specied
manually in the zero span. (spectrum analyzer mode only).
127
CAN'T SET SWEEP TIME AUTO IN ZERO SPAN
The automatic sweep time cannot be in zero span of the spectrum analyzer mode. (The
network analyzer mode allows that the automatic sweep time is turned on.)
0281 Cannot create program
Indicates that an attempt to create a program was unsuccessful. A reason for the failure might
include not enough memory.
0140 Character data error
This error, as well as errors 0141 through 0148, are generated when analyzing the syntax of a
character data element. This particular error message is used if the analyzer cannot detect a
more specic error.
0148 Character data not allowed
A legal character data element was encountered where prohibited by the analyzer.
0144 Character data too long
The character data element contains more than twelve characters (see IEEE 488.2, 7.7.1.4).
0100 Command error
This is a generic syntax error that the analyzer cannot detect more specic errors. This code
indicates only that a command error, as dened in IEEE 488.2, 11.5.1.1.4, has occurred.
0110 Command header error
An error was detected in the header. This error message is used when the analyzer cannot
detect the more specic errors described for errors 0111 through 0119.
75
COMMAND IGNORED - SEGMENT NOT DONE YET
The GPIB command the analyzer received is ignored, because the segment is editing (GPIB
only). Send LIMSDON (limit segment done) or SDON (segment done) to terminate editing
segment. (See Programming Manual.)
269
COMPENSATION ABORTED
Compensation data acquisition process is aborted.
267
COMPENSTATION REQUIRED
Compensation is required. Perform compansation to obtain compensation data.
Messages-3
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
50
CONT SWITCHING MAY DAMAGE MECH SW
RF output power switch, input attenuator switch at input R/A/B, or internal mechanical
switch in the S-parameter test set is switching sweep by sweep, because RF power level or the
input attenuator setting is dierent between two channels and the dual channel is turn on,
or continuous trigger mode is selected after full 2-port calibration is performed when 4395A
is used with the S-parameter test set. To avoid premature wearing out of the output power
switch, input attenuator switch, or internal switch of the S-parameter test set, change trigger
type to HOLD, SINGLE, or NUMBER of GROUP to hold sweep after measurement required. Or,
for example, turn o the dual channel, or set the power level and the input attenuator of both
channels to the same setting.
135
COUPLED CHAN - BETWEEN NA&NA OR ZA&ZA
The analyzer types of both channels must be the network analyzer mode or impedance
analyzer mode when the coupled channel is turned on. It is not possible to turn the coupled
channel on in spectrum analyzer mode.
74
CURRENT EDITING SEGMENT SCRATCHED
The current editing segment for the list table and the limit line is scratched when the following
cases occur (GPIB only) :
When EDITLIST (edit list table) command is received while editing a segment for the list
table.
When EDITLIML (edit limit line) command is received while editing a segment for the limit
line.
Send LIMSDON (limit segment done) or SDON (segment done) to terminate editing segment.
16 CURRENT PARAMETER NOT IN CAL SET
GPIB only. Correction is not valid for the selected measurement parameter.
0230 Data corrupt or stale
D
Possibly invalid data. New reading started but not completed since last access.
0225 Data out of memory
The analyzer has insucient memory to perform the requested operation.
0222 Data out of range
A legal program data element was parsed but could not be executed because the interpreted
value was outside the legal range as dened by the analyzer (see IEEE 488.2, 11.5.1.1.5).
0231 Data questionable
Indicates that measurement accuracy is suspect.
0104 Data type error
The parser recognized an unallowed data element. For example, numeric or string data was
expected but block data was encountered.
Messages-4
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
137
DC CURRENT LIMIT OCCURED
The output current at DC SOURCE port is reached the upper limit; the output voltage is
reduced so that the current does not exceed the upper limit. This message appears when the
DC SOURCE port is used in voltage control mode.
136
DC SOURCE OVERLOAD
The DC SOURCE output is overloded.
138
DC VOLTAGE LIMIT OCCURED
The output voltage at DC SOURCE port is reached the upper limit; the output current is
reduced so that the voltage does not exceed the upper limit. This message appears when the
DC SOURCE port is used in current control mode.
37
DISPLAY BUFFER IS FULL
The display buer is lled with the overlay traces or traces drawn by IBASIC DRAW/MOVE
commands, etc.
117
DUPLICATE FILE EXTENSION
The extension name entered is already used for other le types. Use other extension name.
E
15
EXCEEDED 7 STANDARDS PER CLASS
A maximum of seven standards can be dened for any class.
0200 Execution error
This is the generic syntax error that the analyzer cannot detect more specic errors. This code
indicates only that an execution error as dened in IEEE 488.2, 11.5.1.1.5 has occurred.
0123 Exponent too large
The magnitude of the exponent was larger than 32000 (see IEEE 488.2, 7.7.2.4.1).
0257 File name error
F
Indicates that a legal program command or query could not be executed because the le name
on the device media was in error. For example, an attempt was made to copy to a duplicate le
name. The denition of what constitutes a le name error is device-specic.
0256 File name not found
A legal program command could not be executed because the le name on the device media
was not found: for example, an attempt was made to read or copy a nonexistent le.
Messages-5
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
143
FLOATING POINT ERROR OCCURED
Indicate that a oating point error occured in the analyzer. Data processing may not be correct.
This error message is used when an internal application was executed for illegal data sent from
an external device, or when an internal software bug was detected. Contact your nearest
Agilent Technologies oce.
83
FORMAT NOT VALID FOR MEASUREMENT
The conversion function except the 1/S and the multiple phase modes is not valid for the
Smith, admittance, and SWR formats.
131
FREQUENCY SWEEP ONLY
The sweep type must be frequency sweep when the center step size is set.
0105 GET not allowed
G
A Group Execute Trigger (GET) was received within a program message (see IEEE 488.2, 7.7).
0240 Hardware error
H
Indicates that a legal program command or query could not be executed because of a hardware
problem in the analyzer. Denition of what constitutes a hard ware problem is completely
device-specic. This error message is used when the analyzer cannot detect the more specic
errors described for errors 0241 through 0249.
0241 Hardware missing
A legal program command or query could not be executed because of missing analyzer
hardware. For example, an option was not installed.
0111 Header separator error
A character that is not a legal header separator was encountered while parsing the header. For
example, no white space followed the header, thus *SRE4 is an error.
0114 Header Sux out of range
The value of a numeric sux attached to a program mnemonic makes the header invalid.
0224 Illegal parameter value
I
Used where exact value, from a list of possibilities, was expected.
Messages-6
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
0282 Illegal program name
The name used to reference a program was invalid. For example, redening an existing
program, deleting a nonexistent program, or in general, referencing a nonexistent program.
0283 Illegal variable name
An attempt was made to reference a nonexistent variable in a program.
0213 Init ignored
A request for a measurement initiation was ignored as another measurement was already in
progress.
141
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY
If a lot of tasks is executed at same time, memory might be insucient for a while. (For
example, running HP Instrument BASIC program, printing a screen, and sending or receiving
data array by GPIB are required at same time.) Please wait until nishing some tasks then
execute the next task.
0161 Invalid block data
A block data element was expected, but was invalid for some reason (see IEEE 488.2, 7.7.6.2).
For example, an END message was received before the length was satised.
0141 Invalid character data
Either the character data element contains an invalid character or the particular element
received is not valid for the header.
0121 Invalid character in number
An invalid character for the data type being parsed was encountered. For example, an alpha
character in a decimal numeric or a \9" in octal data.
0101 Invalid character
A syntax element contains a character that is invalid for that type. For example, a header
containing an ampersand (SENSE&).
154
INVALID DATE
The date entered to set the real time clock is invalid. Reenter correct date.
112 INVALID FILE NAME
GPIB only. The le name for the RECALL, PURGE, or RE-SAVE function must have a \_D" or
\_S" extension for LIF format.
0103 Invalid separator
The parser was expecting a separator and encountered an illegal character. For example, the
semicolon was omitted after a program message unit, *RST:TRIG.
Messages-7
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
0151 Invalid string data
A string data element was expected, but was invalid for some reason (see IEEE 488.2, 7.7.5.2).
For example, an END message was received before the terminal quote character.
0131 Invalid sux
The sux does not follow the syntax described in IEEE 488.2, 7.7.3.2, or the sux is
inappropriate for the analyzer.
L
115
LIF-DOS COPY NOT ALLOWED
If you try to copy a le between the memory disk and the exible disk when the format of the
memory disk is dierent from the format of the exible disk, this message is displayed.
124
LIST TABLE EMPTY OR INSUFFICIENT TABLE
The frequency list is empty. To implement the list frequency mode, add segments to the list
table.
0250 Mass storage error
M
Indicates that a mass storage error occurred. This error message is used when the analyzer
cannot detect the more specic errors described for errors 0257.
0311 Memory error
An error was detected in the analyzer's memory.
0109 Missing parameter
Fewer parameters were received than required for the header. For example, the *SRE
command requires one parameter, so receiving only *SRE is not allowed.
N
98
NO ACTIVE MARKER
The marker! command cannot be execute when no marker is displayed on the screen. Turn
on the marker before executing the marker! commands.
12
NO CALIBRATION CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The RESUME CAL SEQUENCE softkey is not valid unless a calibration is in progress. Start a new
calibration.
268
NO COMPENSATION CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
No compensation is currently in progress.
Messages-8
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
119
NO DATA TRACE DISPLAYED
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The SCALE FOR [DATA] is selected when the data trace is not displayed.
93
NO DATA TRACE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The MARKER ON [DATA] is selected when the data trace is not displayed.
+0
No error
The error queue is empty. Every error in the queue has been read (OUTPERRO? query) or the
queue was cleared by power-on or the 3CLS command.
100
NO FIXED DELTA MARKER
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The FIXED 1MKR VALUE and FIXED 1MKR AUX VALUE softkey requires that xed delta marker
is turned on.
96
NO MARKER DELTA - RANGE NOT SET
The MKR1!SEARCH RNG softkey requires that delta marker is turned on.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
95
NO MARKER DELTA - SPAN NOT SET
The MKR1!SPAN softkey requires that delta marker mode be turned on.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
120
NO MEMORY TRACE DISPLAYED
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The SCALE FOR [MEMORY] is selected when the memory trace is not displayed.
94
NO MEMORY TRACE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The MARKER ON [MEMORY] is selected when the memory trace is not displayed.
113
NO STATE/DATA FILES ON DISK
There are no les on the exible disk with extensions, \_D" or \_S" for LIF format, or \STA" or
\.DTA" for DOS format.
116
NO STATE/DATA FILES ON MEMORY
There are no les on the memory disk with extensions, \_D" or \_S" for LIF format, or \.STA"
or \.DTA" for DOS format.
184
NOT ALLOWED IN SVC MODE
The operation is not allowed in service mode.
55
NOT ENOUGH DATA
The amount of data sent to the analyzer is less than that expected (GPIB only).
14
NOT VALID FOR PRESENT TEST SET
The calibration requested is inconsistent with the test set present. This message occurs in the
following situations:
Messages-9
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
A full 2-port calibration is requested with a test set other than an S-parameter test set.
A one-path 2-port calibration is requested with an S-parameter test set (this procedure is
typically used with a transmission/reection test set).
34
NO VALID MEMORY TRACE
If a memory trace is to be displayed or otherwise used, a data trace must rst be stored to
memory.
0120 Numeric data error
This error, as well as errors 0121 through 0129, are generated when parsing a data element
that appears to be numeric, including the nondecimal numeric types. This particular error
message is used if the analyzer cannot detect a more specic error.
0128 Numeric data not allowed
A legal numeric data element was received, but the analyzer does not accept it in this position
for a header.
146
O
ON POINT NOT ALLOWD FOR THE CURRENT TRIG
The trigger event mode cannot be changed to the ON POINT mode because the current trigger
source setting does not allow the ON POINT mode. The ON POINT mode is available for only
MANUAL, EXTERNAL, and BUS trigger sources of the network analyzer mode.
56
OPTION NOT INSTALLED
This error occurs when an GPIB command which is optional command is sent and the analyzer
is not installed the option (GPIB only). Please conrm options installed to the analyzer using
*OPT? command (see Programming Manual.)
45
OVERLOAD ON INPUT A
The power level at one of the four receiver inputs exceeds a certain level greater than the
maximum input level.
44
OVERLOAD ON INPUT B
The power level at one of the four receiver inputs exceeds a certain level greater than the
maximum input level.
46
OVERLOAD ON INPUT R
The power level at one of the four receiver inputs exceeds a certain level greater than the
maximum input level.
0220 Parameter error
P
Indicates that a program data element related error occurred. This error message is used when
the analyzer cannot detect the more specic errors described for errors 0221 through 0229.
Messages-10
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
0108 Parameter not allowed
More parameters were received than expected for the header. For example, the *SRE command
only accepts one parameter, so receiving *SRE 4,16 is not allowed.
48
PHASE LOCK LOOP UNLOCKED
EXT REF Input of 10 MHz is not proper, or the instrument is needed to adjust or repair.
Check the external reference signal rst. Contact your nearest Agilent Technologies oce for
adjustment or repair.
193
POWER ON TEST FAILED
Power on test failed. Contact your nearest Agilent Technologies oce.
26
PRINTER: not on, not connected, out of paper
The printer does not respond to control. Check the supply to the printer, online status, sheets,
and so on.
0284 Program currently running
Certain operations dealing with programs may be illegal while the program is running. For
example, deleting a running program might not be possible.
0280 Program error
Indicates that a downloaded program-related execution error occurred. This error message
is used when the analyzer cannot detect the more specic errors described for errors 0281
through 0289.
0112 Program mnemonic too long
The header contains more than twelve characters (see IEEE 488.2, 7.6.1.4.1).
0286 Program runtime error
A program runtime error of the HP Instrument BASIC has occurred. To get a more specic
error information, use the ERRM$ or ERRN command of the HP Instrument BASIC.
0285 Program syntax error
Indicates that a syntax error appears in a downloaded program. The syntax used when parsing
the downloaded program is device-specic.
0400 Query errors
Q
This is the generic query error that the analyzer cannot detect more specic errors. This code
indicates only that a query error as dened in IEEE 488.2, 11.5.1.1.7 and 6.3 has occurred.
0410 Query INTERRUPTED
A condition causing an interrupted query error occurred (see IEEE 488.2, 6.3.2.3). For
example, a query followed by DAB or GET before a response was completely sent.
Messages-11
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
0420 Query UNTERMINATED
A condition causing an unterminated query error occurred (see IEEE 488.2, 6.3.2.2). For
example, the analyzer was addressed to talk and an incomplete program message was received
by the controller.
0350 Queue overow
A specic code entered into the queue in lieu of the code that caused the error. This code
indicates that there is no room in the queue and an error occurred but was not recorded.
111
R
RECALL ERROR: INSTR STATE PRESET
A serious error, for example corrupted data, is detected on recalling a le, and this forced the
analyzer to be PRESET.
S
110
SAVE ERROR
A serious error, for example physically damaged disk surface, is detected on saving a le.
76
SEGMENT START/STOP OVERLAPPED
Segments are not allowed to be overlapped. Reenter appropriate value for start or stop value
of segments to avoid that segment is not overlapped.
0330 Self-test failed
A self-test failed. Contact your nearest Agilent Technologies oce or see the Service Manual
for troubleshooting.
0221 Settings conict
A legal program data element was parsed but could not be executed due to the current device
state (see IEEE 488.2, 6.4.5.3 and 11.5.1.1.5).
128
SPAN = 0 ONLY
The setup must be zero span and spectrum analyzer mode when turning on the RF OUTPUT.
0150 String data error
This error, as well as errors 0151 and 0158, are generated when analyzing the syntax of a
string data element. This particular error message is used if the analyzer cannot detect a more
specic error.
0158 String data not allowed
A string data element was encountered but was not allowed by the analyzer at this point in
parsing.
Messages-12
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
0130 Sux error
This error, as well as errors 0131 through 0139, are generated when parsing a sux. This
particular error message is used if the analyzer cannot detect a more specic error.
0138 Sux not allowed
A sux was encountered after a numeric element that does not allow suxes.
0134 Sux too long
The sux contained more than 12 characters (see IEEE 488.2, 7.7.3.4).
0102 Syntax error
An unrecognized command or data type was encountered. For example, a string was received
when the analyzer was not expecting to receive a string.
0310 System error
Some error, termed \system error" by the analyzer, has occurred.
0124 Too many digits
T
The mantissa of a decimal numeric data element contains more than 255 digits excluding
leading zeros (see IEEE 488.2, 7.7.2.4.1).
77
TOO MANY SEGMENTS OR POINTS
Frequency list mode is limited to 31 segments or 801 points.
64
TOO MANY SEGMENTS
The maximum number of segments for the limit line table is 18.
0223 Too much data
A legal program data element of block, expression, or string type was received that
contained more data than the analyzer could handle due to memory or related device-specic
requirements.
54
TOO MUCH DATA
Either there is too much binary data to send to the analyzer when the data transfer format is
FORM 2, FORM 3 or FORM 5, or the amount of data is greater than the number of points.
78
TOO SMALL POINTS OR TOO LARGE STOP
STOP+SPAN/(NOP01) is out of sweep range. Increase NOP or change STOP value to lower
frequency to avoid this error.
0210 Trigger error
A trigger related error occurred. This error message is used when the analyzer cannot detect
the more specic errors described for errors 0211 through 0219.
Messages-13
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
0211 Trigger ignored
A GET, *TRG, or triggering signal was received and recognized by the analyzer but was ignored
because of analyzer timing considerations. For example, the analyzer was not ready to respond.
0113 Undened header
U
The header is syntactically correct, but it is undened for the analyzer. For example, *XYZ is
not dened for the analyzer.
Messages-14
Error Messages in Numerical Order
Error Messages in Numerical Order
0 - 100
+0
No error
The error queue is empty. Every error in the queue has been read (OUTPERRO? query) or the
queue was cleared by power-on or the 3CLS command.
1
CAN'T SET RBW AUTO IN ZERO SPAN
The RBW AUTO mode cannot be selected in the zero span. The RBW must be specied
manually in the zero span. (spectrum analyzer mode only).
10
ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED
Error correction for the selected calibration class cannot be computed until all the necessary
standards have been measured.
11
CALIBRATION REQUIRED
No valid calibration coecients were found when you attempted to turn calibration on.
12
NO CALIBRATION CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The RESUME CAL SEQUENCE softkey is not valid unless a calibration is in progress. Start a new
calibration.
13
CALIBRATION ABORTED
The calibration in progress was terminated due to a change of the active channel or stimulus
parameters.
14
NOT VALID FOR PRESENT TEST SET
The calibration requested is inconsistent with the test set present. This message occurs in the
following situations:
A full 2-port calibration is requested with a test set other than an S-parameter test set.
A one-path 2-port calibration is requested with an S-parameter test set (this procedure is
typically used with a transmission/reection test set).
15
EXCEEDED 7 STANDARDS PER CLASS
A maximum of seven standards can be dened for any class.
16 CURRENT PARAMETER NOT IN CAL SET
GPIB only. Correction is not valid for the selected measurement parameter.
17
BACKUP DATA LOST
Data checksum error on the battery backup memory has occurred. The battery is recharged for
approximately 10 minutes after power was turned on.
Messages-15
Error Messages in Numerical Order
26
PRINTER:not on, not connect, wrong address
The printer does not respond to control. Check the supply to the printer, online status, sheets,
and so on.
34
NO VALID MEMORY TRACE
If a memory trace is to be displayed or otherwise used, a data trace must rst be stored to
memory.
37
DISPLAY BUFFER IS FULL
The display buer is lled with the overlay traces or traces drawn by IBASIC DRAW/MOVE
commands, etc.
44
OVERLOAD ON INPUT B
The power level at one of the four receiver inputs exceeds a certain level greater than the
maximum input level.
45
OVERLOAD ON INPUT A
The power level at one of the four receiver inputs exceeds a certain level greater than the
maximum input level.
46
OVERLOAD ON INPUT R
The power level at one of the four receiver inputs exceeds a certain level greater than the
maximum input level.
48
PHASE LOCK LOOP UNLOCKED
EXT REF Input of 10 MHz is not proper, or the instrument is needed to adjust or repair.
Check the external reference signal rst. Contact your nearest Agilent Technologies oce for
adjustment or repair.
50
CONT SWITCHING MAY DAMAGE MECH SW
RF output power switch, input attenuator switch at input R/A/B, or internal mechanical
switch in the S-parameter test set is switching sweep by sweep, because RF power level or the
input attenuator setting is dierent between two channels and the dual channel is turn on,
or continuous trigger mode is selected after full 2-port calibration is performed when 4395A
is used with the S-parameter test set. To avoid premature wearing out of the output power
switch, input attenuator switch, or internal switch of the S-parameter test set, change trigger
type to HOLD, SINGLE, or NUMBER of GROUP to hold sweep after measurement required. Or,
for example, turn o the dual channel, or set the power level and the input attenuator of both
channels to the same setting.
54
TOO MUCH DATA
Either there is too much binary data to send to the analyzer when the data transfer format is
FORM 2, FORM 3 or FORM 5, or the amount of data is greater than the number of points.
55
NOT ENOUGH DATA
The amount of data sent to the analyzer is less than that expected (GPIB only).
Messages-16
Error Messages in Numerical Order
56
OPTION NOT INSTALLED
This error occurs when an GPIB command which is optional command is sent and the analyzer
is not installed the option (GPIB only). Please conrm options installed to the analyzer using
*OPT? command (see Programming Manual.)
64
TOO MANY SEGMENTS
The maximum number of segments for the limit line table is 18.
74
CURRENT EDITING SEGMENT SCRATCHED
The current editing segment for the list table and the limit line is scratched when the following
cases occur (GPIB only) :
When EDITLIST (edit list table) command is received while editing a segment for the list
table.
When EDITLIML (edit limit line) command is received while editing a segment for the limit
line.
Send LIMSDON (limit segment done) or SDON (segment done) to terminate editing segment.
75
COMMAND IGNORED - SEGMENT NOT DONE YET
The GPIB command the analyzer received is ignored, because the segment is editing (GPIB
only). Send LIMSDON (limit segment done) or SDON (segment done) to terminate editing
segment. (See Programming Manual.)
76
SEGMENT START/STOP OVERLAPPED
Segments are not allowed to be overlapped. Reenter appropriate value for start or stop value
of segments to avoid that segment is not overlapped.
77
TOO MANY SEGMENTS OR POINTS
Frequency list mode is limited to 31 segments or 801 points.
78
TOO SMALL POINTS OR TOO LARGE STOP
STOP+SPAN/(NOP01) is out of sweep range. Increase NOP or change STOP value to lower
frequency to avoid this error.
82
CAN'T CHANGE- ANOTHER CONTROLLER ON BUS
The analyzer cannot assume the mode of system controller until the active controller is
removed from the bus or relinquishes the bus. See Programming Manual.
83
FORMAT NOT VALID FOR MEASUREMENT
The conversion function except the 1/S and the multiple phase modes is not valid for the
Smith, admittance, and SWR formats.
84
ANALYZER TYPE MISMATCH
The analyzer receives a command that is not available for the current analyzer type. Please
conrm GPIB command or change analyzer type before sending the command.
Messages-17
Error Messages in Numerical Order
93
NO DATA TRACE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The MARKER ON [DATA] is selected when the data trace is not displayed.
94
NO MEMORY TRACE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The MARKER ON [MEMORY] is selected when the memory trace is not displayed.
95
NO MARKER DELTA - SPAN NOT SET
The MKR1!SPAN softkey requires that delta marker mode be turned on.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
96
NO MARKER DELTA - RANGE NOT SET
The MKR1!SEARCH RNG softkey requires that delta marker is turned on.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
97
CAN'T CHANGE WHILE DATA MATH ON
The setting cannot be changed when the data math function is used.
98
NO ACTIVE MARKER
The marker! command cannot be execute when no marker is displayed on the screen. Turn
on the marker before executing the marker! commands.
99
CAN'T CHANGE WHILE DUAL CHAN OFF
The Cross channel cannot be turned on when dual channel is o. Turn on the dual channel
before the cross channel is turned on.
100
NO FIXED DELTA MARKER
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The FIXED 1MKR VALUE and FIXED 1MKR AUX VALUE softkey requires that xed delta marker
is turned on.
101 - 200
110
SAVE ERROR
A serious error, for example physically damaged disk surface, is detected on saving a le.
111
RECALL ERROR: INSTR STATE PRESET
A serious error, for example corrupted data, is detected on recalling a le, and this forced the
analyzer to be PRESET.
112 INVALID FILE NAME
GPIB only. The le name for the RECALL, PURGE, or RE-SAVE function must have a \_D" or
\_S" extension for LIF format.
113
NO STATE/DATA FILES ON DISK
There are no les on the exible disk with extensions, \_D" or \_S" for LIF format, or \STA" or
\.DTA" for DOS format.
Messages-18
Error Messages in Numerical Order
114
CAN'T SAVE GRAPHICS WHEN COPY IN PROGRESS
If you attempt to save graphics when a print is in progress, this error message is displayed.
115
LIF-DOS COPY NOT ALLOWED
If you try to copy a le between the memory disk and the exible disk when the format of the
memory disk is dierent from the format of the exible disk, this message is displayed.
116
NO STATE/DATA FILES ON MEMORY
There are no les on the memory disk with extensions, \_D" or \_S" for LIF format, or \.STA"
or \.DTA" for DOS format.
117
DUPLICATE FILE EXTENSION
The extension name entered is already used for other le types. Use other extension name.
119
NO DATA TRACE DISPLAYED
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The SCALE FOR [DATA] is selected when the data trace is not displayed.
120
NO MEMORY TRACE DISPLAYED
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The SCALE FOR [MEMORY] is selected when the memory trace is not displayed.
124
LIST TABLE EMPTY OR INSUFFICIENT TABLE
The frequency list is empty. To implement the list frequency mode, add segments to the list
table.
126
CAN'T CHANGE NUMBER OF POINTS
The number of points of the spectrum analyzer mode cannot be to change manually, except in
zero span.
127
CAN'T SET SWEEP TIME AUTO IN ZERO SPAN
The automatic sweep time cannot be in zero span of the spectrum analyzer mode. (The
network analyzer mode allows that the automatic sweep time is turned on.)
128
SPAN = 0 ONLY
The setup must be zero span and spectrum analyzer mode when turning on the RF OUTPUT.
131
FREQUENCY SWEEP ONLY
The sweep type must be frequency sweep when the center step size is set.
133
CAN'T CHANGE ON LIST SWEEP
When list sweep is selected, the following parameters are not allowed to be changed:
CENTER, SPAN, START, STOP
NOP
IFBW or RBW
POWER
DC SOURCE
Messages-19
Error Messages in Numerical Order
Modify the list table to change these parameters in the list sweep.
134
CAN'T COUPLE IN CURRENT INPUTS
When one channel measures a ratio measurement, and the other one measures an absolute
measurement (for example: A/R and B), COUPLED CH can not be turned on.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
135
COUPLED CHAN - BETWEEN NA&NA OR ZA&ZA
The analyzer types of both channels must be the network analyzer mode or impedance
analyzer mode when the coupled channel is turned on. It is not possible to turn the coupled
channel on in spectrum analyzer mode.
136
DC SOURCE OVERLOAD
The DC SOURCE output is overloded.
137
DC CURRENT LIMIT OCCURED
The output current at DC SOURCE port is reached the upper limit; the output voltage is
reduced so that the current does not exceed the upper limit. This message appears when the
DC SOURCE port is used in voltage control mode.
138
DC VOLTAGE LIMIT OCCURED
The output voltage at DC SOURCE port is reached the upper limit; the output current is
reduced so that the voltage does not exceed the upper limit. This message appears when the
DC SOURCE port is used in current control mode.
141
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY
If a lot of tasks is executed at same time, memory might be insucient for a while. (For
example, running HP Instrument BASIC program, printing a screen, and sending or receiving
data array by GPIB are required at same time.) Please wait until nishing some tasks then
execute the next task.
143
FLOATING POINT ERROR OCCURED
Indicate that a oating point error occured in the analyzer. Data processing may not be correct.
This error message is used when an internal application was executed for illegal data sent from
an external device, or when an internal software bug was detected. Contact your nearest
Agilent Technologies oce.
146
ON POINT NOT ALLOWD FOR THE CURRENT TRIG
The trigger event mode cannot be changed to the ON POINT mode because the current trigger
source setting does not allow the ON POINT mode. The ON POINT mode is available for only
MANUAL, EXTERNAL, and BUS trigger sources of the network analyzer mode.
154
INVALID DATE
The date entered to set the real time clock is invalid. Reenter correct date.
173
ACTIVE/SYSTEM CONTROLLER REQUIRED
When the 4395A and its peripherals are controlled using the Instrument BASIC, you must set
the GPIB system's control mode to the system controller mode.
Messages-20
Error Messages in Numerical Order
184
NOT ALLOWED IN SVC MODE
The operation is not allowed in service mode.
193
POWER ON TEST FAILED
Power on test failed. Contact your nearest Agilent Technologies oce.
201 - 300
267
COMPENSTATION REQUIRED
Compensation is required. Perform compansation to obtain compensation data.
268
NO COMPENSATION CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
No compensation is currently in progress.
269
COMPENSATION ABORTED
Compensation data acquisition process is aborted.
270
COMPENSATION STD LIST UNDEFINED
Compensation standard list is undened.
0100 Command error
01 - 0100
This is a generic syntax error that the analyzer cannot detect more specic errors. This code
indicates only that a command error, as dened in IEEE 488.2, 11.5.1.1.4, has occurred.
0101 Invalid character
0101 - 0200
A syntax element contains a character that is invalid for that type. For example, a header
containing an ampersand (SENSE&).
0102 Syntax error
An unrecognized command or data type was encountered. For example, a string was received
when the analyzer was not expecting to receive a string.
0103 Invalid separator
The parser was expecting a separator and encountered an illegal character. For example, the
semicolon was omitted after a program message unit, *RST:TRIG.
0104 Data type error
The parser recognized an unallowed data element. For example, numeric or string data was
expected but block data was encountered.
Messages-21
Error Messages in Numerical Order
0105 GET not allowed
A Group Execute Trigger (GET) was received within a program message (see IEEE 488.2, 7.7).
0108 Parameter not allowed
More parameters were received than expected for the header. For example, the *SRE command
only accepts one parameter, so receiving *SRE 4,16 is not allowed.
0109 Missing parameter
Fewer parameters were received than required for the header. For example, the *SRE
command requires one parameter, so receiving only *SRE is not allowed.
0110 Command header error
An error was detected in the header. This error message is used when the analyzer cannot
detect the more specic errors described for errors 0111 through 0119.
0111 Header separator error
A character that is not a legal header separator was encountered while parsing the header. For
example, no white space followed the header, thus *SRE4 is an error.
0112 Program mnemonic too long
The header contains more than twelve characters (see IEEE 488.2, 7.6.1.4.1).
0113 Undened header
The header is syntactically correct, but it is undened for the analyzer. For example, *XYZ is
not dened for the analyzer.
0114 Header Sux out of range
The value of a numeric sux attached to a program mnemonic makes the header invalid.
0120 Numeric data error
This error, as well as errors 0121 through 0129, are generated when parsing a data element
that appears to be numeric, including the nondecimal numeric types. This particular error
message is used if the analyzer cannot detect a more specic error.
0121 Invalid character in number
An invalid character for the data type being parsed was encountered. For example, an alpha
character in a decimal numeric or a \9" in octal data.
0123 Exponent too large
The magnitude of the exponent was larger than 32000 (see IEEE 488.2, 7.7.2.4.1).
0124 Too many digits
The mantissa of a decimal numeric data element contains more than 255 digits excluding
leading zeros (see IEEE 488.2, 7.7.2.4.1).
Messages-22
Error Messages in Numerical Order
0128 Numeric data not allowed
A legal numeric data element was received, but the analyzer does not accept it in this position
for a header.
0130 Sux error
This error, as well as errors 0131 through 0139, are generated when parsing a sux. This
particular error message is used if the analyzer cannot detect a more specic error.
0131 Invalid sux
The sux does not follow the syntax described in IEEE 488.2, 7.7.3.2, or the sux is
inappropriate for the analyzer.
0134 Sux too long
The sux contained more than 12 characters (see IEEE 488.2, 7.7.3.4).
0138 Sux not allowed
A sux was encountered after a numeric element that does not allow suxes.
0140 Character data error
This error, as well as errors 0141 through 0148, are generated when analyzing the syntax of a
character data element. This particular error message is used if the analyzer cannot detect a
more specic error.
0141 Invalid character data
Either the character data element contains an invalid character or the particular element
received is not valid for the header.
0144 Character data too long
The character data element contains more than twelve characters (see IEEE 488.2, 7.7.1.4).
0148 Character data not allowed
A legal character data element was encountered where prohibited by the analyzer.
0150 String data error
This error, as well as errors 0151 and 0158, are generated when analyzing the syntax of a
string data element. This particular error message is used if the analyzer cannot detect a more
specic error.
0151 Invalid string data
A string data element was expected, but was invalid for some reason (see IEEE 488.2, 7.7.5.2).
For example, an END message was received before the terminal quote character.
0158 String data not allowed
A string data element was encountered but was not allowed by the analyzer at this point in
parsing.
Messages-23
Error Messages in Numerical Order
0160 Block data error
This error, as well as errors 0161 and 0168, are generated when analyzing the syntax of a
block data element. This particular error message is used if the analyzer cannot detect a more
specic error.
0161 Invalid block data
A block data element was expected, but was invalid for some reason (see IEEE 488.2, 7.7.6.2).
For example, an END message was received before the length was satised.
0168 Block data not allowed
A legal block data element was encountered but was not allowed by the analyzer at this point
in parsing.
0200 Execution error
This is the generic syntax error that the analyzer cannot detect more specic errors. This code
indicates only that an execution error as dened in IEEE 488.2, 11.5.1.1.5 has occurred.
0210 Trigger error
0201 - 0300
A trigger related error occurred. This error message is used when the analyzer cannot detect
the more specic errors described for errors 0211 through 0219.
0211 Trigger ignored
A GET, *TRG, or triggering signal was received and recognized by the analyzer but was ignored
because of analyzer timing considerations. For example, the analyzer was not ready to respond.
0213 Init ignored
A request for a measurement initiation was ignored as another measurement was already in
progress.
0220 Parameter error
Indicates that a program data element related error occurred. This error message is used when
the analyzer cannot detect the more specic errors described for errors 0221 through 0229.
0221 Settings conict
A legal program data element was parsed but could not be executed due to the current device
state (see IEEE 488.2, 6.4.5.3 and 11.5.1.1.5).
0222 Data out of range
A legal program data element was parsed but could not be executed because the interpreted
value was outside the legal range as dened by the analyzer (see IEEE 488.2, 11.5.1.1.5).
Messages-24
Error Messages in Numerical Order
0223 Too much data
A legal program data element of block, expression, or string type was received that
contained more data than the analyzer could handle due to memory or related device-specic
requirements.
0224 Illegal parameter value
Used where exact value, from a list of possibilities, was expected.
0225 Data out of memory
The analyzer has insucient memory to perform the requested operation.
0230 Data corrupt or stale
Possibly invalid data. New reading started but not completed since last access.
0231 Data questionable
Indicates that measurement accuracy is suspect.
0240 Hardware error
Indicates that a legal program command or query could not be executed because of a hardware
problem in the analyzer. Denition of what constitutes a hard ware problem is completely
device-specic. This error message is used when the analyzer cannot detect the more specic
errors described for errors 0241 through 0249.
0241 Hardware missing
A legal program command or query could not be executed because of missing analyzer
hardware. For example, an option was not installed.
0250 Mass storage error
Indicates that a mass storage error occurred. This error message is used when the analyzer
cannot detect the more specic errors described for errors 0257.
0256 File name not found
A legal program command could not be executed because the le name on the device media
was not found: for example, an attempt was made to read or copy a nonexistent le.
0257 File name error
Indicates that a legal program command or query could not be executed because the le name
on the device media was in error. For example, an attempt was made to copy to a duplicate le
name. The denition of what constitutes a le name error is device-specic.
0280 Program error
Indicates that a downloaded program-related execution error occurred. This error message
is used when the analyzer cannot detect the more specic errors described for errors 0281
through 0289.
Messages-25
Error Messages in Numerical Order
0281 Cannot create program
Indicates that an attempt to create a program was unsuccessful. A reason for the failure might
include not enough memory.
0282 Illegal program name
The name used to reference a program was invalid. For example, redening an existing
program, deleting a nonexistent program, or in general, referencing a nonexistent program.
0283 Illegal variable name
An attempt was made to reference a nonexistent variable in a program.
0284 Program currently running
Certain operations dealing with programs may be illegal while the program is running. For
example, deleting a running program might not be possible.
0285 Program syntax error
Indicates that a syntax error appears in a downloaded program. The syntax used when parsing
the downloaded program is device-specic.
0286 Program runtime error
A program runtime error of the HP Instrument BASIC has occurred. To get a more specic
error information, use the ERRM$ or ERRN command of the HP Instrument BASIC.
0310 System error
0301 - 0400
Some error, termed \system error" by the analyzer, has occurred.
0311 Memory error
An error was detected in the analyzer's memory.
0330 Self-test failed
A self-test failed. Contact your nearest Agilent Technologies oce or see the Service Manual
for troubleshooting.
0350 Queue overow
A specic code entered into the queue in lieu of the code that caused the error. This code
indicates that there is no room in the queue and an error occurred but was not recorded.
0400 Query errors
This is the generic query error that the analyzer cannot detect more specic errors. This code
indicates only that a query error as dened in IEEE 488.2, 11.5.1.1.7 and 6.3 has occurred.
0401 - 0500
Messages-26
Error Messages in Numerical Order
0410 Query INTERRUPTED
A condition causing an interrupted query error occurred (see IEEE 488.2, 6.3.2.3). For
example, a query followed by DAB or GET before a response was completely sent.
0420 Query UNTERMINATED
A condition causing an unterminated query error occurred (see IEEE 488.2, 6.3.2.2). For
example, the analyzer was addressed to talk and an incomplete program message was received
by the controller.
Messages-27
Index
Special characters
#, 4-9
# , 4-8
3, 4-9
0O, 4-9
1L.F, A-33
1R.F, A-33
" , 4-9
g , A-17
1mode, A-33
1X, A-35
1Y, A-35, A-36
1
10833A gpib cable(1 m), 12-5
10833B gpib cable(2 m), 12-5
10833C gpib cable(3 m), 12-5
10833D gpib cable(0.5 m), 12-5
1141A dierential probe, 12-2
11667A power splitter, 12-2
11850C,D three-way power splitters, 12-2
11851B 50 type-n rf cable set, 12-3
11852B 50 to 75 minimum loss pad, 12-3
11853A 50 type-n adapter kit, 12-3
11854A 50 bnc adapter kit, 12-3
11855A 75 type-n adapter kit, 12-3
11856A 75 bnc adapter kit, 12-3
11857B 75 type-n test port return cable
set, 12-3
11857D 7 mm test port return cable set, 12-3
1 M
input adapter, 12-2
2
24-bit I/O interface , 11-22
24-bit I/O interface pin assignment, 11-22
24-bit i/o port, 4-12
4
41800A active probe, 12-2
41802A 1 M
input adapter, 12-2
4395A
overview, 1-1
4395A settings
recalling , 3-29
saving , 3-27
4395U upgrade kit, 12-1
5
50 N(m)/75 N(f) minimum loss pad , 2-19
50 to 75 input impedance conversion (option
1D7), 12-1
7
75 measurement
setting for spectrum , 2-19
8
85031B 7 mm calibration kit, 12-3
85032B 50 type-n calibration kit, 12-3
85033D 3.5 mm calibration kit, 12-3
85036B 75 type-n calibration kit, 12-3
87511A/B s parameter test set, 12-2
87512A, B , A-56
87512A/B transmission/reection test set,
12-2
8 bit i/o port pin assignments , 11-22
A
A , 11-34
A , 6-7
A/B , 6-7
About This Guide, 1-1
absolute amplitude accuracy
network analyzer , 11-4
absolute squared , A-8
accessory, 12-2
Activating channel , 3-35
active channel, 4-6
setting , 3-6, 3-19
ACTIVE CHANNEL block, 4-2
active entry area , 4-10
active probe
available , 2-12
connecting , 2-12
active probes, 12-2
active state, 4-2
adapter, 12-3
adapter kit, 12-3
adding / subtracting ON Del, 4-9
additional amplitude error
spectrum analyzer , 11-13
NNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNN
Index-1
addressable , A-39
admittance , 6-11
ADMITTANCE CHART , 6-10, 10-13
admittance conversion, A-14
admittance measurement , 10-13
advanced techniques, 9-1
aging
spectrum analyzer , 11-7
allowable range, C-1
altitude , 11-25, 11-26
Am , 11-34
amplitude characteristics
spectrum analyzer , 11-8
Amplitude delity
spectrum analyzer, 11-8
AM signal measurement , 10-18
analyzer input terminals R, A, B, 4-4
analyzer mode
selecting , 6-2
analyzer type
setting to network , 3-5
setting to spectrum , 3-18
ANALYZER TYPE , 6-2, 10-2, 10-24, 10-31
Ap , 11-34
APC-7 connector , 7-15
aperture, A-18
aperture , 8-29
approximate , 11-1
A/R , 6-7
ARBITARY IMPEDANCE, A-46
ASCII le format, A-59
ASCII save , 8-21
attenuator, A-8
spectrum analyzer , 11-11
attenuator , 4-8
automatic scaling
performing , 3-8
AUTOREC , A-61
auto recall , A-61
auto recall function , A-61
AUTO SCALE , 10-5
AUTO SCALE , 10-3
averaging, A-11, A-16
averaging , 9-13, A-5, A-8
AVERAGING FACTOR , 9-13
averaging ON Avg , 4-9
Avg , 4-9
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
B
NNNNN
B , 6-7
backup memory, C-1
backup memory, operating time, C-1
bandwidth , 10-3
Index-2
binary le format, A-59
block diagram, A-2
BNC Cables, 12-3
B/R , 6-7
built-in disk drive , 8-19
burst modulated signal, 8-38
bus , 4-9
BW, A-33
4Bw/Avg5 , 6-27
4Bw/Avg5, softkeys under, B-14
NNNNNNNNNNN
C
C , 11-34
C! , 4-9
C?, 4-9
C2 , 4-9
C2! , 4-9
C2? , 4-9
cable, 12-3
connecting, 2-9
cable reection stability , 11-34
cable transmission stability , 11-34
4Cal5 , 10-3
CALIBRATE MENU , 10-3
calibration, A-40
1-path 2-port , 7-8
frequency response , 10-3
full 2-port , 7-6
impedance analyzer, 11-14
impedance analyzer mode, 7-14
kit , 7-10, 7-19
network analyzer mode, 7-1
procedure , 10-3
response , 7-2
response & isolation , 7-2
S-11 1-port , 7-4
S-22 1-port , 7-5
thru , 10-3
transmission measurement , 10-3
calibration , 10-31
calibration coecient arrays , A-5
calibration coecient arrays/calibration,
A-11
calibration coecients arrays , A-59
calibration data , 8-20
calibration, impedance analyzer mode , 10-25
calibration kit, 12-3, C-22
labling and saving, 7-13
verifying denition, 7-13
calibration method , 7-1
calibration output connector, 4-4, 12-1
CAL KIT , 7-10, 7-19
CAL OUT signal , 3-17
4Cal5, softkeys under, B-16
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
capturing unstable signal , 9-14
carrier to noise ratio , 8-37
cent, A-33
4Center5 , 6-15
center frequency
marker! , 6-15
peak! , 6-17
center frequency , 6-15
4Center5, softkeys under, B-35
CENTER STEP SIZE , 6-17
center value , 4-8
4Chan 15 , 6-2
4Chan 15, softkeys under, B-2
4Chan 25 , 6-2
4Chan 25, softkeys under, B-2
CHAN COUP on OFF , 10-16
channel
dual , 6-3
split , 6-3
channel coupling, A-28
channel, selecting active , 6-2
chip capacitor, evaluation, 10-24
class, A-45
class assignment, C-24
cleaning , 2-7
CLEAR SUB MKR , 8-4
Cm!, 4-9
Cm*, 4-9
Cm?, 4-9
Cmp, 4-9
coecient, A-45
color monitor , 4-12
complex plane format , 6-12
connecting active probe
network analyzer mode, 2-12
spectrum analyzer mode, 2-12
connecting active probe , 2-12
connecting cables, 2-9
connecting DUT , 5-1
connecting DUT for impedance analyzer
mode
connecting impedance test kit, 5-8
connecting DUT for network analyzer mode
bi-directional transmission and reection
characteristics measurement, 5-2
directional transmission and reection
characteristics measurement, 5-2
directional transmission characteristic
measurement, 5-1
input/output signals in a circuit, 5-5
output signal in a circuit, 5-3
connecting DUT for spectrum analyzer mode
direct measurement, 5-6
signal in a circuit, 5-6
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
connecting test set, 2-10
connectors , 4-11
Contents, 2-2
CONTINUOUS , 6-6, 9-13
continuous mode, A-32
controller , A-37
conversion , A-5, A-11
conversion function, A-14
converting to other unit, A-8
4Copy5, softkeys under, B-48
Cor , 4-9
CORRECTION ON off , 10-3
COUPLED CH on OFF , 10-5
COUPLED CH ON off , 10-4
coupling, A-28
Cpl, 4-7
cross channel ONXch, 4-7
crosstalk
network analyzer , 11-3
spectrum analyzer , 11-12
crosstalk , A-41, A-43
crt , 11-20
crystal resonator, evaluation of, 10-31
CW FREQ , 6-7
cw frequency , 4-8
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
D
D , 11-34
DATA and MEMORY , 8-14
data array , 8-20
data array names
network analyzer, A-69
spectrum analyzer, A-68
data arrays, A-11
data arrays , A-5, A-59
data groups
network analyzer, A-69
spectrum analyzer, A-69
data hold, A-11
maximum , 9-13
minimum , 9-13
data hold , A-6, A-8
DATA HOLD , 9-13
data math, A-12
data math , 11-20, A-6, A-8
DATA MATH , 8-15
DATA MATH [DATA] , 10-16
data math gain ON G3 , 4-9
data math oset ON 0O , 4-9
data math ON D+M, D/M, 4-9
data only, A-59
DATA ONLY , 8-19
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Index-3
data processing, A-3
impedance measurement, A-10
network measurement, A-3
spectrum measurement, A-7
DATA!MEMORY , 8-14
data trace array, A-12
data trace array , 8-20, A-9
data trace arrays , A-6, A-59
data transfer formats , 11-20
dBm/Hz , 8-35
DC bias , 8-51
DC bias sweep using list sweep function,
10-36
DC SOURCE , 4-4, 12-1
DC SOURCE INPUT , 8-51
dc voltage/current source, 11-21
decimation , A-7
default setting, C-1
DEG , 6-14
Del , 4-9
DELAY, A-46
DELAY , 6-10, 8-29
1mode, A-33
detection, A-8
detection mode, A-19
sample , 8-35
determining expected system performance,
11-52
deviation from linear phase
network analyzer , 11-5
Deviation from the Linear Phase, 8-29
dierential probe, 12-2
digital lter, A-4, A-10
directivity , A-41, A-49
directivity EDF , A-55
directivity EDR , A-55
discrete mode, A-32
disk
initialize , 8-22
preparing , 3-26
disk capacity , A-58
disk drive non-operating condition , 11-25
disk drive operating condition, 11-25
disk format , 11-20, A-58
display, 4-5
overlap channel , 6-3
split channel , 6-3
display , 11-20
displayed average noise level
spectrum analyzer, 11-9
display format, 4-7
display formats
impedance analyzer, 11-14
display points, A-27
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Index-4
4Display5, softkeys under, B-7
D+M , 4-9
D/M , 4-9
D0M, 4-9
document guide, 1-2
DOS , 3-27, 8-19
DOS format, A-58
drift error, A-40
drift error , 11-33
DUAL CHAN , 6-3
DUT
connecting , 3-3
DUT , 5-1
dynamic accuracy , 11-34, 11-37
dynamic accuracy (a/r, b/r)
network analyzer , 11-4, 11-5
dynamic range
spectrum analyzer, 11-9
dynamic range , 9-7
dynamic range, increasing , 6-26
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
E
EDF , A-49
edge mode, 8-38
ELEC DELAY MENU , 8-29
electrical delay, A-15
electrical delay , 8-31, A-5
ELECTRICAL DELAY , 8-27, 8-29
electrical length, 10-26, 10-31
electrical length , 7-17
electrical length, measuring , 8-27
ELF , A-54
emc , 11-26
ENTRY keys, 4-2
environment
operation, 2-7
equivalent circuit analysis , 8-53, 10-29,
10-33
equivalent circuit selection guide , 8-54
equivalent electrical length , 7-17
equivalent noise bandwidth , 8-35, A-22
ERF , A-50
Erm , 11-35
Erp , 11-35
error, A-40
error correction ON Cor , 4-9
error message, Messages-1
error model, A-49
ESF , A-50
ETF , A-55
event trigger
network analyzer , 11-6
examples of applications , 10-1
EXF , A-55
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
EXP PHASE on OFF , 6-12, 10-6
EXP PHASE on OFF , 6-10
ext , 4-9
extension , 8-21
extension cable , 8-31
extension cable, compensating for electrical
delay , 8-31
EXTERNAL , 6-4
external DC bias source , 8-51
external monitor, 12-5
external monitor output, 11-25
external monitor terminal, 4-12
external program run/cont input , 4-12,
11-24
external reference, 4-10
external reference input , 4-11, 11-24
external trigger input , 4-13, 11-24
extrapolated xture compensation ON Cm!,
4-9
ExtRef, 4-10
EXT TRIGGER connector , 6-4
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
F
factory setting, C-21
fast fourier transform , A-7
fast sweep indicator " , 4-9
FFT , A-7
FFT Mode, A-19
delity
spectrum analyzer, 11-8
le
copy , 8-22
purge , 8-21
le extension, A-61
le format
DOS , 8-22, 8-23
LIF , 8-22, 8-23
le header, A-62
le name
entering , 3-27
le name , A-61
lename , 3-28
le structure, A-62
le structure of ASCII le, A-66
single channel vs. dual channel, A-68
le types, A-59
lter , 8-25
lter measurement , 10-2
xture compensation
performing , 7-18
xture compensation coecient arrays/xture
compensation , A-11
xture compensation kit
dening, 7-19
modication menu, 7-19
specifying, 7-20
xture compensation ON Cmp, 4-9
exible disk drive, 4-5
FM signal measurement , 10-21
format
group delay , 8-29
network analyzer , 6-10
noise , 8-35
Smith chart , 6-10
Format, A-11
FORMAT, 4-7
format , A-6, A-8
4Format5 , 6-10, 6-14
4Format5, softkeys under, B-5
frequency
center , 6-15
full span , 6-20
span , 6-19
zero span , 8-47
frequency characteristics
spectrum analyzer , 11-7
frequency characteristics correction , A-5
frequency characteristics level correction,
A-8
frequency deviation , 10-21
frequency range, 6-15
network analyzer , 11-3
setting , 3-7, 3-20
spectrum analyzer , 11-7
frequency readout accuracy
spectrum analyzer , 11-7
frequency reference
spectrum analyzer , 11-7
frequency resolution , 8-3
frequency response
network analyzer , 11-5
spectrum analyzer , 11-8
frequency response , A-41, A-44, A-49, A-50,
A-54
front panel, 4-1
full scale input level
network analyzer , 11-3
full two-port calibration , A-44
fuse
replacing, 2-4
fuse selection, 2-4
G
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
GAIN , 8-35
gain compression measurement , 10-14
G3 , 4-9
gate control mode
spectrum analyzer , 11-13
gate delay
Index-5
spectrum analyzer , 11-13
gated, time, 8-38
gate length, 8-38
spectrum analyzer , 11-13
gate output
spectrum analyzer , 11-13
gate output , 4-13
gate trigger
averaging , 8-45
edge mode , 8-43
gate delay , 8-41
gate length , 8-41
level mode , 8-43
RBW , 8-44
VBW , 8-45
gate trigger , 8-41
gate trigger input
spectrum analyzer , 11-13
gate trigger mode, 8-38
general characteristics , 11-24
glossary, A-45
G&O , 4-9
go/no-go testing , 9-8
GPIB, A-37
gpib , 11-20
GPIB address , A-39
gpib cable, 12-5
GPIB interface , 4-12
GPIB requirements, A-38
GRAPHICS, A-60
graphics le, A-60
group delay, A-16
group delay , 8-29
group delay aperture, setting , 8-30
group delay characteristics
network analyzer , 11-6
H
handle
installing , 2-8
handle and rack
mounting , 2-9
handle kit (option 1CN), 12-1
Hard copy , 11-20
hardcopy of LCD
making , 3-14
harmonics
displaying , 6-18
network analyzer , 11-2
searching , 3-25
header, A-62
high level noise , 11-34
high stability frequency reference (option
1D5), 12-1
Hld , 4-9
Index-6
HP DeskJet 1200 color printer, 12-5
HP DeskJet 1600CM color printer, 12-5
HP DeskJet 340J color printer, 12-5
HP DeskJet 505 printer, 12-5
HP DeskJet 560C color printer, 12-5
HP DeskJet 694C color printer, 12-5
HP DeskJet 850C color printer, 12-5
humidity , 11-25, 11-26
I
IF band reduction, A-16
IF bandwidth
impedance analyzer, 11-14
IF bandwidth , 9-6
IF Bandwidth (IFBW)
network analyzer , 11-3
IF bandwidth, setting , 6-26
IF BW , 6-26, 9-6
IFBW , 4-9
IMAGINARY , 6-10
impedanc
network analyzere , 11-3
impedance
network analyzer , 11-2
spectrum analyzer , 11-12
impedance , 6-11
impedance analyzer
quick start guide, 3-31
IMPEDANCE ANALYZER , 10-24, 10-31
impedance conversion, A-14
impedance measurement , 10-12
impedance measurement basics, A-23
Impedance Measurement Function (option
010), 12-1
impedance measurement scheme , A-25
impedance test kit
connecting , 2-16
improving dynamic range , 9-6
incoming inspection , 2-2
initial achievable accuracy
network analyzer , 11-1
spectrum analyzer , 11-7
initialize disk , 8-22
initialize memory disk , 8-23
input
selecting for network mode , 3-6
selecting for spectrum mode , 3-19
input attenuator
spectrum analyzer, 11-11
input attenuator , 4-8
input characteristics
network analyzer , 11-3
spectrum analyzer , 11-12
input crosstalk
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
network analyzer , 11-3
input port, selecting , 6-7
INPUT Z , 2-19
insertion loss , 10-2
installation, 2-1
rack/handle , 2-8
instrument data arrays , A-59
instrument state , 8-19
INSTRUMENT STATE block, 4-2
instrument states
saving/recalling, A-58
instrument states and internal data arrays ,
A-59
interface function , 11-20
internal reference output , 4-11, 11-24
interpolated error correction ON C?, 4-9
interpolated xture compensation ON Cm?,
4-9
interpreting trace, 8-2
I/O port, 11-21
i/o port , 4-12
isolation , A-41, A-43, A-54
isolation error , A-55
isolation EXF , A-55
isolation EXR, A-55
I-V measurement method , A-23
I-V to reection coecient conversion, A-11
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
K
keyboard
connecting , 2-18
keyboard , 3-27
keyboard connector , 4-12, 11-21
L
LCD, 4-5
LEFT PEAK , 10-22
level accuracy
network analyzer , 11-1
spectrum analyzer , 11-8
level correction ON Cor, 4-9
level mode, 8-39
LIF , 3-27, 8-19
lif (logical inter change format) , A-58
limit line
table , 9-9
to edit , 9-9
limit line concept , A-29
limit line test
activating , 9-10
beep , 9-11
display line , 9-9
modify table , 9-10
oset line , 9-12
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
limit line test , 9-8
limit test, A-29
4LINE5 , 3-17
linear phase shift, A-16
line switch , 4-5
LIN FREQ , 6-6
linking paramters, A-28
LIN MAG , 6-10
liquid crystal display , 4-5
listener , A-37
list of contents, 2-2
list sweep
editing a sweep list , 9-3
list sweep , 9-2
list sweep function, DC bias sweep using ,
10-36
LIST VALUES , 8-17
LOAD, A-46
load match , A-41, A-43, A-54
load match ELF , A-55
load match ELR , A-55
load match error , A-54
4Local5, softkeys under, B-47
LOG FREQ , 6-6
LOG MAG , 6-10
loss, A-33
low level signal , 3-23
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
M
magnitude characteristics
network analyzer , 11-4
magnitude dynamic accuracy , 11-34
magnitude multiplexer switching uncertainty
, 11-34
man , 4-9
manual changes, D-1
marker, A-32
displaying dierence , 8-5
xed 1marker , 8-37
marker list , 8-4, 8-9
noise marker , 8-37
reading value , 3-12, 8-2
to center , 6-15
tracking 1marker , 8-50
1marker , 8-5
4Marker5 , 8-2
MARKER block, 4-2
marker couple ONCpl, 4-7
marker readout, 4-7
4Marker!5, softkeys under, B-36
marker search, A-33
4Marker5, softkeys under, B-36
marker statistics, 4-7
marker time mode , A-32
Index-7
marker value, A-32
Max, 4-7
Max , 4-9
max hold , 9-13
maximum hold ON Max, 4-9
maximum safe input level
network analyzer , 11-4
spectrum analyzer , 11-13
4Meas5, softkeys under, B-2
measured inputs, 4-7
measurement
3 dB bandwidth , 8-25
cable electrical length , 8-32
carrier to noise ratio (C/N) , 8-37
noise level , 8-35
peak to peak of ripple , 8-7
ripple parameters , 8-7
time domain , 8-47
time gated , 8-41
zero span , 8-47
measurement basic
impedance analyzer, A-23
network analyzer, A-13
spectrum analyzer, A-19
measurement basic accuracy (supplemental
performance characteristics) , 11-16
MEASUREMENT block, 4-2
measurement block diagram
impedance analyzer , A-25
measurement error, A-40
measurement functions
impedance analyzer, 11-14
measurement parameter , 6-8
measurement parameters, setting, 10-27
measurement points, A-27
measurement port type
impedance analyzer, 11-14
measurement techniques
impedance analyzer, 8-51
network analyzer, 8-24
spectrum analyzer, 8-34
measurement throughput
network analyzer, 11-6
MEMORY , 8-14
memory array , 8-20
memory arrays, A-11
memory arrays , A-5, A-8, A-59
memory disk
initialize , 8-23
memory disk , A-58
memory trace , 8-15
memory trace array , 8-20, A-9, A-12
memory trace arrays , A-6, A-59
menu, 4-2
message area, 4-10
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Index-8
Min , 4-7, 4-9
mini-DIN keyboard , 2-18
minimum hold ON Min, 4-9
MKR COUP on OFF , 10-16
MKR LIST , 8-4, 8-9
MKR!CENTER , 6-15
MKR!CNTR STEP , 6-17
MKR!DELAY , 8-29
MKR!LEFT RNG , 8-12
MKR!REFERENCE , 6-24
MKR!RIGHT RNG , 8-12
MKR TIME , 8-48
MKR!REFERENCE , 10-4
MKR1!SEARCH RNG , 8-12
MKR XCH ZOOM , 6-22
MKR ZOOM , 6-22, 10-22
Ml , 11-34
modifying calibration kit, A-45
modulating frequency , 10-18, 10-22
modulation index , 10-18
Ms , 11-34
Msw , 11-34
multiplexer switching impedance change
network analyzer, 11-3
multiplexer switching uncertainty , 11-34
multiply trace , 8-15
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
N
Neg , 4-9
negative peak detection ON Neg , 4-9
negative peak mode, A-19
network analyzer
quick start guide, 3-1
NETWORK ANALYZER , 10-2
network measurement basics, A-13
NEXT PEAK , 8-8, 10-21
Nh , 11-34
Nl , 11-34
NOISE , 8-35
noise oor , 11-34
NOISE FORM , 8-37
noise level
network analyzer, 11-3
noise marker , 8-37
noise measurement, A-22
noise sidebands
network analyzer , 11-2
spectrum analyzer , 11-7
nominal , 11-1
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
non-harmonics spurious
network analyzer , 11-2
non-operation condition , 11-26
non-volatile memory, C-1
NOP, A-27
number of display points
spectrum analyzer , 11-12
NUMBER of GROUPS , 6-6
Number of Points
network analyzer, 11-6
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
O
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
OFFSET , 10-16
OFFSET , 8-35
oset Delay , A-47
oset Loss , A-47
oset Z0 , A-47
one-path two-port calibration , A-44
one-port calibration , A-44
one-port error model , A-49
OPEN, A-46
opened cable reection , 8-32
OPERATING PARAMETERS , 8-17
operation condition , 11-25
operation environment, 2-7
option, 12-1
option 1CM rack mount kit , 2-9
option 1CN handle kit , 2-8
option 1CP rack mount & handle kit , 2-9
option 1D5 , 4-11, 4-13
option 1D6
spectrum analyzer , 11-13
option 1D6 , 4-13, 8-41
option 1D7 50
to 75
input impedance
conversion , 2-19
oscilloscope , 8-41
other spurious
spectrum analyzer , 11-10
output characteristics
impedance analyzer, 11-14
network analyzer , 11-1
output connector, 4-4
overlaying multiple traces, 8-16
overview
4395A, 1-1
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
P
P , 4-9
P? , 4-9
parallel interface , 4-12
parameters, linking, A-28
Part Number, 2-2
PART SRCH , 8-7, 8-12
pass/fail , 4-8
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
peak
dening peak specication , 8-10
setting to center , 6-17
to search multiple peaks , 8-9
to search single peak , 8-8
Peak , 4-7
PEAK ALL , 8-9
peak denition, A-35
PEAK DEF MENU , 10-4
PEAK DEF MENU , 8-10, 8-11
peak level
read by marker , 3-22
reading , 3-22
peak mode, A-19
PEAK PLRTY POS neg , 10-4
peak polarity , A-35
PEAK!CENTER , 6-17
peak search , 10-5
PEAKS LEFT , 8-9
PEAKS RIGHT , 8-9
performance , 11-1
performance test, 4-1
performance test , 11-1
PHASE , 6-10
phase characteristics
network analyzer , 11-5
phase deviation, measuring , 8-29
phase dynamic accuracy , 11-34
phase lock , 4-11
phase measurements , 10-5
phase multiplexer switching uncertainty ,
11-34
phase oset , A-5
phase shift, A-16
PHASE UNIT [ ] , 6-10
PksA , 4-7
PksL , 4-7
PksR , 4-7
POLAR , 10-11
polar chart, A-15
polar chart , 10-11
POLAR CHART , 6-10
port extension, 8-59
port extension , 8-31
PORT EXTENSIONS , 8-31
positive peak mode, A-19
power , 6-14
POWER , 9-6
Power Cable, 2-5
power cable receptacle, 4-12
power level , 4-8, 9-6
power ON default, C-1
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Index-9
power range
network analyzer , 11-1
power requirements, 2-5
power splitter, 12-2
available , 2-13
power sweep , 10-14
POWER SWEEP , 6-7
Power sweep linearity
network analyzer, 11-2
precision frequency reference
spectrum analyzer , 11-7
4Preset5, C-1
4Preset5 , 5-9
4Preset5 key , 4-3
4Preset5, softkeys under, B-47
preset state, C-1
Presetting , 3-29
print
analyzer setting , 8-17
display image , 8-17
list values , 8-17
PRINT , 8-17
printer, 12-5
conguring and connecting , 3-14
printer control language, 11-21
Printer parallel port , 11-21
probe power , 11-21
PROBE POWER , 4-3
probe power supply, 4-3
pulse repetition width (PRI) , 8-41
pulse width (Tp ) , 11-24
purge le , 8-21
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Q
Q, A-33
Q factor , 8-57
quick start guide
impedance analyzer, 3-31
network analyzer, 3-1
spectrum analyzer, 3-15
R
NNNNN
R , 6-7
rack/handle installation , 2-8
rack mount and handle kit (option 1CP),
12-1
rack mounting , 2-9
rack mount kit (option 1CM), 12-1
RAD , 6-14
random error, A-40
random error , 11-33
ratio , A-4
ratio accuracy
network analyzer , 11-4
NNNNNNNNNNN
Index-10
raw data , 8-20
raw data arrays, A-11
raw data arrays , A-5, A-8, A-59
RBW
setting , 3-23, 8-44
RBW , 4-9, 6-27
RBW lter response time , 8-40
RBW selectivity, A-21
reading transition time using the marker ,
8-48
REAL , 6-10
rear panel , 4-11
recall
analyzer setting , 8-20
automatically when starting up, A-61
4Recall5, softkeys under, B-54
receiver characteristics
network analyzer , 11-3
recharge time, C-1
reference level, 4-7
marker! , 6-24
setting , 6-24
reference oven output , 4-13, 11-24
REFERENCE VALUE , 6-24
Reference Value setting range
spectrum analyzer, 11-8
reection coecient , 10-7, A-49
reection measurement , 10-7
reection repeatability , 11-34
reection tracking drift , 11-34
reection tracking ERF , A-55
reection tracking ERR , A-55
reection uncertainty equations , 11-35
Refl:FWD S11 [A/R] , 6-7
Refl:REV S22 [A/R] , 6-7
relative permittivity ("R ) , 8-28
REMOTE , 4-3
remote indicator , 4-3
repetitive sampling mode , 8-47
replacing fuse, 2-4
requirements
power, 2-5
RES BW , 6-27
RES BW auto MAN , 6-27
residual crosstalk , 11-34
residual load match , 11-34
residual measurement error, 11-33
residual reection tracking , 11-34
residual response
spectrum analyzer, 11-10
residual responses
network analyzer , 11-5
residual source match , 11-34
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
residual transmission tracking , 11-34
resolution , 8-3
resolution bandwidth (rbw)
spectrum analyzer , 11-7
resolution bandwidth (RBW) , 6-27
RESPONSE , 7-2, 10-3
response and isolation calibration , A-44
response calibration
performing , 3-10
response calibration , A-44
RESPONSE & ISOL'N , 7-2
response time , 8-40
return loss
network analyzer , 11-2, 11-3
spectrum analyzer , 11-12
return loss , 10-7
RF OUT , 4-4
rf output ON P , 4-9
RF power level , 4-8
RIGTH PEAK , 10-22
ripple , 10-4
Rr1 , 11-34
Rr2 , 11-34
Rt1 , 11-34
Rt2 , 11-34
run/cont input , 4-12, 11-24
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
S
S11 one-port calibration , A-44
S22 one-port calibration , A-44
safety , 11-26
sample detection , 8-35
sample detection mode, A-22
sample mode, A-19
sample peak detection ON Smp , 4-9
sampling mode , 8-47
save
analyzer setting , 8-19
data array type , 8-20
display image , 8-21
extension , 8-21
measurement data , 8-19
save data format , A-71
4Save5, softkeys under, B-52
saving/recalling instrument states, A-58
scale
spectrum analyzer , 11-12
scale and reference, 6-23
SCALE/DEV , 10-4
SCALE/DIV, 4-7
SCALE/DIV , 6-25
scale/division
setting , 6-25
4Scale Ref5, softkeys under, B-11
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
scaling, A-12
scaling , A-6, A-9
scan speed of 31.5 kHz, 4-12
scattering parameters , A-13
screen display, 4-5
search, A-33
multiple peaks , 8-9
peak denition , 8-10
range , 8-7
search range , 8-12
target value , 8-5
to dene peak shape , 8-11
search function
using , 3-25
SEARCH:PEAK , 10-21
4Search5, softkeys under, B-39
search tracking ONMax, 4-7
search tracking ONMin, 4-7
search tracking ONPeak, 4-7
search tracking ONPksA, 4-7
search tracking ONPksL, 4-7
search tracking ONPksR, 4-7
search tracking ONTarg, 4-7
SEARCH TRK , 8-50
SEARCH TRK on OFF , 6-18
second harmonic distortion
spectrum analyzer, 11-10
SEGMENT, A-29
segment , A-29
SEGMENT , 9-10
selectivity, A-21
spectrum analyzer , 11-7
selectivity, RBW, A-21
serial number, D-2
service mode Svc, 4-9
setting IF bandwidth , 9-6
setting measurement parameters , 10-27
Setting the analyzer type , 3-34
Setting the Trigger Signal Polarity , 6-5
set-up time , 8-40
set up time (SUT) , 8-41, 8-44
SET Z0 , 10-12
Sgnl, 4-7
SHORT, A-46
shorted cable reection , 8-32
signal delay (SD) , 8-41
signal track , 6-20, 9-14
signal tracking ONSgnl, 4-7
SIGNAL TRK , 6-20, 9-14
signal width ( ) , 8-41
SINGLE , 6-6, 9-13
SMITH , 10-12
Smith chart, A-15
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Index-11
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SMITH CHART , 6-10
Smith chart, displaying the trace as , 6-10
Smp , 4-9
SMTH/POLAR MENU , 6-11
softkey menu, 4-3
softkey reference, B-1
softkeys under
4Bw/Avg5, B-14
4Cal5, B-16
4Center5, B-35
4Chan 15, B-2
4Chan 25, B-2
4Copy5, B-48
4Display5, B-7
4Format5, B-5
4Local5, B-47
4Marker5, B-36
4Marker!5, B-36
4Meas5, B-2
4Preset5, B-47
4Recall5, B-54
4Save5, B-52
4Scale Ref5, B-11
4Search5, B-39
4Source5, B-32
4Span5, B-35
4Start5, B-35
4Stop5, B-35
4Sweep5, B-29
4System5, B-44
4Trigger5, B-34
4Utility5, B-42
source characteristics
network analyzer, 11-1
source crosstalk
network analyzer , 11-3
source match , A-41, A-42, A-49, A-50, A-54
source match ESF , A-55
source match ESR , A-55
4Source5, softkeys under, B-32
span
narrowing , 6-20
setting , 6-19
zooming , 6-22
4Span5 , 6-19, 6-20
4Span5, softkeys under, B-35
span value , 4-8
s-parameter , A-13
S-parameter test set
connecting , 2-11
S-parameter test set , 3-3
S parameter test set , 5-1
s-parameter test set interface , 11-24
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Index-12
s-parameter test set interface pin assignments
, 11-25
(SPC) , 11-1
specications, 4-1
common to all analyzers, 11-20
impedance analyzer, 11-14
network analyzer, 11-1
spectrum analyzer, 11-7
specications , 11-1
spectral purity characteristics
network analyzer , 11-2
spectrum analyzer
quick start guide, 3-15
spectrum measurement basics, A-19
SPLIT DISP , 6-3
spreadsheet , 8-21
spurious responses
spectrum analyzer , 11-10
Sr1 , 11-34
Sr2 , 11-34
St1 , 11-34
St2 , 11-34
stability (A/R, B/R, A/B)
network analyzer, 11-5
network analyzer , 11-5
stabilizing trace, 9-13
standard, A-45
standard class
assignment , 7-12
creating label, 7-13
label , 7-11
specifying , 7-12
standard class assignment, C-24
standard denition
table , 7-10
standby for external trigger ext , 4-9
standby for GPIB trigger bus , 4-9
standby for manual trigger man , 4-9
4Start5, softkeys under, B-35
start value , 4-8
state, A-59
STATE , 8-19
STATISTICS , 8-7
status notations, 4-9
step size, specied, 6-17
4Stop5, softkeys under, B-35
stop value , 4-8
storage , 11-20
storage devices , A-58
sub-marker
using , 8-4
SUB MKR , 8-4
sux , 3-30
Svc, 4-9
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
sweep
linear , 6-6
log , 6-6
power , 6-7
to stop , 9-13
SWEEP block, 4-2
sweep characteristics
network analyzer , 11-6
spectrum analyzer , 11-12
sweep conditions , 6-6
SWEEP: HOLD , 9-13
sweep hold ON Hld , 4-9
sweep parameters
impedance analyzer, 11-14
4Sweep5, softkeys under, B-29
sweep time
spectrum analyzer , 11-12
sweep time , 4-8
sweep type
network analyzer , 11-6
spectrum analyzer , 11-12
sweep type , 6-6
swept harmonics , 8-50
swept Mode, A-19
switch port match , 11-34
switch tracking , 11-34
swr , 10-7
SWR , 6-10
system accessory, 12-5
systematic error, A-40
systematic error , 11-33
system controller , A-38, A-39
system error model , 11-34
system overview , A-2
system performance
with typical test sets and connector types,
11-45
system performance , 11-28
system performance, determining expected,
11-52
4System5, softkeys under, B-44
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNN
T
talker , A-37
Targ , 4-7
TARGET , 10-15
TARGET , 8-5
temperature , 11-25
temperature> , 11-26
temperature drift
spectrum analyzer, 11-11
temperature drift , 11-42
temperature stability
network analyzer , 11-1
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
spectrum analyzer , 11-7
test xture
connecting , 2-16, 7-15
setting electrical length , 7-17
user dened , 7-17
test xture, compensation, 10-26
test xture, setting the electrical length of
, 10-26, 10-31
test set, 12-2
connecting, 2-10
test set I/O interface , 4-13
test signal level , A-25
test signal source
connecting , 3-17
text with tab delimiter , 8-21
third order inter-modulation distortion
spectrum analyzer, 11-10
THRESHOLD , 8-11
threshold value, A-35, A-36
THRU, A-46
THRU , 10-3
TIFF, A-60
TIFF , 8-21
time gated, 8-38
time gated spectrum analysis , 8-41
time-gated spectrum analyzer (option 1D6),
12-1
title , 4-10
To Select the Input Port, 6-8
Tr , 11-34
trace arithmetic , 8-15
trace math
to add , 8-15
to divide , 8-15
to subtract , 8-15
trace math , 8-15
trace memory , 8-14
trace noise (A/R, B/R, A/B)
network analyzer, 11-5
tracking , A-41, A-44, A-49, A-50, A-54
TRACKING 1MKR , 8-50
Trans:FWD S21 [B/R] , 6-7
transmission coecient , A-54
transmission/reection test kit , A-56
transmission/reection test set
connecting , 2-10
transmission/reection test set , 3-3, 5-1
transmission repeatability , 11-34
transmission tracking drift , 11-34
transmission tracking ETF , A-55
transmission tracking ETR , A-55
transmission uncertainty equations , 11-36
Trans:REV S12 [B/R] , 6-7
Trd , 11-34
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Index-13
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
TRIG EVENT [ON POINT] , 6-5
4Trigger5 , 6-4
trigger event, generating on each display
point, 6-5
trigger input , 4-13
trigger mode , 6-4
trigger mode, selecting , 6-4
trigger polarity, 8-38
trigger polarity , 11-24
trigger signal
negative , 6-5
positive , 6-5
4Trigger5, softkeys under, B-34
trigger source
external , 6-4
internal , 6-4
network analyzer , 11-6
spectrum analyzer , 11-12
trigger type
network analyzer , 11-6
spectrum analyzer , 11-12
TRIG PLRTY , 6-5
Tsw , 11-34
Tt , 11-34
Ttd , 11-34
turning ON , 3-3, 3-17
Turning on the 4395A, 3-33
two-port error correction ON C2 , 4-9
two-port error model , A-54
two-port interpolated error correction ON
C2?, 4-9
type, A-45
typical , 11-1
typical dynamic range
spectrum analyzer , 11-10
typical system performance, 11-28
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
U
U , 11-34
1MKR , 8-5
Um , 11-34
unabled to interpolated compensation ON
C!, 4-9
unabled to two-port interpolated error
correction ON C2! , 4-9
uncertainty
spectrum analyzer, 11-11
uncertainty , 11-29
unit , 6-14
Up , 11-34
upgrade kit, 12-1
user-dened cal kit, A-45
4Utility5, softkeys under, B-42
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
V
varactor diode, evaluation of, 10-36
VBW , 6-28
velocity factor, A-15
velocity factor , 8-28
VELOCITY FACTOR , 8-28
VGA , 11-25
video Averaging , A-8
video bandwidth
spectrum analyzer , 11-7
video bandwidth (vbw) , 4-8
video bandwidth (VBW) , 6-28
VIDEO BW , 6-28
video output terminal, 4-12
video signal, 4-12
voltage , 6-14
voltage/current ratio, A-10
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
W
warm up time , 11-1, 11-25
weight , 11-26
wide band fm signal , 10-21
WIDTH , 8-25
width functions , 8-57
WIDTH on OFF , 10-3
width search, 8-57, A-33
width value, 4-7, 8-57
WIDTH VALUE , 10-4
windowing , A-7
With the S-Parameter Test Set , 6-7
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
X
Xch, 4-7
Y
Y conversion, A-14
Y conversion , 6-11
Y:Refl , 6-11
Y:Trans , 6-11
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Z
Z conversion, A-14
Z conversion , 6-11
zooming
displaying a zoomed trace on the other
channel, 6-22
setting magnication factor , 6-22
zooming aperture, 6-22
zooming , 6-22
ZOOMING APERTURE , 6-22, 10-22
zooming function , 10-22
Z:Refl , 6-11
Z:Trans , 6-11
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Index-14
REGIONAL SALES AND SUPPORT OFFICES
For more information about Agilent Technologies test and measurement products, applications, services, and
for a current sales office listing, visit our web site: http://www.agilent.com/find/tmdir. You can also contact one
of the following centers and ask for a test and measurement sales representative.
11/29/99
United States:
Agilent Technologies
Test and Measurement Call Center
P.O.Box 4026
Englewood, CO 80155-4026
(tel) 1 800 452 4844
Canada:
Agilent Technologies Canada Inc.
5150 Spectrum Way
Mississauga, Ontario
L4W 5G1
(tel) 1 877 894 4414
Europe:
Agilent Technologies
Test & Measurement
European Marketing Organization
P.O.Box 999
1180 AZ Amstelveen
The Netherlands
(tel) (31 20) 547 9999
Japan:
Agilent Technologies Japan Ltd.
Call Center
9-1, Takakura-Cho, Hachioji-Shi,
Tokyo 192-8510, Japan
(tel) (81) 426 56 7832
(fax) (81) 426 56 7840
Latin America:
Agilent Technologies
Latin American Region Headquarters
5200 Blue Lagoon Drive, Suite #950
Miami, Florida 33126
U.S.A.
(tel) (305) 267 4245
(fax) (305) 267 4286
Australia/New Zealand:
Agilent Technologies Australia Pty Ltd
347 Burwood Highway
Forest Hill, Victoria 3131
(tel) 1-800 629 485 (Australia)
(fax) (61 3) 9272 0749
(tel) 0 800 738 378 (New Zealand)
(fax) (64 4) 802 6881
Asia Pacific:
Agilent Technologies
24/F, Cityplaza One, 1111 King’s Road,
Taikoo Shing, Hong Kong
(tel) (852)-3197-7777
(fax) (852)-2506-9284
">